WO2011152358A1 - Membrane containing silver complex - Google Patents

Membrane containing silver complex Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2011152358A1
WO2011152358A1 PCT/JP2011/062390 JP2011062390W WO2011152358A1 WO 2011152358 A1 WO2011152358 A1 WO 2011152358A1 JP 2011062390 W JP2011062390 W JP 2011062390W WO 2011152358 A1 WO2011152358 A1 WO 2011152358A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
atom
containing heterocyclic
atoms
carbon atoms
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2011/062390
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
小林　憲史
東村　秀之
敬 開▲高▼
Original Assignee
住友化学株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 住友化学株式会社 filed Critical 住友化学株式会社
Publication of WO2011152358A1 publication Critical patent/WO2011152358A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/553—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/576—Six-membered rings
    • C07F9/60—Quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/28—Phosphorus compounds with one or more P—C bonds
    • C07F9/50—Organo-phosphines
    • C07F9/5022—Aromatic phosphines (P-C aromatic linkage)
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/28—Phosphorus compounds with one or more P—C bonds
    • C07F9/50—Organo-phosphines
    • C07F9/5027—Polyphosphines
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/28—Phosphorus compounds with one or more P—C bonds
    • C07F9/50—Organo-phosphines
    • C07F9/5045—Complexes or chelates of phosphines with metallic compounds or metals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/28—Phosphorus compounds with one or more P—C bonds
    • C07F9/50—Organo-phosphines
    • C07F9/53—Organo-phosphine oxides; Organo-phosphine thioxides
    • C07F9/5325—Aromatic phosphine oxides or thioxides (P-C aromatic linkage)
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/28—Phosphorus compounds with one or more P—C bonds
    • C07F9/50—Organo-phosphines
    • C07F9/53—Organo-phosphine oxides; Organo-phosphine thioxides
    • C07F9/5329—Polyphosphine oxides or thioxides
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/553—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/576—Six-membered rings
    • C07F9/58—Pyridine rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/553—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/576—Six-membered rings
    • C07F9/62—Isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/645—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07F9/6503—Five-membered rings
    • C07F9/6506—Five-membered rings having the nitrogen atoms in positions 1 and 3
    • C07F9/65068—Five-membered rings having the nitrogen atoms in positions 1 and 3 condensed with carbocyclic rings or carbocyclic ring systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/6527—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07F9/6533—Six-membered rings
    • C07F9/65335—Six-membered rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or carbocyclic ring systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/6536—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having nitrogen and sulfur atoms with or without oxygen atoms, as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07F9/6539—Five-membered rings
    • C07F9/6541—Five-membered rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or carbocyclic ring systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/655—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having oxygen atoms, with or without sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atoms, as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07F9/65515—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having oxygen atoms, with or without sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atoms, as the only ring hetero atoms the oxygen atom being part of a five-membered ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/655—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having oxygen atoms, with or without sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atoms, as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07F9/65515—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having oxygen atoms, with or without sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atoms, as the only ring hetero atoms the oxygen atom being part of a five-membered ring
    • C07F9/65517—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having oxygen atoms, with or without sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atoms, as the only ring hetero atoms the oxygen atom being part of a five-membered ring condensed with carbocyclic rings or carbocyclic ring systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/655—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having oxygen atoms, with or without sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atoms, as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07F9/6552—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having oxygen atoms, with or without sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atoms, as the only ring hetero atoms the oxygen atom being part of a six-membered ring
    • C07F9/65522—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having oxygen atoms, with or without sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atoms, as the only ring hetero atoms the oxygen atom being part of a six-membered ring condensed with carbocyclic rings or carbocyclic ring systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/6558—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom containing at least two different or differently substituted hetero rings neither condensed among themselves nor condensed with a common carbocyclic ring or ring system
    • C07F9/65586—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom containing at least two different or differently substituted hetero rings neither condensed among themselves nor condensed with a common carbocyclic ring or ring system at least one of the hetero rings does not contain nitrogen as ring hetero atom
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/6561—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom containing systems of two or more relevant hetero rings condensed among themselves or condensed with a common carbocyclic ring or ring system, with or without other non-condensed hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/6564—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having phosphorus atoms, with or without nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium atoms, as ring hetero atoms
    • C07F9/6568—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having phosphorus atoms, with or without nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium atoms, as ring hetero atoms having phosphorus atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07F9/65683—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having phosphorus atoms, with or without nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium atoms, as ring hetero atoms having phosphorus atoms as the only ring hetero atoms the ring phosphorus atom being part of a phosphine
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
    • C09K11/00—Luminescent, e.g. electroluminescent, chemiluminescent materials
    • C09K11/06—Luminescent, e.g. electroluminescent, chemiluminescent materials containing organic luminescent materials
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K85/00—Organic materials used in the body or electrodes of devices covered by this subclass
    • H10K85/30—Coordination compounds
    • H10K85/371—Metal complexes comprising a group IB metal element, e.g. comprising copper, gold or silver
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
    • C09K2211/00—Chemical nature of organic luminescent or tenebrescent compounds
    • C09K2211/18—Metal complexes
    • C09K2211/188—Metal complexes of other metals not provided for in one of the previous groups

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a film containing a silver complex.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 As a light emitting material used for an organic electroluminescence element, a phosphorescent light emitting complex using a platinum group metal typified by an iridium complex is considered promising. However, iridium is rare among platinum group metals and is very expensive. For this reason, various types of complexes using inexpensive metals that are advantageous in terms of cost have been studied (Non-Patent Document 1).
  • a film using a known inexpensive metal complex does not have sufficient durability in the presence of oxygen as a luminescent material.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a film that is cheaper than a platinum group metal complex and uses a complex excellent in durability in the presence of oxygen as a light emitting material.
  • the present invention first provides a film containing a silver complex represented by the following composition formula (1).
  • L 1 is an atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion, and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag +.
  • the total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + of L 1 is 3 or more and 6 or less, and one or more of atoms that can coordinate to Ag + of L 1 are L 2 is a molecule having an atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion, and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag +
  • the total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 2 is 2.
  • L 3 is a phosphorus atom, nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag + Sulfur, arsenic, oxygen Is down and molecules having one atom or ion selected from sulfur anion .
  • X 1 is an anion .a is a number greater than 0.5, b, c and d are the number of independently 0 or is there.)
  • the present invention provides a light emitting device including the film.
  • the present invention provides a silver complex represented by the following composition formula (3).
  • L 4 is A molecule having 4 to 6 phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + , or As an atom capable of coordinating to Ag + or as an atom and an ion, it has at least one phosphorus atom and at least one selected from a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion.
  • the total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 4 is 3 or more and 6 or less.
  • L 5 represents, as capable of coordinating atoms or ions Ag +, phosphorus atom, nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, sulfur atom, arsenic atom, a molecule having an atom or ion selected from oxygen anions and sulfur anions, L 5
  • the total number of atoms and ions capable of coordinating with Ag + is 2.
  • L 6 is a molecule having one atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion, and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag + .
  • X 2 is an anion.
  • the present invention is a group containing two or more diarylphosphino groups and having one to three hydrogen atoms removed from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —O ⁇ , —C ( ⁇ O)
  • One or two groups selected from O ⁇ and —S 2 — and in the formula (Aa), (Ab), (Ba ′), (Bb), (Bc), or (Bd) described later Provide the molecule shown.
  • the film of the present invention is cheaper than a film using a platinum group metal complex and has high durability in the presence of oxygen as a light-emitting material. That is, the film of the present invention can exhibit light emission characteristics excellent in sustainability.
  • “optionally substituted” means that a hydrogen atom constituting the compound or group described immediately after it is unsubstituted or a part or all of the hydrogen atoms are substituted with a substituent. Including both.
  • substituent when substituted by a substituent include, unless otherwise specified, a halogen atom, a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and a hydrocarbyloxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • a halogen atom, a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms and a hydrocarbyloxy group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms are preferable, and a halogen atom, a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms and a hydrocarbyl having 1 to 12 carbon atoms are preferable.
  • An oxy group is more preferable, a halogen atom and a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms are further preferable, and a halogen atom and a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms are particularly preferable.
  • “which may be substituted” may be rephrased as “which may have a substituent”.
  • Me represents a methyl group
  • n-Bu represents an n-butyl group
  • t-Bu represents a tert-butyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group
  • n-Hex represents an n-hexyl group.
  • the film of the present invention contains a silver complex represented by the following composition formula (1).
  • L 1 is a molecule having an atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion, and a sulfur anion as an atom / or ion that can coordinate to Ag +
  • the total number of atoms and ions that can be coordinated to Ag + in 1 is 3 or more and 6 or less, and one or more of the atoms that can be coordinated to Ag + in L 1 is a phosphorus atom.
  • L 2 represents an atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion and / or an ion or an ion that can coordinate to Ag +.
  • the total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + of L 2 is two.
  • L 3 is a molecule having one atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag + .
  • X 1 is an anion.
  • L 1 , L 2 and L 3 are molecules, but each may have a charged functional group. When L 1 , L 2 and L 3 each have a charged functional group, they may be in an ionic state.
  • L 1 has an atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion, and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag +.
  • a phosphorus atom that can coordinate to Ag + is a trivalent phosphorus atom.
  • Examples of the nitrogen atom capable of coordinating to Ag + include a nitrogen atom in an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound (coordinable contained in one nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound) A nitrogen atom is counted as one), and a nitrogen atom in a group obtained by removing one to five hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound (the hydrogen atom from the nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound) A coordinating nitrogen atom contained in one group in which 1 to 5 are removed is counted as 1), a nitrogen atom in an optionally substituted dialkylamino group, an optionally substituted dialkylamino A nitrogen atom in the group, a nitrogen atom in the optionally substituted arylamino group, a nitrogen atom in the optionally substituted alkylarylamino group, a nitrogen atom in the optionally substituted imino group, and Nitrogen in nitrile group Child, and the like.
  • Examples of the oxygen atom that can be coordinated include an oxygen atom to which a hydrogen atom is bonded and an oxygen atom to which a Group 15 element is bonded.
  • Examples of the sulfur atom capable of coordinating to Ag + include a sulfur atom to which a hydrogen atom is bonded, a sulfur atom in an alkyl mercapto group, and a sulfur atom to which a Group 15 element is bonded.
  • Examples of arsenic atoms that can coordinate to Ag + include trivalent arsenic atoms.
  • Examples of the oxygen anion capable of coordinating to Ag + include O ⁇ .
  • Examples of the sulfur anion capable of coordinating with Ag + include S ⁇ .
  • L 1 is a as capable of coordinating atoms to Ag +, may be a molecule having only phosphorus atom three or more than six, capable of coordinating phosphorus atom to Ag + 1 or more, One or more selected from atoms other than phosphorus atoms that can coordinate to Ag + (nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, sulfur atoms, and arsenic atoms) and ions that can coordinate to Ag + (oxygen anions and sulfur anions), It may be a molecule having 3 to 6 in total.
  • L 1 includes a molecule having 4 to 6 phosphorus atoms that can coordinate to Ag + .
  • the one of another preferred embodiment of the L 1, and one or more capable of coordinating phosphorus atom to Ag +, Ag + allows coordinating nitrogen atom, Ag + allows coordinating oxygen atom, Ag +
  • a molecule having a total of 3 or more and 6 or less atoms and ions capable of coordination Of the two preferred examples described above, the latter is more preferred.
  • the number of phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating with Ag + contained in L 1 is 1 or more, preferably 2 or more.
  • the durability of the film against oxygen is further improved, so that any of the two or more phosphorus atoms may contain sp 3 carbon atoms.
  • L 1 may have, Ag + allows coordinating phosphorus atom, Ag + allows coordinating nitrogen atom, capable of coordinating oxygen atom to Ag +, capable of coordinating sulfur atom Ag +, the Ag + coordinatable arsenic atom, among which can coordinate sulfur anions to Ag + allows coordinating oxygen anions and Ag +, preferred examples of the non-phosphorus atom is an oxygen anion and sulfur anion, L 1 is an oxygen anion or It is preferable to contain one sulfur anion.
  • the total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 1 is 3 or more and 6 or less, and preferably 3 or 4.
  • the atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 1 may contain a plurality of the same atoms and ions, or a combination of different atoms and ions. .
  • L 1 is preferably coordinated to Ag +, it is coordinated to Ag + as a monodentate ligand, also coordinated to Ag + as a bidentate ligand, tridentate or more coordination it may be coordinated to Ag + as a child, more preferably coordinated to Ag + as a bidentate or higher ligands, coordinated to Ag + as a tridentate or higher-dentate ligand More preferably.
  • the number of carbon atoms of L 1 is usually 12 to 300, preferably 22 to 250, more preferably 25 to 200, still more preferably 28 to 150, and particularly preferably 30 to 125.
  • L 1 examples include molecules represented by the following formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt), More preferable are the molecules represented by the following formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), and still more preferable are the following formulas (Ba), (Bc) because the complex film-forming property is excellent. ), Particularly preferably a molecule represented by the following formula (Bc).
  • R 11Aa, a R 12Aa, R 13Aa, R 15Aa , R 16Aa, R 17Aa, hydrocarbyl groups R 18Aa and R 21Aa each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted C 1 -C also be ⁇ 50
  • R 14Aa and R 19Aa are each independently of good 1 to 30 carbon atoms optionally substituted alkyl group
  • R 11Aa, R 12Aa, R 13Aa, R 14Aa, R 15Aa, R 16Aa, R 17Aa, R 18Aa, R 19Aa and R21Aa may be the same or different.
  • R 22Aa, R 23Aa, R 25Aa , R 26Aa, R 27Aa and R 28Aa are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted C 1 -C also be ⁇ 50 hydrocarbyl group
  • R 24Aa is substituted an alkyl group having a carbon number of 1 ⁇ 30,
  • R 22Aa, R 23Aa, R 24Aa, R 25Aa, R 26Aa, R 27Aa and R 28Aa may be the same or different.
  • R 2Aa is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Aa is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Aa is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • the molecule represented by the formula (Aa) includes an embodiment containing one or more of —P (R 11Aa ) 2 or —P (R 22Aa ) —,
  • R 11Ab is R 12Ab, R 13Ab, R 15Ab , R 16Ab, R 17Ab, hydrocarbyl groups R 18Ab and R 21Ab each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted C 1 -C also be ⁇ 50, R 14Ab and R 19ab are each independently of good 1 to 30 carbon atoms optionally substituted alkyl group, R 11Ab, R 12Ab, R 13Ab, R 14Ab, R 15Ab, R 16Ab, R 17Ab, R 18Ab, R 19Ab and R 21Ab may be the same or different.
  • R 3Ab is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Ba , R 12Ba , R 13Ba , R 15Ba , R 16Ba , R 17Ba , R 18Ba and R 21Ba are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14Ba And R 19Ba each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • R 11Ba , R 12Ba , R 13Ba , R 14Ba , R 15Ba , R 16Ba , R 17Ba , R 18Ba , R 19Ba and R 21Ba may be the same or different.
  • R 22Ba , R 23Ba , R 25Ba , R 26Ba , R 27Ba and R 28Ba are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Ba may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Ba , R 23Ba , R 24Ba , R 25Ba , R 26Ba , R 27Ba and R 28Ba may be the same or different.
  • R 2Ba is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Ba is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Ba is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • Q 1Ba is —P (R 11Ba ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —O ⁇ , —C ( ⁇ O) O ⁇ , or -S - and it is, Q 2Ba is —P (R 22Ba ) — or a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, R 11Ba and R 22Ba are each independently a phenyl group which may be substituted, and R 2Ba may be a direct bond or a group represented by any one of formulas r1 to r12 described later Is, An embodiment is mentioned.
  • R 11Bb , R 12Bb , R 13Bb , R 15Bb , R 16Bb , R 17Bb , R 18Bb and R 21Bb are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14Bb And R 19Bb each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • R 11Bb , R 12Bb , R 13Bb , R 14Bb , R 15Bb , R 16Bb , R 17Bb , R 18Bb , R 19Bb and R 21Bb may be the same or different.
  • R 22Bb , R 23Bb , R 25Bb , R 26Bb , R 27Bb and R 28Bb are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Bb may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Bb , R 23Bb , R 24Bb , R 25Bb , R 26Bb , R 27Bb and R 28Bb may be the same or different.
  • R 2Bb is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Bb is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Bb is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 3Bb is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Bc , R 12Bc , R 13Bc , R 15Bc , R 16Bc , R 17Bc , R 18Bc and R 21Bc are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Bc And R 19B each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Bc , R 12Bc , R 13Bc , R 14Bc , R 15Bc , R 16Bc , R 17Bc , R 18Bc , R 19Bc and R 21Bc may be the same or different.
  • R 2Bc is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Bc is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 3Bc is In the case of a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • Q 1Bc is —P (R 11Bc ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —O ⁇ , —C ( ⁇ O) O ⁇ , or -S - and it is, Q 3Bc is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from P or an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound;
  • R 11Bc is an optionally substituted phenyl group,
  • R 2Bc is a group represented by any one of formulas r1 to r12 described later, which may be a direct bond or may be substituted; An embodiment is mentioned.
  • R 11Bd , R 12Bd , R 13Bd , R 15Bd , R 16Bd , R 17Bd , R 18Bd and R 21Bd are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14Bd And R 19Bd are each independently an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • R 11Bd , R 12Bd , R 13Bd , R 14Bd , R 15Bd , R 16Bd , R 17Bd , R 18Bd , R 19Bd and R 21Bd may be the same or different.
  • R 4Bd is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Ca , R 12Ca , R 13Ca , R 15Ca , R 16Ca , R 17Ca , R 18Ca and R 21Ca are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14Ca And R 19Ca are each independently an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • R 11Ca , R 12Ca , R 13Ca , R 14Ca , R 15Ca , R 16Ca , R 17Ca , R 18Ca , R 19Ca and R21Ca may be the same or different.
  • R 22Ca , R 23Ca , R 25Ca , R 26Ca , R 27Ca and R 28Ca are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Ca may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Ca , R 23Ca , R 24Ca , R 25Ca , R 26Ca , R 27Ca and R 28Ca may be the same or different.
  • R 2Ca is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Ca is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Ca is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 11Cb , R 12Cb , R 13Cb , R 15Cb , R 16Cb , R 17Cb , R 18Cb and R 21Cb are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Cb And R 19Cb each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Cb , R 12Cb , R 13Cb , R 14Cb , R 15Cb , R 16Cb , R 17Cb , R 18Cb , R 19Cb and R 21Cb may be the same or different from each other.
  • R 22Cb , R 23Cb , R 25Cb , R 26Cb , R 27Cb and R 28Cb are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Cb may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Cb , R 23Cb , R 24Cb , R 25Cb , R 26Cb , R 27Cb and R 28Cb may be the same or different.
  • R 2Cb is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Cb is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Cb is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 3Cb is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Cc , R 12Cc , R 13Cc , R 15Cc , R 16Cc , R 17Cc , R 18Cc and R 21Cc are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Cc And R 19Cc each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Cc , R 12Cc , R 13Cc , R 14Cc , R 15Cc , R 16Cc , R 17Cc , R 18Cc , R 19Cc and R 21Cc may be the same or different.
  • R 22Cc , R 23Cc , R 25Cc , R 26Cc , R 27Cc and R 28Cc are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Cc may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Cc , R 23Cc , R 24Cc , R 25Cc , R 26Cc , R 27Cc and R 28Cc may be the same or different.
  • R 2Cc is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that when the bonded Q 1Cc is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, the bonded Q 2Cc is a nitrogen atom.
  • the group is a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the containing heterocyclic compound, or when the bonded Q 3Cc is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used. .
  • R 11Cd , R 12Cd , R 13Cd , R 15Cd , R 16Cd , R 17Cd , R 18Cd and R 21Cd are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14Cd And R 19Cd are each independently an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • R 11Cd , R 12Cd , R 13Cd , R 14Cd , R 15Cd , R 16Cd , R 17Cd , R 18Cd , R 19Cd and R 21Cd may be the same or different.
  • R 22Cd , R 23Cd , R 25Cd , R 26Cd , R 27Cd and R 28Cd are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Cd may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Cd , R 23Cd , R 24Cd , R 25Cd , R 26Cd , R 27Cd and R 28Cd may be the same or different.
  • R 2Cd is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Cd is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Cd is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 3Cd is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Ce , R 12Ce , R 13Ce , R 15Ce , R 16Ce , R 17Ce , R 18Ce and R 21Ce are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14Ce And R 19Ce are each independently an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms,
  • R 11Ce , R 12Ce , R 13Ce , R 14Ce , R 15Ce , R 16Ce , R 17Ce , R 18Ce , R 19Ce and R 21Ce may be the same or different.
  • R 22Ce , R 23Ce , R 25Ce , R 26Ce , R 27Ce and R 28Ce are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Ce may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Ce , R 23Ce , R 24Ce , R 25Ce , R 26Ce , R 27Ce and R 28Ce may be the same or different.
  • R 2Ce is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Ce is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Ce is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 4Ce is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Cf , R 12Cf , R 13Cf , R 15Cf , R 16Cf , R 17Cf , R 18Cf and R 21Cf are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Cf And R 19Cf each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Cf , R 12Cf , R 13Cf , R 14Cf , R 15Cf , R 16Cf , R 17Cf , R 18Cf , R 19Cf and R21Cf may be the same or different.
  • R 2Cf is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Cf is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 3Cf is In the case of a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 3Cf is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
  • Two or more groups selected from groups in which one or three hydrogen atoms have been removed may be optionally combined to form a ring.
  • R 11Cg , R 12Cg , R 13Cg , R 15Cg , R 16Cg , R 17Cg , R 18Cg and R 21Cg are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Cg And R 19Cg each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Cg , R 12Cg , R 13Cg , R 14Cg , R 15Cg , R 16Cg , R 17Cg , R 18Cg , R 19Cg and R 21Cg may be the same or different.
  • R 22Cg , R 23Cg , R 25Cg , R 26Cg , R 27Cg and R 28Cg are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Cg may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Cg , R 23Cg , R 24Cg , R 25Cg , R 26Cg , R 27Cg and R 28Cg may be the same or different.
  • R 3Cg is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11ch is R 12Ch, R 13Ch, R 15Ch , R 16Ch, R 17Ch, hydrocarbyl groups R 18Ch and R 21ch each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted C 1 -C also be ⁇ 50, R 14Ch And R 19Ch are each independently an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Ch , R 12Ch , R 13Ch , R 14Ch , R 15Ch , R 16Ch , R 17Ch , R 18Ch , R 19Ch and R 21ch may be the same or different, respectively.
  • Q 4Ch is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms that can coordinate to Ag + and includes any one of P, N, O ⁇ or S ⁇ in a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. It is.
  • R 2Ch is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Ch is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, and may be a direct bond.
  • Two or more groups selected from a group excluding one hydrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring.
  • R 11Ci , R 12Ci , R 13Ci , R 15Ci , R 16Ci , R 17Ci , R 18Ci and R 21Ci are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Ci And R 19Ci is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, R 11Ci , R 12Ci , R 13Ci , R 14Ci , R 15Ci , R 16Ci , R 17Ci , R 18Ci , R 19Ci and R Each 21Ci may be the same or different.
  • R 5Ci is a pentavalent group having 100 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Da , R 12Da , R 13Da , R 15Da , R 16Da , R 17Da , R 18Da and R 21Da are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Da And R 19Da each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Da , R 12Da , R 13Da , R 14Da , R 15Da , R 16Da , R 17Da , R 18Da , R 20Da and R 21Da may be the same or different.
  • R 22Da , R 23Da , R 25Da , R 26Da , R 27Da and R 28Da are each independently a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may be substituted, and R 24Da may be substituted It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Da , R 23Da , R 24Da , R 25Da , R 26Da , R 27Da and R 28Da may be the same or different.
  • R 2Da is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Da is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Da is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 11Db, a R 12Db, R 13Db, R 15Db , R 16Db, R 17Db, hydrocarbyl groups R 18dB and R 21Db are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted C 1 -C also be ⁇ 50, R 14Db and R 19 dB are each independently of good 1 to 30 carbon atoms optionally substituted alkyl group, R 11Db, R 12Db, R 13Db, R 14Db, R 15Db, R 16Db, R 17Db, R 18Db, R 19Db and R 21Db may be the same or different.
  • R 22Db , R 23Db , R 25Db , R 26Db , R 27Db and R 28Db are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Db may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Db , R 23Db , R 24Db , R 25Db , R 26Db , R 27Db and R 28Db may be the same or different.
  • R 2Db is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Db is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Db is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 3Db is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Dc , R 12Dc , R 13Dc , R 15Dc , R 16Dc , R 17Dc , R 18Dc and R 21Dc are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14Dc And R 19Dc each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • R 11Dc , R 12Dc , R 13Dc , R 14Dc , R 15Dc , R 16Dc , R 17Dc , R 18Dc , R 19Dc and R 21Dc may be the same or different.
  • R 22Dc , R 23Dc , R 25Dc , R 26Dc , R 27Dc and R 28Dc are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Dc may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Dc , R 23Dc , R 24Dc , R 25Dc , R 26Dc , R 27Dc and R 28Dc may be the same or different.
  • R 2Dc is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that when bonded Q 1Dc is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, the bonded Q 2Dc is a nitrogen atom.
  • the group is a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the containing heterocyclic compound, or when the bonded Q 3Dc is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used. .
  • R 11Dd , R 12Dd , R 13Dd , R 15Dd , R 16Dd , R 17Dd , R 18Dd and R 21Dd are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14Dd And R 19Dd each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • R 11Dd , R 12Dd , R 13Dd , R 14Dd , R 15Dd , R 16Dd , R 17Dd , R 18Dd , R 19Dd and R21Dd may be the same or different.
  • R 22Dd , R 23Dd , R 25Dd , R 26Dd , R 27Dd and R 28Dd are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Dd may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Dd , R 23Dd , R 24Dd , R 25Dd , R 26Dd , R 27Dd and R 28Dd may be the same or different.
  • R 2Dd is a divalent group 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that when bound Q 1dd is a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound from which one hydrogen atom has been removed group or bound Q 2Dd is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 4Dd is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11De , R 12De , R 13De , R 15De , R 16De , R 17De , R 18De and R 21De are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14De And R 19De are each independently an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • R 11De and R 12De , R 13De , R 14De , R 15De , R 16De , R 17De , R 18De , R 19De and R21De may be the same or different.
  • R 22De , R 23De , R 25De , R 26De , R 27De and R 28De each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24De may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22De , R 23De , R 24De , R 25De , R 26De , R 27De and R 28De may be the same or different.
  • R 2De is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1De is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2De is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 3De is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Df , R 12Df , R 13Df , R 15Df , R 16Df , R 17Df , R 18Df and R 21Df are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Df And R 19Df each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Df , R 12Df , R 13Df , R 14Df , R 15Df , R 16Df , R 17Df , R 18Df , R 19Df and R21Df may be the same or different.
  • R 22Df , R 23Df , R 25Df , R 26Df , R 27Df and R 28Df are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Df may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Df , R 23Df , R 24Df , R 25Df , R 26Df , R 27Df and R 28Df may be the same or different.
  • R 2Df is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that when bonded Q 1Df is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, the bonded Q 2Df is a nitrogen atom.
  • the group is a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the containing heterocyclic compound, or when the bonded Q 3Df is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used. .
  • R 11Dg , R 12Dg , R 13Dg , R 15Dg , R 16Dg , R 17Dg , R 18Dg and R 21Dg are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14Dg And R 19Dg is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • Each 21Dg may be the same or different.
  • R 22Dg , R 23Dg , R 25Dg , R 26Dg , R 27Dg and R 28Dg are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Dg may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Dg , R 23Dg , R 24Dg , R 25Dg , R 26Dg , R 27Dg and R 28Dg may be the same or different.
  • R 2Dg is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that when bonded Q 1Dg is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, the bonded Q 2Dg is a nitrogen atom.
  • the group is a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the containing heterocyclic compound, or when the bonded Q 3Dg is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used. .
  • R 3Dg is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Dh , R 12Dh , R 13Dh , R 15Dh , R 16Dh , R 17Dh , R 18Dh and R 21Dh are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14Dh And R 19Dh each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • R 11Dh , R 12Dh , R 13Dh , R 14Dh , R 15Dh , R 16Dh , R 17Dh , R 18Dh , R 19Dh and R 21Dh may be the same or different.
  • R 22Dh , R 23Dh , R 25Dh , R 26Dh , R 27Dh and R 28Dh are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Dh may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Dh , R 23Dh , R 24Dh , R 25Dh , R 26Dh , R 27Dh and R 28Dh may be the same or different.
  • R 2Dh is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that when bonded Q 1Dh is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, the bonded Q 2Dh is a nitrogen atom.
  • the group is a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the containing heterocyclic compound, or when the bonded Q 3Dh is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used. .
  • R 3Dh is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Di , R 12Di , R 13Di , R 15Di , R 16Di , R 17Di , R 18Di and R 21Di are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Di And R 19Di each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Di , R 12Di , R 13Di , R 14Di , R 15Di , R 16Di , R 17Di , R 18Di , R 19Di and R21Di may be the same or different.
  • R 22Di , R 23Di , R 25Di , R 26Di , R 27Di and R 28Di are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Di may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Di , R 23Di , R 24Di , R 25Di , R 26Di , R 27Di and R 28Di may be the same or different.
  • R 2Di is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Di is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Di is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 4Di is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Dj , R 12Dj , R 13Dj , R 15Dj , R 16Dj , R 17Dj , R 18Dj and R 21Dj are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14Dj And R 19Dj each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • R 11Dj , R 12Dj , R 13Dj , R 14Dj , R 15Dj , R 16Dj , R 17Dj , R 18Dj , R 19Dj and R 21Dj may be the same or different.
  • R 22Dj , R 23Dj , R 25Dj , R 26Dj , R 27Dj and R 28Dj are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Dj may be substituted.
  • a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Dj , R 23Dj , R 24Dj , R 25Dj , R 26Dj , R 27Dj and R 28Dj may be the same or different.
  • R 2Dj is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Dj is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Dj is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 3Dj is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Dk , R 12Dk , R 13Dk , R 15Dk , R 16Dk , R 17Dk , R 18Dk and R 21Dk are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14Dk And R 19Dk are each independently an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • R 11Dk , R 12Dk , R 13Dk , R 14Dk , R 15Dk , R 16Dk , R 17Dk , R 18Dk , R 19Dk and R 21Dk may be the same or different.
  • R 2Dk is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Dk is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 3Dk is In the case of a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 11Dl , R 12Dl , R 13Dl , R 15Dl , R 16Dl , R 17Dl , R 18Dl and R 21Dl are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14Dl And R 19Dl each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • R 11Dl , R 12Dl , R 13Dl , R 14Dl , R 15Dl , R 16Dl , R 17Dl , R 18Dl , R 19Dl and R21Dl may be the same or different.
  • R 22Dl, R 23Dl, R 25Dl , R 26Dl, R 27Dl and R 28 dl are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted C 1 -C also be ⁇ 50 hydrocarbyl group
  • R 24Dl is substituted an alkyl group having a carbon number of 1 ⁇ 30,
  • R 22Dl, R 23Dl, R 24Dl, R 25Dl, R 26Dl, R 27Dl and R 28 dl may be the same or different.
  • R 2Dl is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that when Q 1Dl bonded is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, the bonded Q 2Dl is a nitrogen atom.
  • the group is a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the containing heterocyclic compound, or when the bonded Q 3Dl is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used. .
  • R 3Dl is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Dm , R 12Dm , R 13Dm , R 15Dm , R 16Dm , R 17Dm , R 18Dm and R 21Dm are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Dm And R 19Dm each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Dm , R 12Dm , R 13Dm , R 14Dm , R 15Dm , R 16Dm , R 17Dm , R 18Dm , R 19Dm and R21Dm may be the same or different.
  • R 22Dm , R 23Dm , R 25Dm , R 26Dm , R 27Dm and R 28Dm are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Dm may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Dm , R 23Dm , R 24Dm , R 25Dm , R 26Dm , R 27Dm and R 28Dm may be the same or different.
  • Q 4Dm is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms, which can coordinate to Ag + and contains any one of P, N, O ⁇ or S ⁇ in a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. It is.
  • R 2Dm is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Dm is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Dm is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 11Dn , R 12Dn , R 13Dn , R 15Dn , R 16Dn , R 17Dn , R 18Dn and R 21Dn are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14Dn And R 19Dn each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • R 11Dn , R 12Dn , R 13Dn , R 14Dn , R 15Dn , R 16Dn , R 17Dn , R 18Dn , R 19Dn and R21Dn may be the same or different.
  • R 2Dn is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Dn is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 3Dn is In the case of a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 3Dn is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
  • Two or more groups selected from groups in which one or three hydrogen atoms have been removed may be optionally combined to form a ring.
  • R 11Do , R 12Do , R 13Do , R 15Do , R 16Do , R 17Do , R 18Do and R 21Do are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Do And R 19Do each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Do , R 12Do , R 13Do , R 14Do , R 15Do , R 16Do , R 17Do , R 18Do , R 19Do and R21Do may be the same or different.
  • R 2Do is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Do is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 3Do is In the case of a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 4Do is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Dp , R 12Dp , R 13Dp , R 15Dp , R 16Dp , R 17Dp , R 18Dp and R 21Dp are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Dp And R 19Dp each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Dp , R 12Dp , R 13Dp , R 14Dp , R 15Dp , R 16Dp , R 17Dp , R 18Dp , R 19Dp and R 21Dp may be the same or different.
  • R 22Dp , R 23Dp , R 25Dp , R 26Dp , R 27Dp and R 28Dp each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Dp may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Dp , R 23Dp , R 24Dp , R 25Dp , R 26Dp , R 27Dp and R 28Dp may be the same or different.
  • R 3Dp is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 4Dp is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Dq , R 12Dq , R 13Dq , R 15Dq , R 16Dq , R 17Dq , R 18Dq and R 21Dq are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Dq And R 19Dq each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Dq , R 12Dq , R 13Dq , R 14Dq , R 15Dq , R 16Dq , R 17Dq , R 18Dq , R 19Dq and R 21Dq may be the same or different.
  • Q 4Dq is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms and containing any one of P, N, O ⁇ or S ⁇ in a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, which can be coordinated to Ag +. It is.
  • R 2Dq is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Dq is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, and may be a direct bond.
  • R 3Dq is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
  • Two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the containing heterocyclic compound may be optionally combined to form a ring.
  • R 11Dr , R 12Dr , R 13Dr , R 15Dr , R 16Dr , R 17Dr , R 18Dr and R 21Dr are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 14Dr And R 19Dr each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • R 11Dr , R 12Dr , R 13Dr , R 14Dr , R 15Dr , R 16Dr , R 17Dr , R 18Dr , R 19Dr and R21Dr may be the same or different.
  • Q 5Dr is a pentavalent group having 100 or less carbon atoms, which can coordinate to Ag + and contains any one of P, N, O ⁇ or S ⁇ in a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. It is.
  • R 2Dr is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Dr is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, and may be a direct bond.
  • Two or more groups selected from a group excluding one hydrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring.
  • R 11Ds , R 12Ds , R 13Ds , R 15Ds , R 16Ds , R 17Ds , R 18Ds and R 21Ds are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Ds And R 19Ds each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, R 11Ds , R 12Ds , R 13Ds , R 14Ds , R 15Ds , R 16Ds , R 17Ds , R 18Ds , R 19Ds and R21Ds may be the same or different.
  • R 22Ds , R 23Ds , R 25Ds , R 26Ds , R 27Ds and R 28Ds are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Ds may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Ds , R 23Ds , R 24Ds , R 25Ds , R 26Ds , R 27Ds and R 28Ds may be the same or different.
  • R 2Ds is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Ds is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Ds is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
  • R 5Ds is a pentavalent group having 100 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Dt , R 12Dt , R 13Dt , R 15Dt , R 16Dt , R 17Dt , R 18Dt and R 21Dt are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Dt And R 19Dt each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Dt , R 12Dt , R 13Dt , R 14Dt , R 15Dt , R 16Dt , R 17Dt , R 18Dt , R 19Dt and R 21Dt may be the same or different.
  • R 6Dt is a hexavalent group having 150 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 11Dt , R 12Dt , R 13Dt , R 14Dt , R 15Dt , R 16Dt , R 17Dt , R 18Dt , R 19Dt , R 21Dt , R 6Dt and optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compounds A group selected from the groups excluding one may be optionally bonded to form a ring.
  • the molecules represented by the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt) are phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag +. It is preferable to contain 2 or more. Since the durability of the film against oxygen is improved, it is preferable that the sp 3 carbon atom is not bonded to the phosphorus atom.
  • the structure of the molecule represented by the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt) is A structure having three phosphorus atoms, A structure having two phosphorus atoms and one nitrogen atom, A structure having two phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion, A structure having two phosphorus atoms and one sulfur anion, or A structure having two phosphorus atoms and one arsenic atom is preferred, A structure having two phosphorus atoms and one nitrogen atom, or A structure having two phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion is more preferable.
  • the structure of the molecule represented by the above formulas (Ba) to (Bd) is A structure having four phosphorus atoms, A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one nitrogen atom, A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion, A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one sulfur anion, A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one arsenic atom, A structure having two phosphorus atoms and two nitrogen atoms, or A structure having two phosphorus atoms and two arsenic atoms is preferred, A structure having four phosphorus atoms, A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one nitrogen atom, A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion, A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one sulfur anion, or A structure having two phosphorus atoms and two nitrogen atoms is more preferable, A structure having four phosphorus atoms, A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion, or A structure having two
  • the structure of the molecule represented by the above formulas (Ca) to (Ci) is A structure having five phosphorus atoms, A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one nitrogen atom, A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion, A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one sulfur anion, A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one arsenic atom, A structure having three phosphorus atoms and two nitrogen atoms, A structure having three phosphorus atoms and two oxygen atoms, A structure having three phosphorus atoms and two sulfur anions, A structure having three phosphorus atoms and two arsenic atoms, A structure having two phosphorus atoms and three nitrogen atoms, or A structure having two phosphorus atoms and three arsenic atoms is preferred, A structure having five phosphorus atoms, A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one nitrogen atom, A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion, A
  • the structures of the molecules represented by the above formulas (Da) to (Dt) are as follows: A structure having six phosphorus atoms, A structure having five phosphorus atoms and one nitrogen atom, A structure having five phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion, A structure having five phosphorus atoms and one sulfur anion, A structure having five phosphorus atoms and one arsenic atom, A structure having four phosphorus atoms and two nitrogen atoms, A structure having four phosphorus atoms and two oxygen anions, A structure having four phosphorus atoms and two sulfur anions, A structure having four phosphorus atoms and two arsenic atoms, A structure having three phosphorus atoms and three nitrogen atoms, A structure having three phosphorus atoms and three arsenic atoms, A structure having two phosphorus atoms and four nitrogen atoms, or A structure having two phosphorus atoms and four arsenic atoms is preferred, A structure having six phospho
  • nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds in the molecules represented by the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt)
  • pyridine pyridazine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, triazine, quinoline, isoquinoline, imidazole, pyrazole, oxazole, thiazole, oxadiazole, thiadiazole, azadiazole and acridine.
  • pyridine Preferable are pyridine, imidazole, quinoline and isoquinoline, more preferable are pyridine, imidazole and quinoline, and still more preferable are imidazole and quinoline because a complex having good film forming property is easily formed.
  • Examples of the substituent that the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound may have include a halogen atom, a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms substituted with a halogen atom, a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, carbon Examples thereof include a hydrocarbyloxy group having 1 to 24 atoms and a diarylamino group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms.
  • the number of substituents that the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound may have is preferably 0 to 4, more preferably 0 to 3, further preferably 0 to 2, and particularly preferably 1 to 2. It is a piece.
  • the substituent which the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound which may be substituted may have may be condensed to form a ring structure.
  • an ethenyl group may be bonded to the 4,5-position of imidazole, and the ethenyl groups may be condensed to form a benzene ring to form a benzimidazole skeleton.
  • hydrocarbyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by the formula (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt)
  • hydrocarbyl groups are shown below: Methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, pentadecyl, Alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, such as octadecyl group and docosyl group; A cyclic saturated hydrocarbyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, such as cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, cyclononyl group, cyclodo
  • the hydrocarbyl group is preferably a methyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, dodecyl group, cyclohexyl group, phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 2 -Methylphenyl group, 3-methylphenyl group, 4-methylphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl group, 2-isopropylphenyl group, 4-ethylphenyl group, 4-propylphenyl group, 4-isopropylphenyl group 4-butylphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, 4- (2-ethylhexyl) phenyl group, 4-cyclohexylphenyl group, 4-adamantylphenyl group, 4-phenylphenyl group, 9 A fluorenyl group or a phenylmethyl
  • Examples of the substituent that the hydrocarbyl group may have are the same as the substituent that the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound may have, a halogen atom, a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and a substituent having 1 to 24 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by the formula (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt).
  • Examples include methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, pentadecyl, octadecyl, docosyl, etc.
  • a straight-chain hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms which may be an alkyl group having a branched structure such as an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a tert-butyl group and a 2-ethylhexyl group.
  • Cyclic structures such as groups, cyclopentyl groups, cyclohexyl groups, cyclononyl groups, cyclododecyl groups, norbornyl groups and adamantyl groups Or an alkyl group having.
  • a methyl group, an ethyl group, a butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a dodecyl group, an octadecyl group and a cyclohexyl group more preferably a methyl group, a butyl group, a hexyl group and an octyl group. More preferably a methyl group.
  • Examples of the group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound include 2 hydrogen atoms in the above-described example of the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. Examples thereof include the same groups as those obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the structure of a compound having two or more compounds. Examples of the group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound include 3 hydrogen atoms among the above-described examples of the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. Examples thereof include the same groups as those obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the structure of a compound having two or more compounds.
  • Examples of the tetravalent group obtained by removing four hydrogen atoms from the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound include hydrogen among the examples of the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. Examples thereof include the same groups as those obtained by removing four hydrogen atoms from the structure of a compound having four or more atoms. Examples of the pentavalent group obtained by removing five hydrogen atoms from the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound include hydrogen among the examples of the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. Examples thereof include the same groups as those obtained by removing five hydrogen atoms from the structure of a compound having 5 or more atoms.
  • Examples of the hexavalent group obtained by removing six hydrogen atoms from the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound include hydrogen among the examples of the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. Examples thereof include the same groups as those obtained by removing six hydrogen atoms from the structure of a compound having 6 or more atoms.
  • a group represented by any one of the following formulas r1 to r12 which may be substituted (for example, a group represented by any one of the following formulas r1 ′ to r12 ′).
  • Y 1 is — (CH 2 ) n —, —O—, —S— , —N (R 50 ) —, —Si (R 51 ) 2 —, —O (CH 2 ) n —, Or a group represented by —O (CH 2 ) n O—
  • Y 2 is — (CH 2 ) n —, —O—, —S—, or —Si (R 51 ) 2 —.
  • N is an integer of 1 to 3.
  • R 50 is an optionally substituted aryl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 51 is an optionally substituted carbon atom. 1 to 50 hydrocarbyl groups.
  • Examples of the aryl group which may be substituted represented by R 50 are phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 3-methylphenyl group, 4 -Methylphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl group, 2-isopropylphenyl group, 4-ethylphenyl group, 4-propylphenyl group, 4-isopropylphenyl group, 4-butylphenyl group, 4-tert-butyl Examples include phenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, 4- (2-ethylhexyl) phenyl group, 4-cyclohexylphenyl group, 4-adamantylphenyl group, 4-phenylphenyl group, and 9-fluorenyl group.
  • phenyl group 2-methylphenyl group, 4-methylphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl group, 2-isopropylphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group and 4-hexylphenyl group
  • phenyl group 2-methylphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl group and 4-hexylphenyl group
  • phenyl group is a group that is a group.
  • hydrocarbyl group of the optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group represented by R 51 are the formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and Examples of the hydrocarbyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by (Da) to (Dt) are the same as those of the hydrocarbyl group.
  • the groups represented by the formulas r1 ′ to r12 ′ that may be substituted which are examples of the groups represented by the formulas r1 to r12 that may be substituted, are shown below.
  • Y 3 is, -CH 2 -, - O - , - S -, - N (R 52) -, or, -Si (R 53) 2 - .
  • R 52 is a group represented by the (It is an aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms which may be substituted, and R 53 is a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms which may be substituted.)
  • Examples of the aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms which may be substituted represented by R 52 and preferred structures thereof include examples of the aryl group which may be substituted and represented by R 50 . Of these, those having 1 to 18 carbon atoms are the same.
  • Examples of the optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms represented by R 53 and preferred structures thereof include, among the examples and preferred structures of the hydrocarbyl group represented by R 51 , the number of carbon atoms. Similar to those of 1-18.
  • R 2Xx is preferably a group represented by any one of the aforementioned formulas r1 to r12 which may be substituted, and may optionally be substituted by the formulas r1, r2, r5, r6, r8 And a group represented by any one of r9, a group represented by the formula r10, wherein Y 1 is —O— or —N (R 50 ) —, represented by the formula r11 A group in which Y 1 is —O— or —S—, a group represented by the formula r12, wherein Y 1 is —O—, and Y 2 is —CH 2 - is group, a group represented by the formula r12, a Y 1 in the formula is -O-, Y 2 is -Si (R 51) 2 - group are more preferably, substituted A group represented by any one of the formulas r1 ′, r5 ′, r6 ′ and r10 ′, and
  • Examples of the substituent that the group represented by R 2Xx may have are the formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Da) Dt)
  • a halogen atom a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a hydrocarbyloxy group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, A diarylamino group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms;
  • the number of substituents that the group represented by R 2Xx may have is preferably 0 to 4, more preferably 0 to 3, and still more preferably 0 to 2.
  • the position of the substituent is preferably the following position.
  • r1 ′ preferably one or more selected from 2 ′ and 3 ′; r2 ′: Preferably, one or more selected from 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′ and 5 ′, more preferably two of 2 ′ and 5 ′, or two of 3 ′ and 4 ′; r3 ′: Preferably, one or more locations selected from 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′, 5 ′, 6 ′ and 8 ′, more preferably, only one location of 4 ′, two locations of 2 ′ and 6 ′, 2 locations 3 ′ and 5 ′, 3 locations 2 ′, 4 ′ and 6 ′, or 3 locations 3 ′, 4 ′ and 5 ′; r4 ′: Preferably, one or more locations selected from 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′, 5 ′, 6 ′ and 7 ′, more preferably 2 locations of 2 ′ and 7 ′, 2 of 3 ′ and 6 ′ Or two places, 4 'and 5'; r5
  • R 2xx there is a plurality
  • the group represented by one or more R 2xx Among the groups represented by plural R 2xx is not a direct bond preferable.
  • one or more R 2Ba of the three R 2Ba in the formula (Ba) is preferably not a direct bond
  • molecules of the above formula in this case (Ba) is the following formula (Ba ')
  • Q 1Ba and Q 2Ba are the same as Q 1Ba and Q 2Ba in the formula (Ba).
  • R 3Ab , R 3Bb , R 3Cb , R 3Cd , R 3Cf , R 3Cg , R 3Db , R 3De , R 3Dg , R 3Dh , R 3Dj , R 3Dl , R 3Dn , R 3Dp and R 3Dq (hereinafter referred to as these Examples of the group represented by R 3Xx ) include groups represented by any of the following formulas r31 and r32 which may be substituted.
  • Y 5 , Y 6 and Y 7 are each independently a direct bond or optionally substituted - (CH 2) nm As long as it is not adjacent to each other, any number of CH 2 may be replaced with O, and nm is an integer of 1 to 8.
  • a plurality of Y 5 , Y 6 and Y 7 may be the same or different.
  • R 31 is an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms
  • R 32 is a group represented by any one of the above formulas r1 to r12 which may be directly bonded or substituted.
  • R 33 is an optionally substituted group represented by any one of the above formulas r1 to r12, and the plurality of R 32 and R 33 may be the same or different, and Y 5 , Y 6 , Two or more groups selected from Y 7 , R 31 , R 32 and R 33 are optionally bonded to form a ring. May be.
  • Examples and preferred examples of the hydrocarbyl group of the optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group in R 31 are the formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and ( Examples of the hydrocarbyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by Da) to (Dt) and the preferable examples thereof are the same.
  • Examples and preferred examples of the substituent that the hydrocarbyl group may have are also the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt). The examples are the same as the examples and preferred examples of the substituent that the hydrocarbyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by
  • R 32 and R 33 are each independently a group represented by any one of the formulas r1 to r12 which may be directly bonded or substituted. Preferably, it is a group represented by any one of the aforementioned formulas r1, r2, r4, r5, r8 and r10 which may be substituted, and more preferably, the formulas r1, r2, r5 and r10 which may be substituted. It is group represented by either.
  • R 32 and R 33 are groups represented by any of the above formulas r1 to r12
  • examples of substituents that the groups represented by the above formulas r1 to r12 may have and preferred examples thereof are the above R 2Xx This is the same as the examples and preferred examples of the substituent that the group represented by
  • R 4Bd, R 4Ce, R 4Dd , R 4Di, R 4Do and R 4DP examples of tetravalent groups represented by (hereinafter, these groups collectively referred to as R 4xx), it may be substituted Examples include the group represented by the following formula r41.
  • Y 8 is C, Si, or, B - a is either Y 9 is a direct bond or - (CH 2) nn -, - O -, - S -, - N (R 60) Or a group represented by —Si (R 61 ) 2 —, nn is an integer of 1 to 3.
  • Two Y 9 s may be the same or different, and R 60 may be substituted.
  • a good aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and R 61 is an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms.
  • Examples and preferred examples of the substituent that r41 may have are the same as the examples and preferred examples of the substituent that the group represented by R 2Xx may have.
  • Examples and preferred examples of the aryl group represented by R 60 are the same as those of the aryl group represented by R 52 and preferred examples, respectively.
  • Examples and preferred examples of the hydrocarbyl group represented by R 61 are the same as the examples and preferred examples of the hydrocarbyl group represented by R 53 , respectively.
  • Y 8 and Y 9 of the r41 is preferably a combination Y 8 is located at C 2 both Y 9 are both -O-, Y 8 is located in Si 2 both Y 9 are both -O- combination, the combination Y 8 is located at C 2 both Y 9 are both -S-, combination Y 8 is located in Si 2 both Y 9 are both -S-, and Y 8 is B - a is two A combination in which both Y 9 are —O— is exemplified. A more preferred combination is that Y 8 is Si and the two Y 9 are both —O—.
  • one Q 1Aa is —P (R 11Aa ) 2 ;
  • Q 2Aa is —As (R 23Aa ) — or a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound,
  • Combinations R 11Aa, R 12Aa and R 23Aa are each independently a phenyl group which may be substituted; And more preferably
  • One Q 1Aa is —P (R 11Aa ) 2 , —As (R 12Aa ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optional
  • R 2Aa for each combination of Q 1Aa and Q 2Aa in the formula (Aa) is as described for the group represented by R 2Xx .
  • a preferred combination of Q 1Ab and R 3Ab in the formula (Ab) is:
  • the two Q 1Abs are —P (R 11Ab ) 2 ;
  • R 3Ab is a group represented by any one of the above-described formulas r31 and r32 which may be substituted.
  • a preferred combination of Q 1Ba , Q 2Ba and R 2Ba in the formula (Ba) is:
  • One Q 1Ba is —P (R 11Ba ) 2 or a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, and the other Q 1Ba is —O ⁇ .
  • R 2Ba is —P (R 22Ba ) — or a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, R 11Ba and R 22Ba are each independently an optionally substituted phenyl group; A combination in which R 2Ba is a direct bond or a group represented by any one of the above formulas r1 to r12 which may be substituted.
  • Q 1Bc , Q 3Bc and R 2Bc in the formula (Bc) is two Q 1Bc are each independently —P (R 11Bc ) 2 , —As (R 12Bc ) 2 , or a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound.
  • Q 1Bc is —O ⁇ , —S ⁇ , —S ( ⁇ O) 2 O ⁇ , or —C ( ⁇ O) O ⁇
  • Q 3Bc is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from P or an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound
  • R 11Bc and R 12Bc are optionally substituted aryl groups, more preferably
  • R 11Bc is an optionally substituted phenyl group, A combination in which R 2Bc is a direct bond or a group represented
  • a preferred combination of Q 1Bd and R 4Bd in the formula (Bd) is Each of the three Q 1Bd groups independently represents —P (R 11Bd ) 2 , —As (R 12Bd ) 2 , or a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound; And one Q 1Bd is —C ( ⁇ O) O ⁇ , —O ⁇ , —S ⁇ , —S ( ⁇ O) 2 O ⁇ , or —C ( ⁇ O) O ⁇ , (R 11Bd ) and (R 12Bd ) are optionally substituted phenyl groups, In the combination, R 4Bd may be substituted.
  • L 1 examples are represented by the following formulas Aa1 to 94, Ab1 to 4, Ba1 to 20, Bb1, Bc1 to 23, Bd1 to 3, Ca1 to 8, Cc1 to 3, Cf1, Da1 to 4, and Dk1. Molecule.
  • R70 is a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, a trifluoromethyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, An octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propyloxy group, a butoxy group, a tert-butoxy group, or a phenyloxy group.
  • R 71 is a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • R 72 is hydrogen atom, fluorine atom, trifluoromethyl group, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, tert-butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl A group, a decyl group, a methoxy group, or a diphenylamino group.
  • the example of R 73 is the same as the example of R 70 , but R 73 may be directly bonded and connected to R 74 .
  • R 74 is —CH 2 —, and any number may be replaced with O as long as the CH 2 are not adjacent to each other.
  • m is an integer of 1 to 12.
  • the plurality of R 70 to R 74 may be the same or different.
  • Ar 1 is an optionally substituted phenyl group, and a plurality of Ar 1 may be the same or different.
  • Ar 2 is an optionally substituted phenylene group.
  • Y 10 is a group represented by —CH 2 —, —O—, or —S—.
  • Y 11 represents —C (CH 3 ) 2 —, — (CH 2 ) 2 —, —O—, —S—, —Si (CH 3 ) 2 —, —Si (n—C 6 H 13 ) 2 — Or a group represented by —Si (Ph) 2 —.
  • Ph is a phenyl group.
  • the plurality of Y 10 and Y 11 may be the same or different.
  • R 70 is preferably a hydrogen atom, fluorine atom, chlorine atom, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, hexyl group, octyl group, methoxy group, ethoxy group, propyloxy group, butoxy group, a tert-butoxy group or a phenyloxy group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a methyl group, a butyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a methoxy group, a butoxy group, a tert-butoxy group, or A phenyloxy group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a methoxy group, a butoxy group, a tert-butoxy group, or a phenyloxy group, and particularly preferably a fluor
  • R 71 is preferably a hydrogen atom, phenyl group, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group, decyl group or dodecyl group, More preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group or a dodecyl group, still more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a butyl group or a hexyl group. And particularly preferably a methyl group.
  • R 72 is preferably a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a trifluoromethyl group, a methyl group, a butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a methoxy group, or a diphenylamino group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • An atom, a fluorine atom, a trifluoromethyl group, a tert-butyl group, an octyl group or a methoxy group more preferably a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom.
  • R 73 are the same as the preferred examples of R 70 described above.
  • R 73 may be linked to R 74 by a direct bond.
  • M is preferably an integer of 1 to 10, more preferably an integer of 3 to 10, still more preferably an integer of 4 to 9, and particularly preferably an integer of 5 to 8.
  • Ar 1 is preferably a phenyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 3-methylphenyl group, 4-methylphenyl group, 2-ethylphenyl group, 2-propylphenyl group, 2-isopropylphenyl group, 2-butylphenyl group 2-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, 2-fluorophenyl group, 4-fluorophenyl group, 3-diphenylaminophenyl group, 4-diphenylaminophenyl group, 3 -Bis (2-methylphenyl) aminophenyl group, 3-bis (4-methylphenyl) aminophenyl group, 2-methoxyphenyl group, 3-methoxyphenyl group, 4-methoxyphenyl group, 4-phenoxyphenyl group, 2 , 6-Dimethylphenyl group, 3,5-dimethylphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethyl Phenyl group, 2,6-die
  • Ar 2 is preferably 1,2-phenylene group, 1,3-phenylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, 3-methyl-1,2-phenylene group, 4-methyl-1,2-phenylene group, 5-methyl-1,2-phenylene group, 6-methyl-1,2-phenylene group, 6-ethyl-1,2-phenylene group, 6-propyl-1,2-phenylene group, 6-methoxy-1, 2-phenylene group, 6-methyl-1,3-phenylene group, 6-methyl-1,4-phenylene group, 6-methoxy-1,3-phenylene group or 6-fluoro-1,3-phenylene group More preferably, 1,2-phenylene group, 1,3-phenylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, 6-methyl-1,2-phenylene group, 6-methyl-1,3-phenylene group, 6- Methyl-1,4-phenylene group, 6- Toxi-1,3-phenylene group or 6-fluoro-1,3-phenylene group, more preferably 1,2-phenylene group, 1,3-pheny
  • Y 10 is preferably —CH 2 — or —O—, and more preferably —O—.
  • Y 11 is preferably —C (CH 3 ) 2 —, — (CH 2 ) 2 —, —O—, —Si (CH 3 ) 2 —, —Si (n—C 6 H 13 ) 2 —, or —Si (Ph) 2 —, more preferably —C (CH 3 ) 2 —, —Si (CH 3 ) 2 —, or —Si (Ph) 2 —, particularly preferably —C ( CH 3 ) 2 — and —Si (CH 3 ) 2 —.
  • Z 1 is —O 2 — or —C ( ⁇ O) O 2 — , preferably —O 2 — .
  • Z 2 is —S 2 — or —S ( ⁇ O) 2 O 2 — , preferably —S 2 — .
  • L 1 is preferably a molecule represented by the above formulas Aa1 to 94, Ab1 to 4, Ba1 to 20, Bb1, Bc1 to 23, Bd1 to 3, more preferably the formulas Aa1 to 40 , Aa60 to 66, Aa77 to 80, Aa91 to 94, Ab1 to 4, Ba1 to 16, Ba18 to 20, Bb1, Bc1 to 21, and Bd1 to 3, and more preferably represented by the formulas Aa1 and Aa3 Aa5, Aa13, Aa15, Aa23, Aa24, Aa33, Aa35, Ba1, Ba2, Ba3, Ba6, Ba7, Ba9, Ba11, Ba12, Ba13, Ba14, Ba15, Ba16, Bc1, Bc3, Bc4, Bc5, Bc6, Bc5, Bc6 , Bc8, Bc9, Bc10, Bc14, Bc15, Bc18, Bc19, Bc21, and Bd1 It is a molecule, particularly preferably a molecule represented by the above formula
  • L 1 include the following formulas Aa1 ′, Aa1′-2, Aa3 ′, Aa5 ′, Aa15 ′, Aa23 ′, Aa35 ′, Aa60 ′, Ba1 ′, Ba3 ′, Ba6 ′, Ba11 ′, Ba13 ′. , Ba16 ′, Ba19 ′, Bc1 ′, Bc4 ′, Bc9 ′, Bc15 ′, Bc21 ′, and Bd1 ′.
  • L 1 is preferably represented by the formulas Aa1 ′, Aa1′-2, Aa3 ′, Aa23 ′, Ba1 ′, Ba3 ′, Ba6 ′, Ba11 ′, Ba16 ′, Ba13 ′, Bc4 ′, Bc15.
  • a molecule represented by 'or Bc21' more preferably a molecule represented by the formula Ba3 ', Ba6', Ba11 ', Ba16', Bc4 ', or Bc21'.
  • L 2 in the composition formula (1) has an atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion, and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag +.
  • the total number of atoms and ions that are molecules and can coordinate to Ag + of L 2 is two.
  • L 2 is preferably coordinated to Ag +, be coordinated to Ag + as a monodentate ligand, the Ag + as a bidentate ligand Although it may coordinate, it is more preferable to coordinate to Ag ⁇ +> as a bidentate ligand.
  • the number of carbon atoms of L 2 is usually 2 to 250, preferably 3 to 200, more preferably 4 to 150, still more preferably 6 to 100, and particularly preferably 10 to 80.
  • L 2 is preferably a molecule represented by the following formula (E).
  • R 11E to R 14E are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 16E and R 18E are each independently an optionally substituted carbon atom. different is an alkyl group having 1 to 30, two R 11E, two R 12E, two R 13E, two R 14E, R 16E, and also the two R 18E identical Good .
  • R 2E also be is a divalent group, provided that there two one hydrogen atom from containing heterocyclic compounds a nitrogen atom which may be substituted Q 1E in removing one group In this case, it may be a direct bond selected from R 11E , R 12E , R 13E , R 14E , R 16E , R 18E , R 2E and a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic ring.
  • the two or more groups selected may be optionally combined to form a ring.
  • hydrocarbyl group and preferred examples of the optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group in R 11E to R 14E are the formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ca)
  • hydrocarbyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by Ci) and (Da) to (Dt) and the preferable examples thereof are the same.
  • Examples of the optionally substituted alkyl group in R 16E and R 18E and the substituents that the alkyl group may have and preferred examples thereof include the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), ( This is the same as the examples of the alkyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by (Ca) to (Ci) and (Da) to (Dt) and the substituent that the alkyl group may have.
  • Examples and preferred examples of the optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound in Q 1E include the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and Examples of the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound which may be substituted in the molecule represented by (Da) to (Dt) and the examples and preferred examples of the substituent that the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound may have is there.
  • Examples and preferred examples of the divalent group in R 2E are the same as the examples and preferred examples of the group represented by R 2Xx .
  • the combination of the two Q 1E is preferably two —P (R 11E ) 2, two —As (R 14E ) 2, two groups obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, O - and -P (R 11E ) 2 one by one, -CO 2 - and -P (R 11E ) 2 one by one, or -S - and -P (R 11E ) 2 one by one Yes, more preferably -P (R 11E ) 2 or two groups obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound.
  • L 2 examples include optionally substituted molecules represented by the following formulas a1 to a37, b1 to b11, c1 to c41, and d1 to d30.
  • L 2 is preferably represented by the formulas a1 to a16, a25 to a37, c1 to c6, c12 to c41, d22.
  • d24 or d26 more preferably represented by the formulas a1 to a2, a4 to a8, a10 to a12, a15 to a16, a25 to a32, c14 to c41, d22, d23, or d26.
  • L 3 is an atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag +.
  • L 3 usually has 2 to 150 carbon atoms, preferably 3 to 100, more preferably 4 to 75, still more preferably 5 to 60, and particularly preferably 6 to 50.
  • L 3 is an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, P (R 11F ) 3 , (P ⁇ O) (R 12F ) 3 , ( P ⁇ S ) (R 13F ) 3 , As (R 14F) 3, R 15F -OH, R 16F -O -, R 17F -CO 2 H, R 18F -CO 2 -, R 19F -SH, R 20F -S -, R 21F -SO 3 H, R 22F - A molecule represented by SO 3 ⁇ or N (R 24F ) 3 is preferred.
  • R 11F to R 22F are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group
  • R 24F is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • three R 11F , 3 R 12F , 3 R 13F , 3 R 14F , R 15F , R 16F , R 17F , R 18F , R 19F , R 20F , R 21F , R 22F , and 3 R 24F are the same May be different.
  • Two or more of the three optional of R 11F may form a ring, two or more any of the three R 12F may form a ring, three R 13F the two or more of any of a may be bonded to form a ring, two or more any of the three R 14F may form a ring, three R 24F is bonded to A ring may be formed.
  • Examples and preferred examples of the optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound as L 3 include the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci). And the examples and preferred examples of the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound which may be substituted in the molecule represented by (Da) to (Dt).
  • Examples of the hydrocarbyl group which may be substituted in R 11F to R 22F and examples of the substituent which the hydroalkyl group may have and preferred examples thereof are the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), respectively. ), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt) in the molecule represented by the hydrocarbyl group which may be substituted and examples of the substituent that the hydroalkyl group may have and preferred examples It is the same.
  • Examples and preferred examples of the alkyl group which may be substituted in R 24F and the substituent that the alkyl group may have are the formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to Examples of the alkyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by (Ci) and (Da) to (Dt) and the substituent which the alkyl group may have and preferred examples thereof are the same.
  • L 3 is preferably an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, P (R 11F ) 3 , R 16F —O ⁇ , R 18F —CO 2 ⁇ , R 20F —S ⁇ , or R 22F
  • a molecule represented by —SO 3 — more preferably an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, P (R 11F ) 3 , R 18F —CO 2 ⁇ , or R 20F —S ⁇ . More preferably, it is a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound or a molecule represented by P (R 11F ) 3 .
  • L 3 examples include molecules represented by the following formulas e1 to e35 which may be substituted.
  • L 3 is preferably a molecule represented by any one of the formulas e1 to e13, e16 to e20, e25, e26, e28, e32, e33, and e34. More preferably, it is a molecule represented by any of formulas e1 to e13, e16 to e20, e28, and e33.
  • X 1 is an anion, for example, halide ion (for example, fluoride ion, chloride ion, bromide ion, iodide ion), tetrafluoroborate ion, hexa Fluorophosphate ion, hexafluoroantimony ion, hexafluoroarsenic ion, trifluoromethanesulfonate ion, trifluoroacetate ion, tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate ion), sulfate ion, nitrate ion, carbonate ion, acetate ion, Polymerization containing chlorate ion, methanesulfonate ion, benzenesulfonate ion, p-toluenesulfonate ion, dodecylbenzenesulf
  • a is a number greater than 0.5
  • b, c, and d are each independently a number of 0 or more.
  • a value obtained by substituting the a, b, c, and d into the formula (z ⁇ a) + (2 ⁇ b) + c + d is defined as the average coordination number in the composition formula (1).
  • z is the total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 1 .
  • the average coordination number is preferably more than 2.0 and 7.0 or less. That is, a, b, c, and d preferably satisfy the following mathematical formula (2). 7.0 ⁇ (z ⁇ a) + (2 ⁇ b) + c + d> 2.0 (2)
  • z is the total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 1.
  • the average coordination number in the composition formula (1) is more preferably 3.0 or more and 6.0 or less, further preferably 3.5 or more and 5.5 or less, and 4.0 or more and 5.0. It is particularly preferred that
  • a is preferably a number greater than 0.5 and not greater than 1.5, more preferably a number from 0.6 to 1.4, still more preferably a number from 0.7 to 1.3, The number is preferably 0.8 to 1.2.
  • b is preferably a number from 0 to 1.5, more preferably a number from 0 to 1.0, still more preferably a number from 0 to 0.3 or 1.0, and particularly preferably 0. is there.
  • c is preferably a number of 0 to 1.5, more preferably a number of 0 to 1.0, still more preferably a number of 0 to 0.3 or 1.0, and particularly preferably 0. is there.
  • the number is preferably 0 to 0.3, more preferably 0 to 0.2, still more preferably 0 to 0.1, and particularly preferably 0.
  • Another aspect is preferably a number of 0.5 to 1.5, more preferably a number of 0.6 to 1.5, still more preferably a number of 0.7 to 1.3.
  • the number is preferably 0.8 to 1.2.
  • the aforementioned embodiments are more preferred.
  • the luminescent silver complex in the film of the present invention may be any of a mononuclear complex, a binuclear complex, a trinuclear complex, a tetranuclear complex, a 5-nuclear complex, a hexanuclear complex, and a complex having 7 or more nuclei.
  • it is preferably a mononuclear complex, a binuclear complex, or a trinuclear complex, more preferably a mononuclear complex or a binuclear complex, and still more preferably a mononuclear complex.
  • Examples of silver complexes in the film of the present invention are shown in Table 1-1 and Table 1-2.
  • a, b, c, and d in the composition formula (1) are omitted, an appropriate number as described above can be taken for each compound number.
  • the combinations shown in Table 1-1 and Table 1-2 are preferable, and the Compound Nos. 1 to 9, 31 to More preferred are combinations represented by 41, 72 to 108, and 124 to 154, and further preferred are combinations represented by compound numbers 1 to 9, 31 to 41, 72 to 75, 94 to 100, and 124 to 154. 9, 31-41, 94-100, 124-137 and 148-154 are particularly preferred.
  • Silver complexes represented by the formulas 10 ′, 32 ′, 68 ′, 94 ′, and 95 ′ are representative silver complexes having the combinations represented by the compound numbers 10, 32, 68, 94, and 95, respectively. .
  • the silver complex in the film of the present invention usually exhibits luminescence.
  • the difference between the S1 energy and the T1 energy is preferably 0.3 eV or less, more preferably 0.2 eV or less, and the triplet tends to contribute to light emission, so that it is 0.1 eV or less. Is more preferable. If the difference between the S1 energy and the T1 energy is 0.3 eV or less, a light emission lifetime of 200 ns or more can be exhibited.
  • the structure optimization calculation is performed on the initial structure of the silver complex by density functional theory.
  • B3LYP can be used as the functional
  • LANL2DZ as the silver atom (or Ag + ) and halogen atom as the basis function
  • 6-31G (d) as the other atoms.
  • Gaussian 03 manufactured by Gaussian Inc.
  • none of L 1 , L 2 and L 3 in the composition formula (1) has an anion capable of coordinating to Ag +
  • X 1 is F ⁇ , Cl
  • the total charge is +1
  • at least one of L 1 , L 2 and L 3 has an anion capable of coordinating to Ag +
  • X 1 2 is any one of F ⁇ , Cl ⁇ , Br ⁇ and I ⁇
  • the total charge is 0, and each coordination atom of L 1 , L 2 and L 3 is from a silver atom (or Ag + ) to 3.
  • X 1 is a halide ion
  • the S1 energy here is the energy of the lowest excited singlet state when the ground state is the reference in the one-electron excited state
  • the T1 energy is when the ground state is the reference in the one-electron excited state.
  • the S1 energy and the T1 energy can be obtained by applying a time-dependent density functional method to the optimized structure obtained by the structure optimization calculation and calculating the one-electron excited state.
  • the calculation method used for the time-dependent density functional method can use B3LYP as the functional, Ag + as the basis function, LANL2DZ for the halogen atom, and 6-31G (d) for the other atoms.
  • Gaussian 03 manufactured by Gaussian Inc.
  • the silver complex in the film of the present invention has one or more nitrogen atoms in an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound as a nitrogen atom capable of coordinating to Ag +
  • L 1 for all of the nitrogen atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + in 1 the distance between the L 1 in Ag + allows coordinating nitrogen atom and Ag + is preferably less than 2.00 ⁇ 3.50 ⁇ . More preferably, it is 2.10 mm or more and 3.40 mm or less, further preferably 2.20 mm or more and 3.30 mm or less, particularly preferably 2.30 mm or more and 3.20 mm or less, and particularly preferably 2.30 mm or more and 2 or less. .70 mm or less.
  • the distance between the Ag + allows coordinating nitrogen atom and Ag + can be determined by a method of performing silver structural optimization calculation by the above density functional method.
  • the silver complex in the film of the present invention can be produced, for example, by a method of mixing a silver salt and a molecule constituting the silver complex in a solvent.
  • the thickness of the film provided by the present invention is usually 1 nm to 50 ⁇ m, preferably 2 nm to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 3 nm to 5 ⁇ m, still more preferably 5 nm to 3 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably light emission. Since it is easy to flow an electric charge when used in an element, the thickness is 10 nm to 200 nm.
  • the film may contain pinholes or irregularities, but preferably does not contain pinholes or irregularities.
  • the film of the present invention is, for example, a method comprising a step of vapor-depositing a silver complex and other components on a substrate in an arbitrary ratio, or a silver complex and other components suspended in a solvent in an arbitrary ratio or It can be manufactured by a method including a step of dissolving and applying. Preferably, it is produced by a method comprising a step of suspending or dissolving a silver complex and other components in a solvent in an arbitrary ratio and applying the suspension.
  • solvent used in the coating step examples include benzene, toluene, xylene, chloroform, 1,2-dichloroethane, 1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane, dichloromethane, tetrahydrofuran, 2-methyltetrahydrofuran, 1,4. -Dioxane, N, N-dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, acetonitrile, ethyl acetate, methanol, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, hexane, cyclohexane, and mixtures thereof.
  • Examples of the method for drying the solvent include air drying, heat drying, vacuum drying, heat vacuum drying, and drying performed by blowing nitrogen gas, and air drying or heat drying is preferable, and heat drying is more preferable.
  • Examples of the coating method include spin coating, casting, dip coating, gravure printing, bar coating, roll coating, spray coating, screen printing, flexographic printing, inkjet printing, and offset printing.
  • the spin coating method, casting method, roll coating method, spray coating method, screen printing method, flexographic printing method, ink jet method and offset printing method are preferable.
  • the membrane of the present invention may contain other components.
  • a low-molecular organic material a high-molecular organic material, an organic-inorganic composite material, an inorganic material, and a mixture thereof can be used, and can be arbitrarily selected according to the application.
  • the component include carbazole derivatives, triazole derivatives, oxazole derivatives, oxadiazole derivatives, imidazole derivatives, polyarylalkane derivatives, pyrazoline derivatives, pyrazolone derivatives, phenylenediamine derivatives, arylamine derivatives, amino-substituted chalcone derivatives, styrylanthracene.
  • the content of the silver complex in the film is usually 0.01 to 100% by weight, preferably 0.1 to 99% by weight, more preferably 1 to 90% by weight, based on the weight of the whole film. More preferably 5 to 80% by weight, particularly preferably 10 to 50% by weight.
  • the film of the present invention preferably uses a polymer compound as a component for forming the film.
  • the polymer compound include the following. Carbazole derivatives, pyrazoline derivatives, pyrazolone derivatives, arylamine derivatives, stilbene derivatives, triphenyldiamine derivatives, phenylenediamine derivatives, styrylanthracene derivatives, styrylamine derivatives, aromatic dimethylidine derivatives, hydrazone derivatives, polyaromatic tertiary amine compounds, amino A polymer containing a residue of a hole transport material such as a substituted chalcone derivative; Polyarylalkane derivatives, polyvinylcarbazole derivatives, polysilane derivatives, polysiloxane derivatives having an aromatic amine structure in the side chain or main chain, polyaniline derivatives, poly (2,5-thienylene vinylene) derivatives, aniline copolymers, polythiophene Polymer hole transport materials such as
  • polycarbazole derivatives polyarylamine derivatives, polyphenylenediamine derivatives, polyhydrazone derivatives, polymers containing residues of polyaromatic tertiary amine compounds, polyarylalkane derivatives, polyvinylcarbazole derivatives, polysilane derivatives, side chains or Polysiloxane derivatives having an aromatic amine structure in the main chain, poly (2,5-thienylene vinylene) derivatives, aniline copolymers, polytriazole derivatives, polyoxadiazole derivatives, polyimidazole derivatives, 8-hydroxyquinoline derivatives Polymers containing residues of the above, polyphthalocyanine derivatives, polymers containing residues of metal porphyrin derivatives, polytriazine derivatives, polyoxazole derivatives, polynaphthalene derivatives, polyaniline derivatives, polythiophene derivatives, polythiophene Nylene vinylene derivative, polyquinoxaline derivative, polymer containing aromatic
  • the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer compound is usually 1 ⁇ 10 3 to 1 ⁇ 10 8 , preferably 1 ⁇ 10 3 to 1 ⁇ 10 7 , more preferably 2 ⁇ 10 3 to 1. ⁇ 10 6 , more preferably 3 ⁇ 10 3 to 5 ⁇ 10 5 , and particularly preferably 5 ⁇ 10 3 to 1 ⁇ 10 5 .
  • the content of the silver complex in the film is usually 0.01 to 99.99% by weight, preferably 0.1% with respect to the weight of the whole film. It is ⁇ 99% by weight, more preferably 1 to 90% by weight, still more preferably 5 to 80% by weight, and particularly preferably 10 to 50% by weight.
  • the present invention provides a light emitting device containing the film of the present invention.
  • the light-emitting element is usually a light-emitting element in which a pair of electrodes composed of an anode and a cathode and a layer (thin film layer) composed of one or more layers having a light-emitting layer provided between the electrodes are sandwiched.
  • a layer thin film layer
  • the layers is the film of the present invention.
  • the content of the silver complex in the film including the film of the present invention is usually 0.01 to 100% by weight, preferably 0.1 to 99% by weight based on the weight of the whole layer. % By weight, more preferably 1 to 90% by weight, still more preferably 5 to 80% by weight, and particularly preferably 10 to 50% by weight.
  • Examples of the light emitting device of the present invention include a single layer type light emitting device (anode / light emitting layer / cathode) and a multilayer type light emitting device.
  • Examples of the layer configuration of the multilayer light emitting element include the following layer configurations.
  • A anode / hole injection layer / (hole transport layer) / light emitting layer / cathode
  • b anode / light emitting layer / electron injection layer / (electron transport layer) / cathode
  • c anode / hole injection layer / (Hole transport layer) / light emitting layer / electron injection layer / (electron transport layer) / cathode
  • d anode / light emitting layer / (electron transport layer) / electron injection layer / cathode
  • e anode / hole injection layer / (Hole transport layer) / light emitting layer / (electron transport layer) / electron injection layer / cathode
  • any layer constituting the device may be the film of the present invention, and the layer is not limited, but is preferably a light emitting layer.
  • (hole transport layer) and (electron transport layer) represent arbitrary layers that may or may not exist at each position.
  • the anode supplies holes to layers such as a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, and a light emitting layer, and preferably has a work function of 4.5 eV or more.
  • a metal, an alloy, a metal oxide, an electrically conductive compound, and a combination thereof can be used.
  • Conductive metal oxides metals such as gold, silver, chromium and nickel; mixtures and laminates of the conductive metal oxides and the metals; inorganic conductive materials such as copper iodide and copper sulfide; polyanilines and polythiophenes Examples [polyethylenedioxythiophene and the like], organic conductive materials such as polypyrrole, and a combination thereof with ITO.
  • the cathode supplies electrons to an electron injection layer, an electron transport layer, a light emitting layer, and the like.
  • the cathode material for example, a metal, an alloy, a metal halide, a metal oxide, an electrically conductive compound, and a combination thereof can be used.
  • an alkali metal Li, Na, K, Cs, etc.
  • Fluorides and oxides thereof alkaline earth metals (Mg, Ca, Ba, etc.) and fluorides and oxides thereof; gold, silver, lead, aluminum, alloys and mixed metals [sodium-potassium alloys, sodium-potassium mixtures] Metal, lithium-aluminum alloy, lithium-aluminum mixed metal, magnesium-silver alloy, magnesium-silver mixed metal, etc.]; rare earth metal [ytterbium, etc.]; indium;
  • the hole injection layer and the hole transport layer have a function of injecting holes from the anode, a function of transporting holes, or a function of blocking electrons injected from the cathode.
  • materials used for these layers include carbazole derivatives, triazole derivatives, oxazole derivatives, oxadiazole derivatives, imidazole derivatives, polyarylalkane derivatives, pyrazoline derivatives, pyrazolone derivatives, phenylenediamine derivatives, arylamine derivatives, amino-substituted Chalcone derivatives, styrylanthracene derivatives, fluorenone derivatives, hydrazone derivatives, stilbene derivatives, silazane derivatives, aromatic tertiary amine derivatives, styrylamine derivatives, aromatic dimethylidine derivatives, porphyrin derivatives, polysilane derivatives, poly (N-vinylcarbazole) derivatives , Organosilane derivatives, and polymers
  • the electron injection layer and the electron transport layer have a function of injecting electrons from the cathode, a function of transporting electrons, or a function of blocking holes injected from the anode.
  • materials used for these layers include triazole derivatives, oxazole derivatives, oxadiazole derivatives, imidazole derivatives, fluorenone derivatives, anthraquinodimethane derivatives, anthrone derivatives, diphenylquinone derivatives, thiopyrandioxide derivatives, carbodiimide derivatives.
  • the electron injection layer and the electron transport layer may have a single layer structure composed of one or more of these, or may have a multilayer structure composed of a plurality of layers having the same composition or different compositions.
  • Inorganic compounds such as insulators and semiconductors can also be used as materials for the electron injection layer and the electron transport layer. If the electron injection layer and the electron transport layer are made of an insulator or a semiconductor, current leakage can be effectively prevented and the electron injection property can be improved.
  • insulators include one or more metal compounds selected from the group consisting of alkali metal chalcogenides, alkaline earth metal chalcogenides, alkali metal halides and alkaline earth metal halides, and CaO BaO, SrO, BeO, BaS and CaSe are preferred.
  • Examples of semiconductors include oxides of one or more elements selected from the group consisting of Ba, Ca, Sr, Yb, Al, Ga, In, Li, Na, Cd, Mg, Si, Ta, Sb, and Zn. , Nitrides and oxynitrides.
  • a reducing dopant may be added to the interface region between the cathode and the film in contact with the cathode.
  • the reducing dopant include alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, rare earth metal, alkali metal oxide, alkali metal halide, alkaline earth metal oxide, alkaline earth metal halide, rare earth metal. And oxides or rare earth metal halides, alkali metal complexes, alkaline earth metal complexes, and rare earth metal complexes.
  • the light emitting layer is capable of injecting holes from the anode, the hole injection layer, or the hole transport layer when an electric field is applied, and has the function of injecting electrons from the cathode, the electron injection layer, or the electron transport layer. It has one of the function of moving electric charges by the force of an electric field and the function of providing a field for recombination of electrons and holes and connecting it to light emission.
  • the silver complex contained in the film of the present invention may be contained in the light emitting layer as a guest material, and further the host material may be contained in the light emitting layer.
  • Examples of the host material include a compound having a fluorene skeleton, a compound having a carbazole skeleton, a compound having a diarylamine skeleton, a compound having a pyridine skeleton, a compound having a pyrazine skeleton, a compound having a triazine skeleton, and a compound having an arylsilane skeleton Is mentioned.
  • the T1 of the host material is preferably larger than that of the guest material, and the difference is more preferably larger than 0.2 eV.
  • the host material may be a low molecular compound or a high molecular compound.
  • the host material may further contain an electrolyte.
  • electrolyte examples include supporting salts (lithium trifluoromethanesulfonate, lithium perchlorate, tetrabutylammonium perchlorate, potassium hexafluorophosphate, tetrafluoroborate. Solvents that may contain tetra-n-butylammonium etc.
  • a light-emitting layer in which a light-emitting material is doped in the host material can be formed by applying a mixture of a host material and a silver complex or by co-evaporation.
  • examples of a method for forming each layer include vacuum deposition methods (resistance heating deposition method, electron beam method, etc.), sputtering methods, LB methods, molecular lamination methods, and coating methods (casting method, spin coating method). , Bar coating method, blade coating method, roll coating method and gravure printing method, screen printing method, ink jet method, etc.), and the coating method is preferable in that the production process can be simplified.
  • the coating method the silver complex, the polymer compound, or a mixture thereof, which is a material of each layer, is mixed with a solvent to prepare a coating solution, and the coating solution is placed on a desired layer (or electrode). It can be formed by coating and drying.
  • the coating solution may contain a resin as a host material and / or a binder. This resin can be dissolved in a solvent or dispersed.
  • a non-conjugated polymer such as polyvinyl carbazole, or a conjugated polymer such as a polyolefin polymer
  • a non-conjugated polymer such as polyvinyl carbazole, or a conjugated polymer such as a polyolefin polymer
  • polyvinyl chloride polycarbonate, polystyrene, polymethyl methacrylate, polybutyl.
  • Methacrylate, polyester, polysulfone, polyphenylene oxide, polybutadiene, poly (N-vinylcarbazole), hydrocarbon resin, ketone resin, phenoxy resin, polyamide, ethyl cellulose, vinyl acetate, ABS resin, polyurethane, melamine resin, unsaturated polyester resin, alkyd Resins, epoxy resins, and silicone resins are listed.
  • the resin solution may further contain an antioxidant, a viscosity modifier and the like.
  • a solvent that uniformly dissolves the components of the film or a solvent that gives a stable dispersion is preferable.
  • alcohols methanol, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, etc.
  • ketones acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, etc.
  • Chlorinated hydrocarbons chloroform, 1,2-dichloroethane, etc.
  • aromatic hydrocarbons benzene, toluene, xylene, etc.
  • aliphatic hydrocarbons normal hexane, cyclohexane, etc.
  • amides dimethylformamide
  • a high boiling point solvent anisole, bicyclohexylbenzene, etc.
  • the viscosity of the solution is preferably 1 to 100 mPa ⁇ s at 25 ° C.
  • each layer of the light emitting device of the present invention is preferably 0.5 nm to 100 ⁇ m, more preferably 1 nm to 1 ⁇ m.
  • the light emitting device of the present invention can be used for, for example, an illumination light source, a sign light source, a backlight light source, a display device, a printer head, and the like.
  • Examples of the display device include a device of a segment type, a dot matrix type, or the like using a known driving technique, a driving circuit, or the like.
  • the present invention provides a silver complex represented by the following composition formula (3).
  • L 4 is either a molecule having a coordinatable phosphorus atoms four or more than six to Ag +, or, as capable of coordinating atoms to Ag +, or atoms and ions
  • the total number of ions is from 3 to 6.
  • L 5 is a phosphorus atom, nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, sulfur atom, arsenic atom, oxygen anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag + and a molecule having an atom or ion selected from sulfur anion, .L 6 total number of coordinatable atoms and ions Ag + are two having the L 5 represents, Ag + allows coordinating atoms or As ions, phosphorus atom, nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, sulfur A molecule having one atom or ion selected from a yellow atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion, X 2 is an anion, e is a number greater than 0.5, and f, g and h are respectively It is independently a number of 0 or more.)
  • L 4 are the preferred examples and examples of L 1 above. Having 4 or more and 6 or less phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + , or As an atom capable of coordinating to Ag + or as an atom and an ion, it has at least one phosphorus atom and at least one selected from a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion.
  • the total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 4 is the same as 3 or more and 6 or less.
  • L 5 , L 6 , X 2 , e, f, g and h are the same as L 2 , L 3 , X 1 , a, b, c and d in the composition formula (1), respectively.
  • Preferred examples and examples of L 5 , L 6 , X 2 , e, f, g and h are preferred examples of L 2 , L 3 , X 1 , a, b, c and d in the composition formula (1), respectively. And the same as the example.
  • the present invention is a diaryl phosphino group contains two or more, and, the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic one hydrogen atom from the compound to 3 except groups, -O -, and -S - a group selected from A molecule containing one or two and represented by the formula (Aa), (Ab), (Ba ′), (Bb), (Bc) or (Bd) is provided.
  • the molecule of the present invention is useful because it can be used, for example, as a ligand of a metal complex or a reaction catalyst.
  • it is useful as a silver complex contained in the film of the present invention or as a ligand in the silver complex.
  • diarylphosphino group and the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound examples include —P (R 11Aa ) 2 in the formula Aa, and examples and preferred examples of the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, respectively. It is the same.
  • the molecule of the present invention contains two or more diarylphosphino groups and a group obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —O ⁇ , —C ( ⁇ O) O -, or, -S - group 1 or 2 containing a selected from.
  • Two diarylphosphino groups and one group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound Diaryl phosphino group two and -O - one, Two diarylphosphino groups and one —C ( ⁇ O) O 2 — , Diaryl phosphino group two and -S - one, Two diarylphosphino groups and two groups obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, Three diarylphosphino groups and one group obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, Diarylphosphino based on two and nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic one hydrogen atom from the compound to 3 group remaining after removing one -O - one, Two diarylphosphino groups, one group obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, and one —C ( ⁇ O) O 2 — , Dia
  • the molecule of the present invention is a molecule represented by the formula (Aa), (Ab), (Ba ′), (Bb), (Bc) or (Bd).
  • Preferred examples of the molecule of the present invention include the formulas Aa1 to Aa40, Aa77 to Aa80, Aa91 to Aa94, Ba4 to Ba16, Bb1, and Bc6 to Bc21. More preferably, any one of the formulas Aa1 to Aa40, Ba4 to Ba15, Ba21, and Bc6 to Bc18, more preferably any one of the formulas Ba4 to Ba16, and Bc6 to Bc18, and particularly preferably Ba4, Ba6. , Ba8, Ba9, Ba16, and Bc6 to Bc10.
  • the molecule of the present invention preferably has the formula Aa1 ′, Aa1′-2, Aa3 ′, Aa5 ′, Aa15 ′, Aa23 ′, Aa35 ′, Ba6 ′, Ba11 ′, Ba13 ′, Ba16 ′, Bc9 ′, or It is a molecule represented by Bc15 ′.
  • Ba6 ', Ba11', Ba13 ', Ba16', Bc9 ', and Bc15' are more preferable, and formulas Ba6 ', Ba16', and Bc9 'are particularly preferable.
  • a 300 MHz NMR spectrometer manufactured by Varian or a 400 MHz NMR spectrometer manufactured by Burker was used for NMR measurement
  • the AccuTOF TLC (JMS-T100TD) manufactured by JEOL was used for DART-MS measurement.
  • LC908-C60 manufactured by Nippon Analytical Industries, Ltd. and columns JAIGEL-1H-40 and JAIGEL-2H-40 manufactured by Nippon Analytical Industries, Ltd. were used as the developing solvent.
  • An automatic analysis method was used for CHN elemental analysis, a flask combustion-potentiometric titration method was used for Cl elemental analysis, and a flask combustion-ion chromatographic method was used for Br elemental analysis.
  • Aa60 ′ (217 mg, 0.344 mmol) was added to a solution of silver (I) iodide (80.7 mg, 0.344 mmol) in 5 mL of acetonitrile, and the mixture was stirred at 45 ° C. for 30 minutes, and then added with 15 mL of dichloromethane. The mixture was refluxed for 1 hour with stirring. The reaction solution was filtered, the filtrate was concentrated, recrystallized by slow diffusion with chloroform-ether, and the crystals were dried to obtain 297 mg of a pale yellow crystal complex.
  • composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from the yield, 1 H NMR, 31 P NMR, yield, DART-MS measurement, and elemental analysis value.
  • composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from 1 H NMR, 31 P NMR, yield, DART-MS measurement, and elemental analysis value.
  • composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from 1 H NMR, 31 P NMR, yield, DART-MS measurement, and elemental analysis value.
  • Synthesis Example 4 (Compound No. 37 in Table 1-1) To a solution of 13.6 mg of the complex obtained in Synthesis Example 3 in 1.5 mL of dichloromethane was added 2.17 mg (0.0175 mmol) of 1,2,4,5-tetramethylimidazole in 0.5 mL of dichloromethane. Stir for minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and then vacuum-dried to obtain 15.8 mg of a pale yellow crystal complex.
  • composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
  • Synthesis Example 5 (Compound No. 36 in Table 1-1) To a solution of 9.85 mg of the complex obtained in Synthesis Example 3 in 1.5 mL of dichloromethane, 2,6-lutidine (1.36 mg, 0.0127 mmol) in 0.5 mL of dichloromethane was added and stirred at 40 ° C. for 10 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and then vacuum-dried to obtain 11.2 mg of a pale yellow crystal complex.
  • composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
  • Example 1 (Synthesis of Aa1 ′) 8-[[o- (Diphenylphosphino) phenyl] phenylphosphino] -quinoline (Aa1 ′) was synthesized by the following method.
  • reaction solution A A 50 mL Schlenk tube was charged with 1-bromo-2-diphenylphosphinobenzene (3.12 g, 9.14 mmol) and 15 mL of dehydrated THF, cooled to ⁇ 65 ° C., and stirred with an n-hexane solution of n-butyllithium ( 1.6 mol / L, 5.5 mL, 8.8 mmol as n-butyllithium) was added dropwise over 5 minutes. The reaction solution turned red was heated to ⁇ 30 ° C. and stirred for 2 hours (reaction solution A).
  • reaction solution B A 50 mL four-necked eggplant-shaped flask was charged with phenyldichlorophosphine (1.58 g, 8.83 mmol) and 8 mL of dehydrated THF, cooled to ⁇ 50 ° C., and the reaction solution A was mixed by sending a cannula. The reaction mixture was gradually warmed to room temperature (23 ° C.) and stirred for 12 hours. The reaction solution became cloudy (reaction solution B).
  • the reaction was gradually warmed to room temperature (23 ° C.) and stirred for 18 hours.
  • Aqueous ammonium chloride solution and chloroform are added to the reaction solution, followed by extraction with chloroform.
  • the obtained organic layer is dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated, and then purified by silica gel column chromatography using chloroform as a developing solvent. This was repeated and dried to obtain 335 mg (yield 7.64%) of Aa1 ′ as a yellow solid.
  • Example 2 (Compound No. 6 in Table 1-1) Aa1 ′ (8.26 mg, 0.0166 mmol) was added to a solution of silver hexafluorophosphate (I) (4.20 mg, 0.0166 mmol) in 1 mL of dichloromethane, and the mixture was stirred at 40 ° C. for 10 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and dried to obtain 12.5 mg of an orange solid complex.
  • composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
  • Example 3 (Compound No. 1 in Table 1-1) Aa1 ′ (12.2 mg, 0.0246 mmol) was added to a solution of silver (I) fluoride (3.12 mg, 0.0246 mmol) in 1 mL of dichloromethane, and the mixture was stirred at 40 ° C. for 10 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and dried to obtain 15.3 mg of an orange solid complex.
  • composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
  • the TFPA solution was added dropwise over 30 minutes while stirring. After stirring at 0 ° C. for 2 hours, a 20 wt% aqueous sodium hydrogen sulfite solution was added to the reaction solution, extraction was performed with dichloromethane, and the obtained organic layer was washed with saturated aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate and water. After concentration of the organic layer, the residue was dissolved in 300 mL of methanol, 1 drop of concentrated hydrochloric acid was added, and the mixture was allowed to stand at room temperature (23 ° C.) for 3 days.
  • TBS-Bc9 'and Bc9' (OH form) were synthesized by the following method.
  • Example 5 (Compound No. 97 in Table 1-2) To a solution of silver (I) bromide (1.90 mg, 0.0101 mmol) in 1 mL of acetonitrile was added Bc9 ′ (OH form) (13.0 mg, 0.0101 mmol), and the mixture was stirred at 45 ° C. for 15 minutes. 0.71 mg, 0.0101 mmol) methanol solution (0.45 mL) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 45 ° C. for 15 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated, dried and solidified, then added with water, suspended and filtered, and vacuum dried to obtain a colorless solid. 14.1 mg of this complex was obtained.
  • composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from the CHN elemental analysis value. The results of elemental analysis measurement are shown below.
  • Example 6 (Compound No. 72 in Table 1-1) To a solution of silver tetrafluoroborate (I) (3.72 mg, 0.0191 mmol) in 1 mL of dichloromethane was added 2,2′-6,6′-tetramethoxy-4,4′-bis (di (3,5-xylyl). ) Phosphino) -3,3′-bipyridine (Ba19 ′) (14.5 mg, 0.0191 mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature (23 ° C.) for 10 minutes. 2,9-Dichloro-1,10-phenanthroline (4.76 mg, 0.0191 mmol) was added to the reaction solution, and the mixture was stirred at 40 ° C. for 10 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and then vacuum dried to obtain 22.9 mg of a pale yellow crystal complex.
  • composition of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
  • Example 21 (Synthesis of Aa3 ′) Aa3 ′ was synthesized by the following method. N-methyl-2- (2-bromophenyl) benzimidazole was prepared according to Org. Biomol. Chem. 3297-3302 (2006). A 50 mL Schlenk tube is charged with 1-bromo-2-diphenylphosphinobenzene (2.93 g, 8.59 mmol) and 15 mL of dehydrated THF, cooled to ⁇ 65 ° C., and stirred with an n-hexane solution of n-butyllithium. (1.6 mol / L, 5.5 mL, 8.8 mmol as n-butyllithium) was added dropwise over 5 minutes.
  • reaction solution D The reaction solution turned red was heated to ⁇ 35 ° C. and stirred for 1 hour (reaction solution D).
  • a 50 mL eggplant-shaped flask was charged with phenyldichlorophosphine (1.57 g, 8.77 mmol) and 8 mL of dehydrated THF, cooled to ⁇ 65 ° C., and the reaction solution D was mixed by sending a cannula.
  • the reaction solution was stirred for 12 hours while gradually warming to room temperature (23 ° C.). As a result, the reaction solution became cloudy (reaction solution E).
  • reaction solution F was stirred overnight while gradually warming to room temperature (23 ° C.), and then stirred at 50 ° C. for 1 hour.
  • Aqueous ammonium chloride solution and chloroform were added to the reaction solution, followed by extraction with chloroform.
  • the organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, concentrated, and then subjected to colorless solid diphosphine 2 by preparative GPC. 675 mg (yield 12.9%) of an oxide was obtained.
  • the diphosphine dioxide (500 mg, 0.822 mmol) synthesized above, 3.94 g of triethylamine and 10 mL of dehydrated xylene were added to a 100 mL four-necked flask, cooled to 0 ° C., and trichlorosilane (5 0.000 g, 37.0 mmol) was added dropwise over 10 minutes. After returning to room temperature (23 ° C.) by natural temperature rise, the mixture was stirred at 130 ° C. for 12 hours. The reaction solution was returned to room temperature (23 ° C.), and 5 mL of a 30 wt% aqueous sodium hydroxide solution was added dropwise, followed by extraction with xylene. The organic layer was concentrated, dried and solidified. The residue was subjected to silica gel column chromatography using a developing solvent chloroform to obtain 202 mg (yield 47.3%) of colorless solid Aa3 '.
  • Example 22 (Compound No. 13 in Table 1-1) Aa3 ′ (6.63 mg, 0.0115 mmol) was added to a suspension of silver (I) iodide (2.70 mg, 0.0115 mmol) in 0.5 mL of acetonitrile, and the mixture was stirred for 3 minutes. For 5 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and dried to obtain 9.33 mg of a solid complex.
  • composition of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
  • Example 23 (Compound No. 11 in Table 1-1) To a suspension of silver chloride (I) (2.10 mg, 0.0147 mmol) in 0.5 mL of acetonitrile, Aa3 ′ (8.45 mg, 0.0147 mmol) was added and stirred for 3 minutes, and then 1 mL of dichloromethane was added at 40 ° C. Stir for 5 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and dried to obtain 10.6 mg of a solid complex.
  • composition of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
  • Example 24 (Compound No. 124 in Table 1-3) Aa3 ′ (6.52 mg, 0.0113 mmol) was added to a 1.5 mL suspension of silver tetrafluoroborate (I) (2.20 mg, 0.0113 mmol) in dichloromethane, and the mixture was stirred at 40 ° C. for 5 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and dried to obtain 8.72 mg of a solid complex.
  • composition of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
  • Example 25 (synthesis of Aa1′-2 and Ba16 ′) A crude product containing Ba16 ′ was synthesized by the following method, and 8-[[o- (diphenylphosphino) phenyl] phenylphosphino] -2-methylquinoline (Aa1′-2) was synthesized by the following method. .
  • Example 26 (Compound No. 132 in Table 1-3) Aa1′-2 (15.9 mg, 0.0311 mmol) was added to a 2.0 mL chloroform suspension of silver (I) iodide (7.30 mg, 0.0311 mmol), and the mixture was stirred at 40 ° C. for 5 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and dried to obtain 23.2 mg of a solid complex.
  • composition of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
  • Example 27 (Compound No. 133 in Table 1-3) Aa1′-2 (14.7 mg, 0.0288 mmol) was added to a suspension of silver tetrafluoroborate (I) (5.60 mg, 0.0288 mmol) in 2 mL of dichloromethane, and the mixture was stirred at 40 ° C. for 5 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and dried to obtain 20.3 mg of a solid complex.
  • composition of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
  • NMR data of the complex is shown below. NMR spectra were obtained from Chem. Commun. Since the pattern was the same as the complex described in 6384-6386 (2008), it was a complex having the structure shown above.
  • Solid emission quantum efficiency The solid emission quantum efficiency under air at room temperature (23 ° C.) was measured with a quantum efficiency measurement device (manufactured by Sumitomo Heavy Industries Mechatronics) as follows. Sample preparation was performed as follows. Approximately 1.5 mg of a sample composed only of the complex synthesized in the above examples and comparative examples was sandwiched between two quartz plates of 18 mm square and 0.3 mm thickness at room temperature (23 ° C.), and pressed to 10 mm ⁇ It was stretched to an ellipse of about 5 mm, and the four sides were fixed with tape and sealed.
  • the equipment configuration is as follows.
  • the light source was a Class 3B He-Cd CW laser manufactured by Kimmon.
  • An ND filter FDU0.5 manufactured by OFR was inserted into the emission part and led to an integrating sphere with an optical fiber.
  • a model 2400 source meter manufactured by KEYTHLEY was connected via an integrating sphere, polychromator, and CCD multichannel detector manufactured by Sumitomo Heavy Industries Mechatronics, and data was captured by a notebook PC.
  • the measurement procedure was as follows. Place the sample prepared under the above conditions in an integrating sphere in room temperature (23 ° C) air, set the laser excitation light to 325 nm, CW light, integration time 300 ms, excitation light integration range 315 to 335 nm, PL wavelength integration The range was 390 to 800 nm.
  • the quantum efficiency was calculated according to the procedure of measurement / analysis software manufactured by Sumitomo Heavy Industries Mechatronics.
  • Solid emission wavelength A sample prepared by the same method as the solid emission quantum efficiency measurement is set in a sample fixing place of a fluorescence spectrophotometer (manufactured by JOBINYVON-SPEX, Fluorolog-Tau3), and the excitation wavelength is 350 nm and solid emission is performed. The wavelength was measured.
  • Solid emission lifetime Measurement and analysis were performed as follows. A sample prepared by the same method as the solid-state luminescence quantum efficiency measurement is set in a sample fixing place for an unknown sample of a fluorescence spectrophotometer (manufactured by JOBINYVON-SPEX, Inc., Fluorolog-Tau3).
  • the structure optimization calculation was performed using the density functional method of the Gaussian 03 program (revision D.02, manufactured by Gaussian Inc.).
  • a one-electron excited state was calculated using a time-dependent density functional method, similarly using the Gaussian 03 program.
  • the functionals are B3LYP, basis functions are Ag + and LANL2DZ for halogen atoms, and 6-31G (d) for other atoms.
  • the complex had an S1 energy of 3.07 eV, a T1 energy of 3.01 eV, and a difference between the S1 energy and the T1 energy was 0.06 eV.
  • Example 2 As a model of the complex obtained in Example 5, 1 atom of silver atom and 1 molecule of Bc9 ′ were used. As an initial configuration, three phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + contained in Bc9 ′ and one oxygen anion are all placed within a distance of 3.0 cm or less from the silver atom (structure of compound 95 ′), and Gaussian03 Structure optimization calculations were performed using the density functional theory of the program (Revision D.02, manufactured by Gaussian Inc.). For the optimized structure obtained, a one-electron excited state was calculated using a time-dependent density functional method, similarly using the Gaussian 03 program.
  • the functional method is B3LYP
  • the basis function is Ag + and LANL2DZ for halogen atoms
  • 6-31G (d) for other atoms.
  • the complex had an S1 energy of 2.61 eV, a T1 energy of 2.61 eV, and a difference between the S1 energy and the T1 energy was 0.00 eV.
  • Example 3 As a model of the complex obtained in Example 6, a structure was used in which one atom of silver, one molecule of Ba19 ′, one molecule of 2,9-dichloro-1,10-phenanthroline, and no counter ions were used. . Two phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + contained in Ba19 ′ as an initial configuration and two nitrogen atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + contained in 2,9-dichloro-1,10-phenanthroline All of them were installed within a distance of 3.0 cm from the silver atom, and the structure optimization calculation was performed using the density functional method of the Gaussian 03 program (Revision D.02, manufactured by Gaussian Inc.).
  • a one-electron excited state was calculated using a time-dependent density functional method, similarly using the Gaussian 03 program.
  • the functional method is B3LYP
  • the basis function is Ag + and LANL2DZ for halogen atoms
  • 6-31G (d) for other atoms.
  • the complex had an S1 energy of 2.29 eV, a T1 energy of 2.29 eV, and a difference between the S1 energy and the T1 energy was 0.00 eV.
  • Example 4 As a model of the complex obtained in Example 22, one silver atom, one Aa3 ′ molecule, and one iodine atom were used. As an initial configuration, two phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + contained in Aa3 ′, one nitrogen atom capable of coordinating to Ag + contained in Aa3 ′, and one iodine atom all from silver atoms Installation was performed at a distance of 3.0 mm or less, and the structure optimization calculation was performed using the density functional method of the Gaussian 03 program (revision D.02, manufactured by Gaussian Inc.). For the optimized structure obtained, a one-electron excited state was calculated using a time-dependent density functional method, similarly using the Gaussian 03 program.
  • the functionals are B3LYP, basis functions are Ag + and LANL2DZ for halogen atoms, and 6-31G (d) for other atoms.
  • the complex had an S1 energy of 2.81 eV, a T1 energy of 2.78 eV, and a difference between the S1 energy and the T1 energy was 0.03 eV.
  • the distance between silver and the nitrogen atom coordinated with silver was 2.54 cm.
  • Example 5 As a model of the complex obtained in Example 26, 1 atom of silver atom, 1 molecule of 8-[[o- (diphenylphosphino) phenyl] phenylphosphino] -2-methylquinoline (Aa1′-2), iodine atom One atom was used.
  • the functional is B3LYP
  • the basis function is LANL2DZ for silver and halogen atoms
  • 6-31G (d) for other atoms.
  • the complex had an S1 energy of 2.54 eV, a T1 energy of 2.47 eV, and a difference between the S1 energy and the T1 energy was 0.07 eV.
  • the distance between silver and the nitrogen atom coordinated with silver was 3.12 cm.
  • a spin coater manufactured by Oshibell Co., Ltd., SC-150
  • a spin coater manufactured by Oshibell Co., Ltd., SC-150
  • 1,2-dichloroethane 2: 1 weight ratio
  • a spin coater manufactured by Oshibell Co., Ltd., SC-150
  • the thicknesses of the thin films using the complexes of Examples 2, 3, 5, 6, 26, and 27 were 0.98 ⁇ m, 1.2 ⁇ m, 2.8 ⁇ m, 2.3 ⁇ m, 1.7 ⁇ m, and 1.7 ⁇ m, respectively. Met.
  • the thin film is placed in the integrating sphere of a quantum efficiency measurement device (manufactured by Sumitomo Heavy Industries Mechatronics Co., Ltd.). The efficiency was measured, and the value obtained by dividing the difference in the decay rate of the emission quantum efficiency before and after the laser light irradiation by the elapsed time was determined as the oxygen deterioration rate. Similarly, the value obtained by measuring the emission quantum efficiency in about 5 seconds after laser light irradiation in a nitrogen atmosphere was defined as the thin film emission quantum efficiency. The results are shown in Table 3.
  • poly (ethylenedioxythiophene) / polystyrene sulfonic acid manufactured by Bayer, trade name: Bytron P AI4083
  • the film was formed by spin coating for 60 seconds and dried at 130 ° C. for 10 minutes. Then, about 3 nm of lithium fluoride and then about 80 nm of aluminum were vapor-deposited as a cathode, and the light emitting element was produced. By applying a voltage of 18 V to the obtained device, yellow light emission with a luminance of 42 cd / m 2 and an efficiency of 1.0 cd / A was confirmed.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Inorganic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a membrane using a silver complex which is inexpensive compared to a platinum group metal complex and which exhibits excellent durability in the presence of oxygen when used as a light-emitting material. Specifically provided is a membrane containing a silver complex represented by the following compositional formula (1): (Ag+)(L1)a(L2)b(L3)c(X1)d. (L1 represents a molecule having a total of 3 to 6 of the following atoms and/or ions: at least one phosphorus atom and at least one nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, sulfur atom, arsenic atom, oxygen anion and/or sulfur anion. L2 represents a molecule having a total of two atoms and/or ions selected from among the aforementioned atoms and ions. L3 represents a molecule having one of the aforementioned atoms or ions. X1 represents an anion, a represents a number greater than 0.5, and b, c, and d each independently represent a number greater than or equal to 0.)

Description

銀錯体を含む膜Film containing silver complex
　本発明は、銀錯体を含む膜に関する。 The present invention relates to a film containing a silver complex.
　有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子に用いる発光材料として、イリジウム錯体を代表とする白金族金属を用いた燐光発光錯体が有望視されている。しかし、イリジウムは白金族金属の中でも希少であり、非常に高価である。そのため、コスト面で有利である安価な金属を用いる錯体が、種々検討されている（非特許文献１）。 As a light emitting material used for an organic electroluminescence element, a phosphorescent light emitting complex using a platinum group metal typified by an iridium complex is considered promising. However, iridium is rare among platinum group metals and is very expensive. For this reason, various types of complexes using inexpensive metals that are advantageous in terms of cost have been studied (Non-Patent Document 1).
　有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子に用いる発光材料として、膜の形状で安定に発光することが重要である。 As a light emitting material used for an organic electroluminescence element, it is important to emit light stably in the form of a film.
　しかし、公知の安価な金属の錯体を用いる膜は、発光材料として、酸素存在下における耐久性が十分ではなかった。 However, a film using a known inexpensive metal complex does not have sufficient durability in the presence of oxygen as a luminescent material.
　そこで、本発明は、白金族金属の錯体と比べて安価であり、発光材料として酸素存在下における耐久性に優れた錯体を使用する膜を提供することを目的とする。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a film that is cheaper than a platinum group metal complex and uses a complex excellent in durability in the presence of oxygen as a light emitting material.
　本発明は第一に、下記組成式（１）で表される銀錯体を含む膜を提供する。

（Ａｇ+）（Ｌ1）a（Ｌ2）b（Ｌ3）c（Ｘ1）d　　　　　（１）

（組成式（１）中、Ｌ1は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを有する分子であり、Ｌ1が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は３つ以上６つ以下であり、Ｌ1が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子のうち１つ以上はリン原子である。Ｌ2は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを有する分子であり、Ｌ2が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は２つである。Ｌ3は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを１つ有する分子である。Ｘ1はアニオンである。ａは０．５より大きい数であり、ｂ、ｃ及びｄはそれぞれ独立に０以上の数である。）
　本発明は第二に、前記膜を含む発光素子を提供する。
　本発明は第三に、下記組成式（３）で表される銀錯体を提供する。

（Ａｇ+）（Ｌ4）e（Ｌ5）f（Ｌ6）g（Ｘ2）h　　　　　（３）

（組成式（３）中、Ｌ4は、
　Ａｇ+に配位可能なリン原子を４つ以上６つ以下有する分子であるか、又は、
　Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子として、又は原子及びイオンとして、リン原子を１つ以上と、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる１つ以上とを有し、Ｌ4が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は３つ以上６つ以下である分子である。Ｌ5は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを有する分子であり、Ｌ5が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は２つである。Ｌ6はＡｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを１つ有する分子である。Ｘ2はアニオンである。ｅは０．５より大きい数であり、ｆ、ｇ及びｈはそれぞれ独立に０以上の数である。）
　本発明は第四に、ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つ以上含有し、且つ、窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基、－Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、及び－Ｓ-から選ばれる基を１つ又は２つ含有し、且つ、後述する式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ’）、（Ｂｂ）、（Ｂｃ）又は（Ｂｄ）で示される分子を提供する。 The present invention first provides a film containing a silver complex represented by the following composition formula (1).

(Ag + ) (L 1 ) a (L 2 ) b (L 3 ) c (X 1 ) d (1)

(In the composition formula (1), L 1 is an atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion, and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag +. The total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + of L 1 is 3 or more and 6 or less, and one or more of atoms that can coordinate to Ag + of L 1 are L 2 is a molecule having an atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion, and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag + The total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 2 is 2. L 3 is a phosphorus atom, nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag + Sulfur, arsenic, oxygen Is down and molecules having one atom or ion selected from sulfur anion .X 1 is an anion .a is a number greater than 0.5, b, c and d are the number of independently 0 or is there.)
Secondly, the present invention provides a light emitting device including the film.
Thirdly, the present invention provides a silver complex represented by the following composition formula (3).

(Ag + ) (L 4 ) e (L 5 ) f (L 6 ) g (X 2 ) h (3)

(In composition formula (3), L 4 is
A molecule having 4 to 6 phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + , or
As an atom capable of coordinating to Ag + or as an atom and an ion, it has at least one phosphorus atom and at least one selected from a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion. The total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 4 is 3 or more and 6 or less. L 5 represents, as capable of coordinating atoms or ions Ag +, phosphorus atom, nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, sulfur atom, arsenic atom, a molecule having an atom or ion selected from oxygen anions and sulfur anions, L 5 The total number of atoms and ions capable of coordinating with Ag + is 2. L 6 is a molecule having one atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion, and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag + . X 2 is an anion. e is a number greater than 0.5, and f, g, and h are each independently a number of 0 or more. )
Fourthly, the present invention is a group containing two or more diarylphosphino groups and having one to three hydrogen atoms removed from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —O − , —C (═O) One or two groups selected from O − and —S 2 — , and in the formula (Aa), (Ab), (Ba ′), (Bb), (Bc), or (Bd) described later Provide the molecule shown.
　本発明の膜は、白金族金属の錯体を用いる膜に比べて安価であり、発光材料として酸素存在下における耐久性が高い。即ち、本発明の膜は、持続性に優れた発光特性を発現できる。 The film of the present invention is cheaper than a film using a platinum group metal complex and has high durability in the presence of oxygen as a light-emitting material. That is, the film of the present invention can exhibit light emission characteristics excellent in sustainability.
　以下、本発明を説明する。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be described.
　本明細書において、「置換されていてもよい」とは、その直後に記載された化合物又は基を構成する水素原子が無置換の場合及び水素原子の一部又は全部が置換基によって置換されている場合の双方を含む。置換基によって置換されている場合の置換基としては、特に説明がない限り、例えば、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数１～３０のヒドロカルビル基及び炭素原子数１～３０のヒドロカルビルオキシ基が挙げられ、これらの中でも、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数１～１８のヒドロカルビル基及び炭素原子数１～１８のヒドロカルビルオキシ基が好ましく、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数１～１２のヒドロカルビル基及び炭素原子数１～１２のヒドロカルビルオキシ基がより好ましく、ハロゲン原子及び炭素原子数１～１２のヒドロカルビル基が更に好ましく、ハロゲン原子及び炭素原子数１～６のヒドロカルビル基が特に好ましい。なお、本明細書において、「置換されていてもよい」は、「置換基を有していてもよい」と言い換え得る。 In the present specification, “optionally substituted” means that a hydrogen atom constituting the compound or group described immediately after it is unsubstituted or a part or all of the hydrogen atoms are substituted with a substituent. Including both. Examples of the substituent when substituted by a substituent include, unless otherwise specified, a halogen atom, a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and a hydrocarbyloxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. Among them, a halogen atom, a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms and a hydrocarbyloxy group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms are preferable, and a halogen atom, a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms and a hydrocarbyl having 1 to 12 carbon atoms are preferable. An oxy group is more preferable, a halogen atom and a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms are further preferable, and a halogen atom and a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms are particularly preferable. In the present specification, “which may be substituted” may be rephrased as “which may have a substituent”.
　本明細書において、Ｍｅはメチル基を、ｎ－Ｂｕはｎ－ブチル基を、ｔ－Ｂｕはｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基を、Ｐｈはフェニル基を、ｎ－Ｈｅｘはｎ－ヘキシル基をそれぞれ表す。 In this specification, Me represents a methyl group, n-Bu represents an n-butyl group, t-Bu represents a tert-butyl group, Ph represents a phenyl group, and n-Hex represents an n-hexyl group.
　本明細書において、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ウンデシル基、ドデシル基、ペンタデシル基、オクタデシル基、ドコシル基と記載されている場合、これらは直鎖状でも分岐構造をとっていてもよく、好ましくは直鎖状である。 In this specification, when it is described as propyl group, butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group, decyl group, undecyl group, dodecyl group, pentadecyl group, octadecyl group, docosyl group, These may be linear or have a branched structure, and are preferably linear.
　本発明の膜は、下記組成式（１）で表される銀錯体を含む。

（Ａｇ+）（Ｌ1）a（Ｌ2）b（Ｌ3）c（Ｘ1）d　　　　　（１）

（組成式（１）中、
　Ｌ1は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子／又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを有する分子であり、Ｌ1が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は３つ以上６つ以下であり、Ｌ1が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子のうち１つ以上はリン原子である。Ｌ2はＡｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子及び／又はイオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを有する分子であり、Ｌ2が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は２つである。Ｌ3はＡｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを１つ有する分子である。Ｘ1はアニオンである。ａは０．５より大きい数であり、ｂ、ｃ及びｄはそれぞれ独立に０以上の数である。）
　組成式（１）において、Ｌ1、Ｌ2及びＬ3は分子であるが、それぞれ、電荷を帯びた官能基を有し得る。Ｌ1、Ｌ2及びＬ3はそれぞれ、電荷を帯びた官能基を有する場合、イオンの状態であってもよい。 The film of the present invention contains a silver complex represented by the following composition formula (1).

(Ag + ) (L 1 ) a (L 2 ) b (L 3 ) c (X 1 ) d (1)

(In composition formula (1),
L 1 is a molecule having an atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion, and a sulfur anion as an atom / or ion that can coordinate to Ag + , The total number of atoms and ions that can be coordinated to Ag + in 1 is 3 or more and 6 or less, and one or more of the atoms that can be coordinated to Ag + in L 1 is a phosphorus atom. L 2 represents an atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion and / or an ion or an ion that can coordinate to Ag +. The total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + of L 2 is two. L 3 is a molecule having one atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag + . X 1 is an anion. a is a number greater than 0.5, and b, c, and d are each independently a number of 0 or more. )
In the composition formula (1), L 1 , L 2 and L 3 are molecules, but each may have a charged functional group. When L 1 , L 2 and L 3 each have a charged functional group, they may be in an ionic state.
　組成式（１）においてＬ1は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを有する分子である。
　Ａｇ+に配位可能なリン原子の例としては、３価のリン原子が挙げられる。Ａｇ+に配位可能な窒素原子の例としては、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物中の窒素原子（該窒素原子含有複素環式化合物１つ中に含まれる配位可能な窒素原子は１つと数える。）、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～５つ除いた基中の窒素原子（該窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～５つ除いた基１つ中に含まれる配位可能な窒素原子は１つと数える。）、置換されていてもよいジアルキルアミノ基中の窒素原子、置換されていてもよいジアルキルアミノ基中の窒素原子、置換されていてもよいアリールアミノ基中の窒素原子、置換されていてもよいアルキルアリールアミノ基中の窒素原子、置換されていてもよいイミノ基中の窒素原子、及び、ニトリル基中の窒素原子が挙げられる。配位可能な酸素原子の例としては、水素原子が結合した酸素原子及び第１５族元素が結合した酸素原子が挙げられる。Ａｇ+に配位可能な硫黄原子の例としては、水素原子が結合した硫黄原子、アルキルメルカプト基中の硫黄原子、及び、第１５族元素が結合した硫黄原子が挙げられる。Ａｇ+に配位可能なヒ素原子の例としては、３価のヒ素原子が挙げられる。Ａｇ+に配位可能な酸素アニオンの例としては、Ｏ-が挙げられる。Ａｇ+に配位可能な硫黄アニオンの例としては、Ｓ-が挙げられる。 In the composition formula (1), L 1 has an atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion, and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag +. Is a molecule.
An example of a phosphorus atom that can coordinate to Ag + is a trivalent phosphorus atom. Examples of the nitrogen atom capable of coordinating to Ag + include a nitrogen atom in an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound (coordinable contained in one nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound) A nitrogen atom is counted as one), and a nitrogen atom in a group obtained by removing one to five hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound (the hydrogen atom from the nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound) A coordinating nitrogen atom contained in one group in which 1 to 5 are removed is counted as 1), a nitrogen atom in an optionally substituted dialkylamino group, an optionally substituted dialkylamino A nitrogen atom in the group, a nitrogen atom in the optionally substituted arylamino group, a nitrogen atom in the optionally substituted alkylarylamino group, a nitrogen atom in the optionally substituted imino group, and Nitrogen in nitrile group Child, and the like. Examples of the oxygen atom that can be coordinated include an oxygen atom to which a hydrogen atom is bonded and an oxygen atom to which a Group 15 element is bonded. Examples of the sulfur atom capable of coordinating to Ag + include a sulfur atom to which a hydrogen atom is bonded, a sulfur atom in an alkyl mercapto group, and a sulfur atom to which a Group 15 element is bonded. Examples of arsenic atoms that can coordinate to Ag + include trivalent arsenic atoms. Examples of the oxygen anion capable of coordinating to Ag + include O − . Examples of the sulfur anion capable of coordinating with Ag + include S − .
　Ｌ1が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は３つ以上６つ以下であり、Ｌ1が有する配位可能な原子のうち１つ以上はリン原子である。すなわち、Ｌ1は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子として、リン原子のみを３つ以上６つ以下有する分子であってもよいし、Ａｇ+に配位可能なリン原子を１つ以上と、Ａｇ+に配位可能なリン原子以外の原子（窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、並びにヒ素原子）及びＡｇ+に配位可能なイオン（酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオン）から選ばれる１つ以上を、合計で３つ以上６つ以下有する分子であってもよい。 The total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 1 is 3 or more and 6 or less, and one or more of the atoms that can be coordinated in L 1 is a phosphorus atom. That, L 1 is a as capable of coordinating atoms to Ag +, may be a molecule having only phosphorus atom three or more than six, capable of coordinating phosphorus atom to Ag + 1 or more, One or more selected from atoms other than phosphorus atoms that can coordinate to Ag + (nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, sulfur atoms, and arsenic atoms) and ions that can coordinate to Ag + (oxygen anions and sulfur anions), It may be a molecule having 3 to 6 in total.
　前記Ｌ1の好ましい態様の１つとしては、Ａｇ+に配位可能なリン原子を４つ以上６つ以下有する分子が挙げられる。Ｌ1の別の好ましい態様の１つとしては、Ａｇ+に配位可能なリン原子を１つ以上と、Ａｇ+に配位可能な窒素原子、Ａｇ+に配位可能な酸素原子、Ａｇ+に配位可能な硫黄原子、Ａｇ+に配位可能なヒ素原子、Ａｇ+に配位可能な酸素アニオン及びＡｇ+に配位可能な硫黄アニオンから選ばれる１つ以上とを有し、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの合計が３つ以上６つ以下である分子が挙げられる。上述の好ましい２つの例のうちでは、後者がより好ましい。 One preferred embodiment of L 1 includes a molecule having 4 to 6 phosphorus atoms that can coordinate to Ag + . The one of another preferred embodiment of the L 1, and one or more capable of coordinating phosphorus atom to Ag +, Ag + allows coordinating nitrogen atom, Ag + allows coordinating oxygen atom, Ag + One or more selected from a sulfur atom that can be coordinated to Ag + , an arsenic atom that can coordinate to Ag + , an oxygen anion that can coordinate to Ag + , and a sulfur anion that can coordinate to Ag + , and Ag + And a molecule having a total of 3 or more and 6 or less atoms and ions capable of coordination. Of the two preferred examples described above, the latter is more preferred.
　前記Ｌ1に含まれる、Ａｇ+に配位可能なリン原子の数は、１つ以上であり、好ましくは２つ以上である。Ｌ1が有するＡｇ+に配位可能なリン原子の数が２つ以上である場合、酸素に対する膜の耐久性がより向上するので、該２つ以上のリン原子のいずれにもｓｐ3炭素原子が結合していないことが好ましい。 The number of phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating with Ag + contained in L 1 is 1 or more, preferably 2 or more. When the number of phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating with Ag + in L 1 is 2 or more, the durability of the film against oxygen is further improved, so that any of the two or more phosphorus atoms may contain sp 3 carbon atoms. Are preferably not bound.
　Ｌ1が有しうる、Ａｇ+に配位可能なリン原子、Ａｇ+に配位可能な窒素原子、Ａｇ+に配位可能な酸素原子、Ａｇ+に配位可能な硫黄原子、Ａｇ+に配位可能なヒ素原子、Ａｇ+に配位可能な酸素アニオン及びＡｇ+に配位可能な硫黄アニオンのうち、リン原子以外で好ましいものは酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンであり、Ｌ1は酸素アニオン又は硫黄アニオンを１つ含有することが好ましい。 L 1 may have, Ag + allows coordinating phosphorus atom, Ag + allows coordinating nitrogen atom, capable of coordinating oxygen atom to Ag +, capable of coordinating sulfur atom Ag +, the Ag + coordinatable arsenic atom, among which can coordinate sulfur anions to Ag + allows coordinating oxygen anions and Ag +, preferred examples of the non-phosphorus atom is an oxygen anion and sulfur anion, L 1 is an oxygen anion or It is preferable to contain one sulfur anion.
　Ｌ1が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は、３つ以上６つ以下であり、３つ又は４つであることが好ましい。なお、Ｌ1が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの中には、同じ原子及びイオンが複数個含まれていてもよいし、相異なる原子及びイオンの組み合わせが含まれていてもよい。 The total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 1 is 3 or more and 6 or less, and preferably 3 or 4. The atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 1 may contain a plurality of the same atoms and ions, or a combination of different atoms and ions. .
　Ｌ1はＡｇ+に配位していることが好ましく、単座配位子としてＡｇ+に配位しても、二座配位子としてＡｇ+に配位しても、三座以上の配位子としてＡｇ+に配位してもよいが、二座以上の配位子としてＡｇ+に配位していることがより好ましく、三座以上の配位子としてＡｇ+に配位していることが更に好ましい。 L 1 is preferably coordinated to Ag +, it is coordinated to Ag + as a monodentate ligand, also coordinated to Ag + as a bidentate ligand, tridentate or more coordination it may be coordinated to Ag + as a child, more preferably coordinated to Ag + as a bidentate or higher ligands, coordinated to Ag + as a tridentate or higher-dentate ligand More preferably.
　Ｌ1の炭素原子数は、通常１２～３００であり、好ましくは２２～２５０、より好ましくは２５～２００であり、更に好ましくは２８～１５０であり、特に好ましくは３０～１２５である。 The number of carbon atoms of L 1 is usually 12 to 300, preferably 22 to 250, more preferably 25 to 200, still more preferably 28 to 150, and particularly preferably 30 to 125.
　Ｌ1の例としては、下記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子が挙げられ、錯体の成膜性が優れるので、より好ましくは、下記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）で表される分子であり、更に好ましくは、下記式（Ｂａ）、（Ｂｃ）で表される分子であり、特に好ましくは、下記式（Ｂｃ）で表される分子である。 Examples of L 1 include molecules represented by the following formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt), More preferable are the molecules represented by the following formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), and still more preferable are the following formulas (Ba), (Bc) because the complex film-forming property is excellent. ), Particularly preferably a molecule represented by the following formula (Bc).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
　式（Ａａ）中、Ｑ1Aaは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Aa）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Aa）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Aa）（Ｒ14Aa）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Aa）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Aa）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Aa）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Aa）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Aa、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Aa）2である。Ｒ11Aa、Ｒ12Aa、Ｒ13Aa、Ｒ15Aa、Ｒ16Aa、Ｒ17Aa、Ｒ18Aa及びＲ21Aaはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Aa及びＲ19Aaはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Aa、Ｒ12Aa、Ｒ13Aa、Ｒ14Aa、Ｒ15Aa、Ｒ16Aa、Ｒ17Aa、Ｒ18Aa、Ｒ19Aa及びＲ21Aaはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In formula (Aa), Q 1Aa is -P (R 11Aa ) 2 , -As (R 12Aa ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Aa) (R 14Aa ), - O -, -S -, -S (= O) 2 O -, -C (= O) O -, -P (= O) (R 15Aa) 2, - As (= O) (R 16Aa ) 2, -P (= S) (R 17Aa) 2, -As (= S) (R 18Aa) 2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Aa , or —C (═O) N (R 21Aa ) 2 . R 11Aa, a R 12Aa, R 13Aa, R 15Aa , R 16Aa, R 17Aa, hydrocarbyl groups R 18Aa and R 21Aa each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted C 1 -C also be ~ 50, R 14Aa and R 19Aa are each independently of good 1 to 30 carbon atoms optionally substituted alkyl group, R 11Aa, R 12Aa, R 13Aa, R 14Aa, R 15Aa, R 16Aa, R 17Aa, R 18Aa, R 19Aa and R21Aa may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Aaは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Aa）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Aa）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Aa）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Aa）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Aa）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Aa）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Aa）－である。Ｒ22Aa、Ｒ23Aa、Ｒ25Aa、Ｒ26Aa、Ｒ27Aa及びＲ28Aaはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Aaは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Aa、Ｒ23Aa、Ｒ24Aa、Ｒ25Aa、Ｒ26Aa、Ｒ27Aa及びＲ28Aaはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Aa is —P (R 22Aa ) —, —As (R 23Aa ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Aa ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Aa )-, -As (= O) (R 26Aa )-, -P (= S) (R 27Aa )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Aa )- It is. R 22Aa, R 23Aa, R 25Aa , R 26Aa, R 27Aa and R 28Aa are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted C 1 -C also be ~ 50 hydrocarbyl group, R 24Aa is substituted an alkyl group having a carbon number of 1 ~ 30, R 22Aa, R 23Aa, R 24Aa, R 25Aa, R 26Aa, R 27Aa and R 28Aa may be the same or different.
　Ｒ2Aaは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Aaが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Aaが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Aa is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Aa is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Aa is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ11Aa、Ｒ12Aa、Ｒ13Aa、Ｒ14Aa、Ｒ15Aa、Ｒ16Aa、Ｒ17Aa、Ｒ18Aa、Ｒ19Aa、Ｒ21Aa、Ｒ22Aa、Ｒ23Aa、Ｒ24Aa、Ｒ25Aa、Ｒ26Aa、Ｒ27Aa、Ｒ28Aa、Ｒ2Aa及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Aa, R 12Aa, R 13Aa , R 14Aa, R 15Aa, R 16Aa, R 17Aa, R 18Aa, R 19Aa, R 21Aa, R 22Aa, R 23Aa, R 24Aa, R 25Aa, R 26Aa, R 27Aa, R 28Aa , R 2Aa and two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one or two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring. .
　式（Ａａ）で表される分子の各置換基の好ましい態様としては、
　Ｑ1Aaが、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Aa）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Aa）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-であり、
　Ｑ2Aaが、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Aa）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Aa）－、又は、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基であり、
　Ｒ11Aa、Ｒ12Aa、Ｒ22Aa及びＲ23Aaがそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよいフェニル基であり、
　式（Ａａ）で表される分子は、１つ以上の－Ｐ（Ｒ11Aa）2、又は、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Aa）－を含む態様が挙げられ、中でも、Ｒ2Aaは、直接結合あるいは置換されていてもよい後述する式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基であることが好ましい。 As a preferable aspect of each substituent of the molecule represented by the formula (Aa),
Q 1Aa is, -P (R 11Aa) 2, -As (R 12Aa) 2, 1 one group obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds, -O -, -S - , -S (= O) 2 O -, or, -C (= O) O - is and,
Q 2Aa is —P (R 22Aa ) —, —As (R 23Aa ) —, or a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound,
R 11Aa, a R 12Aa, R 22Aa and R 23Aa is a phenyl group which may be substituted independently,
The molecule represented by the formula (Aa) includes an embodiment containing one or more of —P (R 11Aa ) 2 or —P (R 22Aa ) —, and among them, R 2Aa is directly bonded or substituted. A group represented by any one of formulas r1 to r12, which will be described later, is preferable.
　式（Ａｂ）中、Ｑ1Abは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Ab）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Ab）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Ab）（Ｒ14Ab）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Ab）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Ab）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Ab）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Ab）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Ab、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Ab）2である。Ｒ11Ab、Ｒ12Ab、Ｒ13Ab、Ｒ15Ab、Ｒ16Ab、Ｒ17Ab、Ｒ18Ab及びＲ21Abはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Ab及びＲ19Abはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Ab、Ｒ12Ab、Ｒ13Ab、Ｒ14Ab、Ｒ15Ab、Ｒ16Ab、Ｒ17Ab、Ｒ18Ab、Ｒ19Ab及びＲ21Abはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Ab), Q 1Ab is -P (R 11Ab ) 2 , -As (R 12Ab ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Ab ) (R 14Ab ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Ab ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Ab ) 2, -P (= S) (R 17Ab) 2, -As (= S) (R 18Ab) 2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Ab , or —C (═O) N (R 21Ab ) 2 . R 11Ab, is R 12Ab, R 13Ab, R 15Ab , R 16Ab, R 17Ab, hydrocarbyl groups R 18Ab and R 21Ab each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted C 1 -C also be ~ 50, R 14Ab and R 19ab are each independently of good 1 to 30 carbon atoms optionally substituted alkyl group, R 11Ab, R 12Ab, R 13Ab, R 14Ab, R 15Ab, R 16Ab, R 17Ab, R 18Ab, R 19Ab and R 21Ab may be the same or different.
　Ｒ3Abは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。 R 3Ab is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Ab、Ｒ12Ab、Ｒ13Ab、Ｒ14Ab、Ｒ15Ab、Ｒ16Ab、Ｒ17Ab、Ｒ18Ab、Ｒ19Ab、Ｒ21Ab、Ｒ3Ab及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 Hydrogen atoms from R 11Ab , R 12Ab , R 13Ab , R 14Ab , R 15Ab , R 16Ab , R 17Ab , R 18Ab , R 19Ab , R 21Ab , R 3Ab and optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compounds Two or more groups selected from a group other than one may be optionally combined to form a ring.
　式（Ｂａ）中、Ｑ1Baは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Ba）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Ba）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Ba）（Ｒ14Ba）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Ba）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Ba）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Ba）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Ba）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Ba、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Ba）2である。Ｒ11Ba、Ｒ12Ba、Ｒ13Ba、Ｒ15Ba、Ｒ16Ba、Ｒ17Ba、Ｒ18Ba及びＲ21Baはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Ba及びＲ19Baはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Ba、Ｒ12Ba、Ｒ13Ba、Ｒ14Ba、Ｒ15Ba、Ｒ16Ba、Ｒ17Ba、Ｒ18Ba、Ｒ19Ba及びＲ21Baはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Ba), Q 1Ba represents —P (R 11Ba ) 2 , —As (R 12Ba ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Ba ) (R 14Ba ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Ba ) 2 , − As (= O) (R 16Ba ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Ba ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Ba ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Ba , or —C (═O) N (R 21Ba ) 2 . R 11Ba , R 12Ba , R 13Ba , R 15Ba , R 16Ba , R 17Ba , R 18Ba and R 21Ba are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Ba And R 19Ba each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Ba , R 12Ba , R 13Ba , R 14Ba , R 15Ba , R 16Ba , R 17Ba , R 18Ba , R 19Ba and R 21Ba may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Baは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Ba）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Ba）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Ba）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Ba）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Ba）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Ba）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Ba）－である。Ｒ22Ba、Ｒ23Ba、Ｒ25Ba、Ｒ26Ba、Ｒ27Ba及びＲ28Baはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Baは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Ba、Ｒ23Ba、Ｒ24Ba、Ｒ25Ba、Ｒ26Ba、Ｒ27Ba及びＲ28Baはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Ba is —P (R 22Ba ) —, —As (R 23Ba ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Ba ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Ba )-, -As (= O) (R 26Ba )-, -P (= S) (R 27Ba )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Ba )- It is. R 22Ba , R 23Ba , R 25Ba , R 26Ba , R 27Ba and R 28Ba are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Ba may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Ba , R 23Ba , R 24Ba , R 25Ba , R 26Ba , R 27Ba and R 28Ba may be the same or different.
　Ｒ2Baは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Baが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Baが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Ba is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Ba is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Ba is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ11Ba、Ｒ12Ba、Ｒ13Ba、Ｒ14Ba、Ｒ15Ba、Ｒ16Ba、Ｒ17Ba、Ｒ18Ba、Ｒ19Ba、Ｒ21Ba、Ｒ22Ba、Ｒ23Ba、Ｒ24Ba、Ｒ25Ba、Ｒ26Ba、Ｒ27Ba、Ｒ28Ba、Ｒ2Ba及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Ba , R 12Ba , R 13Ba , R 14Ba , R 15Ba , R 16Ba , R 17Ba , R 18Ba , R 19Ba , R 21Ba , R 22Ba , R 23Ba , R 24Ba , R 25Ba , R 26Ba , R 27Ba , R 28Ba , R 2Ba and two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one or two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring. .
　式（Ｂａ）で表される分子の各置換基の好ましい態様としては、
　Ｑ1Baが、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Ba）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、又は、－Ｓ-であり、
　Ｑ2Baが、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Ba）－又は、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基であり、
　Ｒ11Ba及びＲ22Baがそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよいフェニル基であり、Ｒ2Baが直接結合であるか又は置換されていてもよい、後述する式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基である、
態様が挙げられる。 As a preferable embodiment of each substituent of the molecule represented by the formula (Ba),
Q 1Ba is —P (R 11Ba ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —O − , —C (═O) O − , or -S - and it is,
Q 2Ba is —P (R 22Ba ) — or a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound,
R 11Ba and R 22Ba are each independently a phenyl group which may be substituted, and R 2Ba may be a direct bond or a group represented by any one of formulas r1 to r12 described later Is,
An embodiment is mentioned.
　式（Ｂｂ）中、Ｑ1Bbは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bb）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Bb）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Bb）（Ｒ14Bb）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Bb）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Bb）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Bb）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Bb）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Bb、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Bb）2である。Ｒ11Bb、Ｒ12Bb、Ｒ13Bb、Ｒ15Bb、Ｒ16Bb、Ｒ17Bb、Ｒ18Bb及びＲ21Bbはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Bb及びＲ19Bbはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Bb、Ｒ12Bb、Ｒ13Bb、Ｒ14Bb、Ｒ15Bb、Ｒ16Bb、Ｒ17Bb、Ｒ18Bb、Ｒ19Bb及びＲ21Bbはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Bb), Q 1Bb is -P (R 11Bb ) 2 , -As (R 12Bb ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Bb ) (R 14Bb ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Bb ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Bb ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Bb ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Bb ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Bb , or —C (═O) N (R 21Bb ) 2 . R 11Bb , R 12Bb , R 13Bb , R 15Bb , R 16Bb , R 17Bb , R 18Bb and R 21Bb are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Bb And R 19Bb each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Bb , R 12Bb , R 13Bb , R 14Bb , R 15Bb , R 16Bb , R 17Bb , R 18Bb , R 19Bb and R 21Bb may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Bbは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Bb）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Bb）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Bb）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Bb）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Bb）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Bb）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Bb）－である。Ｒ22Bb、Ｒ23Bb、Ｒ25Bb、Ｒ26Bb、Ｒ27Bb及びＲ28Bbはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Bbは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Bb、Ｒ23Bb、Ｒ24Bb、Ｒ25Bb、Ｒ26Bb、Ｒ27Bb及びＲ28Bbはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Bb is, -P (R 22Bb) -, - As (R 23Bb) -, substituted two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom which containing heterocyclic compounds have been removed group, -N (R 24Bb) - , -P (= O) (R 25Bb )-, -As (= O) (R 26Bb )-, -P (= S) (R 27Bb )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Bb )- It is. R 22Bb , R 23Bb , R 25Bb , R 26Bb , R 27Bb and R 28Bb are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Bb may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Bb , R 23Bb , R 24Bb , R 25Bb , R 26Bb , R 27Bb and R 28Bb may be the same or different.
　Ｒ2Bbは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Bbが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Bbが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Bb is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Bb is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Bb is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ3Bbは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。 R 3Bb is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Bb、Ｒ12Bb、Ｒ13Bb、Ｒ14Bb、Ｒ15Bb、Ｒ16Bb、Ｒ17Bb、Ｒ18Bb、Ｒ19Bb、Ｒ21Bb、Ｒ22Bb、Ｒ23Bb、Ｒ24Bb、Ｒ25Bb、Ｒ26Bb、Ｒ27Bb、Ｒ28Bb、Ｒ2Bb、Ｒ3Bb及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Bb, R 12Bb, R 13Bb , R 14Bb, R 15Bb, R 16Bb, R 17Bb, R 18Bb, R 19Bb, R 21Bb, R 22Bb, R 23Bb, R 24Bb, R 25Bb, R 26Bb, R 27Bb, R 28Bb , R 2Bb, 2 or more groups selected hydrogen atoms from one to 2 group remaining after removing from R 3Bb and optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, forms a ring attached at any May be.
　式（Ｂｃ）中、Ｑ1Bcは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bc）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Bc）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Bc）（Ｒ14Bc）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Bc）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Bc）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Bc）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Bc）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Bc、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Bc）2である。Ｒ11Bc、Ｒ12Bc、Ｒ13Bc、Ｒ15Bc、Ｒ16Bc、Ｒ17Bc、Ｒ18Bc及びＲ21Bcはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Bc及びＲ19Bはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Bc、Ｒ12Bc、Ｒ13Bc、Ｒ14Bc、Ｒ15Bc、Ｒ16Bc、Ｒ17Bc、Ｒ18Bc、Ｒ19Bc及びＲ21Bcはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Bc), Q 1Bc is -P (R 11Bc ) 2 , -As (R 12Bc ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Bc ) (R 14Bc ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Bc ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Bc ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Bc ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Bc ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Bc , or —C (═O) N (R 21Bc ) 2 . R 11Bc , R 12Bc , R 13Bc , R 15Bc , R 16Bc , R 17Bc , R 18Bc and R 21Bc are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Bc And R 19B each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Bc , R 12Bc , R 13Bc , R 14Bc , R 15Bc , R 16Bc , R 17Bc , R 18Bc , R 19Bc and R 21Bc may be the same or different.
　Ｑ3Bcは、Ｐ、Ａｓ、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基、Ｎ、Ｐ（＝Ｏ）、Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）、Ｐ（＝Ｓ）、又は、Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）である。 Q 3Bc is P, As, a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N, P (═O), As (═O), P (═S) Or As (= S).
　Ｒ2Bcは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Bcが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ3Bcが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Bc is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Bc is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 3Bc is In the case of a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ11Bc、Ｒ12Bc、Ｒ13Bc、Ｒ14Bc、Ｒ15Bc、Ｒ16Bc、Ｒ17Bc、Ｒ18Bc、Ｒ19Bc、Ｒ21Bc、Ｒ2Bc及び窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ又は３つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基が任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 Remove one or three hydrogen atoms from R 11Bc , R 12Bc , R 13Bc , R 14Bc , R 15Bc , R 16Bc , R 17Bc , R 18Bc , R 19Bc , R 21Bc , R 2Bc and the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound Two or more groups selected from these groups may be optionally combined to form a ring.
　前記式（Ｂｃ）で表される分子の各置換基の好ましい態様としては、
　Ｑ1Bcが、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bc）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、又は、－Ｓ-であり、
　Ｑ3Bcが、Ｐ又は置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基であり、
　Ｒ11Bcが置換されていてもよいフェニル基であり、
　Ｒ2Bcが直接結合であるか又は置換されていてもよい、後述する式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基である、
態様が挙げられる。 As a preferable aspect of each substituent of the molecule represented by the formula (Bc),
Q 1Bc is —P (R 11Bc ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —O − , —C (═O) O − , or -S - and it is,
Q 3Bc is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from P or an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound;
R 11Bc is an optionally substituted phenyl group,
R 2Bc is a group represented by any one of formulas r1 to r12 described later, which may be a direct bond or may be substituted;
An embodiment is mentioned.
　式（Ｂｄ）中、Ｑ1Bdは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bd）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Bd）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Bd）（Ｒ14Bd）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Bd）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Bd）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Bd）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Bd）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Bd、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Bd）2である。Ｒ11Bd、Ｒ12Bd、Ｒ13Bd、Ｒ15Bd、Ｒ16Bd、Ｒ17Bd、Ｒ18Bd及びＲ21Bdはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Bd及びＲ19Bdはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Bd、Ｒ12Bd、Ｒ13Bd、Ｒ14Bd、Ｒ15Bd、Ｒ16Bd、Ｒ17Bd、Ｒ18Bd、Ｒ19Bd及びＲ21Bdはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Bd), Q 1Bd is -P (R 11Bd ) 2 , -As (R 12Bd ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Bd ) (R 14Bd ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Bd ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Bd ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Bd ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Bd ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Bd , or —C (═O) N (R 21Bd ) 2 . R 11Bd , R 12Bd , R 13Bd , R 15Bd , R 16Bd , R 17Bd , R 18Bd and R 21Bd are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Bd And R 19Bd are each independently an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Bd , R 12Bd , R 13Bd , R 14Bd , R 15Bd , R 16Bd , R 17Bd , R 18Bd , R 19Bd and R 21Bd may be the same or different.
　Ｒ4Bdは炭素原子数７０以下の４価の基である。 R 4Bd is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Bd、Ｒ12Bd、Ｒ13Bd、Ｒ14Bd、Ｒ15Bd、Ｒ16Bd、Ｒ17Bd、Ｒ18Bd、Ｒ19Bd、Ｒ21Bd、Ｒ4Bd及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 Hydrogen atoms from R 11Bd , R 12Bd , R 13Bd , R 14Bd , R 15Bd , R 16Bd , R 17Bd , R 18Bd , R 19Bd , R 21Bd , R 4Bd and an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound Two or more groups selected from a group other than one may be optionally combined to form a ring.
　式（Ｃａ）中、Ｑ1Caは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Ca）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Ca）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Ca）（Ｒ14Ca）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Ca）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Ca）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Ca）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Ca）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Ca、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Ca）2である。Ｒ11Ca、Ｒ12Ca、Ｒ13Ca、Ｒ15Ca、Ｒ16Ca、Ｒ17Ca、Ｒ18Ca及びＲ21Caはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Ca及びＲ19Caはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Ca、Ｒ12Ca、Ｒ13Ca、Ｒ14Ca、Ｒ15Ca、Ｒ16Ca、Ｒ17Ca、Ｒ18Ca、Ｒ19Ca及びＲ21Caはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Ca), Q 1Ca is -P (R 11Ca ) 2 , -As (R 12Ca ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Ca ) (R 14Ca ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Ca ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Ca ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Ca ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Ca ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Ca , or —C (═O) N (R 21Ca ) 2 . R 11Ca , R 12Ca , R 13Ca , R 15Ca , R 16Ca , R 17Ca , R 18Ca and R 21Ca are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Ca And R 19Ca are each independently an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Ca , R 12Ca , R 13Ca , R 14Ca , R 15Ca , R 16Ca , R 17Ca , R 18Ca , R 19Ca and R21Ca may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Caは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Ca）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Ca）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Ca）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Ca）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Ca）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Ca）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Ca）－である。Ｒ22Ca、Ｒ23Ca、Ｒ25Ca、Ｒ26Ca、Ｒ27Ca及びＲ28Caはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Caは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Ca、Ｒ23Ca、Ｒ24Ca、Ｒ25Ca、Ｒ26Ca、Ｒ27Ca及びＲ28Caはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Ca is —P (R 22Ca ) —, —As (R 23Ca ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Ca ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Ca )-, -As (= O) (R 26Ca )-, -P (= S) (R 27Ca )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Ca )- It is. R 22Ca , R 23Ca , R 25Ca , R 26Ca , R 27Ca and R 28Ca are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Ca may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Ca , R 23Ca , R 24Ca , R 25Ca , R 26Ca , R 27Ca and R 28Ca may be the same or different.
　Ｒ2Caは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Caが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Caが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Ca is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Ca is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Ca is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ11Ca、Ｒ12Ca、Ｒ13Ca、Ｒ14Ca、Ｒ15Ca、Ｒ16Ca、Ｒ17Ca、Ｒ18Ca、Ｒ19Ca、Ｒ21Ca、Ｒ22Ca、Ｒ23Ca、Ｒ24Ca、Ｒ25Ca、Ｒ26Ca、Ｒ27Ca、Ｒ28Ca、Ｒ2Ca及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R11Ca , R12Ca , R13Ca , R14Ca , R15Ca , R16Ca , R17Ca , R18Ca , R19Ca , R21Ca , R22Ca , R23Ca , R24Ca , R25Ca , R26Ca , R27Ca , R28Ca , R 2Ca and two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one or two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring. .
　式（Ｃｂ）中、Ｑ1Cbは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Cb）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Cb）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Cb）（Ｒ14Cb）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Cb）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Cb）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Cb）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Cb）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Cb、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Cb）2である。Ｒ11Cb、Ｒ12Cb、Ｒ13Cb、Ｒ15Cb、Ｒ16Cb、Ｒ17Cb、Ｒ18Cb及びＲ21Cbはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Cb及びＲ19Cbはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Cb、Ｒ12Cb、Ｒ13Cb、Ｒ14Cb、Ｒ15Cb、Ｒ16Cb、Ｒ17Cb、Ｒ18Cb、Ｒ19Cb及びＲ21Cbはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Cb), Q 1Cb is -P (R 11Cb ) 2 , -As (R 12Cb ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Cb ) (R 14Cb ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Cb ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Cb ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Cb ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Cb ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Cb , or —C (═O) N (R 21Cb ) 2 . R 11Cb , R 12Cb , R 13Cb , R 15Cb , R 16Cb , R 17Cb , R 18Cb and R 21Cb are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Cb And R 19Cb each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Cb , R 12Cb , R 13Cb , R 14Cb , R 15Cb , R 16Cb , R 17Cb , R 18Cb , R 19Cb and R 21Cb may be the same or different from each other.
　Ｑ2Cbは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Cb）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Cb）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Cb）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Cb）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Cb）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Cb）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Cb）－である。Ｒ22Cb、Ｒ23Cb、Ｒ25Cb、Ｒ26Cb、Ｒ27Cb及びＲ28Cbはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Cbは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Cb、Ｒ23Cb、Ｒ24Cb、Ｒ25Cb、Ｒ26Cb、Ｒ27Cb及びＲ28Cbはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Cb is —P (R 22Cb ) —, —As (R 23Cb ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Cb ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Cb )-, -As (= O) (R 26Cb )-, -P (= S) (R 27Cb )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Cb )- It is. R 22Cb , R 23Cb , R 25Cb , R 26Cb , R 27Cb and R 28Cb are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Cb may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Cb , R 23Cb , R 24Cb , R 25Cb , R 26Cb , R 27Cb and R 28Cb may be the same or different.
　Ｒ2Cbは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Cbが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Cbが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Cb is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Cb is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Cb is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ3Cbは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。 R 3Cb is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Cb、Ｒ12Cb、Ｒ13Cb、Ｒ14Cb、Ｒ15Cb、Ｒ16Cb、Ｒ17Cb、Ｒ18Cb、Ｒ19Cb、Ｒ21Cb、Ｒ22Cb、Ｒ23Cb、Ｒ24Cb、Ｒ25Cb、Ｒ26Cb、Ｒ27Cb、Ｒ28Cb、Ｒ2Cb、Ｒ3Cb及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Cb, R 12Cb, R 13Cb , R 14Cb, R 15Cb, R 16Cb, R 17Cb, R 18Cb, R 19Cb, R 21Cb, R 22Cb, R 23Cb, R 24Cb, R 25Cb, R 26Cb, R 27Cb, R 28Cb , R 2Cb , R 3Cb, and optionally substituted two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one or two hydrogen atoms from a heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom to form a ring May be.
　式（Ｃｃ）中、Ｑ1Ccは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Cc）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Cc）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Cc）（Ｒ14Cc）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Cc）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Cc）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Cc）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Cc）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Cc、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Cc）2である。Ｒ11Cc、Ｒ12Cc、Ｒ13Cc、Ｒ15Cc、Ｒ16Cc、Ｒ17Cc、Ｒ18Cc及びＲ21Ccはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Cc及びＲ19Ccはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Cc、Ｒ12Cc、Ｒ13Cc、Ｒ14Cc、Ｒ15Cc、Ｒ16Cc、Ｒ17Cc、Ｒ18Cc、Ｒ19Cc及びＲ21Ccはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In formula (Cc), Q 1Cc is —P (R 11Cc ) 2 , —As (R 12Cc ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Cc ) (R 14Cc ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Cc ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Cc ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Cc ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Cc ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Cc , or —C (═O) N (R 21Cc ) 2 . R 11Cc , R 12Cc , R 13Cc , R 15Cc , R 16Cc , R 17Cc , R 18Cc and R 21Cc are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Cc And R 19Cc each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Cc , R 12Cc , R 13Cc , R 14Cc , R 15Cc , R 16Cc , R 17Cc , R 18Cc , R 19Cc and R 21Cc may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Ccは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Cc）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Cc）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Cc）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Cc）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Cc）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Cc）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Cc）－である。Ｒ22Cc、Ｒ23Cc、Ｒ25Cc、Ｒ26Cc、Ｒ27Cc及びＲ28Ccはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Ccは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Cc、Ｒ23Cc、Ｒ24Cc、Ｒ25Cc、Ｒ26Cc、Ｒ27Cc及びＲ28Ccはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Cc is —P (R 22Cc ) —, —As (R 23Cc ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Cc ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Cc )-, -As (= O) (R 26Cc )-, -P (= S) (R 27Cc )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Cc )- It is. R 22Cc , R 23Cc , R 25Cc , R 26Cc , R 27Cc and R 28Cc are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Cc may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Cc , R 23Cc , R 24Cc , R 25Cc , R 26Cc , R 27Cc and R 28Cc may be the same or different.
　Ｑ3Ccは、Ｐ、Ａｓ、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基、Ｎ、Ｐ（＝Ｏ）、Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）、Ｐ（＝Ｓ）、又は、Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）である。 Q 3Cc is P, As, a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N, P (═O), As (═O), P (═S) Or As (= S).
　Ｒ2Ccは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Ccが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、結合したＱ2Ccが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ3Ccが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Cc is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that when the bonded Q 1Cc is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, the bonded Q 2Cc is a nitrogen atom. When the group is a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the containing heterocyclic compound, or when the bonded Q 3Cc is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used. .
　Ｒ11Cc、Ｒ12Cc、Ｒ13Cc、Ｒ14Cc、Ｒ15Cc、Ｒ16Cc、Ｒ17Cc、Ｒ18Cc、Ｒ19Cc、Ｒ21Cc、Ｒ22Cc、Ｒ23Cc、Ｒ24Cc、Ｒ25Cc、Ｒ26Cc、Ｒ27Cc、Ｒ28Cc、Ｒ2Cc及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１～３つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Cc, R 12Cc, R 13Cc , R 14Cc, R 15Cc, R 16Cc, R 17Cc, R 18Cc, R 19Cc, R 21Cc, R 22Cc, R 23Cc, R 24Cc, R 25Cc, R 26Cc, R 27Cc, R 28Cc , R 2Cc and two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing 1 to 3 hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring.
　式（Ｃｄ）中、Ｑ1Cdは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Cd）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Cd）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Cd）（Ｒ14Cd）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Cd）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Cd）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Cd）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Cd）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Cd、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Cd）2である。Ｒ11Cd、Ｒ12Cd、Ｒ13Cd、Ｒ15Cd、Ｒ16Cd、Ｒ17Cd、Ｒ18Cd及びＲ21Cdはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Cd及びＲ19Cdはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Cd、Ｒ12Cd、Ｒ13Cd、Ｒ14Cd、Ｒ15Cd、Ｒ16Cd、Ｒ17Cd、Ｒ18Cd、Ｒ19Cd及びＲ21Cdはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In formula (Cd), Q 1Cd is -P (R 11Cd ) 2 , -As (R 12Cd ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Cd ) (R 14Cd ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Cd ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Cd ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Cd ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Cd ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Cd , or —C (═O) N (R 21Cd ) 2 . R 11Cd , R 12Cd , R 13Cd , R 15Cd , R 16Cd , R 17Cd , R 18Cd and R 21Cd are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Cd And R 19Cd are each independently an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Cd , R 12Cd , R 13Cd , R 14Cd , R 15Cd , R 16Cd , R 17Cd , R 18Cd , R 19Cd and R 21Cd may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Cdは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Cd）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Cd）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Cd）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Cd）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Cd）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Cd）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Cd）－である。Ｒ22Cd、Ｒ23Cd、Ｒ25Cd、Ｒ26Cd、Ｒ27Cd及びＲ28Cdはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Cdは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Cd、Ｒ23Cd、Ｒ24Cd、Ｒ25Cd、Ｒ26Cd、Ｒ27Cd及びＲ28Cdはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Cd is —P (R 22Cd ) —, —As (R 23Cd ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Cd ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Cd )-, -As (= O) (R 26Cd )-, -P (= S) (R 27Cd )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Cd )- It is. R 22Cd , R 23Cd , R 25Cd , R 26Cd , R 27Cd and R 28Cd are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Cd may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Cd , R 23Cd , R 24Cd , R 25Cd , R 26Cd , R 27Cd and R 28Cd may be the same or different.
　Ｒ2Cdは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Cdが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Cdが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Cd is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Cd is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Cd is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ3Cdは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。 R 3Cd is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Cd、Ｒ12Cd、Ｒ13Cd、Ｒ14Cd、Ｒ15Cd、Ｒ16Cd、Ｒ17Cd、Ｒ18Cd、Ｒ19Cd、Ｒ21Cd、Ｒ22Cd、Ｒ23Cd、Ｒ24Cd、Ｒ25Cd、Ｒ26Cd、Ｒ27Cd、Ｒ28Cd、Ｒ2Cd、Ｒ3Cd及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R11Cd , R12Cd , R13Cd , R14Cd , R15Cd , R16Cd , R17Cd , R18Cd , R19Cd , R21Cd , R22Cd , R23Cd , R24Cd , R25Cd , R26Cd , R27Cd , R27Cd , R 2Cd , R 3Cd and two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one or two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom to form a ring. May be.
　式（Ｃｅ）中、Ｑ1Ceは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Ce）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Ce）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Ce）（Ｒ14Ce）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Ce）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Ce）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Ce）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Ce）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Ce、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Ce）2である。Ｒ11Ce、Ｒ12Ce、Ｒ13Ce、Ｒ15Ce、Ｒ16Ce、Ｒ17Ce、Ｒ18Ce及びＲ21Ceはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Ce及びＲ19Ceはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Ce、Ｒ12Ce、Ｒ13Ce、Ｒ14Ce、Ｒ15Ce、Ｒ16Ce、Ｒ17Ce、Ｒ18Ce、Ｒ19Ce及びＲ21Ceはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Ce), Q 1Ce is -P (R 11Ce ) 2 , -As (R 12Ce ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Ce ) (R 14Ce ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Ce ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Ce ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Ce ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Ce ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Ce , or —C (═O) N (R 21Ce ) 2 . R 11Ce , R 12Ce , R 13Ce , R 15Ce , R 16Ce , R 17Ce , R 18Ce and R 21Ce are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Ce And R 19Ce are each independently an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, R 11Ce , R 12Ce , R 13Ce , R 14Ce , R 15Ce , R 16Ce , R 17Ce , R 18Ce , R 19Ce and R 21Ce may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Ceは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Ce）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Ce）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Ce）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Ce）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Ce）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Ce）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Ce）－である。Ｒ22Ce、Ｒ23Ce、Ｒ25Ce、Ｒ26Ce、Ｒ27Ce及びＲ28Ceはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Ceは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Ce、Ｒ23Ce、Ｒ24Ce、Ｒ25Ce、Ｒ26Ce、Ｒ27Ce及びＲ28Ceはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Ce is, -P (R 22Ce) -, - As (R 23Ce) -, substituted two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom which containing heterocyclic compounds have been removed group, -N (R 24Ce) - , -P (= O) ( R25Ce )-, -As (= O) ( R26Ce )-, -P (= S) ( R27Ce )-, or -As (= S) ( R28Ce )- It is. R 22Ce , R 23Ce , R 25Ce , R 26Ce , R 27Ce and R 28Ce are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Ce may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Ce , R 23Ce , R 24Ce , R 25Ce , R 26Ce , R 27Ce and R 28Ce may be the same or different.
　Ｒ2Ceは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Ceが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Ceが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Ce is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Ce is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Ce is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ4Ceは炭素原子数７０以下の４価の基である。 R 4Ce is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Ce、Ｒ12Ce、Ｒ13Ce、Ｒ14Ce、Ｒ15Ce、Ｒ16Ce、Ｒ17Ce、Ｒ18Ce、Ｒ19Ce、Ｒ21Ce、Ｒ22Ce、Ｒ23Ce、Ｒ24Ce、Ｒ25Ce、Ｒ26Ce、Ｒ27Ce、Ｒ28Ce、Ｒ2Ce、Ｒ4Ce及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R11Ce , R12Ce , R13Ce , R14Ce , R15Ce , R16Ce , R17Ce , R18Ce , R19Ce , R21Ce , R22Ce , R23Ce , R24Ce , R25Ce , R26Ce , R27Ce , R27Ce , R 2Ce, 2 or more groups selected hydrogen atoms from one to 2 group remaining after removing from R 4ce and optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, forms a ring attached at any May be.
　式（Ｃｆ）中、Ｑ1Cfは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Cf）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Cf）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Cf）（Ｒ14Cf）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Cf）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Cf）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Cf）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Cf）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Cf、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Cf）2である。Ｒ11Cf、Ｒ12Cf、Ｒ13Cf、Ｒ15Cf、Ｒ16Cf、Ｒ17Cf、Ｒ18Cf及びＲ21Cfはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Cf及びＲ19Cfはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Cf、Ｒ12Cf、Ｒ13Cf、Ｒ14Cf、Ｒ15Cf、Ｒ16Cf、Ｒ17Cf、Ｒ18Cf、Ｒ19Cf及びＲ21Cfはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Cf), Q 1Cf is -P (R 11Cf ) 2 , -As (R 12Cf ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Cf ) (R 14Cf ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Cf ) 2 , − As (= O) (R 16Cf ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Cf ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Cf ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Cf , or —C (═O) N (R 21Cf ) 2 . R 11Cf , R 12Cf , R 13Cf , R 15Cf , R 16Cf , R 17Cf , R 18Cf and R 21Cf are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Cf And R 19Cf each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Cf , R 12Cf , R 13Cf , R 14Cf , R 15Cf , R 16Cf , R 17Cf , R 18Cf , R 19Cf and R21Cf may be the same or different.
　Ｑ3Cfは、Ｐ、Ａｓ、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基、Ｎ、Ｐ（＝Ｏ）、Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）、Ｐ（＝Ｓ）、又は、Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）である。 Q 3Cf is P, As, a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N, P (═O), As (═O), P (═S) Or As (= S).
　Ｒ2Cfは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Cfが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ3Cfが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Cf is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Cf is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 3Cf is In the case of a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ3Cfは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。 R 3Cf is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Cf、Ｒ12Cf、Ｒ13Cf、Ｒ14Cf、Ｒ15Cf、Ｒ16Cf、Ｒ17Cf、Ｒ18Cf、Ｒ19Cf、Ｒ21Cf、Ｒ2Cf、Ｒ3Cf及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ又は３つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Cf , R 12Cf , R 13Cf , R 14Cf , R 15Cf , R 16Cf , R 17Cf , R 18Cf , R 19Cf , R 21Cf , R 2Cf , R 3Cf and an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound Two or more groups selected from groups in which one or three hydrogen atoms have been removed may be optionally combined to form a ring.
　式（Ｃｇ）中、Ｑ1Cgは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Cg）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Cg）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Cg）（Ｒ14Cg）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Cg）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Cg）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Cg）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Cg）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Cg、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Cg）2である。Ｒ11Cg、Ｒ12Cg、Ｒ13Cg、Ｒ15Cg、Ｒ16Cg、Ｒ17Cg、Ｒ18Cg及びＲ21Cgはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Cg及びＲ19Cgはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Cg、Ｒ12Cg、Ｒ13Cg、Ｒ14Cg、Ｒ15Cg、Ｒ16Cg、Ｒ17Cg、Ｒ18Cg、Ｒ19Cg及びＲ21Cgはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Cg), Q 1Cg is -P (R 11Cg ) 2 , -As (R 12Cg ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Cg ) (R 14Cg ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Cg ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Cg ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Cg ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Cg ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Cg , or —C (═O) N (R 21Cg ) 2 . R 11Cg , R 12Cg , R 13Cg , R 15Cg , R 16Cg , R 17Cg , R 18Cg and R 21Cg are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Cg And R 19Cg each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Cg , R 12Cg , R 13Cg , R 14Cg , R 15Cg , R 16Cg , R 17Cg , R 18Cg , R 19Cg and R 21Cg may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Cgは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Cg）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Cg）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Cg）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Cg）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Cg）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Cg）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Cg）－である。Ｒ22Cg、Ｒ23Cg、Ｒ25Cg、Ｒ26Cg、Ｒ27Cg及びＲ28Cgはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Cgは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Cg、Ｒ23Cg、Ｒ24Cg、Ｒ25Cg、Ｒ26Cg、Ｒ27Cg及びＲ28Cgはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Cg is —P (R 22Cg ) —, —As (R 23Cg ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Cg ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Cg )-, -As (= O) (R 26Cg )-, -P (= S) (R 27Cg )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Cg )- It is. R 22Cg , R 23Cg , R 25Cg , R 26Cg , R 27Cg and R 28Cg are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Cg may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Cg , R 23Cg , R 24Cg , R 25Cg , R 26Cg , R 27Cg and R 28Cg may be the same or different.
　Ｒ3Cgは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。 R 3Cg is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Cg、Ｒ12Cg、Ｒ13Cg、Ｒ14Cg、Ｒ15Cg、Ｒ16Cg、Ｒ17Cg、Ｒ18Cg、Ｒ19Cg、Ｒ21Cg、Ｒ22Cg、Ｒ23Cg、Ｒ24Cg、Ｒ25Cg、Ｒ26Cg、Ｒ27Cg、Ｒ28Cg、Ｒ3Cg及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Cg, R 12Cg, R 13Cg , R 14Cg, R 15Cg, R 16Cg, R 17Cg, R 18Cg, R 19Cg, R 21Cg, R 22Cg, R 23Cg, R 24Cg, R 25Cg, R 26Cg, R 27Cg, R 28Cg , R 3Cg and two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one or two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring. .
　式（Ｃｈ）中、Ｑ1Chは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Ch）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Ch）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Ch）（Ｒ14Ch）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Ch）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Ch）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Ch）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Ch）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Ch、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Ch）2である。Ｒ11Ch、Ｒ12Ch、Ｒ13Ch、Ｒ15Ch、Ｒ16Ch、Ｒ17Ch、Ｒ18Ch及びＲ21Chはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Ch及びＲ19Chはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Ch、Ｒ12Ch、Ｒ13Ch、Ｒ14Ch、Ｒ15Ch、Ｒ16Ch、Ｒ17Ch、Ｒ18Ch、Ｒ19Ch及びＲ21Chはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Ch), Q 1Ch represents —P (R 11Ch ) 2 , —As (R 12Ch ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Ch ) (R 14Ch ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Ch ) 2 , − As (= O) (R 16Ch ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Ch ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Ch ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Ch , or —C (═O) N (R 21Ch ) 2 . R 11ch, is R 12Ch, R 13Ch, R 15Ch , R 16Ch, R 17Ch, hydrocarbyl groups R 18Ch and R 21ch each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted C 1 -C also be ~ 50, R 14Ch And R 19Ch are each independently an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Ch , R 12Ch , R 13Ch , R 14Ch , R 15Ch , R 16Ch , R 17Ch , R 18Ch , R 19Ch and R 21ch may be the same or different, respectively.
　Ｑ4Chは、Ａｇ+に配位可能な、Ｐ、窒素原子含有複素環式化合物中のＮ、Ｏ-、又は、Ｓ-のうちいずれか１つを含む炭素原子数７０以下の４価の基である。 Q 4Ch is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms that can coordinate to Ag + and includes any one of P, N, O − or S − in a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. It is.
　Ｒ2Chは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Chが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Ch is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Ch is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, and may be a direct bond.
　Ｒ11Ch、Ｒ12Ch、Ｒ13Ch、Ｒ14Ch、Ｒ15Ch、Ｒ16Ch、Ｒ17Ch、Ｒ18Ch、Ｒ19Ch、Ｒ21Ch、Ｒ2Ch、Ｑ4Ch及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Ch, R 12Ch, R 13Ch , R 14Ch, R 15Ch, R 16Ch, R 17Ch, R 18Ch, R 19Ch, R 21Ch, from R 2Ch, Q 4Ch and optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound Two or more groups selected from a group excluding one hydrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring.
　式（Ｃｉ）中、Ｑ1Ciは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Ci）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Ci）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Ci）（Ｒ14Ci）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Ci）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Ci）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Ci）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Ci）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Ci、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Ci）2である。Ｒ11Ci、Ｒ12Ci、Ｒ13Ci、Ｒ15Ci、Ｒ16Ci、Ｒ17Ci、Ｒ18Ci及びＲ21Ciはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Ci及びＲ19Ciは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Ci、Ｒ12Ci、Ｒ13Ci、Ｒ14Ci、Ｒ15Ci、Ｒ16Ci、Ｒ17Ci、Ｒ18Ci、Ｒ19Ci及びＲ21Ciはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Ci), Q 1Ci represents —P (R 11Ci ) 2 , —As (R 12Ci ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Ci ) (R 14Ci ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Ci ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Ci ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Ci ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Ci ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Ci , or —C (═O) N (R 21Ci ) 2 . R 11Ci , R 12Ci , R 13Ci , R 15Ci , R 16Ci , R 17Ci , R 18Ci and R 21Ci are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Ci And R 19Ci is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, R 11Ci , R 12Ci , R 13Ci , R 14Ci , R 15Ci , R 16Ci , R 17Ci , R 18Ci , R 19Ci and R Each 21Ci may be the same or different.
　Ｒ5Ciは炭素原子数１００以下の５価の基である。 R 5Ci is a pentavalent group having 100 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Ci、Ｒ12Ci、Ｒ13Ci、Ｒ14Ci、Ｒ15Ci、Ｒ16Ci、Ｒ17Ci、Ｒ18Ci、Ｒ19Ci、Ｒ21Ci、Ｒ5Ci及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 Hydrogen atoms from R 11Ci , R 12Ci , R 13Ci , R 14Ci , R 15Ci , R 16Ci , R 17Ci , R 18Ci , R 19Ci , R 21Ci , R 5Ci and optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compounds Two or more groups selected from a group other than one may be optionally combined to form a ring.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
　式（Ｄａ）中、Ｑ1Daは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Da）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Da）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Da）（Ｒ14Da）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Da）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Da）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Da）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Da）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Da、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Da）2である。Ｒ11Da、Ｒ12Da、Ｒ13Da、Ｒ15Da、Ｒ16Da、Ｒ17Da、Ｒ18Da及びＲ21Daはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Da及びＲ19Daはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Da、Ｒ12Da、Ｒ13Da、Ｒ14Da、Ｒ15Da、Ｒ16Da、Ｒ17Da、Ｒ18Da、Ｒ20Da及びＲ21Daはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Da), Q 1Da is -P (R 11Da ) 2 , -As (R 12Da ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Da ) (R 14Da ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Da ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Da ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Da ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Da ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Da , or —C (═O) N (R 21Da ) 2 . R 11Da , R 12Da , R 13Da , R 15Da , R 16Da , R 17Da , R 18Da and R 21Da are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Da And R 19Da each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Da , R 12Da , R 13Da , R 14Da , R 15Da , R 16Da , R 17Da , R 18Da , R 20Da and R 21Da may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Daは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Da）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Da）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Da）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Da）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Da）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Da）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Da）－である。Ｒ22Da、Ｒ23Da、Ｒ25Da、Ｒ26Da、Ｒ27Da及びＲ28Daはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Daは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Da、Ｒ23Da、Ｒ24Da、Ｒ25Da、Ｒ26Da、Ｒ27Da及びＲ28Daはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Da is —P (R 22Da ) —, —As (R 23Da ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Da ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Da )-, -As (= O) (R 26Da )-, -P (= S) (R 27Da )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Da )- It is. R 22Da , R 23Da , R 25Da , R 26Da , R 27Da and R 28Da are each independently a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may be substituted, and R 24Da may be substituted It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Da , R 23Da , R 24Da , R 25Da , R 26Da , R 27Da and R 28Da may be the same or different.
　Ｒ2Daは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Daが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Daが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Da is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Da is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Da is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ11Da、Ｒ12Da、Ｒ13Da、Ｒ14Da、Ｒ15Da、Ｒ16Da、Ｒ17Da、Ｒ18Da、Ｒ19Da、Ｒ21Da、Ｒ22Da、Ｒ23Da、Ｒ24Da、Ｒ25Da、Ｒ26Da、Ｒ27Da、Ｒ28Da、Ｒ2Da及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Da, R 12Da, R 13Da , R 14Da, R 15Da, R 16Da, R 17Da, R 18Da, R 19Da, R 21Da, R 22Da, R 23Da, R 24Da, R 25Da, R 26Da, R 27Da, R 28Da , R 2Da and two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one or two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring. .
　式（Ｄｂ）中、Ｑ1Dbは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Db）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Db）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Db）（Ｒ14Db）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Db）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Db）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Db）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Db）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Db、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Db）2である。Ｒ11Db、Ｒ12Db、Ｒ13Db、Ｒ15Db、Ｒ16Db、Ｒ17Db、Ｒ18Db及びＲ21Dbはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Db及びＲ19Dbはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Db、Ｒ12Db、Ｒ13Db、Ｒ14Db、Ｒ15Db、Ｒ16Db、Ｒ17Db、Ｒ18Db、Ｒ19Db及びＲ21Dbはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Wherein (Db), Q 1Db is, -P (R 11Db) 2, -As (R 12Db) 2, 1 one group obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds, - N (R 13Db ) (R 14Db ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Db ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Db ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Db ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Db ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Db , or —C (═O) N (R 21Db ) 2 . R 11Db, a R 12Db, R 13Db, R 15Db , R 16Db, R 17Db, hydrocarbyl groups R 18dB and R 21Db are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted C 1 -C also be ~ 50, R 14Db and R 19 dB are each independently of good 1 to 30 carbon atoms optionally substituted alkyl group, R 11Db, R 12Db, R 13Db, R 14Db, R 15Db, R 16Db, R 17Db, R 18Db, R 19Db and R 21Db may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Dbは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Db）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Db）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Db）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Db）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Db）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Db）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Db）－である。Ｒ22Db、Ｒ23Db、Ｒ25Db、Ｒ26Db、Ｒ27Db及びＲ28Dbはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Dbは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Db、Ｒ23Db、Ｒ24Db、Ｒ25Db、Ｒ26Db、Ｒ27Db及びＲ28Dbはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Db is —P (R 22Db ) —, —As (R 23Db ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Db ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Db )-, -As (= O) (R 26Db )-, -P (= S) (R 27Db )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Db )- It is. R 22Db , R 23Db , R 25Db , R 26Db , R 27Db and R 28Db are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Db may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Db , R 23Db , R 24Db , R 25Db , R 26Db , R 27Db and R 28Db may be the same or different.
　Ｒ2Dbは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Dbが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Dbが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Db is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Db is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Db is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ3Dbは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。 R 3Db is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Db、Ｒ12Db、Ｒ13Db、Ｒ14Db、Ｒ15Db、Ｒ16Db、Ｒ17Db、Ｒ18Db、Ｒ19Db、Ｒ21Db、Ｒ22Db、Ｒ23Db、Ｒ24Db、Ｒ25Db、Ｒ26Db、Ｒ27Db、Ｒ28Db、Ｒ2Db、Ｒ3Db及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Db, R 12Db, R 13Db , R 14Db, R 15Db, R 16Db, R 17Db, R 18Db, R 19Db, R 21Db, R 22Db, R 23Db, R 24Db, R 25Db, R 26Db, R 27Db, R 28Db , R 2Db , R 3Db and two or more groups selected from a group in which one or two hydrogen atoms have been removed from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom, are optionally bonded to form a ring. May be.
　式（Ｄｃ）中、Ｑ1Dcは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Dc）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Dc）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Dc）（Ｒ14Dc）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Dc）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Dc）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Dc）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Dc）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Dc、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Dc）2である。Ｒ11Dc、Ｒ12Dc、Ｒ13Dc、Ｒ15Dc、Ｒ16Dc、Ｒ17Dc、Ｒ18Dc及びＲ21Dcはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Dc及びＲ19Dcはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Dc、Ｒ12Dc、Ｒ13Dc、Ｒ14Dc、Ｒ15Dc、Ｒ16Dc、Ｒ17Dc、Ｒ18Dc、Ｒ19Dc及びＲ21Dcはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Dc), Q 1Dc is -P (R 11Dc ) 2 , -As (R 12Dc ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Dc ) (R 14Dc ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Dc ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Dc ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Dc ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Dc ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Dc , or —C (═O) N (R 21Dc ) 2 . R 11Dc , R 12Dc , R 13Dc , R 15Dc , R 16Dc , R 17Dc , R 18Dc and R 21Dc are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, R 14Dc And R 19Dc each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Dc , R 12Dc , R 13Dc , R 14Dc , R 15Dc , R 16Dc , R 17Dc , R 18Dc , R 19Dc and R 21Dc may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Dcは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Dc）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Dc）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Dc）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Dc）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Dc）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Dc）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Dc）－である。Ｒ22Dc、Ｒ23Dc、Ｒ25Dc、Ｒ26Dc、Ｒ27Dc及びＲ28Dcはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Dcは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Dc、Ｒ23Dc、Ｒ24Dc、Ｒ25Dc、Ｒ26Dc、Ｒ27Dc及びＲ28Dcはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Dc is —P (R 22Dc ) —, —As (R 23Dc ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Dc ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Dc )-, -As (= O) (R 26Dc )-, -P (= S) (R 27Dc )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Dc )- It is. R 22Dc , R 23Dc , R 25Dc , R 26Dc , R 27Dc and R 28Dc are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Dc may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Dc , R 23Dc , R 24Dc , R 25Dc , R 26Dc , R 27Dc and R 28Dc may be the same or different.
　Ｑ3Dcは、Ｐ、Ａｓ、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基、Ｎ、Ｐ（＝Ｏ）、Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）、Ｐ（＝Ｓ）、又は、Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）である。 Q 3Dc is P, As, a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N, P (═O), As (═O), P (═S) Or As (= S).
　Ｒ2Dcは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Dcが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、結合したＱ2Dcが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ3Dcが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Dc is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that when bonded Q 1Dc is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, the bonded Q 2Dc is a nitrogen atom. When the group is a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the containing heterocyclic compound, or when the bonded Q 3Dc is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used. .
　Ｒ11Dc、Ｒ12Dc、Ｒ13Dc、Ｒ14Dc、Ｒ15Dc、Ｒ16Dc、Ｒ17Dc、Ｒ18Dc、Ｒ19Dc、Ｒ21Dc、Ｒ22Dc、Ｒ23Dc、Ｒ24Dc、Ｒ25Dc、Ｒ26Dc、Ｒ27Dc、Ｒ28Dc、Ｒ2Dc及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Dc, R 12Dc, R 13Dc , R 14Dc, R 15Dc, R 16Dc, R 17Dc, R 18Dc, R 19Dc, R 21Dc, R 22Dc, R 23Dc, R 24Dc, R 25Dc, R 26Dc, R 27Dc, R 28Dc , R 2Dc and two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring. .
　式（Ｄｄ）中、Ｑ1Ddは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Dd）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Dd）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Dd）（Ｒ14Dd）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Dd）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Dd）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Dd）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Dd）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Dd、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Dd）2である。Ｒ11Dd、Ｒ12Dd、Ｒ13Dd、Ｒ15Dd、Ｒ16Dd、Ｒ17Dd、Ｒ18Dd及びＲ21Ddはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Dd及びＲ19Ddはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Dd、Ｒ12Dd、Ｒ13Dd、Ｒ14Dd、Ｒ15Dd、Ｒ16Dd、Ｒ17Dd、Ｒ18Dd、Ｒ19Dd及びＲ21Ddはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Wherein (Dd), Q 1Dd is, -P (R 11Dd) 2, -As (R 12Dd) 2, 1 one group obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds, - N (R 13Dd ) (R 14Dd ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Dd ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Dd ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Dd ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Dd ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Dd , or —C (═O) N (R 21Dd ) 2 . R 11Dd , R 12Dd , R 13Dd , R 15Dd , R 16Dd , R 17Dd , R 18Dd and R 21Dd are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, R 14Dd And R 19Dd each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Dd , R 12Dd , R 13Dd , R 14Dd , R 15Dd , R 16Dd , R 17Dd , R 18Dd , R 19Dd and R21Dd may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Ddは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Dd）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Dd）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Dd）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Dd）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Dd）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Dd）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Dd）－である。Ｒ22Dd、Ｒ23Dd、Ｒ25Dd、Ｒ26Dd、Ｒ27Dd及びＲ28Ddはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Ddは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Dd、Ｒ23Dd、Ｒ24Dd、Ｒ25Dd、Ｒ26Dd、Ｒ27Dd及びＲ28Ddはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Dd is —P (R 22Dd ) —, —As (R 23Dd ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Dd ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Dd )-, -As (= O) (R 26Dd )-, -P (= S) (R 27Dd )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Dd )- It is. R 22Dd , R 23Dd , R 25Dd , R 26Dd , R 27Dd and R 28Dd are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Dd may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Dd , R 23Dd , R 24Dd , R 25Dd , R 26Dd , R 27Dd and R 28Dd may be the same or different.
　Ｒ2Ddは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Ddが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Ddが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Dd is a divalent group 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that when bound Q 1dd is a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound from which one hydrogen atom has been removed group or bound Q 2Dd is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ4Ddは炭素原子数７０以下の４価の基である。 R 4Dd is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Dd、Ｒ12Dd、Ｒ13Dd、Ｒ14Dd、Ｒ15Dd、Ｒ16Dd、Ｒ17Dd、Ｒ18Dd、Ｒ19Dd、Ｒ21Dd、Ｒ22Dd、Ｒ23Dd、Ｒ24Dd、Ｒ25Dd、Ｒ26Dd、Ｒ27Dd、Ｒ28Dd、Ｒ2Dd、Ｒ4Dd及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Dd, R 12Dd, R 13Dd , R 14Dd, R 15Dd, R 16Dd, R 17Dd, R 18Dd, R 19Dd, R 21Dd, R 22Dd, R 23Dd, R 24Dd, R 25Dd, R 26Dd, R 27Dd, R 28Dd , R 2Dd , R 4Dd and two or more groups selected from a group in which one or two hydrogen atoms have been removed from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom, are optionally bonded to form a ring. May be.
　式（Ｄｅ）中、Ｑ1Deは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11De）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12De）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13De）（Ｒ14De）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15De）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16De）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17De）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18De）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19De、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21De）2である。Ｒ11De、Ｒ12De、Ｒ13De、Ｒ15De、Ｒ16De、Ｒ17De、Ｒ18De及びＲ21Deはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14De及びＲ19Deはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11De及びＲ12De、Ｒ13De、Ｒ14De、Ｒ15De、Ｒ16De、Ｒ17De、Ｒ18De、Ｒ19De及びＲ21Deはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (De), Q 1De is -P (R 11De ) 2 , -As (R 12De ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13De ) (R 14De ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15De ) 2 , − As (= O) (R 16De ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17De ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18De ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19De , or —C (═O) N (R 21De ) 2 . R 11De , R 12De , R 13De , R 15De , R 16De , R 17De , R 18De and R 21De are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14De And R 19De are each independently an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11De and R 12De , R 13De , R 14De , R 15De , R 16De , R 17De , R 18De , R 19De and R21De may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Deは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22De）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23De）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24De）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25De）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26De）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27De）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28De）－である。Ｒ22De、Ｒ23De、Ｒ25De、Ｒ26De、Ｒ27De及びＲ28Deはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Deは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22De、Ｒ23De、Ｒ24De、Ｒ25De、Ｒ26De、Ｒ27De及びＲ28Deはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2De represents —P (R 22De ) —, —As (R 23De ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24De ) — , -P (= O) (R 25De )-, -As (= O) (R 26De )-, -P (= S) (R 27De )-, or -As (= S) (R 28De )- It is. R 22De , R 23De , R 25De , R 26De , R 27De and R 28De each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24De may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22De , R 23De , R 24De , R 25De , R 26De , R 27De and R 28De may be the same or different.
　Ｒ2Deは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Deが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Deが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2De is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1De is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2De is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ3Deは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。 R 3De is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11De、Ｒ12De、Ｒ13De、Ｒ14De、Ｒ15De、Ｒ16De、Ｒ17De、Ｒ18De、Ｒ19De、Ｒ21De、Ｒ22De、Ｒ23De、Ｒ24De、Ｒ25De、Ｒ26De、Ｒ27De、Ｒ28De、Ｒ2De、Ｒ3De及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11De, R 12De, R 13De , R 14De, R 15De, R 16De, R 17De, R 18De, R 19De, R 21De, R 22De, R 23De, R 24De, R 25De, R 26De, R 27De, R 28De , R 2De , R 3De, and optionally substituted two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one or two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound to form a ring May be.
　式（Ｄｆ）中、Ｑ1Dfは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Df）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Df）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Df）（Ｒ14Df）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Df）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Df）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Df）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Df）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Df、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Df）2である。Ｒ11Df、Ｒ12Df、Ｒ13Df、Ｒ15Df、Ｒ16Df、Ｒ17Df、Ｒ18Df及びＲ21Dfはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Df及びＲ19Dfはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Df、Ｒ12Df、Ｒ13Df、Ｒ14Df、Ｒ15Df、Ｒ16Df、Ｒ17Df、Ｒ18Df、Ｒ19Df及びＲ21Dfはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Df), Q 1Df is -P (R 11Df ) 2 , -As (R 12Df ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Df ) (R 14Df ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Df ) 2 , − As (= O) (R 16Df ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Df ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Df ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Df , or —C (═O) N (R 21Df ) 2 . R 11Df , R 12Df , R 13Df , R 15Df , R 16Df , R 17Df , R 18Df and R 21Df are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Df And R 19Df each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Df , R 12Df , R 13Df , R 14Df , R 15Df , R 16Df , R 17Df , R 18Df , R 19Df and R21Df may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Dfは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Df）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Df）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Df）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Df）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Df）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Df）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Df）－である。Ｒ22Df、Ｒ23Df、Ｒ25Df、Ｒ26Df、Ｒ27Df及びＲ28Dfはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Dfは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Df、Ｒ23Df、Ｒ24Df、Ｒ25Df、Ｒ26Df、Ｒ27Df及びＲ28Dfはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Df represents —P (R 22Df ) —, —As (R 23Df ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Df ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Df )-, -As (= O) (R 26Df )-, -P (= S) (R 27Df )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Df )- It is. R 22Df , R 23Df , R 25Df , R 26Df , R 27Df and R 28Df are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Df may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Df , R 23Df , R 24Df , R 25Df , R 26Df , R 27Df and R 28Df may be the same or different.
　Ｑ3Dfは、Ｐ、Ａｓ、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基、Ｎ、Ｐ（＝Ｏ）、Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）、Ｐ（＝Ｓ）、又は、Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）である。 Q 3Df represents P, As, a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N, P (═O), As (═O), P (═S) Or As (= S).
　Ｒ2Dfは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Dfが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、結合したＱ2Dfが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ3Dfが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Df is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that when bonded Q 1Df is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, the bonded Q 2Df is a nitrogen atom. When the group is a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the containing heterocyclic compound, or when the bonded Q 3Df is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used. .
　Ｒ11Df、Ｒ12Df、Ｒ13Df、Ｒ14Df、Ｒ15Df、Ｒ16Df、Ｒ17Df、Ｒ18Df、Ｒ19Df、Ｒ21Df、Ｒ22Df、Ｒ23Df、Ｒ24Df、Ｒ25Df、Ｒ26Df、Ｒ27Df、Ｒ28Df、Ｒ2Df及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Df , R 12Df , R 13Df , R 14Df , R 15Df , R 16Df , R 17Df , R 18Df , R 19Df , R 21Df , R 22Df , R 23Df , R 24Df , R 25Df , R 26Df , R 27Df , R 27Df , R 2Df and two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring. .
　式（Ｄｇ）中、Ｑ1Dgは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Dg）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Dg）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Dg）（Ｒ14Dg）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Dg）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Dg）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Dg）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Dg）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Dg、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Dg）2である。Ｒ11Dg、Ｒ12Dg、Ｒ13Dg、Ｒ15Dg、Ｒ16Dg、Ｒ17Dg、Ｒ18Dg及びＲ21Dgはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Dg及びＲ19Dgは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Dg、Ｒ12Dg、Ｒ13Dg、Ｒ14Dg、Ｒ15Dg、Ｒ16Dg、Ｒ17Dg、Ｒ18Dg、Ｒ19Dg及びＲ21Dgはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Dg), Q 1Dg is -P (R 11Dg ) 2 , -As (R 12Dg ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Dg ) (R 14Dg ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Dg ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Dg ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Dg ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Dg ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Dg , or —C (═O) N (R 21Dg ) 2 . R 11Dg , R 12Dg , R 13Dg , R 15Dg , R 16Dg , R 17Dg , R 18Dg and R 21Dg are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, R 14Dg And R 19Dg is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, R 11Dg , R 12Dg , R 13Dg , R 14Dg , R 15Dg , R 16Dg , R 17Dg , R 18Dg , R 19Dg and R Each 21Dg may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Dgは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Dg）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Dg）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Dg）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Dg）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Dg）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Dg）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Dg）－である。Ｒ22Dg、Ｒ23Dg、Ｒ25Dg、Ｒ26Dg、Ｒ27Dg及びＲ28Dgはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Dgは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Dg、Ｒ23Dg、Ｒ24Dg、Ｒ25Dg、Ｒ26Dg、Ｒ27Dg及びＲ28Dgはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Dg is —P (R 22Dg ) —, —As (R 23Dg ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Dg ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Dg )-, -As (= O) (R 26Dg )-, -P (= S) (R 27Dg )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Dg )- It is. R 22Dg , R 23Dg , R 25Dg , R 26Dg , R 27Dg and R 28Dg are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Dg may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Dg , R 23Dg , R 24Dg , R 25Dg , R 26Dg , R 27Dg and R 28Dg may be the same or different.
　Ｑ3Dgは、Ｐ、Ａｓ、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基、Ｎ、Ｐ（＝Ｏ）、Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）、Ｐ（＝Ｓ）、又は、Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）である。 Q 3Dg is P, As, a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N, P (═O), As (═O), P (═S) Or As (= S).
　Ｒ2Dgは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Dgが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、結合したＱ2Dgが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ3Dgが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Dg is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that when bonded Q 1Dg is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, the bonded Q 2Dg is a nitrogen atom. When the group is a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the containing heterocyclic compound, or when the bonded Q 3Dg is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used. .
　Ｒ3Dgは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。 R 3Dg is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Dg、Ｒ12Dg、Ｒ13Dg、Ｒ14Dg、Ｒ15Dg、Ｒ16Dg、Ｒ17Dg、Ｒ18Dg、Ｒ19Dg、Ｒ21Dg、Ｒ22Dg、Ｒ23Dg、Ｒ24Dg、Ｒ25Dg、Ｒ26Dg、Ｒ27Dg、Ｒ28Dg、Ｒ2Dg、Ｒ3Dg及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Dg, R 12Dg, R 13Dg , R 14Dg, R 15Dg, R 16Dg, R 17Dg, R 18Dg, R 19Dg, R 21Dg, R 22Dg, R 23Dg, R 24Dg, R 25Dg, R 26Dg, R 27Dg, R 28Dg , R 2Dg , R 3Dg and two or more groups selected from a group in which one to three hydrogen atoms have been removed from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom, are optionally bonded to form a ring. May be.
　式（Ｄｈ）中、Ｑ1Dhは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Dh）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Dh）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Dh）（Ｒ14Dh）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Dh）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Dh）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Dh）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Dh）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Dh、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Dh）2である。Ｒ11Dh、Ｒ12Dh、Ｒ13Dh、Ｒ15Dh、Ｒ16Dh、Ｒ17Dh、Ｒ18Dh及びＲ21Dhはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Dh及びＲ19Dhはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Dh、Ｒ12Dh、Ｒ13Dh、Ｒ14Dh、Ｒ15Dh、Ｒ16Dh、Ｒ17Dh、Ｒ18Dh、Ｒ19Dh及びＲ21Dhはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Dh), Q 1Dh is -P (R 11Dh ) 2 , -As (R 12Dh ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Dh ) (R 14Dh ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Dh ) 2 , − As (= O) (R 16Dh ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Dh ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Dh ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Dh , or —C (═O) N (R 21Dh ) 2 . R 11Dh , R 12Dh , R 13Dh , R 15Dh , R 16Dh , R 17Dh , R 18Dh and R 21Dh are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, R 14Dh And R 19Dh each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, R 11Dh , R 12Dh , R 13Dh , R 14Dh , R 15Dh , R 16Dh , R 17Dh , R 18Dh , R 19Dh and R 21Dh may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Dhは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Dh）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Dh）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Dh）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Dh）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Dh）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Dh）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Dh）－である。Ｒ22Dh、Ｒ23Dh、Ｒ25Dh、Ｒ26Dh、Ｒ27Dh及びＲ28Dhはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Dhは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Dh、Ｒ23Dh、Ｒ24Dh、Ｒ25Dh、Ｒ26Dh、Ｒ27Dh及びＲ28Dhはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Dh is —P (R 22Dh ) —, —As (R 23Dh ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Dh ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Dh )-, -As (= O) (R 26Dh )-, -P (= S) (R 27Dh )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Dh )- It is. R 22Dh , R 23Dh , R 25Dh , R 26Dh , R 27Dh and R 28Dh are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Dh may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Dh , R 23Dh , R 24Dh , R 25Dh , R 26Dh , R 27Dh and R 28Dh may be the same or different.
　Ｑ3Dhは、Ｐ、Ａｓ、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基、Ｎ、Ｐ（＝Ｏ）、Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）、Ｐ（＝Ｓ）、又は、Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）である。 Q 3Dh is P, As, a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N, P (═O), As (═O), P (═S) Or As (= S).
　Ｒ2Dhは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Dhが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、結合したＱ2Dhが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ3Dhが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Dh is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that when bonded Q 1Dh is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, the bonded Q 2Dh is a nitrogen atom. When the group is a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the containing heterocyclic compound, or when the bonded Q 3Dh is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used. .
　Ｒ3Dhは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。 R 3Dh is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Dh、Ｒ12Dh、Ｒ13Dh、Ｒ14Dh、Ｒ15Dh、Ｒ16Dh、Ｒ17Dh、Ｒ18Dh、Ｒ19Dh、Ｒ21Dh、Ｒ22Dh、Ｒ23Dh、Ｒ24Dh、Ｒ25Dh、Ｒ26Dh、Ｒ27Dh、Ｒ28Dh、Ｒ2Dh、Ｒ3Dh及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１～３つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Dh, R 12Dh, R 13Dh , R 14Dh, R 15Dh, R 16Dh, R 17Dh, R 18Dh, R 19Dh, R 21Dh, R 22Dh, R 23Dh, R 24Dh, R 25Dh, R 26Dh, R 27Dh, R 28Dh , R 2Dh , R 3Dh and two or more groups selected from a group in which 1 to 3 hydrogen atoms have been removed from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom are optionally bonded to form a ring. Also good.
　式（Ｄｉ）中、Ｑ1Diは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Di）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Di）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Di）（Ｒ14Di）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Di）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Di）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Di）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Di）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Di、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Di）2である。Ｒ11Di、Ｒ12Di、Ｒ13Di、Ｒ15Di、Ｒ16Di、Ｒ17Di、Ｒ18Di及びＲ21Diはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Di及びＲ19Diはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Di、Ｒ12Di、Ｒ13Di、Ｒ14Di、Ｒ15Di、Ｒ16Di、Ｒ17Di、Ｒ18Di、Ｒ19Di及びＲ21Diはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In formula (Di), Q 1Di represents —P (R 11Di ) 2 , —As (R 12Di ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Di ) (R 14Di ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Di ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Di ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Di ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Di ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Di , or —C (═O) N (R 21Di ) 2 . R 11Di , R 12Di , R 13Di , R 15Di , R 16Di , R 17Di , R 18Di and R 21Di are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Di And R 19Di each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Di , R 12Di , R 13Di , R 14Di , R 15Di , R 16Di , R 17Di , R 18Di , R 19Di and R21Di may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Diは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Di）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Di）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Di）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Di）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Di）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Di）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Di）－である。Ｒ22Di、Ｒ23Di、Ｒ25Di、Ｒ26Di、Ｒ27Di及びＲ28Diはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Diは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Di、Ｒ23Di、Ｒ24Di、Ｒ25Di、Ｒ26Di、Ｒ27Di及びＲ28Diはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Di represents —P (R 22Di ) —, —As (R 23Di ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Di ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Di )-, -As (= O) (R 26Di )-, -P (= S) (R 27Di )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Di )- It is. R 22Di , R 23Di , R 25Di , R 26Di , R 27Di and R 28Di are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Di may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Di , R 23Di , R 24Di , R 25Di , R 26Di , R 27Di and R 28Di may be the same or different.
　Ｒ2Diは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Diが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Diが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Di is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Di is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Di is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ4Diは炭素原子数７０以下の４価の基である。 R 4Di is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Di、Ｒ12Di、Ｒ13Di、Ｒ14Di、Ｒ15Di、Ｒ16Di、Ｒ17Di、Ｒ18Di、Ｒ19Di、Ｒ21Di、Ｒ22Di、Ｒ23Di、Ｒ24Di、Ｒ25Di、Ｒ26Di、Ｒ27Di、Ｒ28Di、Ｒ2Di、Ｒ4Di及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R11Di , R12Di , R13Di , R14Di , R15Di , R16Di , R17Di , R18Di , R19Di , R21Di , R22Di , R23Di , R24Di , R25Di , R26Di , R27Di , R28Di , R 2Di , R 4Di and two or more groups selected from a group in which one or two hydrogen atoms have been removed from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom, are optionally bonded to form a ring. May be.
　式（Ｄｊ）中、Ｑ1Djは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Dj）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Dj）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Dj）（Ｒ14Dj）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Dj）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Dj）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Dj）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Dj）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Dj、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Dj）2である。Ｒ11Dj、Ｒ12Dj、Ｒ13Dj、Ｒ15Dj、Ｒ16Dj、Ｒ17Dj、Ｒ18Dj及びＲ21Djはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Dj及びＲ19Djはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Dj、Ｒ12Dj、Ｒ13Dj、Ｒ14Dj、Ｒ15Dj、Ｒ16Dj、Ｒ17Dj、Ｒ18Dj、Ｒ19Dj及びＲ21Djはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Dj), Q 1Dj is —P (R 11Dj ) 2 , —As (R 12Dj ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Dj ) (R 14Dj ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Dj ) 2 , − As (= O) (R 16Dj ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Dj ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Dj ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Dj , or —C (═O) N (R 21Dj ) 2 . R 11Dj , R 12Dj , R 13Dj , R 15Dj , R 16Dj , R 17Dj , R 18Dj and R 21Dj are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, R 14Dj And R 19Dj each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Dj , R 12Dj , R 13Dj , R 14Dj , R 15Dj , R 16Dj , R 17Dj , R 18Dj , R 19Dj and R 21Dj may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Djは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Dj）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Dj）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Dj）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Dj）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Dj）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Dj）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Dj）－である。Ｒ22Dj、Ｒ23Dj、Ｒ25Dj、Ｒ26Dj、Ｒ27Dj及びＲ28Djはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Djは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Dj、Ｒ23Dj、Ｒ24Dj、Ｒ25Dj、Ｒ26Dj、Ｒ27Dj及びＲ28Djはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Dj represents —P (R 22Dj ) —, —As (R 23Dj ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Dj ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Dj )-, -As (= O) (R 26Dj )-, -P (= S) (R 27Dj )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Dj )- It is. R 22Dj , R 23Dj , R 25Dj , R 26Dj , R 27Dj and R 28Dj are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Dj may be substituted. A good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Dj , R 23Dj , R 24Dj , R 25Dj , R 26Dj , R 27Dj and R 28Dj may be the same or different.
　Ｒ2Djは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Djが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Djが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Dj is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Dj is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Dj is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ3Djは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。 R 3Dj is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Dj、Ｒ12Dj、Ｒ13Dj、Ｒ14Dj、Ｒ15Dj、Ｒ16Dj、Ｒ17Dj、Ｒ18Dj、Ｒ19Dj、Ｒ21Dj、Ｒ22Dj、Ｒ23Dj、Ｒ24Dj、Ｒ25Dj、Ｒ26Dj、Ｒ27Dj、Ｒ28Dj、Ｒ2Dj、Ｒ3Dj及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Dj, R 12Dj, R 13Dj , R 14Dj, R 15Dj, R 16Dj, R 17Dj, R 18Dj, R 19Dj, R 21Dj, R 22Dj, R 23Dj, R 24Dj, R 25Dj, R 26Dj, R 27Dj, R 28Dj , R 2Dj , R 3Dj and two or more groups selected from a group in which one or two hydrogen atoms have been removed from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom, are optionally bonded to form a ring. May be.
　式（Ｄｋ）中、Ｑ1Dkは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Dk）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Dk）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Dk）（Ｒ14Dk）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Dk）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Dk）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Dk）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Dk）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Dk、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Dk）2である。Ｒ11Dk、Ｒ12Dk、Ｒ13Dk、Ｒ15Dk、Ｒ16Dk、Ｒ17Dk、Ｒ18Dk及びＲ21Dkはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Dk及びＲ19Dkはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Dk、Ｒ12Dk、Ｒ13Dk、Ｒ14Dk、Ｒ15Dk、Ｒ16Dk、Ｒ17Dk、Ｒ18Dk、Ｒ19Dk及びＲ21Dkはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Dk), Q 1Dk is -P (R 11Dk ) 2 , -As (R 12Dk ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Dk ) (R 14Dk ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Dk ) 2 , − As (= O) (R 16Dk ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Dk ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Dk ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Dk , or —C (═O) N (R 21Dk ) 2 . R 11Dk , R 12Dk , R 13Dk , R 15Dk , R 16Dk , R 17Dk , R 18Dk and R 21Dk are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Dk And R 19Dk are each independently an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Dk , R 12Dk , R 13Dk , R 14Dk , R 15Dk , R 16Dk , R 17Dk , R 18Dk , R 19Dk and R 21Dk may be the same or different.
　Ｑ3Dkは、Ｐ、Ａｓ、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基、Ｎ、Ｐ（＝Ｏ）、Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）、Ｐ（＝Ｓ）、又は、Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）である。 Q 3Dk is P, As, a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N, P (═O), As (═O), P (═S) Or As (= S).
　Ｒ2Dkは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Dkが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ3Dkが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Dk is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Dk is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 3Dk is In the case of a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ11Dk、Ｒ12Dk、Ｒ13Dk、Ｒ14Dk、Ｒ15Dk、Ｒ16Dk、Ｒ17Dk、Ｒ18Dk、Ｒ19Dk、Ｒ21Dk、Ｒ2Dk及び窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ又は３つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基が任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 Remove one or three hydrogen atoms from R 11Dk , R 12Dk , R 13Dk , R 14Dk , R 15Dk , R 16Dk , R 17Dk , R 18Dk , R 19Dk , R 21Dk , R 2Dk and nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compounds Two or more groups selected from these groups may be optionally combined to form a ring.
　式（Ｄｌ）中、Ｑ1Dlは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Dl）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Dl）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Dl）（Ｒ14Dl）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Dl）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Dl）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Dl）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Dl）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Dl、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Dl）2である。Ｒ11Dl、Ｒ12Dl、Ｒ13Dl、Ｒ15Dl、Ｒ16Dl、Ｒ17Dl、Ｒ18Dl及びＲ21Dlはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Dl及びＲ19Dlはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Dl、Ｒ12Dl、Ｒ13Dl、Ｒ14Dl、Ｒ15Dl、Ｒ16Dl、Ｒ17Dl、Ｒ18Dl、Ｒ19Dl及びＲ21Dlはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Dl), Q 1Dl is —P (R 11Dl ) 2 , —As (R 12Dl ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Dl ) (R 14Dl ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Dl ) 2 , − As (= O) (R 16Dl ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Dl ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Dl ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Dl , or —C (═O) N (R 21Dl ) 2 . R 11Dl , R 12Dl , R 13Dl , R 15Dl , R 16Dl , R 17Dl , R 18Dl and R 21Dl are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Dl And R 19Dl each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, R 11Dl , R 12Dl , R 13Dl , R 14Dl , R 15Dl , R 16Dl , R 17Dl , R 18Dl , R 19Dl and R21Dl may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Dlは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Dl）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Dl）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Dl）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Dl）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Dl）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Dl）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Dl）－である。Ｒ22Dl、Ｒ23Dl、Ｒ25Dl、Ｒ26Dl、Ｒ27Dl及びＲ28Dlはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Dlは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Dl、Ｒ23Dl、Ｒ24Dl、Ｒ25Dl、Ｒ26Dl、Ｒ27Dl及びＲ28Dlはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2DL is, -P (R 22Dl) -, - As (R 23Dl) -, substituted two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom which containing heterocyclic compounds have been removed group, -N (R 24Dl) - , -P (= O) (R 25Dl )-, -As (= O) (R 26Dl )-, -P (= S) (R 27Dl )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Dl )- It is. R 22Dl, R 23Dl, R 25Dl , R 26Dl, R 27Dl and R 28 dl are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted C 1 -C also be ~ 50 hydrocarbyl group, R 24Dl is substituted an alkyl group having a carbon number of 1 ~ 30, R 22Dl, R 23Dl, R 24Dl, R 25Dl, R 26Dl, R 27Dl and R 28 dl may be the same or different.
　Ｑ3Dlは、Ｐ、Ａｓ、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基、Ｎ、Ｐ（＝Ｏ）、Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）、Ｐ（＝Ｓ）、又は、Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）である。 Q 3Dl is P, As, a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing nitrogen atom, N, P (═O), As (═O), P (═S) Or As (= S).
　Ｒ2Dlは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Dlが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、結合したＱ2Dlが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ3Dlが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Dl is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that when Q 1Dl bonded is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, the bonded Q 2Dl is a nitrogen atom. When the group is a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the containing heterocyclic compound, or when the bonded Q 3Dl is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used. .
　Ｒ3Dlは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。 R 3Dl is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Dl、Ｒ12Dl、Ｒ13Dl、Ｒ14Dl、Ｒ15Dl、Ｒ16Dl、Ｒ17Dl、Ｒ18Dl、Ｒ19Dl、Ｒ21Dl、Ｒ22Dl、Ｒ23Dl、Ｒ24Dl、Ｒ25Dl、Ｒ26Dl、Ｒ27Dl、Ｒ28Dl、Ｒ2Dl、Ｒ3Dl及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Dl, R 12Dl, R 13Dl , R 14Dl, R 15Dl, R 16Dl, R 17Dl, R 18Dl, R 19Dl, R 21Dl, R 22Dl, R 23Dl, R 24Dl, R 25Dl, R 26Dl, R 27Dl, R 28Dl , R 2Dl , R 3Dl and two or more groups selected from a group in which one to three hydrogen atoms have been removed from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom are optionally bonded to form a ring. May be.
　式（Ｄｍ）中、Ｑ1Dmは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Dm）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Dm）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Dm）（Ｒ14Dm）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Dm）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Dm）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Dm）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Dm）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Dm、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Dm）2である。Ｒ11Dm、Ｒ12Dm、Ｒ13Dm、Ｒ15Dm、Ｒ16Dm、Ｒ17Dm、Ｒ18Dm及びＲ21Dmはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Dm及びＲ19Dmはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Dm、Ｒ12Dm、Ｒ13Dm、Ｒ14Dm、Ｒ15Dm、Ｒ16Dm、Ｒ17Dm、Ｒ18Dm、Ｒ19Dm及びＲ21Dmはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Dm), Q 1Dm is —P (R 11Dm ) 2 , —As (R 12Dm ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Dm ) (R 14Dm ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Dm ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Dm ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Dm ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Dm ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Dm , or —C (═O) N (R 21Dm ) 2 . R 11Dm , R 12Dm , R 13Dm , R 15Dm , R 16Dm , R 17Dm , R 18Dm and R 21Dm are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Dm And R 19Dm each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Dm , R 12Dm , R 13Dm , R 14Dm , R 15Dm , R 16Dm , R 17Dm , R 18Dm , R 19Dm and R21Dm may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Dmは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Dm）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Dm）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Dm）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Dm）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Dm）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Dm）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Dm）－である。Ｒ22Dm、Ｒ23Dm、Ｒ25Dm、Ｒ26Dm、Ｒ27Dm及びＲ28Dmはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Dmは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Dm、Ｒ23Dm、Ｒ24Dm、Ｒ25Dm、Ｒ26Dm、Ｒ27Dm及びＲ28Dmはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Dm is —P (R 22Dm ) —, —As (R 23Dm ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Dm ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Dm )-, -As (= O) (R 26Dm )-, -P (= S) (R 27Dm )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Dm )- It is. R 22Dm , R 23Dm , R 25Dm , R 26Dm , R 27Dm and R 28Dm are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Dm may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Dm , R 23Dm , R 24Dm , R 25Dm , R 26Dm , R 27Dm and R 28Dm may be the same or different.
　Ｑ4Dmは、Ａｇ+に配位可能な、Ｐ、窒素原子含有複素環式化合物中のＮ、Ｏ-、又は、Ｓ-のうちいずれか１つを含む炭素原子数７０以下の４価の基である。 Q 4Dm is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms, which can coordinate to Ag + and contains any one of P, N, O − or S − in a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. It is.
　Ｒ2Dmは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Dmが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Dmが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Dm is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Dm is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Dm is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ11Dm、Ｒ12Dm、Ｒ13Dm、Ｒ14Dm、Ｒ15Dm、Ｒ16Dm、Ｒ17Dm、Ｒ18Dm、Ｒ19Dm、Ｒ21Dm、Ｒ22Dm、Ｒ23Dm、Ｒ24Dm、Ｒ25Dm、Ｒ26Dm、Ｒ27Dm、Ｒ28Dm、Ｒ2Dm、Ｑ4Dm及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Dm , R 12Dm , R 13Dm , R 14Dm , R 15Dm , R 16Dm , R 17Dm , R 18Dm , R 19Dm , R 21Dm , R 22Dm , R 23Dm , R 24Dm , R 25Dm , R 26Dm , R 27Dm , R 27Dm , R 2Dm , Q 4Dm and two or more groups selected from a group in which one or two hydrogen atoms have been removed from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom, are optionally bonded to form a ring. May be.
　式（Ｄｎ）中、Ｑ1Dnは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Dn）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Dn）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Dn）（Ｒ14Dn）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Dn）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Dn）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Dn）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Dn）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Dn、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Dn）2である。Ｒ11Dn、Ｒ12Dn、Ｒ13Dn、Ｒ15Dn、Ｒ16Dn、Ｒ17Dn、Ｒ18Dn及びＲ21Dnはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Dn及びＲ19Dnはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Dn、Ｒ12Dn、Ｒ13Dn、Ｒ14Dn、Ｒ15Dn、Ｒ16Dn、Ｒ17Dn、Ｒ18Dn、Ｒ19Dn及びＲ21Dnはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Dn), Q 1Dn is -P (R 11Dn ) 2 , -As (R 12Dn ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Dn ) (R 14Dn ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Dn ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Dn ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Dn ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Dn ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Dn , or —C (═O) N (R 21Dn ) 2 . R 11Dn , R 12Dn , R 13Dn , R 15Dn , R 16Dn , R 17Dn , R 18Dn and R 21Dn are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, R 14Dn And R 19Dn each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, R 11Dn , R 12Dn , R 13Dn , R 14Dn , R 15Dn , R 16Dn , R 17Dn , R 18Dn , R 19Dn and R21Dn may be the same or different.
　Ｑ3Dnは、Ｐ、Ａｓ、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基、Ｎ、Ｐ（＝Ｏ）、Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）、Ｐ（＝Ｓ）、又は、Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）である。 Q 3Dn is P, As, a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N, P (═O), As (═O), P (═S) Or As (= S).
　Ｒ2Dnは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Dnが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ3Dnが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Dn is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Dn is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 3Dn is In the case of a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ3Dnは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。 R 3Dn is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Dn、Ｒ12Dn、Ｒ13Dn、Ｒ14Dn、Ｒ15Dn、Ｒ16Dn、Ｒ17Dn、Ｒ18Dn、Ｒ19Dn、Ｒ21Dn、Ｒ2Dn、Ｒ3Dn及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ又は３つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Dn , R 12Dn , R 13Dn , R 14Dn , R 15Dn , R 16Dn , R 17Dn , R 18Dn , R 19Dn , R 21Dn , R 2Dn , R 3Dn and an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound Two or more groups selected from groups in which one or three hydrogen atoms have been removed may be optionally combined to form a ring.
　式（Ｄｏ）中、Ｑ1Doは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Do）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Do）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Do）（Ｒ14Do）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Do）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Do）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Do）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Do）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Do、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Do）2である。Ｒ11Do、Ｒ12Do、Ｒ13Do、Ｒ15Do、Ｒ16Do、Ｒ17Do、Ｒ18Do及びＲ21Doはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Do及びＲ19Doはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Do、Ｒ12Do、Ｒ13Do、Ｒ14Do、Ｒ15Do、Ｒ16Do、Ｒ17Do、Ｒ18Do、Ｒ19Do及びＲ21Doはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Do), Q 1Do is —P (R 11Do ) 2 , —As (R 12Do ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Do ) (R 14Do ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Do ) 2 , − As (= O) (R 16Do ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Do ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Do ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Do , or —C (═O) N (R 21Do ) 2 . R 11Do , R 12Do , R 13Do , R 15Do , R 16Do , R 17Do , R 18Do and R 21Do are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Do And R 19Do each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Do , R 12Do , R 13Do , R 14Do , R 15Do , R 16Do , R 17Do , R 18Do , R 19Do and R21Do may be the same or different.
　Ｑ3Doは、Ｐ、Ａｓ、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基、Ｎ、Ｐ（＝Ｏ）、Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）、Ｐ（＝Ｓ）、又は、Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）である。 Q 3Do is P, As, a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, N, P (═O), As (═O), P (═S) Or As (= S).
　Ｒ2Doは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Doが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ3Doが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Do is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Do is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 3Do is In the case of a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ4Doは炭素原子数７０以下の４価の基である。 R 4Do is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Do、Ｒ12Do、Ｒ13Do、Ｒ14Do、Ｒ15Do、Ｒ16Do、Ｒ17Do、Ｒ18Do、Ｒ19Do、Ｒ21Do、Ｒ2Do、Ｒ4Do及び窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ又は３つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基が任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Do, R 12Do, R 13Do , R 14Do, R 15Do, R 16Do, R 17Do, R 18Do, R 19Do, R 21Do, R 2Do, one hydrogen atom from R 4Do and a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compounds or Two or more groups selected from the groups excluding three may be optionally combined to form a ring.
　式（Ｄｐ）中、Ｑ1Dpは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Dp）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Dp）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Dp）（Ｒ14Dp）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Dp）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Dp）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Dp）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Dp）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Dp、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Dp）2である。Ｒ11Dp、Ｒ12Dp、Ｒ13Dp、Ｒ15Dp、Ｒ16Dp、Ｒ17Dp、Ｒ18Dp及びＲ21Dpはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Dp及びＲ19Dpはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Dp、Ｒ12Dp、Ｒ13Dp、Ｒ14Dp、Ｒ15Dp、Ｒ16Dp、Ｒ17Dp、Ｒ18Dp、Ｒ19Dp及びＲ21Dpはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Dp), Q 1Dp is -P (R 11Dp ) 2 , -As (R 12Dp ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Dp ) (R 14Dp ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Dp ) 2 , − As (= O) (R 16Dp ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Dp ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Dp ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Dp , or —C (═O) N (R 21Dp ) 2 . R 11Dp , R 12Dp , R 13Dp , R 15Dp , R 16Dp , R 17Dp , R 18Dp and R 21Dp are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Dp And R 19Dp each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Dp , R 12Dp , R 13Dp , R 14Dp , R 15Dp , R 16Dp , R 17Dp , R 18Dp , R 19Dp and R 21Dp may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Dpは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Dp）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Dp）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Dp）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Dp）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Dp）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Dp）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Dp）－である。Ｒ22Dp、Ｒ23Dp、Ｒ25Dp、Ｒ26Dp、Ｒ27Dp及びＲ28Dpはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Dpは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Dp、Ｒ23Dp、Ｒ24Dp、Ｒ25Dp、Ｒ26Dp、Ｒ27Dp及びＲ28Dpはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Dp is —P (R 22Dp ) —, —As (R 23Dp ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Dp ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Dp )-, -As (= O) (R 26Dp )-, -P (= S) (R 27Dp )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Dp )- It is. R 22Dp , R 23Dp , R 25Dp , R 26Dp , R 27Dp and R 28Dp each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Dp may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Dp , R 23Dp , R 24Dp , R 25Dp , R 26Dp , R 27Dp and R 28Dp may be the same or different.
　Ｒ3Dpは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。 R 3Dp is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ4Dpは炭素原子数７０以下の４価の基である。 R 4Dp is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Dp、Ｒ12Dp、Ｒ13Dp、Ｒ14Dp、Ｒ15Dp、Ｒ16Dp、Ｒ17Dp、Ｒ18Dp、Ｒ19Dp、Ｒ21Dp、Ｒ22Dp、Ｒ23Dp、Ｒ24Dp、Ｒ25Dp、Ｒ26Dp、Ｒ27Dp、Ｒ28Dp、Ｒ3Dp、Ｒ4Dp及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R11Dp , R12Dp , R13Dp , R14Dp , R15Dp , R16Dp , R17Dp , R18Dp , R19Dp , R21Dp , R22Dp , R23Dp , R24Dp , R25Dp , R26Dp , R27Dp , R27Dp , R 3Dp , R 4Dp and two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one or two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound to form a ring. May be.
　式（Ｄｑ）中、Ｑ1Dqは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Dq）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Dq）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Dq）（Ｒ14Dq）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Dq）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Dq）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Dq）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Dq）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Dq、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Dq）2である。Ｒ11Dq、Ｒ12Dq、Ｒ13Dq、Ｒ15Dq、Ｒ16Dq、Ｒ17Dq、Ｒ18Dq及びＲ21Dqはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Dq及びＲ19Dqはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Dq、Ｒ12Dq、Ｒ13Dq、Ｒ14Dq、Ｒ15Dq、Ｒ16Dq、Ｒ17Dq、Ｒ18Dq、Ｒ19Dq及びＲ21Dqはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Dq), Q 1Dq is -P (R 11Dq ) 2 , -As (R 12Dq ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Dq ) (R 14Dq ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Dq ) 2 , − As (= O) (R 16Dq ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Dq ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Dq ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Dq , or —C (═O) N (R 21Dq ) 2 . R 11Dq , R 12Dq , R 13Dq , R 15Dq , R 16Dq , R 17Dq , R 18Dq and R 21Dq are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Dq And R 19Dq each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Dq , R 12Dq , R 13Dq , R 14Dq , R 15Dq , R 16Dq , R 17Dq , R 18Dq , R 19Dq and R 21Dq may be the same or different.
　Ｑ4Dqは、Ａｇ+に配位可能な、Ｐ、窒素原子含有複素環式化合物中のＮ、Ｏ-、又は、Ｓ-のうちいずれか１つを含む炭素原子数７０以下の４価の基である。 Q 4Dq is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms and containing any one of P, N, O − or S − in a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, which can be coordinated to Ag +. It is.
　Ｒ2Dqは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Dqが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Dq is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Dq is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, and may be a direct bond.
　Ｒ3Dqは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。 R 3Dq is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Dq、Ｒ12Dq、Ｒ13Dq、Ｒ14Dq、Ｒ15Dq、Ｒ16Dq、Ｒ17Dq、Ｒ18Dq、Ｒ19Dq、Ｒ21Dq、Ｒ2Dq、Ｒ2Dq、Ｒ3Dq、Ｑ4Dq及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Dq , R 12Dq , R 13Dq , R 14Dq , R 15Dq , R 16Dq , R 17Dq , R 18Dq , R 19Dq , R 21Dq , R 2Dq , R 2Dq , R 3Dq , Q 4Dq and an optionally substituted nitrogen atom Two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the containing heterocyclic compound may be optionally combined to form a ring.
　式（Ｄｒ）中、Ｑ1Drは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Dr）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Dr）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Dr）（Ｒ14Dr）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Dr）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Dr）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Dr）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Dr）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Dr、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Dr）2である。Ｒ11Dr、Ｒ12Dr、Ｒ13Dr、Ｒ15Dr、Ｒ16Dr、Ｒ17Dr、Ｒ18Dr及びＲ21Drはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Dr及びＲ19Drはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Dr、Ｒ12Dr、Ｒ13Dr、Ｒ14Dr、Ｒ15Dr、Ｒ16Dr、Ｒ17Dr、Ｒ18Dr、Ｒ19Dr及びＲ21Drはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Dr), Q 1Dr is -P (R 11Dr ) 2 , -As (R 12Dr ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Dr ) (R 14Dr ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Dr ) 2 , — As (= O) (R 16Dr ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Dr ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Dr ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Dr , or —C (═O) N (R 21Dr ) 2 . R 11Dr , R 12Dr , R 13Dr , R 15Dr , R 16Dr , R 17Dr , R 18Dr and R 21Dr are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Dr And R 19Dr each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Dr , R 12Dr , R 13Dr , R 14Dr , R 15Dr , R 16Dr , R 17Dr , R 18Dr , R 19Dr and R21Dr may be the same or different.
　Ｑ5Drは、Ａｇ+に配位可能な、Ｐ、窒素原子含有複素環式化合物中のＮ、Ｏ-、又は、Ｓ-のうちいずれか１つを含む炭素原子数１００以下の５価の基である。 Q 5Dr is a pentavalent group having 100 or less carbon atoms, which can coordinate to Ag + and contains any one of P, N, O − or S − in a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. It is.
　Ｒ2Drは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Drが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Dr is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Dr is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, and may be a direct bond.
　Ｒ11Dr、Ｒ12Dr、Ｒ13Dr、Ｒ14Dr、Ｒ15Dr、Ｒ16Dr、Ｒ17Dr、Ｒ18Dr、Ｒ19Dr、Ｒ21Dr、Ｒ2Dr、Ｑ5Dr及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Dr, R 12Dr, R 13Dr , R 14Dr, R 15Dr, R 16Dr, R 17Dr, R 18Dr, R 19Dr, R 21Dr, from R 2Dr, Q 5Dr and optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound Two or more groups selected from a group excluding one hydrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring.
　式（Ｄｓ）中、Ｑ1Dsは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Ds）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Ds）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Ds）（Ｒ14Ds）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Ds）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Ds）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Ds）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Ds）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Ds、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Ds）2である。Ｒ11Ds、Ｒ12Ds、Ｒ13Ds、Ｒ15Ds、Ｒ16Ds、Ｒ17Ds、Ｒ18Ds及びＲ21Dsはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Ds及びＲ19Dsはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Ds、Ｒ12Ds、Ｒ13Ds、Ｒ14Ds、Ｒ15Ds、Ｒ16Ds、Ｒ17Ds、Ｒ18Ds、Ｒ19Ds及びＲ21Dsはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Ds), Q 1Ds is -P (R 11Ds ) 2 , -As (R 12Ds ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Ds ) (R 14Ds ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Ds ) 2 , − As (= O) (R 16Ds ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Ds ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Ds ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Ds , or —C (═O) N (R 21Ds ) 2 . R 11Ds , R 12Ds , R 13Ds , R 15Ds , R 16Ds , R 17Ds , R 18Ds and R 21Ds are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Ds And R 19Ds each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, R 11Ds , R 12Ds , R 13Ds , R 14Ds , R 15Ds , R 16Ds , R 17Ds , R 18Ds , R 19Ds and R21Ds may be the same or different.
　Ｑ2Dsは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Ds）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Ds）－、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Ds）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Ds）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Ds）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Ds）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Ds）－である。Ｒ22Ds、Ｒ23Ds、Ｒ25Ds、Ｒ26Ds、Ｒ27Ds及びＲ28Dsはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Dsは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Ds、Ｒ23Ds、Ｒ24Ds、Ｒ25Ds、Ｒ26Ds、Ｒ27Ds及びＲ28Dsはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Q 2Ds is —P (R 22Ds ) —, —As (R 23Ds ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Ds ) — , -P (= O) (R 25Ds )-, -As (= O) (R 26Ds )-, -P (= S) (R 27Ds )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Ds )- It is. R 22Ds , R 23Ds , R 25Ds , R 26Ds , R 27Ds and R 28Ds are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 24Ds may be substituted. It is a good alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 22Ds , R 23Ds , R 24Ds , R 25Ds , R 26Ds , R 27Ds and R 28Ds may be the same or different.
　Ｒ2Dsは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Dsが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Dsが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。 R 2Ds is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Ds is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Ds is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
　Ｒ5Dsは炭素原子数１００以下の５価の基である。 R 5Ds is a pentavalent group having 100 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Ds、Ｒ12Ds、Ｒ13Ds、Ｒ14Ds、Ｒ15Ds、Ｒ16Ds、Ｒ17Ds、Ｒ18Ds、Ｒ19Ds、Ｒ21Ds、Ｒ22Ds、Ｒ23Ds、Ｒ24Ds、Ｒ25Ds、Ｒ26Ds、Ｒ27Ds、Ｒ28Ds、Ｒ2Ds、Ｒ5Ds及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 11Ds, R 12Ds, R 13Ds , R 14Ds, R 15Ds, R 16Ds, R 17Ds, R 18Ds, R 19Ds, R 21Ds, R 22Ds, R 23Ds, R 24Ds, R 25Ds, R 26Ds, R 27Ds, R 28Ds , R 2Ds , R 5Ds and two or more groups selected from a group in which one or two hydrogen atoms have been removed from an optionally substituted heterocyclic compound containing a nitrogen atom, are optionally bonded to form a ring. May be.
　式（Ｄｔ）中、Ｑ1Dtは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Dt）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Dt）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Dt）（Ｒ14Dt）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Dt）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Dt）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Dt）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Dt）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Dt、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Dt）2である。Ｒ11Dt、Ｒ12Dt、Ｒ13Dt、Ｒ15Dt、Ｒ16Dt、Ｒ17Dt、Ｒ18Dt及びＲ21Dtはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Dt及びＲ19Dtはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Dt、Ｒ12Dt、Ｒ13Dt、Ｒ14Dt、Ｒ15Dt、Ｒ16Dt、Ｒ17Dt、Ｒ18Dt、Ｒ19Dt及びＲ21Dtはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (Dt), Q 1Dt is -P (R 11Dt ) 2 , -As (R 12Dt ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, N (R 13Dt ) (R 14Dt ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Dt ) 2 , − As (= O) (R 16Dt ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Dt ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Dt ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, —S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Dt , or —C (═O) N (R 21Dt ) 2 . R 11Dt , R 12Dt , R 13Dt , R 15Dt , R 16Dt , R 17Dt , R 18Dt and R 21Dt are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 14Dt And R 19Dt each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and R 11Dt , R 12Dt , R 13Dt , R 14Dt , R 15Dt , R 16Dt , R 17Dt , R 18Dt , R 19Dt and R 21Dt may be the same or different.
　Ｒ6Dtは炭素原子数１５０以下の６価の基である。 R 6Dt is a hexavalent group having 150 or less carbon atoms.
　Ｒ11Dt、Ｒ12Dt、Ｒ13Dt、Ｒ14Dt、Ｒ15Dt、Ｒ16Dt、Ｒ17Dt、Ｒ18Dt、Ｒ19Dt、Ｒ21Dt、Ｒ6Dt及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基から選ばれる基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。 Hydrogen atoms from R 11Dt , R 12Dt , R 13Dt , R 14Dt , R 15Dt , R 16Dt , R 17Dt , R 18Dt , R 19Dt , R 21Dt , R 6Dt and optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compounds A group selected from the groups excluding one may be optionally bonded to form a ring.
　上記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子は、Ａｇ+に配位可能なリン原子を２つ以上含有することが好ましい。酸素に対する膜の耐久性が向上するので、該リン原子はｓｐ3炭素原子が結合していないことが好ましい。 The molecules represented by the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt) are phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag +. It is preferable to contain 2 or more. Since the durability of the film against oxygen is improved, it is preferable that the sp 3 carbon atom is not bonded to the phosphorus atom.
　上記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子のそれぞれについて以下説明する。
　上記式（Ａａ）及び（Ａｂ）で表される分子の構造は、
　リン原子を３つ有する構造、
　リン原子を２つと窒素原子を１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を２つと酸素アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を２つと硫黄アニオンを１つ有する構造、又は、
　リン原子を２つとヒ素原子を１つ有する構造
が好ましく、
　リン原子を２つと窒素原子を１つ有する構造、又は、
　リン原子を２つと酸素アニオンを１つ有する構造
がより好ましい。 Each of the molecules represented by the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt) will be described below.
The structure of the molecule represented by the above formulas (Aa) and (Ab) is
A structure having three phosphorus atoms,
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and one nitrogen atom,
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion,
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and one sulfur anion, or
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and one arsenic atom is preferred,
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and one nitrogen atom, or
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion is more preferable.
　上記式（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）で表される分子の構造は、
　リン原子を４つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つと窒素原子を１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つと酸素アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つと硫黄アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つとヒ素原子を１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を２つと窒素原子を２つ有する構造、又は、
　リン原子を２つとヒ素原子を２つ有する構造
が好ましく、
　リン原子を４つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つと窒素原子を１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つと酸素アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つと硫黄アニオンを１つ有する構造、又は、
　リン原子を２つと窒素原子を２つ有する構造
がより好ましく、
　リン原子を４つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つと酸素アニオンを１つ有する構造、又は、
　リン原子を２つと窒素原子を２つ有する構造
が更に好ましく、
　リン原子を３つと酸素アニオンを１つ有する構造、又は、
　リン原子を２つと窒素原子を２つ有する構造
が特に好ましい。 The structure of the molecule represented by the above formulas (Ba) to (Bd) is
A structure having four phosphorus atoms,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one nitrogen atom,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one sulfur anion,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one arsenic atom,
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and two nitrogen atoms, or
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and two arsenic atoms is preferred,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one nitrogen atom,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one sulfur anion, or
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and two nitrogen atoms is more preferable,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion, or
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and two nitrogen atoms is more preferable,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion, or
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and two nitrogen atoms is particularly preferable.
　上記式（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）で表される分子の構造は、
　リン原子を５つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと窒素原子を１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと酸素アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと硫黄アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つとヒ素原子を１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つと窒素原子を２つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つと酸素原子を２つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つと硫黄アニオンを２つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つとヒ素原子を２つ有する構造、
　リン原子を２つと窒素原子を３つ有する構造、又は、
　リン原子を２つとヒ素原子を３つ有する構造
が好ましく、
　リン原子を５つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと窒素原子を１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと酸素アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと硫黄アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つと窒素アニオンを２つ有する構造、又は、
　リン原子を２つと窒素原子を３つ有する構造
がより好ましく、
　リン原子を５つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと酸素アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと硫黄アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つと窒素原子を２つ有する構造、又は、
　リン原子を２つと窒素原子を３つ有する構造
が更に好ましく、
　リン原子を５つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと酸素アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つと窒素原子を２つ有する構造、又は、
　リン原子を２つと窒素原子を３つ有する構造
が特に好ましく、
　リン原子を５つ有する構造、又は、
　リン原子を４つと酸素アニオンを１つ有する構造
がとりわけ好ましい。 The structure of the molecule represented by the above formulas (Ca) to (Ci) is
A structure having five phosphorus atoms,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one nitrogen atom,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one sulfur anion,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one arsenic atom,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and two nitrogen atoms,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and two oxygen atoms,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and two sulfur anions,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and two arsenic atoms,
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and three nitrogen atoms, or
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and three arsenic atoms is preferred,
A structure having five phosphorus atoms,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one nitrogen atom,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one sulfur anion,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and two nitrogen anions, or
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and three nitrogen atoms is more preferable,
A structure having five phosphorus atoms,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one sulfur anion,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and two nitrogen atoms, or
More preferred is a structure having two phosphorus atoms and three nitrogen atoms,
A structure having five phosphorus atoms,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and two nitrogen atoms, or
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and three nitrogen atoms is particularly preferred,
A structure having five phosphorus atoms, or
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion is particularly preferred.
　上記式（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子の構造は、
　リン原子を６つ有する構造、
　リン原子を５つと窒素原子を１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を５つと酸素アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を５つと硫黄アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を５つとヒ素原子を１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと窒素原子を２つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと酸素アニオンを２つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと硫黄アニオンを２つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つとヒ素原子を２つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つと窒素原子を３つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つとヒ素原子を３つ有する構造、
　リン原子を２つと窒素原子を４つ有する構造、又は、
　リン原子を２つとヒ素原子を４つ有する構造
が好ましく、
　リン原子を６つ有する構造、
　リン原子を５つと窒素原子を１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を５つと酸素アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を５つと硫黄アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと窒素原子を２つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと酸素アニオンを２つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと硫黄アニオンを２つ有する構造、
　リン原子を３つと窒素原子を３つ有する構造、又は、
　リン原子を２つと窒素原子を４つ有する構造
がより好ましく、
　リン原子を６つ有する構造、
　リン原子を５つと酸素アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を５つと硫黄アニオンを１つ有する構造、
　リン原子を４つと窒素原子を２つ有する構造、又は、
　リン原子を３つと窒素原子を３つ有する構造
が更に好ましく、
　リン原子を６つ有する構造、
　リン原子を５つと酸素アニオンを１つ有する構造、又は、
　リン原子を４つと窒素原子を２つ有する構造
が特に好ましい。 The structures of the molecules represented by the above formulas (Da) to (Dt) are as follows:
A structure having six phosphorus atoms,
A structure having five phosphorus atoms and one nitrogen atom,
A structure having five phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion,
A structure having five phosphorus atoms and one sulfur anion,
A structure having five phosphorus atoms and one arsenic atom,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and two nitrogen atoms,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and two oxygen anions,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and two sulfur anions,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and two arsenic atoms,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and three nitrogen atoms,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and three arsenic atoms,
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and four nitrogen atoms, or
A structure having two phosphorus atoms and four arsenic atoms is preferred,
A structure having six phosphorus atoms,
A structure having five phosphorus atoms and one nitrogen atom,
A structure having five phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion,
A structure having five phosphorus atoms and one sulfur anion,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and two nitrogen atoms,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and two oxygen anions,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and two sulfur anions,
A structure having three phosphorus atoms and three nitrogen atoms, or
More preferred is a structure having two phosphorus atoms and four nitrogen atoms,
A structure having six phosphorus atoms,
A structure having five phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion,
A structure having five phosphorus atoms and one sulfur anion,
A structure having four phosphorus atoms and two nitrogen atoms, or
More preferred is a structure having three phosphorus atoms and three nitrogen atoms,
A structure having six phosphorus atoms,
A structure having five phosphorus atoms and one oxygen anion, or
A structure having 4 phosphorus atoms and 2 nitrogen atoms is particularly preferred.
　上記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子において、Ａｇ+に配位可能な酸素アニオン又は硫黄アニオンを１つ含有することが好ましい。 In the molecules represented by the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt), an oxygen anion capable of coordinating to Ag + Or it is preferable to contain one sulfur anion.
　上記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子中における窒素原子含有複素環式化合物の例としては、ピリジン、ピリダジン、ピリミジン、ピラジン、トリアジン、キノリン、イソキノリン、イミダゾール、ピラゾール、オキサゾール、チアゾール、オキサジアゾール、チアジアゾール、アザジアゾール及びアクリジンが挙げられる。成膜性の良い錯体を形成しやすいので、好ましくはピリジン、イミダゾール、キノリン及びイソキノリンであり、より好ましくはピリジン、イミダゾール及びキノリンであり、更に好ましくはイミダゾール及びキノリンである。 Examples of nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds in the molecules represented by the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt) As pyridine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, triazine, quinoline, isoquinoline, imidazole, pyrazole, oxazole, thiazole, oxadiazole, thiadiazole, azadiazole and acridine. Preferable are pyridine, imidazole, quinoline and isoquinoline, more preferable are pyridine, imidazole and quinoline, and still more preferable are imidazole and quinoline because a complex having good film forming property is easily formed.
　該窒素原子含有複素環式化合物が有し得る置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子、ハロゲン原子で置換されている炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基、炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基、炭素原子数１～２４のヒドロカルビルオキシ基及び炭素原子数１～２４のジアリールアミノ基が挙げられる。このうち、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子、トリフルオロメチル基、トリクロロメチル基、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ドデシル基、オクタデシル基、ドコシル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロへキシル基、シクロオクチル基、シクロドデシル基、ノルボニル基、アダマンチル基、エテニル基、プロペニル基、３－ブテニル基、２－ブテニル基、２－ペンテニル基、フェニル基、１－ナフチル基、２－ナフチル基、２－メチルフェニル基、３－メチルフェニル基、４－メチルフェニル基、２－メトキシフェニル基、３－メトキシフェニル基、４－メトキシフェニル基、４－エチルフェニル基、４－プロピルフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、４－ヘキシルフェニル基、４－シクロヘキシルフェニル基、４－アダマンチルフェニル基、２－フェニルフェニル基、９－フルオレニル基、フェニルメチル基、１－フェニルエチル基、２－フェニルエチル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、フェノキシ基、ジフェニルアミノ基、ビス（２－メチルフェニル）アミノ基、ビス（３－メチルフェニル）アミノ基、ビス（４－メチルフェニル）アミノ基、ビス（４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル）アミノ基、ジナフチルアミノ基が好ましく、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、トリフルオロメチル基、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基、ドデシル基、オクタデシル基、シクロへキシル基、アダマンチル基、エテニル基、フェニル基、２－メチルフェニル基、２－メトキシフェニル基、４－メトキシフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、２－フェニルフェニル基、９－フルオレニル基、フェニルメチル基、１－フェニルエチル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、フェノキシ基、ジフェニルアミノ基、ビス（２－メチルフェニル）アミノ基、ビス（３－メチルフェニル）アミノ基、ビス（４－メチルフェニル）アミノ基及びビス（４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル）アミノ基がより好ましく、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ヘキシル基、エテニル基、フェニルメチル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、ブトキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基及びフェノキシ基、が更に好ましく、フッ素原子、塩素原子、メチル基、ブチル基、メトキシ基、ブトキシ基、及びフェノキシ基が特に好ましい。 Examples of the substituent that the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound may have include a halogen atom, a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms substituted with a halogen atom, a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, carbon Examples thereof include a hydrocarbyloxy group having 1 to 24 atoms and a diarylamino group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms. Among these, fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom, trifluoromethyl group, trichloromethyl group, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, tert-butyl group, pentyl group, Hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, dodecyl, octadecyl, docosyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclooctyl, cyclododecyl, norbornyl, adamantyl, ethenyl, propenyl Group, 3-butenyl group, 2-butenyl group, 2-pentenyl group, phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 3-methylphenyl group, 4-methylphenyl group, 2- Methoxyphenyl group, 3-methoxyphenyl group, 4-methoxyphenyl group, 4-ethyl An phenyl group, a 4-propylphenyl group, a 4-tert-butylphenyl group, a 4-hexylphenyl group, a 4-cyclohexylphenyl group, a 4-adamantylphenyl group, a 2-phenylphenyl group, a 9-fluorenyl group, a phenylmethyl group, 1-phenylethyl group, 2-phenylethyl group, methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, hexyloxy group, phenoxy group, diphenylamino group, bis (2-methylphenyl) amino group, bis (3-methyl Phenyl) amino group, bis (4-methylphenyl) amino group, bis (4-tert-butylphenyl) amino group, and dinaphthylamino group are preferred. Fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, trifluoromethyl group, methyl group , Ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, tert-butyl Group, hexyl group, octyl group, dodecyl group, octadecyl group, cyclohexyl group, adamantyl group, ethenyl group, phenyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 2-methoxyphenyl group, 4-methoxyphenyl group, 4-tert -Butylphenyl group, 2-phenylphenyl group, 9-fluorenyl group, phenylmethyl group, 1-phenylethyl group, methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, hexyloxy group, phenoxy group, diphenylamino group, bis (2-Methylphenyl) amino group, bis (3-methylphenyl) amino group, bis (4-methylphenyl) amino group and bis (4-tert-butylphenyl) amino group are more preferred, and fluorine atom, chlorine atom, Bromine atom, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, t ert-butyl group, hexyl group, ethenyl group, phenylmethyl group, methoxy group, ethoxy group, butoxy group, hexyloxy group and phenoxy group are more preferable, fluorine atom, chlorine atom, methyl group, butyl group, methoxy group, A butoxy group and a phenoxy group are particularly preferable.
　窒素原子含有複素環式化合物が有し得る置換基の数は、０個～４個が好ましく、０個～３個がより好ましく、０個～２個が更に好ましく、特に好ましくは１個～２個である。
　置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物が有し得る該置換基同士が縮合して環構造を形成してもよい。例えば、イミダゾールの４，５－位にエテニル基が結合し、該エテニル基同士が縮合してベンゼン環となり、ベンズイミダゾール骨格を形成してもよい。 The number of substituents that the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound may have is preferably 0 to 4, more preferably 0 to 3, further preferably 0 to 2, and particularly preferably 1 to 2. It is a piece.
The substituent which the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound which may be substituted may have may be condensed to form a ring structure. For example, an ethenyl group may be bonded to the 4,5-position of imidazole, and the ethenyl groups may be condensed to form a benzene ring to form a benzimidazole skeleton.
　上記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子中における置換されていてもよいヒドロカルビル基の、ヒドロカルビル基の例を以下に示す：
　メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ウンデシル基、ドデシル基、ペンタデシル基、オクタデシル基、ドコシル基等の炭素原子数１～５０のアルキル基；
　シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロへキシル基、シクロノニル基、シクロドデシル基、ノルボニル基、アダマンチル基等の炭素原子数３～５０の環状飽和ヒドロカルビル基；
　エテニル基、プロペニル基、３－ブテニル基、２－ブテニル基、２－ペンテニル基、２－ヘキセニル基、２－ノネニル基、２－ドデセニル基等の炭素原子数２～５０のアルケニル基；
　フェニル基、１－ナフチル基、２－ナフチル基、２－メチルフェニル基、３－メチルフェニル基、４－メチルフェニル基、２，４，６－トリメチルフェニル基、２－イソプロピルフェニル基、４－エチルフェニル基、４－プロピルフェニル基、４－イソプロピルフェニル基、４－ブチルフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、４－ヘキシルフェニル基、４－（２－エチルヘキシル）フェニル基、４－シクロヘキシルフェニル基、４－アダマンチルフェニル基、４－フェニルフェニル基、９－フルオレニル基等の炭素原子数６～５０のアリール基；
　フェニルメチル基、１－フェニルエチル基、２－フェニルエチル基、１－フェニル－１－プロピル基、１－フェニル－２－プロピル基、２－フェニル－２－プロピル基、３－フェニル－１－プロピル基、４－フェニル－１－ブチル基、５－フェニル－１－ペンチル基、６－フェニル－１－ヘキシル基等の炭素原子数７～５０のアラルキル基。 Of the hydrocarbyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by the formula (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt) Examples of hydrocarbyl groups are shown below:
Methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, pentadecyl, Alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, such as octadecyl group and docosyl group;
A cyclic saturated hydrocarbyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, such as cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, cyclononyl group, cyclododecyl group, norbornyl group, adamantyl group;
An alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms such as ethenyl group, propenyl group, 3-butenyl group, 2-butenyl group, 2-pentenyl group, 2-hexenyl group, 2-nonenyl group, 2-dodecenyl group;
Phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 3-methylphenyl group, 4-methylphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl group, 2-isopropylphenyl group, 4-ethyl Phenyl group, 4-propylphenyl group, 4-isopropylphenyl group, 4-butylphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, 4- (2-ethylhexyl) phenyl group, 4-cyclohexylphenyl group Aryl groups having 6 to 50 carbon atoms such as 4-adamantylphenyl group, 4-phenylphenyl group and 9-fluorenyl group;
Phenylmethyl, 1-phenylethyl, 2-phenylethyl, 1-phenyl-1-propyl, 1-phenyl-2-propyl, 2-phenyl-2-propyl, 3-phenyl-1-propyl An aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, such as a 4-phenyl-1-butyl group, a 5-phenyl-1-pentyl group, or a 6-phenyl-1-hexyl group.
　個々の事例について特に記載が無い場合、上記ヒドロカルビル基は、好ましくはメチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ヘキシル基、ドデシル基、シクロへキシル基、フェニル基、１－ナフチル基、２－ナフチル基、２－メチルフェニル基、３－メチルフェニル基、４－メチルフェニル基、２，４，６－トリメチルフェニル基、２－イソプロピルフェニル基、４－エチルフェニル基、４－プロピルフェニル基、４－イソプロピルフェニル基、４－ブチルフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、４－ヘキシルフェニル基、４－（２－エチルヘキシル）フェニル基、４－シクロヘキシルフェニル基、４－アダマンチルフェニル基、４－フェニルフェニル基、９－フルオレニル基、フェニルメチル基であり、より好ましくはｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、シクロへキシル基、フェニル基、２－メチルフェニル基、４－メチルフェニル基、２，４，６－トリメチルフェニル基、２－イソプロピルフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、４－ヘキシルフェニル基、４－シクロヘキシルフェニル基であり、更に好ましくはフェニル基、２－メチルフェニル基、２，４，６－トリメチルフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、４－ヘキシルフェニル基であり、特に好ましくはフェニル基、２－メチルフェニル基である。 Unless otherwise specified for individual cases, the hydrocarbyl group is preferably a methyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, dodecyl group, cyclohexyl group, phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 2 -Methylphenyl group, 3-methylphenyl group, 4-methylphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl group, 2-isopropylphenyl group, 4-ethylphenyl group, 4-propylphenyl group, 4-isopropylphenyl group 4-butylphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, 4- (2-ethylhexyl) phenyl group, 4-cyclohexylphenyl group, 4-adamantylphenyl group, 4-phenylphenyl group, 9 A fluorenyl group or a phenylmethyl group, more preferably a tert-butyl group Cyclohexyl group, phenyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 4-methylphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl group, 2-isopropylphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, 4-cyclohexylphenyl group, more preferably phenyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, particularly preferably phenyl A 2-methylphenyl group.
　該ヒドロカルビル基が有し得る置換基の例は、前記窒素原子含有複素環式化合物が有し得る置換基と同様にハロゲン原子、炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基、炭素原子数１～２４のヒドロカルビルオキシ基及び炭素原子数１～２４のジアリールアミノ基である。好ましくは、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子、トリフルオロメチル基、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ドデシル基、オクタデシル基、ドコシル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロへキシル基、シクロオクチル基、シクロドデシル基、ノルボニル基、アダマンチル基、エテニル基、プロペニル基、３－ブテニル基、２－ブテニル基、２－ペンテニル基、フェニル基、１－ナフチル基、２－ナフチル基、２－メチルフェニル基、３－メチルフェニル基、４－メチルフェニル基、２－メトキシフェニル基、３－メトキシフェニル基、４－メトキシフェニル基、４－エチルフェニル基、４－プロピルフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、４－ヘキシルフェニル基、４－シクロヘキシルフェニル基、４－アダマンチルフェニル基、２－フェニルフェニル基、９－フルオレニル基、フェニルメチル基、１－フェニルエチル基、２－フェニルエチル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、フェノキシ基、ジフェニルアミノ基、ビス（２－メチルフェニル）アミノ基、ビス（３－メチルフェニル）アミノ基、ビス（４－メチルフェニル）アミノ基、ビス（４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル）アミノ基及びジナフチルアミノ基であり、より好ましくはフッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、トリフルオロメチル基、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基、ドデシル基、シクロへキシル基、アダマンチル基、フェニル基、１－ナフチル基、２－ナフチル基、２－メチルフェニル基、３－メチルフェニル基、４－メチルフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、９－フルオレニル基、フェニルメチル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、フェノキシ基、ジフェニルアミノ基、ビス（２－メチルフェニル）アミノ基、ビス（３－メチルフェニル）アミノ基、ビス（４－メチルフェニル）アミノ基、ビス（４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル）アミノ基及びジナフチルアミノ基であり、更に好ましくはフッ素原子、トリフルオロメチル基、メチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基、フェニル基、２－メチルフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、フェニルメチル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、ブトキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、及びフェノキシ基であり、特に好ましくはフッ素原子、メチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、及びメトキシ基である。 Examples of the substituent that the hydrocarbyl group may have are the same as the substituent that the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound may have, a halogen atom, a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and a substituent having 1 to 24 carbon atoms. A hydrocarbyloxy group and a diarylamino group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms. Preferably, fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom, trifluoromethyl group, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, tert-butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl Group, octyl group, nonyl group, decyl group, dodecyl group, octadecyl group, docosyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, cyclooctyl group, cyclododecyl group, norbornyl group, adamantyl group, ethenyl group, propenyl group, 3- Butenyl group, 2-butenyl group, 2-pentenyl group, phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 3-methylphenyl group, 4-methylphenyl group, 2-methoxyphenyl group, 3-methoxyphenyl group, 4-methoxyphenyl group, 4-ethylphenyl group, 4-propyl Pyrphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, 4-cyclohexylphenyl group, 4-adamantylphenyl group, 2-phenylphenyl group, 9-fluorenyl group, phenylmethyl group, 1-phenylethyl group, 2-phenylethyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, hexyloxy, phenoxy, diphenylamino, bis (2-methylphenyl) amino, bis (3-methylphenyl) amino, bis (4-methylphenyl) amino group, bis (4-tert-butylphenyl) amino group and dinaphthylamino group, more preferably fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, trifluoromethyl group, methyl group, ethyl group Propyl group, butyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, Til, dodecyl, cyclohexyl, adamantyl, phenyl, 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 2-methylphenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 4-tert-butyl Phenyl group, 9-fluorenyl group, phenylmethyl group, methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, hexyloxy group, phenoxy group, diphenylamino group, bis (2-methylphenyl) amino group, bis (3-methyl Phenyl) amino group, bis (4-methylphenyl) amino group, bis (4-tert-butylphenyl) amino group and dinaphthylamino group, more preferably fluorine atom, trifluoromethyl group, methyl group, tert- Butyl, hexyl, octyl, phenyl, 2-methylphenyl, 4-tert -Butylphenyl group, phenylmethyl group, methoxy group, ethoxy group, butoxy group, hexyloxy group, and phenoxy group, particularly preferably a fluorine atom, a methyl group, a tert-butyl group, and a methoxy group.
　上記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子中における置換されていてもよいアルキル基の例としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ウンデシル基、ドデシル基、ペンタデシル基、オクタデシル基、ドコシル基等の、炭素原子数１～３０の直鎖状ヒドロカルビル基が挙げられるが、イソプロピル基、イソブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基及び２－エチルヘキシル基のように分岐構造を有するアルキル基でもよく、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロへキシル基、シクロノニル基、シクロドデシル基、ノルボニル基及びアダマンチル基のように環状構造を有するアルキル基でもよい。好ましくはメチル基、エチル基、ブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基、ドデシル基、オクタデシル基及びシクロへキシル基であり、より好ましくはメチル基、ブチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基であり、更に好ましくはメチル基である。 Of the alkyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by the formula (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt). Examples include methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, pentadecyl, octadecyl, docosyl, etc. And a straight-chain hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, which may be an alkyl group having a branched structure such as an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a tert-butyl group and a 2-ethylhexyl group. Cyclic structures such as groups, cyclopentyl groups, cyclohexyl groups, cyclononyl groups, cyclododecyl groups, norbornyl groups and adamantyl groups Or an alkyl group having. Preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a dodecyl group, an octadecyl group and a cyclohexyl group, more preferably a methyl group, a butyl group, a hexyl group and an octyl group. More preferably a methyl group.
　前記置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基の例としては、前記置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物の例のうち水素原子を２つ以上持つ化合物の構造から２つの水素原子を除いた基と同様のものが挙げられる。前記置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基の例としては、前記置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物の例のうち水素原子を３つ以上持つ化合物の構造から３つの水素原子を除いた基と同様のものが挙げられる。前記置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を４つ除いた４価の基の例としては、前記置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物の例のうち水素原子を４つ以上持つ化合物の構造から４つの水素原子を除いた基と同様のものが挙げられる。前記置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を５つ除いた５価の基の例としては、前記置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物の例のうち水素原子を５つ以上持つ化合物の構造から５つの水素原子を除いた基と同様のものが挙げられる。前記置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を６つ除いた６価の基の例としては、前記置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物の例のうち水素原子を６つ以上持つ化合物の構造から６つの水素原子を除いた基と同様のものが挙げられる。 Examples of the group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound include 2 hydrogen atoms in the above-described example of the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. Examples thereof include the same groups as those obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the structure of a compound having two or more compounds. Examples of the group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound include 3 hydrogen atoms among the above-described examples of the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. Examples thereof include the same groups as those obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the structure of a compound having two or more compounds. Examples of the tetravalent group obtained by removing four hydrogen atoms from the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound include hydrogen among the examples of the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. Examples thereof include the same groups as those obtained by removing four hydrogen atoms from the structure of a compound having four or more atoms. Examples of the pentavalent group obtained by removing five hydrogen atoms from the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound include hydrogen among the examples of the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. Examples thereof include the same groups as those obtained by removing five hydrogen atoms from the structure of a compound having 5 or more atoms. Examples of the hexavalent group obtained by removing six hydrogen atoms from the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound include hydrogen among the examples of the optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. Examples thereof include the same groups as those obtained by removing six hydrogen atoms from the structure of a compound having 6 or more atoms.
　前記Ｒ2Aa、Ｒ2Ba、Ｒ2Bb、Ｒ2Bc、Ｒ2Ca、Ｒ2Cb、Ｒ2Cc、Ｒ2Cd、Ｒ2Ce、Ｒ2Cf、Ｒ2Ch、Ｒ2Da、Ｒ2Db、Ｒ2Dc、Ｒ2Dd、Ｒ2De、Ｒ2Df、Ｒ2Dg、Ｒ2Dh、Ｒ2Di、Ｒ2Dj、Ｒ2Dk、Ｒ2Dl、Ｒ2Dm、Ｒ2Dn、Ｒ2Do、Ｒ2Dq、Ｒ2Dr及びＲ2Dsで表される基（以下、Ｒ2Xxで表される基と記す）の例としては、以下のものが挙げられる。
　置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルカンジイル基；炭素原子数２～３０のアルケンジイル基；置換されていてもよい主鎖炭素原子数２～３０のアルキンジイル基；置換されていてもよい炭素原子数４～３０のシクロアルカンジイル基；置換されていてもよい炭素原子数６～３０のアレーンジイル基、などのヒドロカルビレン基、すなわち２価のヒドロカルビル基。
　置換されていてもよいヒドロカルビレン基と－Ｏ－及び／又は－Ｓ－とを組み合わせてできる基。
　置換されていてもよい下記式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基（例えば下記式ｒ１’～ｒ１２’のいずれかで表される基）。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 （式中、Ｙ1は、－（ＣＨ2）n－、－Ｏ－、－Ｓ－、－Ｎ（Ｒ50）－、－Ｓｉ（Ｒ51）2－、－Ｏ（ＣＨ2）n－、又は、－Ｏ（ＣＨ2）nＯ－で表される基である。Ｙ2は、－（ＣＨ2）n－、－Ｏ－、－Ｓ－、又は、－Ｓｉ（Ｒ51）2－で表される基である。ｎは１～３の整数である。Ｒ50は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のアリール基であり、Ｒ51は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基である。） Wherein R 2Aa, R 2Ba, R 2Bb , R 2Bc, R 2Ca, R 2Cb, R 2Cc, R 2Cd, R 2Ce, R 2Cf, R 2Ch, R 2Da, R 2Db, R 2Dc, R 2Dd, R 2De, R 2Df, R 2Dg, R 2Dh, R 2Di, R 2Dj, R 2Dk, R 2Dl, R 2Dm, R 2Dn, R 2Do, R 2Dq, groups represented by R 2Dr and R 2DS (hereinafter, represented by R 2xx Examples of such a group are as follows.
An optionally substituted alkanediyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms; an alkenediyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms; an optionally substituted alkynediyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms; A hydrocarbylene group such as a cycloalkanediyl group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms; an arenediyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms which may be substituted; that is, a divalent hydrocarbyl group.
A group formed by combining an optionally substituted hydrocarbylene group with —O— and / or —S—.
A group represented by any one of the following formulas r1 to r12 which may be substituted (for example, a group represented by any one of the following formulas r1 ′ to r12 ′).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 Wherein Y 1 is — (CH 2 ) n —, —O—, —S— , —N (R 50 ) —, —Si (R 51 ) 2 —, —O (CH 2 ) n —, Or a group represented by —O (CH 2 ) n O— Y 2 is — (CH 2 ) n —, —O—, —S—, or —Si (R 51 ) 2 —. N is an integer of 1 to 3. R 50 is an optionally substituted aryl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 51 is an optionally substituted carbon atom. 1 to 50 hydrocarbyl groups.)
　上記Ｒ50で表される置換されていてもよいアリール基の、アリール基の例としては、フェニル基、１－ナフチル基、２－ナフチル基、２－メチルフェニル基、３－メチルフェニル基、４－メチルフェニル基、２，４，６－トリメチルフェニル基、２－イソプロピルフェニル基、４－エチルフェニル基、４－プロピルフェニル基、４－イソプロピルフェニル基、４－ブチルフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、４－ヘキシルフェニル基、４－（２－エチルヘキシル）フェニル基、４－シクロヘキシルフェニル基、４－アダマンチルフェニル基、４－フェニルフェニル基及び９－フルオレニル基が挙げられる。好ましくはフェニル基、２－メチルフェニル基、４－メチルフェニル基、２，４，６－トリメチルフェニル基、２－イソプロピルフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基及び４－ヘキシルフェニル基であり、より好ましくはフェニル基、２－メチルフェニル基、２，４，６－トリメチルフェニル基及び４－ヘキシルフェニル基であり、更に好ましくはフェニル基である。 Examples of the aryl group which may be substituted represented by R 50 are phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 3-methylphenyl group, 4 -Methylphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl group, 2-isopropylphenyl group, 4-ethylphenyl group, 4-propylphenyl group, 4-isopropylphenyl group, 4-butylphenyl group, 4-tert-butyl Examples include phenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, 4- (2-ethylhexyl) phenyl group, 4-cyclohexylphenyl group, 4-adamantylphenyl group, 4-phenylphenyl group, and 9-fluorenyl group. Preferred are phenyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 4-methylphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl group, 2-isopropylphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group and 4-hexylphenyl group, and more Preferred are phenyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl group and 4-hexylphenyl group, and more preferred is phenyl group.
　上記Ｒ51で表される置換されていてもよいヒドロカルビル基の、ヒドロカルビル基の例は、前記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子中における置換されていてもよいヒドロカルビル基の、ヒドロカルビル基の例と同様である。 Examples of the hydrocarbyl group of the optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group represented by R 51 are the formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and Examples of the hydrocarbyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by (Da) to (Dt) are the same as those of the hydrocarbyl group.
　好ましくは、
　メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ウンデシル基、ドデシル基、ペンタデシル基、オクタデシル基、ドコシル基等の炭素原子数１～５０のアルキル基；
　シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロへキシル基、シクロノニル基、シクロドデシル基、ノルボニル基、アダマンチル基等の炭素原子数３～５０の環状飽和ヒドロカルビル基；
　フェニル基、１－ナフチル基、２－ナフチル基、２－メチルフェニル基、３－メチルフェニル基、４－メチルフェニル基、２，４，６－トリメチルフェニル基、２－イソプロピルフェニル基、４－エチルフェニル基、４－プロピルフェニル基、４－イソプロピルフェニル基、４－ブチルフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、４－ヘキシルフェニル基、４－（２－エチルヘキシル）フェニル基、４－シクロヘキシルフェニル基、４－アダマンチルフェニル基、４－フェニルフェニル基、９－フルオレニル基等の炭素原子数６～５０のアリール基である。より好ましくは、
　メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ウンデシル基、ドデシル基、ペンタデシル基、オクタデシル基等の炭素原子数１～１８のアルキル基；
　フェニル基、２－メチルフェニル基、３－メチルフェニル基、４－メチルフェニル基、２，４，６－トリメチルフェニル基、２－イソプロピルフェニル基、４－エチルフェニル基、４－プロピルフェニル基、４－イソプロピルフェニル基、４－ブチルフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、４－ヘキシルフェニル基、４－（２－エチルヘキシル）フェニル基、４－シクロヘキシルフェニル基等の炭素原子数６～２４のアリール基である。更に好ましくは、炭素原子数１～８のアルキル基及びフェニル基である。 Preferably,
Methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, pentadecyl, Alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, such as octadecyl group and docosyl group;
A cyclic saturated hydrocarbyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, such as cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, cyclononyl group, cyclododecyl group, norbornyl group, adamantyl group;
Phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 3-methylphenyl group, 4-methylphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl group, 2-isopropylphenyl group, 4-ethyl Phenyl group, 4-propylphenyl group, 4-isopropylphenyl group, 4-butylphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, 4- (2-ethylhexyl) phenyl group, 4-cyclohexylphenyl group An aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, such as 4-adamantylphenyl group, 4-phenylphenyl group, 9-fluorenyl group. More preferably,
Methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, pentadecyl, An alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, such as an octadecyl group;
Phenyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 3-methylphenyl group, 4-methylphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl group, 2-isopropylphenyl group, 4-ethylphenyl group, 4-propylphenyl group, 4 Aryl having 6 to 24 carbon atoms such as isopropylphenyl group, 4-butylphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, 4- (2-ethylhexyl) phenyl group, 4-cyclohexylphenyl group, etc. It is a group. More preferred are alkyl groups having 1 to 8 carbon atoms and phenyl groups.
　前記置換されていてもよい式ｒ１～ｒ１２で表される基の例である置換されていてもよい式ｒ１’～ｒ１２’で表される基を以下に示す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 （式中、Ｙ3は、－ＣＨ2－、－Ｏ－、－Ｓ－、－Ｎ（Ｒ52）－、又は、－Ｓｉ（Ｒ53）2－で表される基である。Ｒ52は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～１８のアリール基であり、Ｒ53は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～１８のヒドロカルビル基である。） The groups represented by the formulas r1 ′ to r12 ′ that may be substituted, which are examples of the groups represented by the formulas r1 to r12 that may be substituted, are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 (Wherein, Y 3 is, -CH 2 -, - O - , - S -, - N (R 52) -, or, -Si (R 53) 2 - .R 52 is a group represented by the (It is an aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms which may be substituted, and R 53 is a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms which may be substituted.)
　上記Ｒ52で表される置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～１８のアリール基の例と好ましい構造は、前記Ｒ50で表される置換されていてもよいアリール基の例及び好ましい例のうち、炭素原子数が１～１８のものと同様である。 Examples of the aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms which may be substituted represented by R 52 and preferred structures thereof include examples of the aryl group which may be substituted and represented by R 50 . Of these, those having 1 to 18 carbon atoms are the same.
　上記Ｒ53で表される置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～１８のヒドロカルビル基の例及び好ましい構造は、前記Ｒ51で表されるヒドロカルビル基の例及び好ましい構造のうち、炭素原子数が１～１８のものと同様である。 Examples of the optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms represented by R 53 and preferred structures thereof include, among the examples and preferred structures of the hydrocarbyl group represented by R 51 , the number of carbon atoms. Similar to those of 1-18.
　前記Ｒ2Xxで表される基としては、置換されていてもよい前記式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基が好ましく、置換されていてもよい前記式ｒ１、ｒ２、ｒ５、ｒ６、ｒ８及びｒ９のいずれかで表される基、前記式ｒ１０で表される基であって式中のＹ1が－Ｏ－又は－Ｎ（Ｒ50）－である基、前記式ｒ１１で表される基であって式中のＹ1が－Ｏ－又は－Ｓ－である基、前記式ｒ１２で表される基であって、式中のＹ1が－Ｏ－であり、Ｙ2が－ＣＨ2－である基、前記式ｒ１２で表される基であって、式中のＹ1が－Ｏ－であり、Ｙ2が－Ｓｉ（Ｒ51）2－である基がより好ましく、置換されていてもよい前記式ｒ１'、ｒ５'、ｒ６'及びｒ１０'のいずれかで表される基、前記式ｒ１２'で表される基であって、式中のＹ3が－ＣＨ2－である基、前記式ｒ１２'で表される基であって、式中のＹ3が－Ｓｉ（ＣＨ3）2－である基が更に好ましい。 The group represented by R 2Xx is preferably a group represented by any one of the aforementioned formulas r1 to r12 which may be substituted, and may optionally be substituted by the formulas r1, r2, r5, r6, r8 And a group represented by any one of r9, a group represented by the formula r10, wherein Y 1 is —O— or —N (R 50 ) —, represented by the formula r11 A group in which Y 1 is —O— or —S—, a group represented by the formula r12, wherein Y 1 is —O—, and Y 2 is —CH 2 - is group, a group represented by the formula r12, a Y 1 in the formula is -O-, Y 2 is -Si (R 51) 2 - group are more preferably, substituted A group represented by any one of the formulas r1 ′, r5 ′, r6 ′ and r10 ′, and a group represented by the formula r12 ′, wherein Y 3 in the formula is —CH 2 —; Ah And a group represented by the formula r12 ′, wherein Y 3 in the formula is —Si (CH 3 ) 2 —.
　前記Ｒ2Xxで表される基が有し得る置換基の例は、前記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子中における置換されていてもよいヒドロカルビル基が有し得る置換基と同様にハロゲン原子、炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基、炭素原子数１～２４のヒドロカルビルオキシ基及び炭素原子数１～２４のジアリールアミノ基である。好ましくはフッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、トリフルオロメチル基、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、ドデシル基、オクタデシル基、シクロへキシル基、エテニル基、プロペニル基、３－ブテニル基、フェニル基、１－ナフチル基、２－ナフチル基、２－メチルフェニル基、３－メチルフェニル基、４－メチルフェニル基、２－メトキシフェニル基、３－メトキシフェニル基、４－メトキシフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、４－ヘキシルフェニル基、４－シクロヘキシルフェニル基、２－フェニルフェニル基、２－フェニルエチル基、メトキシ基、ブトキシ基、フェノキシ基、ジフェニルアミノ基であり、より好ましくはフッ素原子、塩素原子、トリフルオロメチル基、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基、シクロへキシル基、フェニル基、２－メチルフェニル基、４－メチルフェニル基、２－メトキシフェニル基、４－メトキシフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、４－ヘキシルフェニル基、メトキシ基、ブトキシ基、フェノキシ基、ジフェニルアミノ基であり、更に好ましくはフッ素原子、トリフルオロメチル基、メチル基、ブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、フェニル基、４－メチルフェニル基、４－メトキシフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、メトキシ基であり、特に好ましくはフッ素原子、メチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基である。 Examples of the substituent that the group represented by R 2Xx may have are the formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Da) Dt) In the molecule represented by Dt), a halogen atom, a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a hydrocarbyloxy group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, A diarylamino group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms; Preferably fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, trifluoromethyl group, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, tert-butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group , Dodecyl group, octadecyl group, cyclohexyl group, ethenyl group, propenyl group, 3-butenyl group, phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 3-methylphenyl group, 4- Methylphenyl group, 2-methoxyphenyl group, 3-methoxyphenyl group, 4-methoxyphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, 4-cyclohexylphenyl group, 2-phenylphenyl group, 2- Phenylethyl group, methoxy group, butoxy group, phenoxy group, diphenylamino group, Preferably fluorine atom, chlorine atom, trifluoromethyl group, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, octyl group, cyclohexyl group, phenyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 4-methylphenyl group, 2-methoxyphenyl group, 4-methoxyphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, methoxy group, butoxy group, phenoxy group, diphenylamino group, more preferably Fluorine atom, trifluoromethyl group, methyl group, butyl group, tert-butyl group, phenyl group, 4-methylphenyl group, 4-methoxyphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group, methoxy group, particularly preferably A fluorine atom, a methyl group, and a tert-butyl group;
　前記Ｒ2Xxで表される基が有し得る置換基の数は、０～４個が好ましく、０～３個がより好ましく、０～２個が更に好ましい。Ｒ2Xxで表される基が前記ｒ１’～ｒ１２’で表される基である場合、前記置換基の位置は以下に示す位置が望ましい。
　ｒ１’：好ましくは、２’及び３’から選ばれる１箇所以上；
　ｒ２’：好ましくは、２’、３’、４’及び５’から選ばれる１箇所以上、より好ましくは、２’及び５’の２箇所、又は、３’及び４’の２箇所；
　ｒ３’：好ましくは、２’、３’、４’、５’、６’及び８’から選ばれる１箇所以上、より好ましくは、４’のみの１箇所、２’及び６’の２箇所、３’及び５’の２箇所、２’、４’及び６’の３箇所、又は、３’、４’及び５’の３箇所；
　ｒ４’：好ましくは、２’、３’、４’、５’、６’及び７’から選ばれる１箇所以上、より好ましくは、２’及び７’の２箇所、３’及び６’の２箇所、又は、４’及び５’の２箇所；
　ｒ５’：好ましくは、２’、３’、４’、５’、６’及び７’から選ばれる１箇所以上、より好ましくは、２’及び７’の２箇所、又は、３’及び６’の２箇所、更に好ましくは２’及び７’の２箇所；
　ｒ６’：好ましくは、２’、３’、４’、５’、８’、９’、１０’及び１１’から選ばれる１箇所以上、より好ましくは、２’及び１１’の２箇所、３’及び１０’の２箇所、又は、４’及び９’の２箇所；
　ｒ７’：好ましくは、２’、３’、４’、５’、６’及び７’から選ばれる１箇所以上、より好ましくは、２’及び７’の２箇所；
　ｒ８’：好ましくは、２’、３’、５’、６’、７’、８’、９’及び１０’から選ばれる１箇所以上、より好ましくは、２’及び６’の２箇所、又は、３’及び５’の２箇所；
　ｒ９’：好ましくは、２’及び５’から選ばれる１箇所以上；
　ｒ１０’：好ましくは、２’、３’、４’、５’、６’及び７’から選ばれる１箇所以上、より好ましくは、２’及び７’の２箇所、又は、３’及び６’の２箇所、更に好ましくは、２’及び７’の２箇所；
　ｒ１１’：好ましくは、２’、３’、４’及び５’から選ばれる１箇所以上、より好ましくは、２’及び５’の２箇所；
　ｒ１２’でＹ3が－ＣＨ2－である場合：２’、３’、４’、５’及び７’から選ばれる１箇所以上、より好ましくは、７’における２箇所と、２’、３’、４’及び５’から選ばれる１箇所以上の合計３箇所以上、より好ましくは、７’における２箇所と、２’、３’、４’及び５’から選ばれる２箇所以上の合計４箇所以上、更に好ましくは、７’における２箇所と、２’及び５’の２箇所との合計４箇所；
　ｒ１２’でＹ3が－ＣＨ2－以外の場合：２’、３’、４’及び５’から選ばれる１箇所以上、より好ましくは、２’、３’、４’及び５’から選ばれる２箇所以上、より好ましくは、２’及び５’の２箇所。 The number of substituents that the group represented by R 2Xx may have is preferably 0 to 4, more preferably 0 to 3, and still more preferably 0 to 2. When the group represented by R 2Xx is the group represented by r1 ′ to r12 ′, the position of the substituent is preferably the following position.
r1 ′: preferably one or more selected from 2 ′ and 3 ′;
r2 ′: Preferably, one or more selected from 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′ and 5 ′, more preferably two of 2 ′ and 5 ′, or two of 3 ′ and 4 ′;
r3 ′: Preferably, one or more locations selected from 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′, 5 ′, 6 ′ and 8 ′, more preferably, only one location of 4 ′, two locations of 2 ′ and 6 ′, 2 locations 3 ′ and 5 ′, 3 locations 2 ′, 4 ′ and 6 ′, or 3 locations 3 ′, 4 ′ and 5 ′;
r4 ′: Preferably, one or more locations selected from 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′, 5 ′, 6 ′ and 7 ′, more preferably 2 locations of 2 ′ and 7 ′, 2 of 3 ′ and 6 ′ Or two places, 4 'and 5';
r5 ′: Preferably, one or more locations selected from 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′, 5 ′, 6 ′ and 7 ′, more preferably 2 locations of 2 ′ and 7 ′, or 3 ′ and 6 ′ And more preferably 2 ′ and 7 ′;
r6 ′: Preferably, one or more selected from 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′, 5 ′, 8 ′, 9 ′, 10 ′, and 11 ′, more preferably, two locations of 2 ′ and 11 ′, 3 Two places 'and 10' or two places 4 'and 9';
r7 ′: Preferably, one or more sites selected from 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′, 5 ′, 6 ′ and 7 ′, more preferably 2 sites of 2 ′ and 7 ′;
r8 ′: Preferably, one or more positions selected from 2 ′, 3 ′, 5 ′, 6 ′, 7 ′, 8 ′, 9 ′ and 10 ′, more preferably two positions 2 ′ and 6 ′, or 2 ', 3' and 5 ';
r9 ′: preferably one or more selected from 2 ′ and 5 ′;
r10 ′: Preferably, one or more locations selected from 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′, 5 ′, 6 ′ and 7 ′, more preferably 2 locations of 2 ′ and 7 ′, or 3 ′ and 6 ′ Two, more preferably 2 ′ and 7 ′;
r11 ′: Preferably, one or more selected from 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′ and 5 ′, more preferably two positions of 2 ′ and 5 ′;
When r 3 ′ and Y 3 is —CH 2 —: one or more selected from 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′, 5 ′ and 7 ′, more preferably 2 positions in 7 ′ and 2 ′, 3 3 or more in total of 1 or more selected from “4” and 5 ′, more preferably, 2 in 7 ′ and 4 in total of 2 or more selected from 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′ and 5 ′ 4 or more, more preferably, 2 locations in 7 ′ and 2 locations in 2 ′ and 5 ′ in total; 4 locations;
When r3 ′ and Y 3 are other than —CH 2 —: One or more selected from 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′ and 5 ′, more preferably 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′ and 5 ′ 2 or more, more preferably 2 ′ and 2 ′.
　前記Ｒ2Xxで表される基が複数ある場合、安定な錯体を構築できるので、複数あるＲ2Xxで表される基のうち１つ以上のＲ2Xxで表される基は直接結合ではないことが好ましい。例えば、前記式（Ｂａ）における３つのＲ2Baのうち１つ以上のＲ2Baは、直接結合ではないことが好ましく、この場合の前記式（Ｂａ）で表される分子は下記式（Ｂａ’）で表される分子である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 （式（Ｂａ’）中、Ｑ1Ba及びＱ2Baの定義は、前記式（Ｂａ）におけるＱ1Ba及びＱ2Baと同様である。
　Ｒ2Ba’の定義、例及び好ましい例は、３つあるＲ2Ba’のうち少なくとも１つは直接結合ではないことを除き、前記式（Ｂａ）におけるＲ2Baと同様である。） Where a group represented by R 2xx there is a plurality, it is possible to construct a stable complex, the group represented by one or more R 2xx Among the groups represented by plural R 2xx is not a direct bond preferable. For example, one or more R 2Ba of the three R 2Ba in the formula (Ba) is preferably not a direct bond, molecules of the above formula in this case (Ba) is the following formula (Ba ') It is a molecule represented by
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 (Defined in the formula (Ba '), Q 1Ba and Q 2Ba are the same as Q 1Ba and Q 2Ba in the formula (Ba).
'Defining, examples and preferable examples, there are three R 2Ba' R 2Ba least one of the exception that it is not a direct bond, is the same as R 2Ba in formula (Ba). )
　前記Ｒ3Ab、Ｒ3Bb、Ｒ3Cb、Ｒ3Cd、Ｒ3Cf、Ｒ3Cg、Ｒ3Db、Ｒ3De、Ｒ3Dg、Ｒ3Dh、Ｒ3Dj、Ｒ3Dl、Ｒ3Dn、Ｒ3Dp及びＲ3Dq（以下、これらの基をＲ3Xxと総称する）で表される基の例としては、置換されていてもよい下記式ｒ３１及びｒ３２のいずれかで表される基が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 （式ｒ３１、ｒ３２中、Ｙ4はＣ、Ｓｉ、又は、Ｂ－である。Ｙ5、Ｙ6及びＹ7はそれぞれ独立に、直接結合、又は置換されていてもよい－（ＣＨ2）nｍ－であり、該ＣＨ2は隣同士でない限り任意の数だけＯに置き換わってもよく、ｎｍは１～８の整数である。複数のＹ5、Ｙ6、Ｙ7はそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。Ｒ31は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基である。Ｒ32は直接結合又は置換されていてもよい上記式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基である。Ｒ33は置換されていてもよい上記式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基である。複数のＲ32、Ｒ33はそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよく、Ｙ5、Ｙ6、Ｙ7、Ｒ31、Ｒ32及びＲ33から選ばれる２以上の基が任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。） R 3Ab , R 3Bb , R 3Cb , R 3Cd , R 3Cf , R 3Cg , R 3Db , R 3De , R 3Dg , R 3Dh , R 3Dj , R 3Dl , R 3Dn , R 3Dp and R 3Dq (hereinafter referred to as these Examples of the group represented by R 3Xx ) include groups represented by any of the following formulas r31 and r32 which may be substituted.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 (In the formula r31, r32, Y 4 is C, Si, or, B - a is .Y 5, Y 6 and Y 7 are each independently a direct bond or optionally substituted - (CH 2) nm As long as it is not adjacent to each other, any number of CH 2 may be replaced with O, and nm is an integer of 1 to 8. A plurality of Y 5 , Y 6 and Y 7 may be the same or different. R 31 is an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 32 is a group represented by any one of the above formulas r1 to r12 which may be directly bonded or substituted. R 33 is an optionally substituted group represented by any one of the above formulas r1 to r12, and the plurality of R 32 and R 33 may be the same or different, and Y 5 , Y 6 , Two or more groups selected from Y 7 , R 31 , R 32 and R 33 are optionally bonded to form a ring. May be.)
　上記Ｒ31における置換されていてもよいヒドロカルビル基のヒドロカルビル基の例及び好ましい例は、上記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子中における置換されていてもよいヒドロカルビル基の例及び好ましい例と同様である。該ヒドロカルビル基が有し得る置換基の例及び好ましい例も、上記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子中における置換されていてもよいヒドロカルビル基が有し得る置換基の例及び好ましい例と同様である。 Examples and preferred examples of the hydrocarbyl group of the optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group in R 31 are the formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and ( Examples of the hydrocarbyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by Da) to (Dt) and the preferable examples thereof are the same. Examples and preferred examples of the substituent that the hydrocarbyl group may have are also the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt). The examples are the same as the examples and preferred examples of the substituent that the hydrocarbyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by
　上記Ｒ32及びＲ33は、それぞれ独立に、直接結合又は置換されていてもよい前記式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基である。好ましくは置換されていてもよい前記式ｒ１、ｒ２、ｒ４、ｒ５、ｒ８及びｒ１０のいずれかで表される基であり、より好ましくは置換されていてもよい前記式ｒ１、ｒ２、ｒ５及びｒ１０のいずれかで表される基である。上記Ｒ32及びＲ33が前記式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基である場合に、前記式ｒ１～ｒ１２で表される基が有し得る置換基の例及び好ましい例は前記Ｒ2Xxで表される基が有し得る置換基の例及び好ましい例と同様である。 R 32 and R 33 are each independently a group represented by any one of the formulas r1 to r12 which may be directly bonded or substituted. Preferably, it is a group represented by any one of the aforementioned formulas r1, r2, r4, r5, r8 and r10 which may be substituted, and more preferably, the formulas r1, r2, r5 and r10 which may be substituted. It is group represented by either. In the case where R 32 and R 33 are groups represented by any of the above formulas r1 to r12, examples of substituents that the groups represented by the above formulas r1 to r12 may have and preferred examples thereof are the above R 2Xx This is the same as the examples and preferred examples of the substituent that the group represented by
　前記Ｒ4Bd、Ｒ4Ce、Ｒ4Dd、Ｒ4Di、Ｒ4Do及びＲ4Dp（以下、これらの基をＲ4Xxと総称する）で表される４価の基の例としては、置換されていてもよい下記式ｒ４１で表される基が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 （式中、Ｙ8はＣ、Ｓｉ、又は、Ｂ-であり、Ｙ9は直接結合であるか、又は－（ＣＨ2）nn－、－Ｏ－、－Ｓ－、－Ｎ（Ｒ60）－、若しくは－Ｓｉ（Ｒ61）2－で表される基である。ｎｎは１～３の整数である。２つのＹ9は同じでも異なっていてもよい。Ｒ60は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～１８のアリール基であり、Ｒ61は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～１８のヒドロカルビル基である。） Wherein R 4Bd, R 4Ce, R 4Dd , R 4Di, R 4Do and R 4DP Examples of tetravalent groups represented by (hereinafter, these groups collectively referred to as R 4xx), it may be substituted Examples include the group represented by the following formula r41.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 (Wherein, Y 8 is C, Si, or, B - a is either Y 9 is a direct bond or - (CH 2) nn -, - O -, - S -, - N (R 60) Or a group represented by —Si (R 61 ) 2 —, nn is an integer of 1 to 3. Two Y 9 s may be the same or different, and R 60 may be substituted. A good aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and R 61 is an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms.)
　ｒ４１が有し得る置換基の例及び好ましい例は、前記Ｒ2Xxで表される基が有し得る置換基の例及び好ましい例と同様である。 Examples and preferred examples of the substituent that r41 may have are the same as the examples and preferred examples of the substituent that the group represented by R 2Xx may have.
　Ｒ60で表されるアリール基の例及び好ましい例は、それぞれ、前記Ｒ52で表されるアリール基の例及び好ましい例と同様である。 Examples and preferred examples of the aryl group represented by R 60 are the same as those of the aryl group represented by R 52 and preferred examples, respectively.
　Ｒ61で表されるヒドロカルビル基の例及び好ましい例は、それぞれ、前記Ｒ53で表されるヒドロカルビル基の例及び好ましい例と同様である。 Examples and preferred examples of the hydrocarbyl group represented by R 61 are the same as the examples and preferred examples of the hydrocarbyl group represented by R 53 , respectively.
　ｒ４１のＹ8とＹ9の組み合わせとして、好ましくは、Ｙ8がＣであり２つのＹ9が共に－Ｏ－である組み合わせ、Ｙ8がＳｉであり２つのＹ9が共に－Ｏ－である組み合わせ、Ｙ8がＣであり２つのＹ9が共に－Ｓ－である組み合わせ、Ｙ8がＳｉであり２つのＹ9が共に－Ｓ－である組み合わせ、及びＹ8がＢ－であり２つのＹ9が共に－Ｏ－である組み合わせが挙げられる。より好ましい組み合わせは、Ｙ8がＳｉであり２つのＹ9が共に－Ｏ－である。 as a combination of Y 8 and Y 9 of the r41, is preferably a combination Y 8 is located at C 2 both Y 9 are both -O-, Y 8 is located in Si 2 both Y 9 are both -O- combination, the combination Y 8 is located at C 2 both Y 9 are both -S-, combination Y 8 is located in Si 2 both Y 9 are both -S-, and Y 8 is B - a is two A combination in which both Y 9 are —O— is exemplified. A more preferred combination is that Y 8 is Si and the two Y 9 are both —O—.
　前記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）及び（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）における各基の組み合わせの好ましい例は、以下のとおりである。 Preferred examples of combinations of groups in the formulas (Aa), (Ab) and (Ba) to (Bd) are as follows.
　前記式（Ａａ）におけるＱ1AaとＱ2Aaの好ましい組み合わせは、
（１）１つのＱ1Aaが－Ｐ（Ｒ11Aa）2であり、
　もう１つのＱ1Aaが、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Aa）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-であり、
　Ｑ2Aaが、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Aa）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Aa）－、又は、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基であり、
　Ｒ11Aa、Ｒ12Aa、Ｒ22Aa及びＲ23Aaが、それぞれ独立に、置換されていてもよいフェニル基である組み合わせ；
（２）１つのＱ1Aaが－Ｐ（Ｒ11Aa）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Aa）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ－であり、
　もう１つのＱ1Aaが、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Aa）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Aa）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-であり、
　Ｑ2Aaが、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Aa）－であり、
　Ｒ11Aa、Ｒ12Aa及びＲ22Aaが、それぞれ独立に、置換されていてもよいフェニル基である組み合わせ
である。
（３）１つのＱ1Aaが－Ｐ（Ｒ11Aa）2であり、
　もう１つのＱ1Aaが、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Aa）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Aa）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｏ－、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-であり、
　Ｑ2Aaが、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Aa）－、又は、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基であり、
　Ｒ11Aa、Ｒ12Aa及びＲ23Aaが、それぞれ独立に、置換されていてもよいフェニル基である組み合わせ；
であり、より好ましくは、
　１つのＱ1Aaが－Ｐ（Ｒ11Aa）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Aa）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｏ－、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-であり、
　もう１つのＱ1Aaが、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Aa）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-であり、
　Ｑ2Aaが、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Aa）－であり、
　Ｒ11Aa、Ｒ12Aa及びＲ22Aaが、それぞれ独立に、置換されていてもよいフェニル基である組み合わせ
であり、更に好ましくは、
　１つのＱ1Aaが－Ｐ（Ｒ11Aa）2、ピリジン若しくはイミダゾールから水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、又は、－Ｓ-であり、
　もう１つのＱ1Aaがピリジン若しくはイミダゾールから水素原子を１つ除いた基であり、
　Ｑ2Aaが、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Aa）－であり、
　Ｒ11Aa及びＲ22Aaが、それぞれ独立に、置換されていてもよいフェニル基である組み合わせ
である。 A preferred combination of Q 1Aa and Q 2Aa in the formula (Aa) is
(1) One Q 1Aa is —P (R 11Aa ) 2 ,
Another Q 1Aa is —As (R 12Aa ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —O − , —S − , —S (= O) 2 O -, or, -C (= O) O - is and,
Q 2Aa is —P (R 22Aa ) —, —As (R 23Aa ) —, or a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound,
Combinations R 11Aa, R 12Aa, R 22Aa and R 23Aa are each independently a phenyl group which may be substituted;
(2) one Q 1Aa is —P (R 11Aa ) 2 , —As (R 12Aa ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , or —C (═O) O 2 — ,
Another Q 1Aa is —P (R 11Aa ) 2 , —As (R 12Aa ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —O − , -S -, -S (= O) 2 O -, or, -C (= O) O - is and,
Q 2Aa is —P (R 22Aa ) —,
R 11Aa , R 12Aa and R 22Aa are each independently a combination in which they are an optionally substituted phenyl group.
(3) one Q 1Aa is —P (R 11Aa ) 2 ;
Another Q 1Aa is —P (R 11Aa ) 2 , —As (R 12Aa ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —O − , -S -, -S (= O) 2 O -, or, -C (= O) O - is and,
Q 2Aa is —As (R 23Aa ) — or a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound,
Combinations R 11Aa, R 12Aa and R 23Aa are each independently a phenyl group which may be substituted;
And more preferably
One Q 1Aa is —P (R 11Aa ) 2 , —As (R 12Aa ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —O − , —S -, -S (= O) 2 O -, or, -C (= O) O - is and,
Another Q 1Aa is —As (R 12Aa ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —O − , —S − , —S (= O) 2 O -, or, -C (= O) O - is and,
Q 2Aa is —P (R 22Aa ) —,
R 11Aa , R 12Aa and R 22Aa are each independently a combination of optionally substituted phenyl groups, more preferably
One Q 1Aa is -P (R 11Aa) 2, pyridine or group in which one hydrogen atom is eliminated from imidazole, -O -, -C (= O ) O -, or, -S - a and,
Another Q 1Aa is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from pyridine or imidazole,
Q 2Aa is —P (R 22Aa ) —,
In the combination, R 11Aa and R 22Aa are each independently an optionally substituted phenyl group.
　前記式（Ａａ）におけるＱ1AaとＱ2Aaのそれぞれの組み合わせに対する好ましいＲ2Aaの構造は前述Ｒ2Xxで表される基について説明した通りである。 A preferred structure of R 2Aa for each combination of Q 1Aa and Q 2Aa in the formula (Aa) is as described for the group represented by R 2Xx .
　前記式（Ａｂ）におけるＱ1Ab及びＲ3Abの好ましい組み合わせは、
　２つのＱ1Abが、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Ab）2であり、
　もう１つのＱ1Abが置換されていてもよいピリジン若しくはイミダゾールから水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、又は、－Ｓ-であり、
　Ｒ11Abが置換されていてもよいフェニル基であり、
　Ｒ3Abが上記置換されていてもよい式ｒ３１及びｒ３２のいずれかで表される基である組み合わせ
である。 A preferred combination of Q 1Ab and R 3Ab in the formula (Ab) is:
The two Q 1Abs are —P (R 11Ab ) 2 ;
Another Q 1Ab are formed by removing one hydrogen atom from a good pyridine or imidazole substituted group, -O -, -C (= O ) O -, or, -S - a and,
R 11Ab is an optionally substituted phenyl group,
A combination in which R 3Ab is a group represented by any one of the above-described formulas r31 and r32 which may be substituted.
　前記式（Ｂａ）におけるＱ1Ba、Ｑ2Ba及びＲ2Baの好ましい組み合わせは、
　１つのＱ1Baが、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Ba）2、又は、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基であり、もう１つのＱ1Baが－Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、又は、－Ｓ-であり、
　Ｑ2Baが、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Ba）－又は、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基であり、
　Ｒ11Ba及びＲ22Baが、それぞれ独立に、置換されていてもよいフェニル基であり、
　Ｒ2Baが直接結合であるか又は置換されていてもよい上記式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基である組み合わせ
である。 A preferred combination of Q 1Ba , Q 2Ba and R 2Ba in the formula (Ba) is:
One Q 1Ba is —P (R 11Ba ) 2 or a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, and the other Q 1Ba is —O −. , -C (= O) O - , or, -S - a and,
Q 2Ba is —P (R 22Ba ) — or a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound,
R 11Ba and R 22Ba are each independently an optionally substituted phenyl group;
A combination in which R 2Ba is a direct bond or a group represented by any one of the above formulas r1 to r12 which may be substituted.
　前記式（Ｂｂ）におけるＱ1Bb、Ｑ2Bb、Ｒ2Bb及びＲ3Bbの好ましい組み合わせは、
　２つのＱ1Bbがそれぞれ独立に、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bb）2、又は、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基であり、１つのＱ1Bbが－Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、又は、－Ｓ-であり、
　Ｑ2Bbが、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Bb）－、又は、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基であり、
　Ｒ11Bb及びＲ22Bbがそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよいフェニル基であり、
　Ｒ2Bbが直接結合であるか又は置換されていてもよい上記式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基であり、
　Ｒ3Bbが置換されていてもよい上記式ｒ３１及びｒ３２のいずれかで表される基である組み合わせ
である。 Q 1Bb in the formula (Bb), Q 2Bb, preferred combinations of R 2Bb and R 3Bb are
Two Q 1Bb s are each independently —P (R 11Bb ) 2 or a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, and one Q 1Bb is — O -, -C (= O) O -, or, -S - a and,
Q 2Bb is, -P (R 22Bb) -, or a two group obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from containing heterocyclic compounds may be substituted nitrogen atom,
R 11Bb and R 22Bb are each independently a phenyl group which may be substituted;
R 2Bb is a direct bond or a group represented by any one of the above formulas r1 to r12 which may be substituted;
R 3Bb is a combination which is a group represented by any of the above formulas r31 and r32 which may be substituted.
　前記式（Ｂｃ）におけるＱ1Bc、Ｑ3Bc及びＲ2Bcの好ましい組み合わせは、
　２つのＱ1Bcがそれぞれ独立に、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bc）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Bc）2、又は、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基であり、１つのＱ1Bcが－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-であり、
　Ｑ3Bcが、Ｐ又は置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基であり、
　Ｒ11Bc及びＲ12Bcが置換されていてもよいアリール基である組み合わせ
であり、より好ましくは、
　２つのＱ1Bcがそれぞれ独立に、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bc）2、又は、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基であり、１つのＱ1Bcが－Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、又は、－Ｓ-であり、
　Ｑ3Bcが、Ｐ又は置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基であり、
　Ｒ11Bcが置換されていてもよいフェニル基であり、
　Ｒ2Bcが直接結合であるか又は置換されていてもよい上記式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基である組み合わせ
であり、更に好ましくは、
　２つのＱ1Bcが－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bc）2であり、１つのＱ1Bcが－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bc）2、－Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、又は、－Ｓ-であり、
　Ｑ3BcがＰであり、
　Ｒ11Bcが置換されていてもよいフェニル基であり、
　Ｒ2Bcが直接結合であるか又は置換されていてもよい上記式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基である組み合わせであり、特に好ましくは、
　Ｑ1Bcのうち１つが－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bc）2、－Ｏ-、又は、－Ｓ-であり、
　Ｑ1Bcの残り２つが－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bc）2であり、
　Ｑ3BcがＰであり、
　Ｒ11Bcが置換されていてもよいフェニル基であり、
　Ｒ2Bcが置換されていてもよい上記式ｒ１’～ｒ１２　’のいずれかで表される基である組み合わせ
であり、とりわけ好ましくは、
　Ｑ1Bcのうち１つが－Ｏ-又は－Ｓ-であり、
　Ｑ1Bcの残り２つが－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bc）2であり、
　Ｑ3BcがＰであり、
　Ｒ11Bcが置換されていてもよい２，４，６－トリメチルフェニル基であり、
　Ｒ2Bcが置換されていてもよい上記式ｒ１’、ｒ５’、ｒ１０’及びｒ１２’のいずれかで表される基である組み合わせ
である。 A preferred combination of Q 1Bc , Q 3Bc and R 2Bc in the formula (Bc) is
Two Q 1Bc are each independently —P (R 11Bc ) 2 , —As (R 12Bc ) 2 , or a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound. And one Q 1Bc is —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , or —C (═O) O − ,
Q 3Bc is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from P or an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound;
A combination in which R 11Bc and R 12Bc are optionally substituted aryl groups, more preferably
Two Q 1Bc are each independently —P (R 11Bc ) 2 or a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, and one Q 1Bc is — O -, -C (= O) O -, or, -S - a and,
Q 3Bc is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from P or an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound;
R 11Bc is an optionally substituted phenyl group,
A combination in which R 2Bc is a direct bond or a group represented by any one of the above formulas r1 to r12 which may be substituted;
Two Q 1Bc is -P (R 11Bc) 2, 1 single Q 1Bc is -P (R 11Bc) 2, -O -, -C (= O) O -, or, -S - a and,
Q 3Bc is P,
R 11Bc is an optionally substituted phenyl group,
A combination in which R 2Bc is a direct bond or a group represented by any one of the above formulas r1 to r12 which may be substituted, particularly preferably
One of Q 1Bc but -P (R 11Bc) 2, -O -, or, -S - a and,
The remaining two of Q 1Bc are -P (R 11Bc ) 2 ,
Q 3Bc is P,
R 11Bc is an optionally substituted phenyl group,
A combination in which R 2Bc is a group represented by any one of the above-mentioned formulas r1 ′ to r12 ′ which may be substituted, particularly preferably
One of Q 1Bc but -O - or -S - a and,
The remaining two of Q 1Bc are -P (R 11Bc ) 2 ,
Q 3Bc is P,
R 11Bc is an optionally substituted 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl group,
R 2Bc is a combination which is a group represented by any one of the above formulas r1 ′, r5 ′, r10 ′ and r12 ′ which may be substituted.
　前記式（Ｂｄ）におけるＱ1BdとＲ4Bdの好ましい組み合わせは、
　３つのＱ1Bdがそれぞれ独立に、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bd）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Bd）2、又は、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基であり、１つのＱ1Bdが－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-であり、
　（Ｒ11Bd）及び（Ｒ12Bd）が置換されていてもよいフェニル基であり、
　Ｒ4Bdが置換されていてもよい上記式ｒ４１である組み合わせ
である。より好ましくは、
　３つのＱ1Bdがそれぞれ独立に、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bd）2、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基であり、１つのＱ1Bdが－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、又は、－Ｏ-であり、
　（Ｒ11Bd）が置換されていてもよいフェニル基であり、
　Ｒ4Bdが置換されていてもよい上記式ｒ４１で表される基であって該ｒ４１中のＹ8がＳｉである組み合わせ
である。 A preferred combination of Q 1Bd and R 4Bd in the formula (Bd) is
Each of the three Q 1Bd groups independently represents —P (R 11Bd ) 2 , —As (R 12Bd ) 2 , or a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound; And one Q 1Bd is —C (═O) O − , —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , or —C (═O) O − ,
(R 11Bd ) and (R 12Bd ) are optionally substituted phenyl groups,
In the combination, R 4Bd may be substituted. More preferably,
Three Q 1Bd s are each independently —P (R 11Bd ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, and one Q 1Bd is —C ( = O) O -, or, -O - a and,
(R 11Bd ) is an optionally substituted phenyl group,
R 4Bd is a group represented by the above formula r41 which may be substituted, wherein Y 8 in r41 is Si.
　Ｌ1の例としては、下記式Ａａ１～９４、Ａｂ１～４、Ｂａ１～２０、Ｂｂ１、Ｂｃ１～２３、Ｂｄ１～３、Ｃａ１～８、Ｃｃ１～３、Ｃｆ１、Ｄａ１～４及びＤｋ１で表される分子が挙げられる。 Examples of L 1 are represented by the following formulas Aa1 to 94, Ab1 to 4, Ba1 to 20, Bb1, Bc1 to 23, Bd1 to 3, Ca1 to 8, Cc1 to 3, Cf1, Da1 to 4, and Dk1. Molecule.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
　式中、Ｒ70は水素原子、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、トリフルオロメチル基、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロピルオキシ基、ブトキシ基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブトキシ基、又は、フェニルオキシ基である。Ｒ71は水素原子又は炭素原子数１～１２のヒドロカルビル基である。Ｒ72は水素原子、フッ素原子、トリフルオロメチル基、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、メトキシ基、又は、ジフェニルアミノ基である。Ｒ73の例はＲ70の例と同様であるが、Ｒ73が直接結合となってＲ74と連結してもよい。Ｒ74は－ＣＨ2－であり、該ＣＨ2が隣同士でない限り任意の数だけＯに置き換わってもよい。ｍは１～１２の整数である。複数のＲ70～Ｒ74は同じでも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula, R70 is a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, a trifluoromethyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, An octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propyloxy group, a butoxy group, a tert-butoxy group, or a phenyloxy group. R 71 is a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms. R 72 is hydrogen atom, fluorine atom, trifluoromethyl group, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, tert-butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl A group, a decyl group, a methoxy group, or a diphenylamino group. The example of R 73 is the same as the example of R 70 , but R 73 may be directly bonded and connected to R 74 . R 74 is —CH 2 —, and any number may be replaced with O as long as the CH 2 are not adjacent to each other. m is an integer of 1 to 12. The plurality of R 70 to R 74 may be the same or different.
　Ａｒ1は置換されていてもよいフェニル基であり、複数のＡｒ1は同じでも異なっていてもよい。Ａｒ2は置換されていてもよいフェニレン基である。 Ar 1 is an optionally substituted phenyl group, and a plurality of Ar 1 may be the same or different. Ar 2 is an optionally substituted phenylene group.
　Ｙ10は－ＣＨ2－、－Ｏ－、又は、－Ｓ－で表される基である。Ｙ11は、－Ｃ（ＣＨ3）2－、－（ＣＨ2）2－、－Ｏ－、－Ｓ－、－Ｓｉ（ＣＨ3）2－、－Ｓｉ（ｎ－Ｃ6Ｈ13）2－、又は、－Ｓｉ（Ｐｈ）2－で表される基である。Ｐｈはフェニル基である。複数のＹ10とＹ11は同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Y 10 is a group represented by —CH 2 —, —O—, or —S—. Y 11 represents —C (CH 3 ) 2 —, — (CH 2 ) 2 —, —O—, —S—, —Si (CH 3 ) 2 —, —Si (n—C 6 H 13 ) 2 — Or a group represented by —Si (Ph) 2 —. Ph is a phenyl group. The plurality of Y 10 and Y 11 may be the same or different.
　上記Ｒ70は、好ましくは水素原子、フッ素原子、塩素原子、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロピルオキシ基、ブトキシ基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブトキシ基、又は、フェニルオキシ基であり、より好ましくは水素原子、フッ素原子、塩素原子、メチル基、ブチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基、メトキシ基、ブトキシ基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブトキシ基、又は、フェニルオキシ基であり、更に好ましくは水素原子、フッ素原子、塩素原子、メトキシ基、ブトキシ基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブトキシ基、又は、フェニルオキシ基であり、特に好ましくはフッ素原子又は塩素原子である。 R 70 is preferably a hydrogen atom, fluorine atom, chlorine atom, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, hexyl group, octyl group, methoxy group, ethoxy group, propyloxy group, butoxy group, a tert-butoxy group or a phenyloxy group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a methyl group, a butyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a methoxy group, a butoxy group, a tert-butoxy group, or A phenyloxy group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a methoxy group, a butoxy group, a tert-butoxy group, or a phenyloxy group, and particularly preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
　上記Ｒ71は、好ましくは水素原子、フェニル基、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、又は、ドデシル基であり、より好ましくは水素原子、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基、又は、ドデシル基であり、更に好ましくは水素原子、メチル基、エチル基、ブチル基、又はヘキシル基であり、特に好ましくはメチル基である。 R 71 is preferably a hydrogen atom, phenyl group, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group, decyl group or dodecyl group, More preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group or a dodecyl group, still more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a butyl group or a hexyl group. And particularly preferably a methyl group.
　上記Ｒ72は、好ましくは水素原子、フッ素原子、トリフルオロメチル基、メチル基、ブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基、メトキシ基、又は、ジフェニルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは水素原子、フッ素原子、トリフルオロメチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、オクチル基、又は、メトキシ基であり、更に好ましくは水素原子又はフッ素原子である。 R 72 is preferably a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a trifluoromethyl group, a methyl group, a butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a methoxy group, or a diphenylamino group, more preferably a hydrogen atom. An atom, a fluorine atom, a trifluoromethyl group, a tert-butyl group, an octyl group or a methoxy group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom.
　Ｒ73の好ましい例は上記Ｒ70の好ましい例と同様である。Ｒ73は直接結合でＲ74と連結していてもよい。 Preferred examples of R 73 are the same as the preferred examples of R 70 described above. R 73 may be linked to R 74 by a direct bond.
　ｍは、好ましくは１～１０の整数であり、より好ましくは３～１０の整数であり、更に好ましくは４～９の整数であり、特に好ましくは５～８の整数である。 M is preferably an integer of 1 to 10, more preferably an integer of 3 to 10, still more preferably an integer of 4 to 9, and particularly preferably an integer of 5 to 8.
　Ａｒ1は、好ましくはフェニル基、２－メチルフェニル基、３－メチルフェニル基、４－メチルフェニル基、２－エチルフェニル基、２－プロピルフェニル基、２－イソプロピルフェニル基、２－ブチルフェニル基、２－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、４－ヘキシルフェニル基、２－フルオロフェニル基、４－フルオロフェニル基、３－ジフェニルアミノフェニル基、４－ジフェニルアミノフェニル基、３－ビス（２－メチルフェニル）アミノフェニル基、３－ビス（４－メチルフェニル）アミノフェニル基、２－メトキシフェニル基、３－メトキシフェニル基、４－メトキシフェニル基、４－フェノキシフェニル基、２，６－ジメチルフェニル基、３，５－ジメチルフェニル基、２，４，６－トリメチルフェニル基、２，６－ジエチルフェニル基、２，６－ジイソプロピルフェニル基、２，６－ジフルオロフェニル基、２，４，６－トリフルオロフェニル基、２，３，４，５，６－ペンタフルオロフェニル基、２，６－ジメトキシ基、３，４，５－トリメトキシ基、３，５－ジメトキシ基、３，５－ジ－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基又は３，５－ジ－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル－４－メトキシ基であり、より好ましくはフェニル基、２－メチルフェニル基、４－メチルフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、４－ヘキシルフェニル基、２－フルオロフェニル基、４－フルオロフェニル基、３－ジフェニルアミノフェニル基、４－ジフェニルアミノフェニル基、３－ビス（２－メチルフェニル）アミノフェニル基、２－メトキシフェニル基、４－メトキシフェニル基、４－フェノキシフェニル基、２，４，６－トリメチルフェニル基、２，６－ジメチルフェニル基、３，５－ジエチルフェニル基、２，６－ジフルオロフェニル基、２，４，６－トリフルオロフェニル基、２，３，４，５，６－ペンタフルオロフェニル基、２，６－ジメトキシ基、３，５－ジメトキシ基、３，５－ジ－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル－４－メトキシ基であり、更に好ましくはフェニル基、２－メチルフェニル基、２，６－ジメチルフェニル基、３，５－ジメチルフェニル基、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル基、４－ヘキシルフェニル基、４－フルオロフェニル基、４－ジフェニルアミノフェニル基、４－メトキシフェニル基、４－フェノキシフェニル基、３，５－ジ－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル－４－メトキシ基であり、特に好ましくはフェニル基である。 Ar 1 is preferably a phenyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 3-methylphenyl group, 4-methylphenyl group, 2-ethylphenyl group, 2-propylphenyl group, 2-isopropylphenyl group, 2-butylphenyl group 2-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, 2-fluorophenyl group, 4-fluorophenyl group, 3-diphenylaminophenyl group, 4-diphenylaminophenyl group, 3 -Bis (2-methylphenyl) aminophenyl group, 3-bis (4-methylphenyl) aminophenyl group, 2-methoxyphenyl group, 3-methoxyphenyl group, 4-methoxyphenyl group, 4-phenoxyphenyl group, 2 , 6-Dimethylphenyl group, 3,5-dimethylphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethyl Phenyl group, 2,6-diethylphenyl group, 2,6-diisopropylphenyl group, 2,6-difluorophenyl group, 2,4,6-trifluorophenyl group, 2,3,4,5,6-pentafluoro Phenyl group, 2,6-dimethoxy group, 3,4,5-trimethoxy group, 3,5-dimethoxy group, 3,5-di-tert-butyl group or 3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-methoxy More preferably a phenyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 4-methylphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, 2-fluorophenyl group, 4-fluorophenyl group, 3- Diphenylaminophenyl group, 4-diphenylaminophenyl group, 3-bis (2-methylphenyl) aminophenyl group, 2-methoxyphenyl group, 4-methoxyphenyl group Phenyl group, 4-phenoxyphenyl group, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl group, 2,6-dimethylphenyl group, 3,5-diethylphenyl group, 2,6-difluorophenyl group, 2,4,6-tri A fluorophenyl group, 2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorophenyl group, 2,6-dimethoxy group, 3,5-dimethoxy group, 3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-methoxy group, More preferably, a phenyl group, 2-methylphenyl group, 2,6-dimethylphenyl group, 3,5-dimethylphenyl group, 4-tert-butylphenyl group, 4-hexylphenyl group, 4-fluorophenyl group, 4- A diphenylaminophenyl group, a 4-methoxyphenyl group, a 4-phenoxyphenyl group, and a 3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-methoxy group, particularly preferably Is a Eniru group.
　Ａｒ2は、好ましくは、１，２－フェニレン基、１，３－フェニレン基、１，４－フェニレン基、３－メチル－１，２－フェニレン基、４－メチル－１，２－フェニレン基、５－メチル－１，２－フェニレン基、６－メチル－１，２－フェニレン基、６－エチル－１，２－フェニレン基、６－プロピル－１，２－フェニレン基、６－メトキシ－１，２－フェニレン基、６－メチル－１，３－フェニレン基、６－メチル－１，４－フェニレン基、６－メトキシ－１，３－フェニレン基又は６－フルオロ－１，３－フェニレン基であり、より好ましくは、１，２－フェニレン基、１，３－フェニレン基、１，４－フェニレン基、６－メチル－１，２－フェニレン基、６－メチル－１，３－フェニレン基、６－メチル－１，４－フェニレン基、６－メトキシ－１，３－フェニレン基又は６－フルオロ－１，３－フェニレン基であり、更に好ましくは、１，２－フェニレン基、１，３－フェニレン基、１，４－フェニレン基、６－メチル－１，３－フェニレン基又は６－フルオロ－１，３－フェニレン基であり、特に好ましくは、１，２－フェニレン基、１，３－フェニレン基又は１，４－フェニレン基である。 Ar 2 is preferably 1,2-phenylene group, 1,3-phenylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, 3-methyl-1,2-phenylene group, 4-methyl-1,2-phenylene group, 5-methyl-1,2-phenylene group, 6-methyl-1,2-phenylene group, 6-ethyl-1,2-phenylene group, 6-propyl-1,2-phenylene group, 6-methoxy-1, 2-phenylene group, 6-methyl-1,3-phenylene group, 6-methyl-1,4-phenylene group, 6-methoxy-1,3-phenylene group or 6-fluoro-1,3-phenylene group More preferably, 1,2-phenylene group, 1,3-phenylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, 6-methyl-1,2-phenylene group, 6-methyl-1,3-phenylene group, 6- Methyl-1,4-phenylene group, 6- Toxi-1,3-phenylene group or 6-fluoro-1,3-phenylene group, more preferably 1,2-phenylene group, 1,3-phenylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, 6-methyl 1,3-phenylene group or 6-fluoro-1,3-phenylene group, particularly preferably 1,2-phenylene group, 1,3-phenylene group or 1,4-phenylene group.
　Ｙ10は、好ましくは－ＣＨ2－又は－Ｏ－であり、より好ましくは－Ｏ－である。Ｙ11は、好ましくは－Ｃ（ＣＨ3）2－、－（ＣＨ2）2－、－Ｏ－、－Ｓｉ（ＣＨ3）2－、－Ｓｉ（ｎ－Ｃ6Ｈ13）2－、又は、－Ｓｉ（Ｐｈ）2－であり、更に好ましくは－Ｃ（ＣＨ3）2－、－Ｓｉ（ＣＨ3）2－、又は、－Ｓｉ（Ｐｈ）2－であり、特に好ましくは－Ｃ（ＣＨ3）2－及び－Ｓｉ（ＣＨ3）2－である。
　Ｚ1は－Ｏ-又は－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-であり、好ましくは－Ｏ-である。
　Ｚ2は－Ｓ-又は－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-であり、好ましくは－Ｓ-である。 Y 10 is preferably —CH 2 — or —O—, and more preferably —O—. Y 11 is preferably —C (CH 3 ) 2 —, — (CH 2 ) 2 —, —O—, —Si (CH 3 ) 2 —, —Si (n—C 6 H 13 ) 2 —, or —Si (Ph) 2 —, more preferably —C (CH 3 ) 2 —, —Si (CH 3 ) 2 —, or —Si (Ph) 2 —, particularly preferably —C ( CH 3 ) 2 — and —Si (CH 3 ) 2 —.
Z 1 is —O 2 — or —C (═O) O 2 — , preferably —O 2 — .
Z 2 is —S 2 — or —S (═O) 2 O 2 — , preferably —S 2 — .
　上記の例のうちＬ1として、好ましくは、上記式Ａａ１～９４、Ａｂ１～４、Ｂａ１～２０、Ｂｂ１、Ｂｃ１～２３、Ｂｄ１～３で表される分子であり、より好ましくは式Ａａ１～４０、Ａａ６０～６６、Ａａ７７～８０、Ａａ９１～９４、Ａｂ１～４、Ｂａ１～１６、Ｂａ１８～２０、Ｂｂ１、Ｂｃ１～２１、及びＢｄ１～３で表される分子であり、更に好ましくは式Ａａ１、Ａａ３、Ａａ５、Ａａ１３、Ａａ１５、Ａａ２３、Ａａ２４、Ａａ３３、Ａａ３５、Ｂａ１、Ｂａ２、Ｂａ３、Ｂａ６、Ｂａ７、Ｂａ９、Ｂａ１１、Ｂａ１２、Ｂａ１３、Ｂａ１４、Ｂａ１５、Ｂａ１６、Ｂｃ１、Ｂｃ３、Ｂｃ４、Ｂｃ５、Ｂｃ６、Ｂｃ７、Ｂｃ８、Ｂｃ９、Ｂｃ１０、Ｂｃ１４、Ｂｃ１５、Ｂｃ１８、Ｂｃ１９、Ｂｃ２１、及びＢｄ１で表される分子であり、特に好ましくは、Ｂａ３、Ｂａ６、Ｂａ１１、Ｂａ１２、Ｂａ１６、Ｂｃ４、Ｂｃ５、及びＢｃ９で表される分子である。 In the above examples, L 1 is preferably a molecule represented by the above formulas Aa1 to 94, Ab1 to 4, Ba1 to 20, Bb1, Bc1 to 23, Bd1 to 3, more preferably the formulas Aa1 to 40 , Aa60 to 66, Aa77 to 80, Aa91 to 94, Ab1 to 4, Ba1 to 16, Ba18 to 20, Bb1, Bc1 to 21, and Bd1 to 3, and more preferably represented by the formulas Aa1 and Aa3 Aa5, Aa13, Aa15, Aa23, Aa24, Aa33, Aa35, Ba1, Ba2, Ba3, Ba6, Ba7, Ba9, Ba11, Ba12, Ba13, Ba14, Ba15, Ba16, Bc1, Bc3, Bc4, Bc5, Bc6, Bc5, Bc6 , Bc8, Bc9, Bc10, Bc14, Bc15, Bc18, Bc19, Bc21, and Bd1 It is a molecule, particularly preferably a molecule represented by Ba3, Ba6, Ba11, Ba12, Ba16, Bc4, Bc5, and Bc9.
　Ｌ1の好ましい例としては、下記式Ａａ１’、Ａａ１’－２、Ａａ３’、Ａａ５’、Ａａ１５’、Ａａ２３’、Ａａ３５’、Ａａ６０’、Ｂａ１’、Ｂａ３’、Ｂａ６’、Ｂａ１１’、Ｂａ１３’、Ｂａ１６’、Ｂａ１９’、Ｂｃ１’、Ｂｃ４’、Ｂｃ９’、Ｂｃ１５’、Ｂｃ２１’及びＢｄ１’で表される分子が挙げられる。 Preferred examples of L 1 include the following formulas Aa1 ′, Aa1′-2, Aa3 ′, Aa5 ′, Aa15 ′, Aa23 ′, Aa35 ′, Aa60 ′, Ba1 ′, Ba3 ′, Ba6 ′, Ba11 ′, Ba13 ′. , Ba16 ′, Ba19 ′, Bc1 ′, Bc4 ′, Bc9 ′, Bc15 ′, Bc21 ′, and Bd1 ′.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
　Ｌ1は、上記の構造例のうち、好ましくは式Ａａ１’、Ａａ１’－２、Ａａ３’、Ａａ２３’、Ｂａ１’、Ｂａ３’、Ｂａ６’、Ｂａ１１’、Ｂａ１６’、Ｂａ１３’、Ｂｃ４’、Ｂｃ１５’、又はＢｃ２１’で表される分子であり、より好ましくは式Ｂａ３’、Ｂａ６’、Ｂａ１１’、Ｂａ１６’、Ｂｃ４’、又はＢｃ２１’で表される分子である。 Of the above structural examples, L 1 is preferably represented by the formulas Aa1 ′, Aa1′-2, Aa3 ′, Aa23 ′, Ba1 ′, Ba3 ′, Ba6 ′, Ba11 ′, Ba16 ′, Ba13 ′, Bc4 ′, Bc15. A molecule represented by 'or Bc21', more preferably a molecule represented by the formula Ba3 ', Ba6', Ba11 ', Ba16', Bc4 ', or Bc21'.
　組成式（１）におけるＬ2は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを有する分子であり、Ｌ2が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は２つである。 L 2 in the composition formula (1) has an atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion, and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag +. The total number of atoms and ions that are molecules and can coordinate to Ag + of L 2 is two.
　組成式（１）で表される錯体において、Ｌ2はＡｇ+に配位していることが好ましく、単座配位子としてＡｇ+に配位しても、二座配位子としてＡｇ+に配位してもよいが、二座配位子としてＡｇ+に配位していることがより好ましい。 In complex represented by the composition formula (1), L 2 is preferably coordinated to Ag +, be coordinated to Ag + as a monodentate ligand, the Ag + as a bidentate ligand Although it may coordinate, it is more preferable to coordinate to Ag <+> as a bidentate ligand.
　Ｌ2の炭素原子数は、通常２～２５０であり、好ましくは３～２００であり、より好ましくは４～１５０であり、更に好ましくは６～１００であり、特に好ましくは１０～８０である。 The number of carbon atoms of L 2 is usually 2 to 250, preferably 3 to 200, more preferably 4 to 150, still more preferably 6 to 100, and particularly preferably 10 to 80.
　Ｌ2としては、下記式（Ｅ）で表される分子が好ましい。

Ｑ1E－Ｒ2E－Ｑ1E　　　（Ｅ）

（式（Ｅ）中、Ｑ1Eは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11E）2、－（Ｐ＝Ｏ）（Ｒ12E）2、－（Ｐ＝Ｓ）（Ｒ13E）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ14E）2、－ＯＨ、－Ｏ-、－ＣＯ2Ｈ、－ＣＯ2 -、－ＳＨ、－Ｓ-、－ＳＲ16E、－ＳＯ3Ｈ、－ＳＯ3 -、－Ｎ（Ｒ18E）2、又は、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基であり、２つのＱ1Eは同じでも異なっていてもよく、２つのＱ1Eが結合して環を形成してもよい。Ｒ11E～Ｒ14Eはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ16E及びＲ18Eはそれぞれ独立に置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、２つのＲ11E、２つのＲ12E、２つのＲ13E、２つのＲ14E、Ｒ16E、及び、２つのＲ18Eは同じでも異なっていてもよい。Ｒ2Eは２価の基であり、但し、２つのＱ1Eのいずれか一方が置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合は直接結合でもよい。Ｒ11E、Ｒ12E、Ｒ13E、Ｒ14E、Ｒ16E、Ｒ18E、Ｒ2E及び置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環から水素原子を１つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。） L 2 is preferably a molecule represented by the following formula (E).

Q 1E -R 2E -Q 1E (E)

(In the formula (E), Q 1E is -P (R 11E ) 2 ,-(P = O) (R 12E ) 2 ,-(P = S) (R 13E ) 2 , -As (R 14E ) 2 , —OH, —O − , —CO 2 H, —CO 2 − , —SH, —S − , —SR 16E , —SO 3 H, —SO 3 − , —N (R 18E ) 2 , or substitution A group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound which may be substituted, and two Q 1Es may be the same or different, and two Q 1Es are bonded to form a ring. R 11E to R 14E are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and R 16E and R 18E are each independently an optionally substituted carbon atom. different is an alkyl group having 1 to 30, two R 11E, two R 12E, two R 13E, two R 14E, R 16E, and also the two R 18E identical Good .R 2E also be is a divalent group, provided that there two one hydrogen atom from containing heterocyclic compounds a nitrogen atom which may be substituted Q 1E in removing one group In this case, it may be a direct bond selected from R 11E , R 12E , R 13E , R 14E , R 16E , R 18E , R 2E and a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic ring. The two or more groups selected may be optionally combined to form a ring.)
　Ｒ11E～Ｒ14Eにおける置換されていてもよいヒドロカルビル基の、ヒドロカルビル基の例及び好ましい例は、それぞれ、上記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子中における置換されていてもよいヒドロカルビル基の例及び好ましい例と同様である。 Examples of the hydrocarbyl group and preferred examples of the optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group in R 11E to R 14E are the formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ca) Examples of the hydrocarbyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by Ci) and (Da) to (Dt) and the preferable examples thereof are the same.
　Ｒ16E及びＲ18Eにおける置換されていてもよいアルキル基及び該アルキル基が有し得る置換基の例並びに好ましい例は、上記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子中における置換されていてもよいアルキル基及び該アルキル基が有し得る置換基の例と同様である。 Examples of the optionally substituted alkyl group in R 16E and R 18E and the substituents that the alkyl group may have and preferred examples thereof include the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), ( This is the same as the examples of the alkyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by (Ca) to (Ci) and (Da) to (Dt) and the substituent that the alkyl group may have.
　Ｑ1Eにおける置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物の例及び好ましい例は、上記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子中における置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物及び該窒素原子含有複素環式化合物が有し得る置換基の例及び好ましい例と同様である。 Examples and preferred examples of the optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound in Q 1E include the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci), and Examples of the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound which may be substituted in the molecule represented by (Da) to (Dt) and the examples and preferred examples of the substituent that the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound may have is there.
　Ｒ2Eにおける２価の基の例及び好ましい例は、前記Ｒ2Xxで表される基の例及び好ましい例と同様である。 Examples and preferred examples of the divalent group in R 2E are the same as the examples and preferred examples of the group represented by R 2Xx .
　２つのＱ1Eの組み合わせは、好ましくは－Ｐ（Ｒ11E）2２つ、－Ａｓ（Ｒ14E）2２つ、窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基２つ、－Ｏ-と－Ｐ（Ｒ11E）2が１つずつ、－ＣＯ2 -と－Ｐ（Ｒ11E）2が１つずつ、又は、－Ｓ-と－Ｐ（Ｒ11E）2が１つずつであり、より好ましくは－Ｐ（Ｒ11E）2２つ、又は、窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基２つである。 The combination of the two Q 1E is preferably two —P (R 11E ) 2, two —As (R 14E ) 2, two groups obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, O - and -P (R 11E ) 2 one by one, -CO 2 - and -P (R 11E ) 2 one by one, or -S - and -P (R 11E ) 2 one by one Yes, more preferably -P (R 11E ) 2 or two groups obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound.
　前記Ｌ2の例としては、置換されていてもよい下記式ａ１～ａ３７、ｂ１～ｂ１１、ｃ１～ｃ４１、ｄ１～ｄ３０で表される分子が挙げられる。 Examples of L 2 include optionally substituted molecules represented by the following formulas a1 to a37, b1 to b11, c1 to c41, and d1 to d30.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
　上記式ａ１～ａ３７、ｂ１～ｂ１１、ｃ１～ｃ４１、及びｄ１～ｄ３０で表される分子のうち、Ｌ2は、好ましくは式ａ１～ａ１６、ａ２５～ａ３７、ｃ１～ｃ６、ｃ１２～ｃ４１、ｄ２２～ｄ２４、又はｄ２６で表される分子であり、より好ましくは式ａ１～ａ２、ａ４～ａ８、ａ１０～ａ１２、ａ１５～ａ１６、ａ２５～ａ３２、ｃ１４～ｃ４１、ｄ２２、ｄ２３、又はｄ２６で表される分子であり、更に好ましくは式ａ２、ａ４～ａ７、ａ１０、ａ１５、ａ２５～ａ２６、ａ３０～ａ３２、ｃ１５、ｃ１７～ｃ２５、ｃ２８～ｃ４１、ｄ２２、ｄ２３、又はｄ２６で表される分子であり、特に好ましくは式ａ６、ａ７、ａ２５、ａ２６、ａ３１、ｃ１５、ｃ２２、又はｃ２３で表される分子である。 Of the molecules represented by the formulas a1 to a37, b1 to b11, c1 to c41, and d1 to d30, L 2 is preferably represented by the formulas a1 to a16, a25 to a37, c1 to c6, c12 to c41, d22. To d24 or d26, more preferably represented by the formulas a1 to a2, a4 to a8, a10 to a12, a15 to a16, a25 to a32, c14 to c41, d22, d23, or d26. More preferably, it is a molecule represented by the formula a2, a4 to a7, a10, a15, a25 to a26, a30 to a32, c15, c17 to c25, c28 to c41, d22, d23, or d26. Particularly preferred is a molecule represented by the formula a6, a7, a25, a26, a31, c15, c22, or c23.
　組成式（１）においてＬ3は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを１つ有する分子である。 In the composition formula (1), L 3 is an atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag +. Molecule.
　Ｌ3の炭素原子数は通常２～１５０であり、好ましくは３～１００、より好ましくは４～７５であり、更に好ましくは５～６０であり、特に好ましくは６～５０である。 L 3 usually has 2 to 150 carbon atoms, preferably 3 to 100, more preferably 4 to 75, still more preferably 5 to 60, and particularly preferably 6 to 50.
　Ｌ3は、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物、Ｐ（Ｒ11F）3、（Ｐ＝Ｏ）（Ｒ12F）3、（Ｐ＝Ｓ）（Ｒ13F）3、Ａｓ（Ｒ14F）3、Ｒ15F－ＯＨ、Ｒ16F－Ｏ－、Ｒ17F－ＣＯ2Ｈ、Ｒ18F－ＣＯ2 -、Ｒ19F－ＳＨ、Ｒ20F－Ｓ-、Ｒ21F－ＳＯ3Ｈ、Ｒ22F－ＳＯ3 -、又は、Ｎ（Ｒ24F）3で表される分子であることが好ましい。 L 3 is an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, P (R 11F ) 3 , (P═O) (R 12F ) 3 , ( P═S ) (R 13F ) 3 , As (R 14F) 3, R 15F -OH, R 16F -O -, R 17F -CO 2 H, R 18F -CO 2 -, R 19F -SH, R 20F -S -, R 21F -SO 3 H, R 22F - A molecule represented by SO 3 − or N (R 24F ) 3 is preferred.
　ここで、Ｒ11F～Ｒ22Fはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換されていてもよいヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Fは置換されていてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、３つのＲ11F、３つのＲ12F、３つのＲ13F、３つのＲ14F、Ｒ15F、Ｒ16F、Ｒ17F、Ｒ18F、Ｒ19F、Ｒ20F、Ｒ21F、Ｒ22F、及び、３つのＲ24Fは同じでも異なっていてもよい。 Here, R 11F to R 22F are each independently a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted hydrocarbyl group, R 24F is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and three R 11F , 3 R 12F , 3 R 13F , 3 R 14F , R 15F , R 16F , R 17F , R 18F , R 19F , R 20F , R 21F , R 22F , and 3 R 24F are the same May be different.
　３つのＲ11Fのうち任意の２つ以上は結合して環を形成してもよく、３つのＲ12Fのうち任意の２つ以上は結合して環を形成してもよく、３つのＲ13Fのうち任意の２つ以上は結合して環を形成してもよく、３つのＲ14Fのうち任意の２つ以上は結合して環を形成してもよく、３つのＲ24Fは結合して環を形成してもよい。 Two or more of the three optional of R 11F may form a ring, two or more any of the three R 12F may form a ring, three R 13F the two or more of any of a may be bonded to form a ring, two or more any of the three R 14F may form a ring, three R 24F is bonded to A ring may be formed.
　Ｌ3としての、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物の例及び好ましい例は、上記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子中における置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物の例及び好ましい例と同様である。 Examples and preferred examples of the optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound as L 3 include the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to (Ci). And the examples and preferred examples of the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound which may be substituted in the molecule represented by (Da) to (Dt).
　Ｒ11F～Ｒ22Fにおける置換されていてもよいヒドロカルビル基及び該ヒドロアルキル基が有し得る置換基の例並びに好ましい例は、それぞれ、上記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子中における置換されていてもよいヒドロカルビル基及び該ヒドロアルキル基が有し得る置換基の例並びに好ましい例と同様である。 Examples of the hydrocarbyl group which may be substituted in R 11F to R 22F and examples of the substituent which the hydroalkyl group may have and preferred examples thereof are the above formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), respectively. ), (Ca) to (Ci), and (Da) to (Dt) in the molecule represented by the hydrocarbyl group which may be substituted and examples of the substituent that the hydroalkyl group may have and preferred examples It is the same.
　Ｒ24Fにおける置換されていてもよいアルキル基及び該アルキル基が有し得る置換基の例並びに好ましい例は、上記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）～（Ｂｄ）、（Ｃａ）～（Ｃｉ）、及び（Ｄａ）～（Ｄｔ）で表される分子中における置換されていてもよいアルキル基及び該アルキル基が有し得る置換基の例並びに好ましい例と同様である。 Examples and preferred examples of the alkyl group which may be substituted in R 24F and the substituent that the alkyl group may have are the formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba) to (Bd), (Ca) to Examples of the alkyl group which may be substituted in the molecule represented by (Ci) and (Da) to (Dt) and the substituent which the alkyl group may have and preferred examples thereof are the same.
　Ｌ3は、好ましくは置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物、Ｐ（Ｒ11F）3、Ｒ16F－Ｏ-、Ｒ18F－ＣＯ2 -、Ｒ20F－Ｓ-、又は、Ｒ22F－ＳＯ3 -で表される分子であり、より好ましくは置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物、Ｐ（Ｒ11F）3、Ｒ18F－ＣＯ2 -、又は、Ｒ20F－Ｓ-で表される分子であり、更に好ましくは窒素原子含有複素環式化合物、又は、Ｐ（Ｒ11F）3で表される分子である。 L 3 is preferably an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, P (R 11F ) 3 , R 16F —O − , R 18F —CO 2 − , R 20F —S − , or R 22F A molecule represented by —SO 3 — , more preferably an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, P (R 11F ) 3 , R 18F —CO 2 − , or R 20F —S −. More preferably, it is a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound or a molecule represented by P (R 11F ) 3 .
　前記Ｌ3の例としては、置換されていてもよい下記式ｅ１～ｅ３５で表される分子が挙げられる。 Examples of L 3 include molecules represented by the following formulas e1 to e35 which may be substituted.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
　上記式で表される分子及びイオンのうち、Ｌ3は、好ましくは式ｅ１～ｅ１３、ｅ１６～ｅ２０、ｅ２５、ｅ２６、ｅ２８、ｅ３２、ｅ３３、及びｅ３４のいずれかで表される分子であり、より好ましくは式ｅ１～ｅ１３、ｅ１６～ｅ２０、ｅ２８、及びｅ３３のいずれかで表される分子である。 Of the molecules and ions represented by the above formula, L 3 is preferably a molecule represented by any one of the formulas e1 to e13, e16 to e20, e25, e26, e28, e32, e33, and e34. More preferably, it is a molecule represented by any of formulas e1 to e13, e16 to e20, e28, and e33.
　組成式（１）で表される銀錯体においてＸ1は、アニオンであり、例えば、ハロゲン化物イオン（例えば、フッ化物イオン、塩化物イオン、臭化物イオン、ヨウ化物イオン）、テトラフルオロボレートイオン、ヘキサフルオロホスフェートイオン、ヘキサフルオロアンチモンイオン、ヘキサフルオロヒ素イオン、トリフルオロメタンスルホン酸イオン、トリフルオロ酢酸イオン、テトラキス（ペンタフルオロフェニル）ボレートイオン）のほか、硫酸イオン、硝酸イオン、炭酸イオン、酢酸イオン、過塩素酸イオン、メタンスルホン酸イオン、ベンゼンスルホン酸イオン、パラトルエンスルホン酸イオン、ドデシルベンゼンスルホン酸イオン、テトラフェニルボレートイオン、及びこれらのイオンの構造を有する繰り返し単位を含む高分子化合物が挙げられ、錯体への配位力が良好であるので、好ましくは、ハロゲン化物イオン、テトラフルオロボレートイオン、ヘキサフルオロホスフェートイオン、トリフルオロメタンスルホン酸イオン、トリフルオロ酢酸イオン、テトラキス（ペンタフルオロフェニル）ボレートイオン）、硫酸イオン、硝酸イオン、炭酸イオン、酢酸イオン、過塩素酸イオン、パラトルエンスルホン酸イオン、及びテトラフェニルボレートイオンであり、より好ましくは、ハロゲン化物イオンであり、更に好ましくは、臭化物イオン、ヨウ化物イオンであり、特に好ましくは、ヨウ化物イオンである。 In the silver complex represented by the composition formula (1), X 1 is an anion, for example, halide ion (for example, fluoride ion, chloride ion, bromide ion, iodide ion), tetrafluoroborate ion, hexa Fluorophosphate ion, hexafluoroantimony ion, hexafluoroarsenic ion, trifluoromethanesulfonate ion, trifluoroacetate ion, tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate ion), sulfate ion, nitrate ion, carbonate ion, acetate ion, Polymerization containing chlorate ion, methanesulfonate ion, benzenesulfonate ion, p-toluenesulfonate ion, dodecylbenzenesulfonate ion, tetraphenylborate ion, and repeating units having the structure of these ions Preferably, halide ion, tetrafluoroborate ion, hexafluorophosphate ion, trifluoromethanesulfonate ion, trifluoroacetate ion, tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) ) Borate ion), sulfate ion, nitrate ion, carbonate ion, acetate ion, perchlorate ion, paratoluenesulfonate ion, and tetraphenylborate ion, more preferably halide ion, and still more preferably Bromide ions and iodide ions are preferred, and iodide ions are particularly preferred.
　組成式（１）において、ａは０．５より大きい数であり、ｂ、ｃ及びｄはそれぞれ独立に０以上の数である。 In the composition formula (1), a is a number greater than 0.5, and b, c, and d are each independently a number of 0 or more.
　ここで前記ａ、ｂ、ｃ及びｄを数式（ｚ×ａ）＋（２×ｂ）＋ｃ＋ｄに代入して求められる値を、前記組成式（１）における平均配位数と定義する。式中、ｚはＬ1におけるＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数である。該平均配位数は、２．０より大きく７．０以下であることが好ましい。すなわち、前記ａ、ｂ、ｃ及びｄは、下記数式（２）を満たすことが好ましい。
７．０　≧　（ｚ×ａ）＋（２×ｂ）＋ｃ＋ｄ　＞　２．０　　（２）
（数式（２）中、ｚはＬ1におけるＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数である。） Here, a value obtained by substituting the a, b, c, and d into the formula (z × a) + (2 × b) + c + d is defined as the average coordination number in the composition formula (1). In the formula, z is the total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 1 . The average coordination number is preferably more than 2.0 and 7.0 or less. That is, a, b, c, and d preferably satisfy the following mathematical formula (2).
7.0 ≧ (z × a) + (2 × b) + c + d> 2.0 (2)
(In formula (2), z is the total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 1. )
　前記組成式（１）における平均配位数は、３．０以上６．０以下であることがより好ましく、３．５以上５．５以下であることが更に好ましく、４．０以上５．０以下であることが特に好ましい。 The average coordination number in the composition formula (1) is more preferably 3.0 or more and 6.0 or less, further preferably 3.5 or more and 5.5 or less, and 4.0 or more and 5.0. It is particularly preferred that
　ａは、好ましくは０．５より大きく１．５以下の数であり、より好ましくは０．６～１．４の数であり、更に好ましくは０．７～１．３の数であり、特に好ましくは０．８～１．２の数である。 a is preferably a number greater than 0.5 and not greater than 1.5, more preferably a number from 0.6 to 1.4, still more preferably a number from 0.7 to 1.3, The number is preferably 0.8 to 1.2.
　ｂは、好ましくは０～１．５の数であり、より好ましくは０～１．０の数であり、更に好ましくは０～０．３又は１．０の数であり、特に好ましくは０である。 b is preferably a number from 0 to 1.5, more preferably a number from 0 to 1.0, still more preferably a number from 0 to 0.3 or 1.0, and particularly preferably 0. is there.
　ｃは、好ましくは０～１．５の数であり、より好ましくは０～１．０の数であり、更に好ましくは０～０．３又は１．０の数であり、特に好ましくは０である。 c is preferably a number of 0 to 1.5, more preferably a number of 0 to 1.0, still more preferably a number of 0 to 0.3 or 1.0, and particularly preferably 0. is there.
　ｄの好ましい態様は、２つある。１つの態様として好ましくは０～０．３の数であり、より好ましくは０～０．２の数であり、更に好ましくは０～０．１の数であり、特に好ましくは０である。もう１つの態様として好ましくは０．５～１．５の数であり、より好ましくは０．６～１．５の数であり、更に好ましくは０．７～１．３の数であり、特に好ましくは０．８～１．２の数である。好ましい２つの態様のうち、前述の態様がより好ましい。 There are two preferred embodiments of d. In one embodiment, the number is preferably 0 to 0.3, more preferably 0 to 0.2, still more preferably 0 to 0.1, and particularly preferably 0. Another aspect is preferably a number of 0.5 to 1.5, more preferably a number of 0.6 to 1.5, still more preferably a number of 0.7 to 1.3. The number is preferably 0.8 to 1.2. Of the two preferred embodiments, the aforementioned embodiments are more preferred.
　本発明の膜における発光性銀錯体は、単核錯体、２核錯体、３核錯体、４核錯体、５核錯体、６核錯体、及び７核以上の錯体のいずれであってもよく、これらの混合物であってもよいが、好ましくは単核錯体、２核錯体、又は３核錯体であり、より好ましくは単核錯体又は２核錯体であり、更に好ましくは単核錯体である。 The luminescent silver complex in the film of the present invention may be any of a mononuclear complex, a binuclear complex, a trinuclear complex, a tetranuclear complex, a 5-nuclear complex, a hexanuclear complex, and a complex having 7 or more nuclei. However, it is preferably a mononuclear complex, a binuclear complex, or a trinuclear complex, more preferably a mononuclear complex or a binuclear complex, and still more preferably a mononuclear complex.
　本発明の膜における銀錯体の例を表１－１及び表１－２に示す。なお、前記組成式（１）におけるａ、ｂ、ｃ及びｄを省略しているが、各化合物番号のそれぞれについて、前記記載の適切な数をとることができる。 Examples of silver complexes in the film of the present invention are shown in Table 1-1 and Table 1-2. In addition, although a, b, c, and d in the composition formula (1) are omitted, an appropriate number as described above can be taken for each compound number.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000062
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000062
　表１－１及び表１－２中「－」は、は含まれない旨を示す。 “-” In Table 1-1 and Table 1-2 indicates that it is not included.
　表１－１及び表１－２に示される組み合わせのうち、化合物番号１～１３、２２～２５、及び３１～１０８、及び１２４～１５４で示される組み合わせが好ましく、化合物番号１～９、３１～４１、７２～１０８、及び１２４～１５４で示される組み合わせがより好ましく、化合物番号１～９、３１～４１、７２～７５、９４～１００、及び１２４～１５４で示される組み合わせが更に好ましく、１～９、３１～４１、９４～１００、１２４～１３７、及び１４８－１５４で示される組み合わせが特に好ましい。 Of the combinations shown in Table 1-1 and Table 1-2, the combinations shown by Compound Nos. 1 to 13, 22 to 25, 31 to 108, and 124 to 154 are preferable, and the Compound Nos. 1 to 9, 31 to More preferred are combinations represented by 41, 72 to 108, and 124 to 154, and further preferred are combinations represented by compound numbers 1 to 9, 31 to 41, 72 to 75, 94 to 100, and 124 to 154. 9, 31-41, 94-100, 124-137 and 148-154 are particularly preferred.
　本発明の膜における銀錯体の代表例を以下に示す。式１０’、３２’、６８’、９４’、及び９５’で表される銀錯体は、それぞれ前記化合物番号１０、３２、６８、９４、９５で示される組み合わせを有する代表的な銀錯体である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
 Typical examples of the silver complex in the film of the present invention are shown below. Silver complexes represented by the formulas 10 ′, 32 ′, 68 ′, 94 ′, and 95 ′ are representative silver complexes having the combinations represented by the compound numbers 10, 32, 68, 94, and 95, respectively. .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
　本発明の膜における銀錯体は、通常は発光性を示す。銀錯体の発光寿命は長い方が好ましい。そのためにはＳ１エネルギーとＴ１エネルギーとの差が０．３ｅＶ以下であることが好ましく、０．２ｅＶ以下であることがより好ましく、三重項が発光に寄与しやすいので、０．１ｅＶ以下であることが更に好ましい。Ｓ１エネルギーとＴ１エネルギーの差が０．３ｅＶ以下であれば、２００ｎｓ以上の発光寿命を発現し得る。 The silver complex in the film of the present invention usually exhibits luminescence. The longer the emission lifetime of the silver complex, the better. For this purpose, the difference between the S1 energy and the T1 energy is preferably 0.3 eV or less, more preferably 0.2 eV or less, and the triplet tends to contribute to light emission, so that it is 0.1 eV or less. Is more preferable. If the difference between the S1 energy and the T1 energy is 0.3 eV or less, a light emission lifetime of 200 ns or more can be exhibited.
　ここで、Ｓ１エネルギーとＴ１エネルギーとの差の求め方を、以下に一例を挙げて説明する。まず密度汎関数法により銀錯体の初期構造について構造最適化計算を行う。構造最適化計算の際、汎関数としてＢ３ＬＹＰ、基底関数として銀原子（又はＡｇ+）及びハロゲン原子にはＬＡＮＬ２ＤＺ、その他の原子には６－３１Ｇ（ｄ）を用い得る。計算プログラムはＧａｕｓｓｉａｎ０３（Ｇａｕｓｓｉａｎ　Ｉｎｃ．製）を用い得る。 Here, a method for obtaining the difference between the S1 energy and the T1 energy will be described below with an example. First, the structure optimization calculation is performed on the initial structure of the silver complex by density functional theory. In the structure optimization calculation, B3LYP can be used as the functional, LANL2DZ as the silver atom (or Ag + ) and halogen atom as the basis function, and 6-31G (d) as the other atoms. As the calculation program, Gaussian 03 (manufactured by Gaussian Inc.) can be used.
　前記銀錯体の初期構造としては、前記組成式（１）におけるＬ1、Ｌ2及びＬ3のいずれもがＡｇ+に配位可能なアニオンを有さず、かつ、Ｘ1がＦ-、Ｃｌ-、Ｂｒ-及びＩ-のいずれかでない場合は、総電荷を＋１として、Ｌ1、Ｌ2及びＬ3のいずれか１つ以上がＡｇ+に配位可能なアニオンを有するか、又はＸ1がＦ-、Ｃｌ-、Ｂｒ-及びＩ-のいずれかである場合は、総電荷を０として、Ｌ1、Ｌ2及びＬ3の各配位原子が銀原子（又はＡｇ+）から３．０Å以下になるよう配置したものを用いることが好ましい。Ｘ1がハロゲン化物イオンの場合は、Ｘ1も銀原子（又はＡｇ+）から３．０Å以下になるよう配置したものを用いることが好ましい。 As an initial structure of the silver complex, none of L 1 , L 2 and L 3 in the composition formula (1) has an anion capable of coordinating to Ag + , and X 1 is F − , Cl In the case where it is not any of − , Br − and I − , the total charge is +1, and at least one of L 1 , L 2 and L 3 has an anion capable of coordinating to Ag + , or X 1 2 is any one of F − , Cl − , Br − and I − , the total charge is 0, and each coordination atom of L 1 , L 2 and L 3 is from a silver atom (or Ag + ) to 3. It is preferable to use one arranged so as to be 0 mm or less. In the case where X 1 is a halide ion, it is preferable to use one in which X 1 is also arranged so as to be 3.0 cm or less from the silver atom (or Ag + ).
　ここでいうＳ１エネルギーとは、１電子励起状態において、基底状態を基準としたときの最低励起１重項状態のエネルギーであり、Ｔ１エネルギーとは１電子励起状態において、基底状態を基準としたときの最低励起３重項状態のエネルギーである。Ｓ１エネルギー及びＴ１エネルギーは、前記の構造最適化計算により得られる最適化された構造に対して、時間依存密度汎関数法を適用し、一電子励起状態を計算することにより求めることができる。時間依存密度汎関数法に用いる計算手法は、汎関数としてＢ３ＬＹＰ、基底関数としてＡｇ+及びハロゲン原子にはＬＡＮＬ２ＤＺ、その他の原子には６－３１Ｇ（ｄ）を用い得る。計算プログラムはＧａｕｓｓｉａｎ０３（Ｇａｕｓｓｉａｎ　Ｉｎｃ．製）を用い得る。 The S1 energy here is the energy of the lowest excited singlet state when the ground state is the reference in the one-electron excited state, and the T1 energy is when the ground state is the reference in the one-electron excited state. Of the lowest excited triplet state. The S1 energy and the T1 energy can be obtained by applying a time-dependent density functional method to the optimized structure obtained by the structure optimization calculation and calculating the one-electron excited state. The calculation method used for the time-dependent density functional method can use B3LYP as the functional, Ag + as the basis function, LANL2DZ for the halogen atom, and 6-31G (d) for the other atoms. As the calculation program, Gaussian 03 (manufactured by Gaussian Inc.) can be used.
　本発明の膜における銀錯体は、Ｌ1が、Ａｇ+に配位可能な窒素原子として、置換されていてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物中の窒素原子を１つ以上有する場合に、Ｌ1中のＡｇ+に配位可能な全ての窒素原子について、Ｌ1中のＡｇ+に配位可能な窒素原子とＡｇ+との距離は、２．００Å以上３．５０Å以下であることが好ましい。より好ましくは２．１０Å以上３．４０Å以下であり、更に好ましくは２．２０Å以上３．３０Å以下であり、特に好ましくは２．３０Å以上３．２０Å以下であり、とりわけ好ましくは２．３０Å以上２．７０Å以下である。 When the silver complex in the film of the present invention has one or more nitrogen atoms in an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound as a nitrogen atom capable of coordinating to Ag + , L 1 for all of the nitrogen atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + in 1, the distance between the L 1 in Ag + allows coordinating nitrogen atom and Ag + is preferably less than 2.00 Å 3.50 Å . More preferably, it is 2.10 mm or more and 3.40 mm or less, further preferably 2.20 mm or more and 3.30 mm or less, particularly preferably 2.30 mm or more and 3.20 mm or less, and particularly preferably 2.30 mm or more and 2 or less. .70 mm or less.
　Ａｇ+に配位可能な窒素原子とＡｇ+との距離は、例えば、上述の密度汎関数法により銀構造最適化計算を行う手法によって求めることができる。 The distance between the Ag + allows coordinating nitrogen atom and Ag +, for example, can be determined by a method of performing silver structural optimization calculation by the above density functional method.
　本発明の膜における銀錯体は、例えば、溶媒中で銀塩と銀錯体を構成する分子とを混合する方法によって製造できる。 The silver complex in the film of the present invention can be produced, for example, by a method of mixing a silver salt and a molecule constituting the silver complex in a solvent.
　本発明の膜における銀錯体の製造方法の例について、前記式３２’で表される錯体を例に挙げて説明すると、１ｍｍｏｌの臭化銀（Ｉ）と、１ｍｍｏｌの式Ａａ６０’で表される分子と、溶媒（例えば、アセトニトリル、ジクロロメタン）５０ｍＬとを混合し、３０分時間程度加熱し還流させる。反応液をろ過し、ろ液の溶媒をゆっくりと留去して再結晶することにより、前記式３２’で表される錯体を製造することができる。 An example of the method for producing a silver complex in the film of the present invention will be described by taking the complex represented by the formula 32 ′ as an example, and represented by 1 mmol of silver bromide (I) and 1 mmol of the formula Aa60 ′. The molecules and 50 mL of a solvent (for example, acetonitrile, dichloromethane) are mixed and heated to reflux for about 30 minutes. The complex represented by the formula 32 'can be produced by filtering the reaction solution, slowly distilling off the solvent of the filtrate and recrystallization.
　本発明が提供する膜の厚さは、通常、１ｎｍ～５０μｍであり、好ましくは２ｎｍ～１０μｍであり、より好ましくは３ｎｍ～５μｍであり、更に好ましくは５ｎｍ～３μｍであり、特に好ましくは、発光素子に使用する際に電荷を流しやすいので、１０ｎｍ～２００ｎｍである。膜はピンホール又は凹凸を含んでいてもよいが、ピンホール及び凹凸を含んでいないことが好ましい。 The thickness of the film provided by the present invention is usually 1 nm to 50 μm, preferably 2 nm to 10 μm, more preferably 3 nm to 5 μm, still more preferably 5 nm to 3 μm, and particularly preferably light emission. Since it is easy to flow an electric charge when used in an element, the thickness is 10 nm to 200 nm. The film may contain pinholes or irregularities, but preferably does not contain pinholes or irregularities.
　本発明の膜は、例えば、銀錯体と他の成分とを任意の割合で基板上に蒸着する工程を含む方法、又は、銀錯体と他の成分とを任意の割合で溶媒中に懸濁又は溶解させ、塗布する工程を含む方法によって製造することができる。好ましくは銀錯体と他の成分とを任意の割合で溶媒中に懸濁又は溶解させ、塗布する工程を含む方法によって製造される。 The film of the present invention is, for example, a method comprising a step of vapor-depositing a silver complex and other components on a substrate in an arbitrary ratio, or a silver complex and other components suspended in a solvent in an arbitrary ratio or It can be manufactured by a method including a step of dissolving and applying. Preferably, it is produced by a method comprising a step of suspending or dissolving a silver complex and other components in a solvent in an arbitrary ratio and applying the suspension.
　前記塗布する工程に使用する溶媒としては、例えば、ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン、クロロホルム、１，２－ジクロロエタン、１，１，２，２－テトラクロロエタン、ジクロロメタン、テトラヒドロフラン、２－メチルテトラヒドロフラン、１，４－ジオキサン、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジメチルホルムアミド、ジメチルスルホキシド、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、アセトニトリル、酢酸エチル、メタノール、エタノール、イソプロピルアルコール、ヘキサン、シクロヘキサン、及びこれらの混合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the solvent used in the coating step include benzene, toluene, xylene, chloroform, 1,2-dichloroethane, 1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane, dichloromethane, tetrahydrofuran, 2-methyltetrahydrofuran, 1,4. -Dioxane, N, N-dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, acetonitrile, ethyl acetate, methanol, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, hexane, cyclohexane, and mixtures thereof.
　溶媒を乾燥させる方法の例としては、風乾、加熱乾燥、減圧乾燥、加熱減圧乾燥、及び窒素ガスを吹き付けて行う乾燥が挙げられ、風乾、又は加熱乾燥が好ましく、加熱乾燥がより好ましい。 Examples of the method for drying the solvent include air drying, heat drying, vacuum drying, heat vacuum drying, and drying performed by blowing nitrogen gas, and air drying or heat drying is preferable, and heat drying is more preferable.
　塗布方法としては、例えば、スピンコート法、キャスティング法、ディップコート法、グラビア印刷法、バーコート法、ロールコート法、スプレーコート法、スクリーン印刷法、フレキソ印刷法、インクジェット法及びオフセット印刷法が挙げられ、スピンコート法、キャスティング法、ロールコート法、スプレーコート法、スクリーン印刷法、フレキソ印刷法、インクジェット法及びオフセット印刷法が好ましい。 Examples of the coating method include spin coating, casting, dip coating, gravure printing, bar coating, roll coating, spray coating, screen printing, flexographic printing, inkjet printing, and offset printing. The spin coating method, casting method, roll coating method, spray coating method, screen printing method, flexographic printing method, ink jet method and offset printing method are preferable.
　本発明の膜は、その他の成分を含んでいてもよい。該成分には、低分子有機材料、高分子有機材料、有機無機複合材料、無機材料及びそれらの混合物が使用でき、用途に応じて任意に選択できる。該成分としては、例えば、カルバゾール誘導体、トリアゾール誘導体、オキサゾール誘導体、オキサジアゾール誘導体、イミダゾール誘導体、ポリアリールアルカン誘導体、ピラゾリン誘導体、ピラゾロン誘導体、フェニレンジアミン誘導体、アリールアミン誘導体、アミノ置換カルコン誘導体、スチリルアントラセン誘導体、フルオレノン誘導体、ヒドラゾン誘導体、スチルベン誘導体、シラザン誘導体、スチリルアミン誘導体、芳香族ジメチリジン誘導体、ポルフィリン誘導体、チオフェンオリゴマー、ポリチオフェン等の導電性高分子オリゴマー、アントラキノジメタン誘導体、アントロン誘導体、ジフェニルキノン誘導体、チオピランジオキシド誘導体、カルボジイミド誘導体、フルオレニリデンメタン誘導体、ジスチリルピラジン誘導体、芳香環（ナフタレン、ペリレン等）のテトラカルボン酸無水物、フタロシアニン誘導体、金属錯体（例えば、８－キノリノール誘導体の金属錯体、メタルフタロシアニンを配位子とする金属錯体、ベンゾオキサゾールを配位子とする金属錯体、ベンゾチアゾールを配位子とする金属錯体）、アルカリ金属、アルカリ土類金属、希土類金属、アルカリ金属の酸化物、アルカリ金属のハロゲン化物、アルカリ土類金属の酸化物、アルカリ土類金属のハロゲン化物、希土類金属の酸化物又は希土類金属のハロゲン化物、アルカリ金属錯体、アルカリ土類金属錯体、希土類金属錯体、フルオレン骨格を有する化合物、ピリジン骨格を有する化合物、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物、アリールシラン骨格を有する化合物、支持塩（トリフルオロメタンスルホン酸リチウム、過塩素酸リチウム、過塩素酸テトラブチルアンモニウム、ヘキサフルオロリン酸カリウム、テトラフルオロホウ酸テトラ－ｎ－ブチルアンモニウム等）を含有してもよい溶媒（プロピレンカーボネート、アセトニトリル、２－メチルテトラヒドロフラン、１，３－ジオキソフラン、ニトロベンゼン、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジメチルホルムアミド、ジメチルスルホキシド、グリセリン、プロピルアルコール、水等）及びこれらの混合物が挙げられ、
好ましくは、カルバゾール誘導体、トリアゾール誘導体、オキサゾール誘導体、オキサジアゾール誘導体、イミダゾール誘導体、ポリアリールアルカン誘導体、ピラゾリン誘導体、ピラゾロン誘導体、フェニレンジアミン誘導体、アリールアミン誘導体、スチリルアミン誘導体、ポルフィリン誘導体、チオフェンオリゴマー、ジフェニルキノン誘導体、芳香環（ナフタレン、ペリレン等）のテトラカルボン酸無水物、フタロシアニン誘導体、金属錯体（例えば、８－キノリノール誘導体の金属錯体、メタルフタロシアニンを配位子とする金属錯体、ベンゾオキサゾールを配位子とする金属錯体及びベンゾチアゾールを配位子とする金属錯体）、フルオレン骨格を有する化合物、ピリジン骨格を有する化合物、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物及びアリールシラン骨格を有する化合物であり、
より好ましくは、カルバゾール誘導体、オキサゾール誘導体、オキサジアゾール誘導体、イミダゾール誘導体、フェニレンジアミン誘導体、アリールアミン誘導体、ポルフィリン誘導体、フタロシアニン誘導体、フルオレン骨格を有する化合物、ピリジン骨格を有する化合物、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物及びアリールシラン骨格を有する化合物であり、
更に好ましくは、カルバゾール誘導体、オキサジアゾール誘導体、アリールアミン誘導体有機シラン誘導体、フルオレン骨格を有する化合物、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物及びアリールシラン骨格を有する化合物である。
　その他の成分は１種類であってもよいし、２種類以上の組み合わせであってもよい。 The membrane of the present invention may contain other components. As the component, a low-molecular organic material, a high-molecular organic material, an organic-inorganic composite material, an inorganic material, and a mixture thereof can be used, and can be arbitrarily selected according to the application. Examples of the component include carbazole derivatives, triazole derivatives, oxazole derivatives, oxadiazole derivatives, imidazole derivatives, polyarylalkane derivatives, pyrazoline derivatives, pyrazolone derivatives, phenylenediamine derivatives, arylamine derivatives, amino-substituted chalcone derivatives, styrylanthracene. Derivatives, fluorenone derivatives, hydrazone derivatives, stilbene derivatives, silazane derivatives, styrylamine derivatives, aromatic dimethylidine derivatives, porphyrin derivatives, thiophene oligomers, polythiophene and other conductive polymer oligomers, anthraquinodimethane derivatives, anthrone derivatives, diphenylquinone derivatives , Thiopyrandioxide derivatives, carbodiimide derivatives, fluorenylidenemethane derivatives, distyrylpyrazine Conductors, tetracarboxylic anhydrides of aromatic rings (naphthalene, perylene, etc.), phthalocyanine derivatives, metal complexes (for example, metal complexes of 8-quinolinol derivatives, metal complexes with metal phthalocyanine as a ligand, benzoxazole as a ligand Metal complexes, metal complexes with benzothiazole ligands), alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, rare earth metals, alkali metal oxides, alkali metal halides, alkaline earth metal oxides, alkaline earths Metal halides, rare earth metal oxides or rare earth metal halides, alkali metal complexes, alkaline earth metal complexes, rare earth metal complexes, compounds having a fluorene skeleton, compounds having a pyridine skeleton, compounds having a triazine skeleton, Compound having arylsilane skeleton, supporting salt (trifluoro Solvents that may contain lithium tansulfonate, lithium perchlorate, tetrabutylammonium perchlorate, potassium hexafluorophosphate, tetra-n-butylammonium tetrafluoroborate, etc. (propylene carbonate, acetonitrile, 2- Methyltetrahydrofuran, 1,3-dioxofuran, nitrobenzene, N, N-dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, glycerin, propyl alcohol, water, etc.) and mixtures thereof.
Preferably, a carbazole derivative, triazole derivative, oxazole derivative, oxadiazole derivative, imidazole derivative, polyarylalkane derivative, pyrazoline derivative, pyrazolone derivative, phenylenediamine derivative, arylamine derivative, styrylamine derivative, porphyrin derivative, thiophene oligomer, diphenyl Quinone derivatives, tetracarboxylic anhydrides of aromatic rings (naphthalene, perylene, etc.), phthalocyanine derivatives, metal complexes (for example, metal complexes of 8-quinolinol derivatives, metal complexes with metal phthalocyanine as a ligand, coordinated benzoxazole Metal complexes having a benzothiazole ligand, compounds having a fluorene skeleton, compounds having a pyridine skeleton, compounds having a triazine skeleton, and A compound having an arylsilane,
More preferably, a carbazole derivative, an oxazole derivative, an oxadiazole derivative, an imidazole derivative, a phenylenediamine derivative, an arylamine derivative, a porphyrin derivative, a phthalocyanine derivative, a compound having a fluorene skeleton, a compound having a pyridine skeleton, a compound having a triazine skeleton, and A compound having an arylsilane skeleton,
More preferred are carbazole derivatives, oxadiazole derivatives, arylamine derivatives, organic silane derivatives, compounds having a fluorene skeleton, compounds having a triazine skeleton, and compounds having an arylsilane skeleton.
One type of other component may be sufficient and the combination of 2 or more types may be sufficient.
　膜中の銀錯体の含量は、膜全体の重量に対して、通常、０．０１～１００重量％であり、好ましくは０．１～９９重量％であり、より好ましくは１～９０重量％であり、更に好ましくは５～８０重量％であり、特に好ましくは１０～５０重量％である。 The content of the silver complex in the film is usually 0.01 to 100% by weight, preferably 0.1 to 99% by weight, more preferably 1 to 90% by weight, based on the weight of the whole film. More preferably 5 to 80% by weight, particularly preferably 10 to 50% by weight.
　本発明の膜は、膜を形成するための成分として高分子化合物を用いることが好ましい。該高分子化合物としては、例えば以下のものが挙げられる。
　カルバゾール誘導体、ピラゾリン誘導体、ピラゾロン誘導体、アリールアミン誘導体、スチルベン誘導体、トリフェニルジアミン誘導体、フェニレンジアミン誘導体、スチリルアントラセン誘導体、スチリルアミン誘導体、芳香族ジメチリジン誘導体、ヒドラゾン誘導体、ポリ芳香族三級アミン化合物、アミノ置換カルコン誘導体等の正孔輸送材料の残基を含む重合体；
　ポリアリールアルカン誘導体、ポリビニルカルバゾール誘導体、ポリシラン誘導体、側鎖又は主鎖に芳香族アミン構造を有するポリシロキサン誘導体、ポリアニリン誘導体、ポリ（２，５－チエニレンビニレン）誘導体、アニリン系共重合体、ポリチオフェン等の導電性高分子オリゴマー、などの高分子正孔輸送材料；
　トリアゾール誘導体、オキサジアゾール誘導体、イミダゾール誘導体、ジフェニルキノン誘導体、チオピランジオキシド誘導体、カルボジイミド誘導体、フルオレニリデンメタン誘導体、ジスチリルピラジン誘導体、芳香環カルボン酸無水物誘導体（ナフタレン、ペリレン）、金属錯体（例えば、８－キノリノール誘導体の金属錯体、ベンゾオキサゾールを配位子とする金属錯体、ベンゾチアゾールを配位子とする金属錯体）、ナフトキノン誘導体、アントラキノン誘導体、テトラシアノアントラキノジメタン誘導体、フルオレノン誘導体、ジフェニレンジシアノエチレン誘導体、ジフェノキノン誘導体、８－ヒドロキシキノリン誘導体、フタロシアニン誘導体、金属ポルフィリン誘導体等の電子輸送材料の残基を含む重合体、ポリトリアジン誘導体、ポリオキサゾール誘導体、ポリナフタレン誘導体、ポリチエニレンビニレン誘導体、ポリキノリン誘導体、ポリキノキサリン誘導体、芳香族アミン構造を主鎖又は側鎖に含む重合体等の電子輸送材料；
　ポリ塩化ビニル、ポリカーボネート、ポリスチレン、ポリメチルメタクリレート（ＰＭＭＡ）、ポリブチルメタクリレート及びその誘導体、ポリフルオレン誘導体、ポリエステル及びその誘導体、ポリスルホン及びその誘導体、ポリフェニレンオキシド誘導体、ポリブタジエン誘導体、炭化水素樹脂、ケトン樹脂、フェノキシ樹脂、ポリアミド、エチルセルロース、酢酸ビニル、ＡＢＳ樹脂、ポリウレタン、メラミン樹脂、不飽和ポリエステル樹脂、アルキド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、シリコン樹脂、ポリエチレンオキシド及びその誘導体、ポリアクリルニトリル及びその誘導体、フッ化ビニリデンと６フッ化プロピレンの共重合体等の高分子マトリックス。 The film of the present invention preferably uses a polymer compound as a component for forming the film. Examples of the polymer compound include the following.
Carbazole derivatives, pyrazoline derivatives, pyrazolone derivatives, arylamine derivatives, stilbene derivatives, triphenyldiamine derivatives, phenylenediamine derivatives, styrylanthracene derivatives, styrylamine derivatives, aromatic dimethylidine derivatives, hydrazone derivatives, polyaromatic tertiary amine compounds, amino A polymer containing a residue of a hole transport material such as a substituted chalcone derivative;
Polyarylalkane derivatives, polyvinylcarbazole derivatives, polysilane derivatives, polysiloxane derivatives having an aromatic amine structure in the side chain or main chain, polyaniline derivatives, poly (2,5-thienylene vinylene) derivatives, aniline copolymers, polythiophene Polymer hole transport materials such as conductive polymer oligomers, etc .;
Triazole derivatives, oxadiazole derivatives, imidazole derivatives, diphenylquinone derivatives, thiopyrandioxide derivatives, carbodiimide derivatives, fluorenylidenemethane derivatives, distyrylpyrazine derivatives, aromatic ring carboxylic acid anhydride derivatives (naphthalene, perylene), metal complexes (For example, metal complexes of 8-quinolinol derivatives, metal complexes having benzoxazole as a ligand, metal complexes having benzothiazole as a ligand), naphthoquinone derivatives, anthraquinone derivatives, tetracyanoanthraquinodimethane derivatives, fluorenone derivatives Polymers containing residues of electron transport materials such as diphenylenedicyanoethylene derivatives, diphenoquinone derivatives, 8-hydroxyquinoline derivatives, phthalocyanine derivatives, metalloporphyrin derivatives, polytriazis Derivatives, polyoxazole derivative, poly naphthalene derivatives, polythienylenevinylene derivative, polyquinoline derivatives, polyquinoxaline derivatives, electron-transporting material of a polymer containing an aromatic amine structure in the main chain or side chain;
Polyvinyl chloride, polycarbonate, polystyrene, polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA), polybutyl methacrylate and derivatives thereof, polyfluorene derivatives, polyester and derivatives thereof, polysulfone and derivatives thereof, polyphenylene oxide derivatives, polybutadiene derivatives, hydrocarbon resins, ketone resins, Phenoxy resin, polyamide, ethyl cellulose, vinyl acetate, ABS resin, polyurethane, melamine resin, unsaturated polyester resin, alkyd resin, epoxy resin, silicone resin, polyethylene oxide and derivatives thereof, polyacrylonitrile and derivatives thereof, vinylidene fluoride and 6 Polymer matrix such as a copolymer of propylene fluoride.
　好ましくは、ポリカルバゾール誘導体、ポリアリールアミン誘導体、ポリフェニレンジアミン誘導体、ポリヒドラゾン誘導体、ポリ芳香族三級アミン化合物の残基を含む重合体、ポリアリールアルカン誘導体、ポリビニルカルバゾール誘導体、ポリシラン誘導体、側鎖又は主鎖に芳香族アミン構造を有するポリシロキサン誘導体、ポリ（２，５－チエニレンビニレン）誘導体、アニリン系共重合体、ポリトリアゾール誘導体、ポリオキサジアゾール誘導体、ポリイミダゾール誘導体、８－ヒドロキシキノリン誘導体の残基を含む重合体、ポリフタロシアニン誘導体、金属ポルフィリン誘導体の残基を含む重合体、ポリトリアジン誘導体、ポリオキサゾール誘導体、ポリナフタレン誘導体、ポリアニリン誘導体、ポリチオフェン誘導体、ポリチエニレンビニレン誘導体、ポリキノキサリン誘導体、芳香族アミン構造を主鎖又は側鎖に含む重合体、ポリ塩化ビニル、ポリカーボネート、ポリスチレン、ポリメチルメタクリレート、ポリフルオレン誘導体、ポリフェニレンオキシド誘導体、炭化水素樹脂、ポリアミド、ポリエチレンオキシド及びその誘導体であり、
　より好ましくは、ポリカルバゾール誘導体、ポリアリールアミン誘導体、ポリ芳香族三級アミン化合物の残基を含む重合体、ポリアリールアルカン誘導体、ポリビニルカルバゾール誘導体、ポリシラン誘導体、ポリチオフェン誘導体、ポリオキサジアゾール誘導体、金属ポルフィリン誘導体の残基を含む重合体、ポリトリアジン誘導体、ポリオキサゾール誘導体、ポリナフタレン誘導体、芳香族アミン構造を主鎖又は側鎖に含む重合体、ポリスチレン、ポリメチルメタクリレート、ポリフルオレン誘導体、ポリフェニレンオキシド誘導体であり、
　更に好ましくは、ポリカルバゾール誘導体、ポリ芳香族三級アミン化合物の残基を含む重合体、ポリアリールアルカン誘導体、ポリビニルカルバゾール誘導体、ポリオキサジアゾール誘導体、ポリトリアジン誘導体、ポリフルオレン誘導体である。
　高分子化合物は１種類であってもよいし、２種類以上の組み合わせであってもよい。 Preferably, polycarbazole derivatives, polyarylamine derivatives, polyphenylenediamine derivatives, polyhydrazone derivatives, polymers containing residues of polyaromatic tertiary amine compounds, polyarylalkane derivatives, polyvinylcarbazole derivatives, polysilane derivatives, side chains or Polysiloxane derivatives having an aromatic amine structure in the main chain, poly (2,5-thienylene vinylene) derivatives, aniline copolymers, polytriazole derivatives, polyoxadiazole derivatives, polyimidazole derivatives, 8-hydroxyquinoline derivatives Polymers containing residues of the above, polyphthalocyanine derivatives, polymers containing residues of metal porphyrin derivatives, polytriazine derivatives, polyoxazole derivatives, polynaphthalene derivatives, polyaniline derivatives, polythiophene derivatives, polythiophene Nylene vinylene derivative, polyquinoxaline derivative, polymer containing aromatic amine structure in the main chain or side chain, polyvinyl chloride, polycarbonate, polystyrene, polymethyl methacrylate, polyfluorene derivative, polyphenylene oxide derivative, hydrocarbon resin, polyamide, polyethylene oxide And derivatives thereof,
More preferably, polycarbazole derivatives, polyarylamine derivatives, polymers containing residues of polyaromatic tertiary amine compounds, polyarylalkane derivatives, polyvinylcarbazole derivatives, polysilane derivatives, polythiophene derivatives, polyoxadiazole derivatives, metals Polymer containing residue of porphyrin derivative, polytriazine derivative, polyoxazole derivative, polynaphthalene derivative, polymer containing aromatic amine structure in main chain or side chain, polystyrene, polymethyl methacrylate, polyfluorene derivative, polyphenylene oxide derivative And
More preferred are polycarbazole derivatives, polymers containing residues of polyaromatic tertiary amine compounds, polyarylalkane derivatives, polyvinylcarbazole derivatives, polyoxadiazole derivatives, polytriazine derivatives, and polyfluorene derivatives.
The polymer compound may be one kind or a combination of two or more kinds.
　前記高分子化合物のポリスチレン換算の数平均分子量は、通常、１×１０3～１×１０8であり、好ましくは１×１０3～１×１０7であり、より好ましくは２×１０3～１×１０6であり、更に好ましくは３×１０3～５×１０5であり、特に好ましくは５×１０3～１×１０5である。 The number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer compound is usually 1 × 10 3 to 1 × 10 8 , preferably 1 × 10 3 to 1 × 10 7 , more preferably 2 × 10 3 to 1. × 10 6 , more preferably 3 × 10 3 to 5 × 10 5 , and particularly preferably 5 × 10 3 to 1 × 10 5 .
　本発明の膜が前記高分子化合物を含有する場合、膜における銀錯体の含有量は、膜全体の重量に対して、通常、０．０１～９９．９９重量％であり、好ましくは０．１～９９重量％であり、より好ましくは１～９０重量％であり、更に好ましくは５～８０重量％であり、特に好ましくは１０～５０重量％である。 When the film of the present invention contains the polymer compound, the content of the silver complex in the film is usually 0.01 to 99.99% by weight, preferably 0.1% with respect to the weight of the whole film. It is ˜99% by weight, more preferably 1 to 90% by weight, still more preferably 5 to 80% by weight, and particularly preferably 10 to 50% by weight.
　本発明は、上記本発明の膜を含有する発光素子を提供する。該発光素子は、通常、陽極と陰極からなる一対の電極と、該電極間に設けられた発光層を有する１層又は複数層からなる層（薄膜層）とが挟持されている発光素子であり、該層の１層以上が、本発明の膜である発光素子である。 The present invention provides a light emitting device containing the film of the present invention. The light-emitting element is usually a light-emitting element in which a pair of electrodes composed of an anode and a cathode and a layer (thin film layer) composed of one or more layers having a light-emitting layer provided between the electrodes are sandwiched. In the light-emitting element, one or more of the layers is the film of the present invention.
　本発明の発光素子において、本発明の膜を含む膜中の該銀錯体の含有量は、該層全体の重量に対し、通常０．０１～１００重量％であり、好ましくは０．１～９９重量％であり、より好ましくは１～９０重量％であり、更に好ましくは５～８０重量％であり、特に好ましくは１０～５０重量％である。 In the light emitting device of the present invention, the content of the silver complex in the film including the film of the present invention is usually 0.01 to 100% by weight, preferably 0.1 to 99% by weight based on the weight of the whole layer. % By weight, more preferably 1 to 90% by weight, still more preferably 5 to 80% by weight, and particularly preferably 10 to 50% by weight.
　本発明の発光素子としては、例えば、単層型の発光素子（陽極／発光層／陰極）及び多層型の発光素子が挙げられる。多層型の発光素子の層構成としては、例えば、以下の層構成が挙げられる。
（ａ）陽極／正孔注入層／（正孔輸送層）／発光層／陰極
（ｂ）陽極／発光層／電子注入層／（電子輸送層）／陰極
（ｃ）陽極／正孔注入層／（正孔輸送層）／発光層／電子注入層／（電子輸送層）／陰極
（ｄ）陽極／発光層／（電子輸送層）／電子注入層／陰極
（ｅ）陽極／正孔注入層／（正孔輸送層）／発光層／（電子輸送層）／電子注入層／陰極 Examples of the light emitting device of the present invention include a single layer type light emitting device (anode / light emitting layer / cathode) and a multilayer type light emitting device. Examples of the layer configuration of the multilayer light emitting element include the following layer configurations.
(A) anode / hole injection layer / (hole transport layer) / light emitting layer / cathode (b) anode / light emitting layer / electron injection layer / (electron transport layer) / cathode (c) anode / hole injection layer / (Hole transport layer) / light emitting layer / electron injection layer / (electron transport layer) / cathode (d) anode / light emitting layer / (electron transport layer) / electron injection layer / cathode (e) anode / hole injection layer / (Hole transport layer) / light emitting layer / (electron transport layer) / electron injection layer / cathode
　本発明の発光素子において、該素子を構成するいずれかの層が本発明の膜であればよく、その層は限定されないが、発光層であることが好ましい。 In the light emitting device of the present invention, any layer constituting the device may be the film of the present invention, and the layer is not limited, but is preferably a light emitting layer.
　前記（ａ）～（ｅ）において、（正孔輸送層）及び（電子輸送層）は、その位置にこれらの層がそれぞれ存在していてもしなくてもよい任意の層であることを表す。 In the above (a) to (e), (hole transport layer) and (electron transport layer) represent arbitrary layers that may or may not exist at each position.
　陽極は、正孔注入層、正孔輸送層、発光層等の層に正孔を供給するものであり、４．５ｅＶ以上の仕事関数を有することが好ましい。陽極の材料には、例えば、金属、合金、金属酸化物、電気伝導性化合物及びこれらの組み合わせを用いることができ、好ましくは、酸化スズ、酸化亜鉛、酸化インジウム、酸化インジウムスズ（ＩＴＯ）等の導電性金属酸化物；金、銀、クロム、ニッケル等の金属；前記導電性金属酸化物と前記金属との混合物及び積層物；ヨウ化銅、硫化銅等の無機導電性物質；ポリアニリン類、ポリチオフェン類〔ポリエチレンジオキシチオフェン等〕、ポリピロール等の有機導電性材料及びこれらとＩＴＯとの組み合わせ、が挙げられる。 The anode supplies holes to layers such as a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, and a light emitting layer, and preferably has a work function of 4.5 eV or more. For the material of the anode, for example, a metal, an alloy, a metal oxide, an electrically conductive compound, and a combination thereof can be used. Preferably, tin oxide, zinc oxide, indium oxide, indium tin oxide (ITO), etc. Conductive metal oxides; metals such as gold, silver, chromium and nickel; mixtures and laminates of the conductive metal oxides and the metals; inorganic conductive materials such as copper iodide and copper sulfide; polyanilines and polythiophenes Examples [polyethylenedioxythiophene and the like], organic conductive materials such as polypyrrole, and a combination thereof with ITO.
　陰極は、電子注入層、電子輸送層、発光層等に電子を供給するものである。陰極の材料には、例えば、金属、合金、金属ハロゲン化物、金属酸化物、電気伝導性化合物及びこれらの組み合わせを用いることができ、好ましくは、アルカリ金属（Ｌｉ、Ｎａ、Ｋ、Ｃｓ等）及びそのフッ化物並びに酸化物；アルカリ土類金属（Ｍｇ、Ｃａ、Ｂａ等）及びそのフッ化物並びに酸化物；金、銀、鉛、アルミニウム、合金及び混合金属類〔ナトリウム－カリウム合金、ナトリウム－カリウム混合金属、リチウム－アルミニウム合金、リチウム－アルミニウム混合金属、マグネシウム－銀合金、マグネシウム－銀混合金属等〕；希土類金属〔イッテルビウム等〕；インジウム；これらの組み合わせを用いることができる。 The cathode supplies electrons to an electron injection layer, an electron transport layer, a light emitting layer, and the like. As the cathode material, for example, a metal, an alloy, a metal halide, a metal oxide, an electrically conductive compound, and a combination thereof can be used. Preferably, an alkali metal (Li, Na, K, Cs, etc.) and Fluorides and oxides thereof; alkaline earth metals (Mg, Ca, Ba, etc.) and fluorides and oxides thereof; gold, silver, lead, aluminum, alloys and mixed metals [sodium-potassium alloys, sodium-potassium mixtures] Metal, lithium-aluminum alloy, lithium-aluminum mixed metal, magnesium-silver alloy, magnesium-silver mixed metal, etc.]; rare earth metal [ytterbium, etc.]; indium;
　正孔注入層及び正孔輸送層は、陽極から正孔を注入する機能、正孔を輸送する機能、又は陰極から注入された電子を障壁する機能を有する。これらの層に用いられる材料の例としては、カルバゾール誘導体、トリアゾール誘導体、オキサゾール誘導体、オキサジアゾール誘導体、イミダゾール誘導体、ポリアリールアルカン誘導体、ピラゾリン誘導体、ピラゾロン誘導体、フェニレンジアミン誘導体、アリールアミン誘導体、アミノ置換カルコン誘導体、スチリルアントラセン誘導体、フルオレノン誘導体、ヒドラゾン誘導体、スチルベン誘導体、シラザン誘導体、芳香族第三級アミン誘導体、スチリルアミン誘導体、芳香族ジメチリジン誘導体、ポルフィリン誘導体、ポリシラン誘導体、ポリ（Ｎ－ビニルカルバゾール）誘導体、有機シラン誘導体、及びこれらの残基を含む重合体；アニリン系共重合体、チオフェンオリゴマー、ポリチオフェン等の導電性高分子オリゴマーが挙げられる。正孔注入層及び正孔輸送層は、これらの１種又は２種以上からなる単層構造であってもよいし、同一組成又は異種組成の複数層からなる多層構造であってもよい。 The hole injection layer and the hole transport layer have a function of injecting holes from the anode, a function of transporting holes, or a function of blocking electrons injected from the cathode. Examples of materials used for these layers include carbazole derivatives, triazole derivatives, oxazole derivatives, oxadiazole derivatives, imidazole derivatives, polyarylalkane derivatives, pyrazoline derivatives, pyrazolone derivatives, phenylenediamine derivatives, arylamine derivatives, amino-substituted Chalcone derivatives, styrylanthracene derivatives, fluorenone derivatives, hydrazone derivatives, stilbene derivatives, silazane derivatives, aromatic tertiary amine derivatives, styrylamine derivatives, aromatic dimethylidine derivatives, porphyrin derivatives, polysilane derivatives, poly (N-vinylcarbazole) derivatives , Organosilane derivatives, and polymers containing these residues; conductive polymer oligomers such as aniline copolymers, thiophene oligomers, and polythiophenes. It is. The hole injection layer and the hole transport layer may have a single layer structure composed of one or more of them, or may have a multilayer structure composed of a plurality of layers having the same composition or different compositions.
　電子注入層及び電子輸送層は、陰極から電子を注入する機能、電子を輸送する機能、又は陽極から注入された正孔を障壁する機能を有する。これらの層に用いられる材料の例としては、トリアゾール誘導体、オキサゾール誘導体、オキサジアゾール誘導体、イミダゾール誘導体、フルオレノン誘導体、アントラキノジメタン誘導体、アントロン誘導体、ジフェニルキノン誘導体、チオピランジオキシド誘導体、カルボジイミド誘導体、フルオレニリデンメタン誘導体、ジスチリルピラジン誘導体、芳香環（例えば、ナフタレン、ペリレン）のテトラカルボン酸無水物、フタロシアニン誘導体、金属錯体（例えば、８－キノリノール誘導体の金属錯体、メタルフタロシアニンを配位子とする金属錯体、ベンゾオキサゾールを配位子とする金属錯体及びベンゾチアゾールを配位子とする金属錯体）及び有機シラン誘導体が挙げられる。電子注入層及び電子輸送層は、これらの１種又は２種以上からなる単層構造であってもよいし、同一組成又は異種組成の複数層からなる多層構造であってもよい。 The electron injection layer and the electron transport layer have a function of injecting electrons from the cathode, a function of transporting electrons, or a function of blocking holes injected from the anode. Examples of materials used for these layers include triazole derivatives, oxazole derivatives, oxadiazole derivatives, imidazole derivatives, fluorenone derivatives, anthraquinodimethane derivatives, anthrone derivatives, diphenylquinone derivatives, thiopyrandioxide derivatives, carbodiimide derivatives. , Fluorenylidenemethane derivatives, distyrylpyrazine derivatives, tetracarboxylic anhydrides of aromatic rings (eg, naphthalene, perylene), phthalocyanine derivatives, metal complexes (eg, metal complexes of 8-quinolinol derivatives, metal phthalocyanines as ligands) Metal complexes having benzoxazole as a ligand and metal complexes having benzothiazole as a ligand) and organosilane derivatives. The electron injection layer and the electron transport layer may have a single layer structure composed of one or more of these, or may have a multilayer structure composed of a plurality of layers having the same composition or different compositions.
　電子注入層及び電子輸送層の材料として、絶縁体、半導体等の無機化合物も使用できる。電子注入層及び電子輸送層が絶縁体又は半導体で構成されていれば、電流のリークを有効に防止して、電子注入性を向上させることができる。このような絶縁体の例としては、アルカリ金属カルコゲニド、アルカリ土類金属カルコゲニド、アルカリ金属のハロゲン化物及びアルカリ土類金属のハロゲン化物からなる群から選ばれる１種以上の金属化合物が挙げられ、ＣａＯ、ＢａＯ、ＳｒＯ、ＢｅＯ、ＢａＳ及びＣａＳｅが好ましい。半導体の例としては、Ｂａ、Ｃａ、Ｓｒ、Ｙｂ、Ａｌ、Ｇａ、Ｉｎ、Ｌｉ、Ｎａ、Ｃｄ、Ｍｇ、Ｓｉ、Ｔａ、Ｓｂ及びＺｎからなる群から選ばれる１種以上の元素の、酸化物、窒化物及び酸化窒化物が挙げられる。 Inorganic compounds such as insulators and semiconductors can also be used as materials for the electron injection layer and the electron transport layer. If the electron injection layer and the electron transport layer are made of an insulator or a semiconductor, current leakage can be effectively prevented and the electron injection property can be improved. Examples of such insulators include one or more metal compounds selected from the group consisting of alkali metal chalcogenides, alkaline earth metal chalcogenides, alkali metal halides and alkaline earth metal halides, and CaO BaO, SrO, BeO, BaS and CaSe are preferred. Examples of semiconductors include oxides of one or more elements selected from the group consisting of Ba, Ca, Sr, Yb, Al, Ga, In, Li, Na, Cd, Mg, Si, Ta, Sb, and Zn. , Nitrides and oxynitrides.
　本発明の発光素子において、陰極と陰極に接する膜との界面領域に還元性ドーパントが添加されていてもよい。前記還元性ドーパントの例としては、アルカリ金属、アルカリ土類金属、希土類金属、アルカリ金属の酸化物、アルカリ金属のハロゲン化物、アルカリ土類金属の酸化物、アルカリ土類金属のハロゲン化物、希土類金属の酸化物又は希土類金属のハロゲン化物、アルカリ金属錯体、アルカリ土類金属錯体及び希土類金属錯体が挙げられる。 In the light emitting device of the present invention, a reducing dopant may be added to the interface region between the cathode and the film in contact with the cathode. Examples of the reducing dopant include alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, rare earth metal, alkali metal oxide, alkali metal halide, alkaline earth metal oxide, alkaline earth metal halide, rare earth metal. And oxides or rare earth metal halides, alkali metal complexes, alkaline earth metal complexes, and rare earth metal complexes.
　発光層は、電界印加時に、陽極、正孔注入層又は正孔輸送層より正孔を注入することができ、陰極、電子注入層又は電子輸送層より電子を注入することができる機能、注入した電荷を電界の力で移動させる機能、及び、電子と正孔の再結合の場を提供し、これを発光につなげる機能のいずれかを有する。発光層に本発明の膜を含有させる場合、本発明の膜に含まれる銀錯体をゲスト材料として発光層に含有させ、さらにホスト材料を発光層に含有させてもよい。ホスト材料としては、例えば、フルオレン骨格を有する化合物、カルバゾール骨格を有する化合物、ジアリールアミン骨格を有する化合物、ピリジン骨格を有する化合物、ピラジン骨格を有する化合物、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物及びアリールシラン骨格を有する化合物が挙げられる。ホスト材料のＴ１は、ゲスト材料のそれより大きいことが好ましく、その差が０．２ｅＶよりも大きいことが更に好ましい。ホスト材料は低分子化合物であっても、高分子化合物であってもよい。ホスト材料は更に電解質を含有してもよく、該電解質としては、例えば、支持塩（トリフルオロメタンスルホン酸リチウム、過塩素酸リチウム、過塩素酸テトラブチルアンモニウム、ヘキサフルオロリン酸カリウム、テトラフルオロホウ酸テトラ－ｎ－ブチルアンモニウム等）を含有してもよい溶媒（プロピレンカーボネート、アセトニトリル、２－メチルテトラヒドロフラン、１，３－ジオキソフラン、ニトロベンゼン、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジメチルホルムアミド、ジメチルスルホキシド、グリセリン、プロピルアルコール、水等）及び該溶媒で膨潤したゲル状の高分子（ポリエチレンオキシド、ポリアクリルニトリル、フッ化ビニリデンと六フッ化プロピレンの共重合体等）が挙げられる。ホスト材料と銀錯体とを混合して塗布する、又は共蒸着することにより、発光材料が前記ホスト材料にドープされた発光層を形成することができる。 The light emitting layer is capable of injecting holes from the anode, the hole injection layer, or the hole transport layer when an electric field is applied, and has the function of injecting electrons from the cathode, the electron injection layer, or the electron transport layer. It has one of the function of moving electric charges by the force of an electric field and the function of providing a field for recombination of electrons and holes and connecting it to light emission. When the film of the present invention is contained in the light emitting layer, the silver complex contained in the film of the present invention may be contained in the light emitting layer as a guest material, and further the host material may be contained in the light emitting layer. Examples of the host material include a compound having a fluorene skeleton, a compound having a carbazole skeleton, a compound having a diarylamine skeleton, a compound having a pyridine skeleton, a compound having a pyrazine skeleton, a compound having a triazine skeleton, and a compound having an arylsilane skeleton Is mentioned. The T1 of the host material is preferably larger than that of the guest material, and the difference is more preferably larger than 0.2 eV. The host material may be a low molecular compound or a high molecular compound. The host material may further contain an electrolyte. Examples of the electrolyte include supporting salts (lithium trifluoromethanesulfonate, lithium perchlorate, tetrabutylammonium perchlorate, potassium hexafluorophosphate, tetrafluoroborate. Solvents that may contain tetra-n-butylammonium etc. (propylene carbonate, acetonitrile, 2-methyltetrahydrofuran, 1,3-dioxofuran, nitrobenzene, N, N-dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, glycerin, propyl alcohol, water And a gel-like polymer swollen with the solvent (polyethylene oxide, polyacrylonitrile, a copolymer of vinylidene fluoride and hexafluoropropylene, etc.). A light-emitting layer in which a light-emitting material is doped in the host material can be formed by applying a mixture of a host material and a silver complex or by co-evaporation.
　本発明の発光素子において、各層の形成方法の例としては、真空蒸着法（抵抗加熱蒸着法、電子ビーム法等）、スパッタリング法、ＬＢ法、分子積層法及び塗布法（キャスティング法、スピンコート法、バーコート法、ブレードコート法、ロールコート法及びグラビア印刷法、スクリーン印刷法、インクジェット法等）が挙げられるが、製造プロセスを簡略化できる点で、塗布法が好ましい。前記塗布法では、各層の材料である、前記銀錯体、前記高分子化合物、それらの混合物等を、溶媒と混合して塗布液を調製し、該塗布液を所望の層（又は電極）上に、塗布・乾燥させることによって形成することができる。塗布液中にはホスト材料及び／又はバインダーとして樹脂を含有させてもよい。この樹脂は溶媒に溶解状態とすることも、分散状態とすることもできる。 In the light emitting device of the present invention, examples of a method for forming each layer include vacuum deposition methods (resistance heating deposition method, electron beam method, etc.), sputtering methods, LB methods, molecular lamination methods, and coating methods (casting method, spin coating method). , Bar coating method, blade coating method, roll coating method and gravure printing method, screen printing method, ink jet method, etc.), and the coating method is preferable in that the production process can be simplified. In the coating method, the silver complex, the polymer compound, or a mixture thereof, which is a material of each layer, is mixed with a solvent to prepare a coating solution, and the coating solution is placed on a desired layer (or electrode). It can be formed by coating and drying. The coating solution may contain a resin as a host material and / or a binder. This resin can be dissolved in a solvent or dispersed.
　樹脂としては、例えば、ポリビニルカルバゾール等の非共役系高分子、ポリオレフィン系高分子等の共役系高分子を使用することができ、好ましくは、ポリ塩化ビニル、ポリカーボネート、ポリスチレン、ポリメチルメタクリレート、ポリブチルメタクリレート、ポリエステル、ポリスルホン、ポリフェニレンオキシド、ポリブタジエン、ポリ（Ｎ－ビニルカルバゾール）、炭化水素樹脂、ケトン樹脂、フェノキシ樹脂、ポリアミド、エチルセルロース、酢酸ビニル、ＡＢＳ樹脂、ポリウレタン、メラミン樹脂、不飽和ポリエステル樹脂、アルキド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂及びシリコン樹脂が挙げられる。樹脂の溶液は、更に、酸化防止剤、粘度調整剤等を含有してもよい。前記溶液に用いられる溶媒としては、膜の成分を均一に溶解するもの又は安定な分散液を与える溶媒が好ましく、例えば、アルコール類（メタノール、エタノール、イソプロピルアルコール等）、ケトン類（アセトン、メチルエチルケトン等）、塩素化炭化水素類（クロロホルム、１，２－ジクロロエタン等）、芳香族炭化水素類（ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン等）、脂肪族炭化水素類（ノルマルヘキサン、シクロヘキサン等）、アミド類（ジメチルホルムアミド等）、スルホキシド類（ジメチルスルホキシド等）及びそれらの混合物が挙げられる。 As the resin, for example, a non-conjugated polymer such as polyvinyl carbazole, or a conjugated polymer such as a polyolefin polymer can be used, and preferably polyvinyl chloride, polycarbonate, polystyrene, polymethyl methacrylate, polybutyl. Methacrylate, polyester, polysulfone, polyphenylene oxide, polybutadiene, poly (N-vinylcarbazole), hydrocarbon resin, ketone resin, phenoxy resin, polyamide, ethyl cellulose, vinyl acetate, ABS resin, polyurethane, melamine resin, unsaturated polyester resin, alkyd Resins, epoxy resins, and silicone resins are listed. The resin solution may further contain an antioxidant, a viscosity modifier and the like. As the solvent used in the solution, a solvent that uniformly dissolves the components of the film or a solvent that gives a stable dispersion is preferable. For example, alcohols (methanol, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, etc.), ketones (acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, etc.) ), Chlorinated hydrocarbons (chloroform, 1,2-dichloroethane, etc.), aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, etc.), aliphatic hydrocarbons (normal hexane, cyclohexane, etc.), amides (dimethylformamide) Etc.), sulfoxides (dimethyl sulfoxide, etc.) and mixtures thereof.
　インクジェット法においては、例えば、ノズルからの蒸発を押さえるために高沸点の溶媒（アニソール、ビシクロヘキシルベンゼン等）を用いることができる。溶液の粘度は、２５℃において、１～１００ｍＰａ・ｓが好ましい。 In the inkjet method, for example, a high boiling point solvent (anisole, bicyclohexylbenzene, etc.) can be used to suppress evaporation from the nozzle. The viscosity of the solution is preferably 1 to 100 mPa · s at 25 ° C.
　本発明の発光素子の各層の厚さは、０．５ｎｍ～１００μｍが好ましく、１ｎｍ～１μｍがより好ましい。 The thickness of each layer of the light emitting device of the present invention is preferably 0.5 nm to 100 μm, more preferably 1 nm to 1 μm.
　本発明の発光素子は、例えば、照明用光源、サイン用光源、バックライト用光源、ディスプレイ装置、プリンターヘッド等に用いることができる。ディスプレイ装置としては、公知の駆動技術、駆動回路等を用い、セグメント型、ドットマトリクス型等の構成とした装置が挙げられる。 The light emitting device of the present invention can be used for, for example, an illumination light source, a sign light source, a backlight light source, a display device, a printer head, and the like. Examples of the display device include a device of a segment type, a dot matrix type, or the like using a known driving technique, a driving circuit, or the like.
　本発明は、下記組成式（３）で表される銀錯体を提供する。
（Ａｇ+）（Ｌ4）e（Ｌ5）f（Ｌ6）g（Ｘ2）h　　　　　（３）
（組成式（３）中、Ｌ4は、Ａｇ+に配位可能なリン原子を４つ以上６つ以下有する分子であるか、又は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子として、又は原子及びイオンとして、リン原子を１つ以上と、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる１つ以上とを有し、Ｌ4が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は３つ以上６つ以下である分子である。Ｌ5は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを有する分子であり、Ｌ5が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は２つである。Ｌ6は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを１つ有する分子である。Ｘ2はアニオンである。ｅは０．５より大きい数であり、ｆ、ｇ及びｈはそれぞれ独立に０以上の数である。） The present invention provides a silver complex represented by the following composition formula (3).
(Ag + ) (L 4 ) e (L 5 ) f (L 6 ) g (X 2 ) h (3)
(In the composition formula (3), L 4 is either a molecule having a coordinatable phosphorus atoms four or more than six to Ag +, or, as capable of coordinating atoms to Ag +, or atoms and ions An atom having at least one phosphorus atom and at least one selected from a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion and capable of coordinating to Ag + of L 4 And the total number of ions is from 3 to 6. L 5 is a phosphorus atom, nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, sulfur atom, arsenic atom, oxygen anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag + and a molecule having an atom or ion selected from sulfur anion, .L 6 total number of coordinatable atoms and ions Ag + are two having the L 5 represents, Ag + allows coordinating atoms or As ions, phosphorus atom, nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, sulfur A molecule having one atom or ion selected from a yellow atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion, X 2 is an anion, e is a number greater than 0.5, and f, g and h are respectively It is independently a number of 0 or more.)
　Ｌ4の好ましい例及び例は、上記Ｌ1のうちの好ましい例及び例のうち、
　Ａｇ+に配位可能なリン原子を４つ以上６つ以下有するもの、又は、
　Ａｇ＋に配位可能な原子として、又は原子及びイオンとして、リン原子を１つ以上と、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる１つ以上とを有し、Ｌ4が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は３つ以上６つ以下であるもの
と同様である。 Preferred examples and examples of L 4 are the preferred examples and examples of L 1 above.
Having 4 or more and 6 or less phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + , or
As an atom capable of coordinating to Ag + or as an atom and an ion, it has at least one phosphorus atom and at least one selected from a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion. However, the total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 4 is the same as 3 or more and 6 or less.
　Ｌ5、Ｌ6、Ｘ2、ｅ、ｆ、ｇ及びｈの定義は、それぞれ上記組成式（１）におけるＬ2、Ｌ3、Ｘ1、ａ、ｂ、ｃ、ｄと同様である。Ｌ5、Ｌ6、Ｘ2、ｅ、ｆ、ｇ及びｈの好ましい例及び例は、それぞれ上記組成式（１）におけるＬ2、Ｌ3、Ｘ1、ａ、ｂ、ｃ、ｄの好ましい例及び例と同様である。 The definitions of L 5 , L 6 , X 2 , e, f, g and h are the same as L 2 , L 3 , X 1 , a, b, c and d in the composition formula (1), respectively. Preferred examples and examples of L 5 , L 6 , X 2 , e, f, g and h are preferred examples of L 2 , L 3 , X 1 , a, b, c and d in the composition formula (1), respectively. And the same as the example.
　本発明は、ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つ以上含有し、且つ、窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基、－Ｏ-、及び－Ｓ-から選ばれる基を１つ又は２つ含有し、且つ、前記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ’）、（Ｂｂ）、（Ｂｃ）又は（Ｂｄ）で示される分子を提供する。本発明の分子は、例えば、金属錯体の配位子や、反応触媒などに用いることができるため、有用である。好ましくは上記本発明の膜に含まれる銀錯体、又は、銀錯体中の配位子として、有用である。 The present invention is a diaryl phosphino group contains two or more, and, the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic one hydrogen atom from the compound to 3 except groups, -O -, and -S - a group selected from A molecule containing one or two and represented by the formula (Aa), (Ab), (Ba ′), (Bb), (Bc) or (Bd) is provided. The molecule of the present invention is useful because it can be used, for example, as a ligand of a metal complex or a reaction catalyst. Preferably, it is useful as a silver complex contained in the film of the present invention or as a ligand in the silver complex.
　該ジアリールホスフィノ基及び該窒素原子含有複素環式化合物の例並びに好ましい例は、それぞれ、前記式Ａａ中の－Ｐ（Ｒ11Aa）2、及び該窒素原子含有複素環式化合物の例並びに好ましい例と同様である。 Examples and preferred examples of the diarylphosphino group and the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound include —P (R 11Aa ) 2 in the formula Aa, and examples and preferred examples of the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, respectively. It is the same.
　本発明の分子は、ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つ以上含有し、且つ、窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基、－Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、又は、－Ｓ-から選ばれる基を１つ又は２つ含有する。
　好ましくは、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つと窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基を１つ、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つと－Ｏ-を１つ、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つと－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-を１つ、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つと－Ｓ-を１つ、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つと窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基を２つ、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を３つと窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基を１つ、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つと窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基を１つと－Ｏ-を１つ、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つと窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基を１つと－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-を１つ、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つと窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基を１つと－Ｓ-を１つ、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を３つと－Ｏ-を１つ、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を３つと－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-を１つ、又は、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を３つと－Ｓ-を１つ含有し、
　より好ましくは、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つと窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基を１つ、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つと窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基を２つ、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を３つと窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基を１つ、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を３つと－Ｏ-を１つ、又は、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を３つと－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-を１つ含有し、
　更に好ましくは、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つと窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基を２つ、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を３つと窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基を１つ、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を３つと－Ｏ-を１つ、又は、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を３つと－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-を１つ含有し、
　特に好ましくは、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つと窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基を２つ、又は、
ジアリールホスフィノ基を３つと－Ｏ-を１つ含有する化合物である。 The molecule of the present invention contains two or more diarylphosphino groups and a group obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —O − , —C (═O) O -, or, -S - group 1 or 2 containing a selected from.
Preferably,
Two diarylphosphino groups and one group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound,
Diaryl phosphino group two and -O - one,
Two diarylphosphino groups and one —C (═O) O 2 — ,
Diaryl phosphino group two and -S - one,
Two diarylphosphino groups and two groups obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound,
Three diarylphosphino groups and one group obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound,
Diarylphosphino based on two and nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic one hydrogen atom from the compound to 3 group remaining after removing one -O - one,
Two diarylphosphino groups, one group obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, and one —C (═O) O 2 — ,
Diarylphosphino based on two and nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic one hydrogen atom from the compound to 3 group remaining after removing one -S - one,
Three and a diaryl phosphino group -O - one,
Three diarylphosphino groups and one —C (═O) O 2 — , or
Bract 3 diaryl phosphino group -S - containing one,
More preferably,
Two diarylphosphino groups and one group obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound;
Two diarylphosphino groups and two groups obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound,
Three diarylphosphino groups and one group obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound,
Three and a diaryl phosphino group -O - one, or,
Containing three diarylphosphino groups and one —C (═O) O 2 —
More preferably,
Two diarylphosphino groups and two groups obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound,
Three diarylphosphino groups and one group obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound,
Three and a diaryl phosphino group -O - one, or,
Containing three diarylphosphino groups and one —C (═O) O 2 —
Particularly preferably,
Two diarylphosphino groups and two groups obtained by removing one to three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or
A compound containing three diarylphosphino groups and one —O 2 — .
　本発明の分子は、前記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ’）、（Ｂｂ）、（Ｂｃ）又は（Ｂｄ）で示される分子である。本発明の分子の好ましい例としては、前記式Ａａ１～Ａａ４０、Ａａ７７～Ａａ８０、Ａａ９１～Ａａ９４、Ｂａ４～Ｂａ１６、Ｂｂ１、及びＢｃ６～Ｂｃ２１が挙げられる。より好ましくは前記式Ａａ１～Ａａ４０、Ｂａ４～Ｂａ１５、Ｂａ２１、及びＢｃ６～Ｂｃ１８のいずれかであり、更に好ましくは前記式Ｂａ４～Ｂａ１６、及びＢｃ６～Ｂｃ１８のいずれかであり、特に好ましくはＢａ４、Ｂａ６、Ｂａ８、Ｂａ９、Ｂａ１６、及びＢｃ６～Ｂｃ１０のいずれかである。 The molecule of the present invention is a molecule represented by the formula (Aa), (Ab), (Ba ′), (Bb), (Bc) or (Bd). Preferred examples of the molecule of the present invention include the formulas Aa1 to Aa40, Aa77 to Aa80, Aa91 to Aa94, Ba4 to Ba16, Bb1, and Bc6 to Bc21. More preferably, any one of the formulas Aa1 to Aa40, Ba4 to Ba15, Ba21, and Bc6 to Bc18, more preferably any one of the formulas Ba4 to Ba16, and Bc6 to Bc18, and particularly preferably Ba4, Ba6. , Ba8, Ba9, Ba16, and Bc6 to Bc10.
　本発明の分子は、好ましくは、前記式Ａａ１’、Ａａ１’－２、Ａａ３’、Ａａ５’、Ａａ１５’、Ａａ２３’、Ａａ３５’、Ｂａ６’　、Ｂａ１１’、Ｂａ１３’、Ｂａ１６’、Ｂｃ９’、又はＢｃ１５’で表される分子である。この中から更に好ましくは、Ｂａ６’、Ｂａ１１’、Ｂａ１３’、Ｂａ１６’、Ｂｃ９’、及びＢｃ１５’であり、特に好ましくは式Ｂａ６’、Ｂａ１６’、及びＢｃ９’である。 The molecule of the present invention preferably has the formula Aa1 ′, Aa1′-2, Aa3 ′, Aa5 ′, Aa15 ′, Aa23 ′, Aa35 ′, Ba6 ′, Ba11 ′, Ba13 ′, Ba16 ′, Bc9 ′, or It is a molecule represented by Bc15 ′. Of these, Ba6 ', Ba11', Ba13 ', Ba16', Bc9 ', and Bc15' are more preferable, and formulas Ba6 ', Ba16', and Bc9 'are particularly preferable.
　次に、実施例を示して本発明を説明するが、本発明はこれらの実施例に限定されるものではない。 Next, the present invention will be described with reference to examples, but the present invention is not limited to these examples.
　以下、ＮＭＲ測定にはＶａｒｉａｎ社製３００ＭＨｚＮＭＲスペクトロメーターあるいはＢｕｒｋｅｒ社製４００ＭＨｚＮＭＲスペクトロメーターを、ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ測定には日本電子製のＴｈｅ　ＡｃｃｕＴＯＦ　ＴＬＣ（ＪＭＳ－Ｔ１００ＴＤ）を用いた。分取用ＧＰＣには展開溶媒をクロロホルムとして、日本分析工業社製ＬＣ９０８－Ｃ６０、同社製カラムＪＡＩＧＥＬ－１Ｈ－４０及びＪＡＩＧＥＬ－２Ｈ－４０を用いた。 Hereinafter, a 300 MHz NMR spectrometer manufactured by Varian or a 400 MHz NMR spectrometer manufactured by Burker was used for NMR measurement, and the AccuTOF TLC (JMS-T100TD) manufactured by JEOL was used for DART-MS measurement. For the preparative GPC, LC908-C60 manufactured by Nippon Analytical Industries, Ltd., and columns JAIGEL-1H-40 and JAIGEL-2H-40 manufactured by Nippon Analytical Industries, Ltd. were used as the developing solvent.
　ＣＨＮの元素分析には自動分析法を、Ｃｌの元素分析にはフラスコ燃焼－電位差滴定法を、Ｂｒの元素分析にはフラスコ燃焼－イオンクロマトグラフ法を、それぞれ用いた。 An automatic analysis method was used for CHN elemental analysis, a flask combustion-potentiometric titration method was used for Cl elemental analysis, and a flask combustion-ion chromatographic method was used for Br elemental analysis.
合成例１（表１－１における化合物番号３３）
　ビス－（ｏ－ジフェニルホスフィノフェニル）フェニルホスフィン（Ａａ６０’）を、Ｊ．Ｃｈｅｍ．Ｓｏｃ．３９３０－３９３６（１９６３）に記載の方法で合成した。 Synthesis Example 1 (Compound No. 33 in Table 1-1)
Bis- (o-diphenylphosphinophenyl) phenylphosphine (Aa60 ′) was prepared according to J. Am. Chem. Soc. It was synthesized by the method described in 3930-3936 (1963).
　アルゴン雰囲気下、ヨウ化銀（Ｉ）（８０．７ｍｇ，０．３４４ｍｍｏｌ）のアセトニトリル５ｍＬ溶液に、Ａａ６０’（２１７ｍｇ，０．３４４ｍｍｏｌ）を加え４５℃で３０分撹拌し、ジクロロメタン１５ｍＬを追加して、撹拌しながら１時間還流した。反応液をろ過し、ろ液を濃縮し、クロロホルム－エーテルでスローディフュージョンによる再結晶を行い、結晶を乾燥させて淡黄色結晶の錯体を２９７ｍｇ得た。 Under an argon atmosphere, Aa60 ′ (217 mg, 0.344 mmol) was added to a solution of silver (I) iodide (80.7 mg, 0.344 mmol) in 5 mL of acetonitrile, and the mixture was stirred at 45 ° C. for 30 minutes, and then added with 15 mL of dichloromethane. The mixture was refluxed for 1 hour with stirring. The reaction solution was filtered, the filtrate was concentrated, recrystallized by slow diffusion with chloroform-ether, and the crystals were dried to obtain 297 mg of a pale yellow crystal complex.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
　得られた錯体のＮＭＲデータを下記に示す。 NMR data of the obtained complex is shown below.
　1Ｈ　ＮＭＲ（３００ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）　δ（ｐｐｍ）＝７．６８－７．６０（ｍ，４Ｈ），７．２８－６．９８（ｍ，２５Ｈ），６．９５－６．８９（ｍ，４Ｈ）；31Ｐ　ＮＭＲ（１２２ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）δ（ｐｐｍ）＝－６．８－－１１．１（ｍ），－２５．４－－２９．６（ｍ） 1 H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = 7.68-7.60 (m, 4H), 7.28-6.98 (m, 25H), 6.95-6.89 (m, 4H); 31 P NMR (122 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = − 6.8−11.1 (m), −25.4−29.6 (m)
　得られた錯体の元素分析測定の結果を下記に示す。 The results of elemental analysis measurement of the obtained complex are shown below.
　Ａｎａｌ．Ｃａｌｃｄ　ｆｏｒ　Ｃ42Ｈ33ＩＰ3Ａｇ・Ｈ2Ｏ（％）：Ｃ，５７．１０；Ｈ，３．９９；Ｎ，０．００．Ｆｏｕｎｄ：Ｃ，５６．７４；Ｈ，３．７３；Ｎ＜０．３． Anal. Calcd for C 42 H 33 IP 3 Ag · H 2 O (%): C, 57.10; H, 3.99; N, 0.00. Found: C, 56.74; H, 3.73; N <0.3.
　錯体のＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ測定の結果を下記に示す。 The results of DART-MS measurement of the complex are shown below.
　ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ（Ｍ／Ｚ）：ｆｏｕｎｄ；７３７．０９．Ｃａｌｃｄ；７３７．０８（Ｍ－Ｉ）+． DART-MS (M / Z): found; 737.09. Calcd; 737.08 (MI) + .
　ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳより、下記組成の錯体を確認した。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
 A complex having the following composition was confirmed by DART-MS.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
　得られた錯体の組成比は、収量、1Ｈ　ＮＭＲ、31Ｐ　ＮＭＲ、収量、ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ測定、及び、元素分析値から決定した。 The composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from the yield, 1 H NMR, 31 P NMR, yield, DART-MS measurement, and elemental analysis value.
合成例２（表１－１における化合物番号３２）
　アルゴン雰囲気下、臭化銀（Ｉ）（５３．０ｍｇ，０．２８２ｍｍｏｌ）のアセトニトリル５ｍＬ溶液に、Ａａ６０’（１７８ｍｇ，０．２８２ｍｍｏｌ）を加え４５℃で３０分撹拌し、ジクロロメタン１５ｍＬを追加して、撹拌しながら１時間加熱還流した。反応液をろ過し、ろ液を濃縮し、クロロホルム－エーテルでスローディフュージョンによる再結晶を行い、結晶を乾燥させて淡黄色結晶の錯体を２２３ｍｇ得た。 Synthesis Example 2 (Compound No. 32 in Table 1-1)
Under an argon atmosphere, Aa60 ′ (178 mg, 0.282 mmol) was added to a solution of silver (I) bromide (53.0 mg, 0.282 mmol) in 5 mL of acetonitrile, and the mixture was stirred at 45 ° C. for 30 minutes, and then added with 15 mL of dichloromethane. The mixture was heated to reflux for 1 hour with stirring. The reaction solution was filtered, the filtrate was concentrated, recrystallized by slow diffusion with chloroform-ether, and the crystals were dried to obtain 223 mg of a pale yellow crystal complex.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
　得られた錯体のＮＭＲデータを下記に示す。 NMR data of the obtained complex is shown below.
　1Ｈ　ＮＭＲ（３００ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）　δ（ｐｐｍ）＝７．６８－７．６２（ｍ，４Ｈ），７．２９－７．００（ｍ，２５Ｈ），６．９３－６．８６（ｍ，４Ｈ）；31Ｐ　ＮＭＲ（１２２ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）　δ（ｐｐｍ）＝－５．１－－９．６（ｍ），－２４．７－－２９．５（ｍ） 1 H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = 7.68-7.62 (m, 4H), 7.29-7.00 (m, 25H), 6.93-6.86 (m, 4H); 31 P NMR (122 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = − 5.1-−9.6 (m), −24.7−−29.5 (m)
　得られた錯体の元素分析測定の結果を下記に示す。 The results of elemental analysis measurement of the obtained complex are shown below.
　Ａｎａｌ．Ｃａｌｃｄ　ｆｏｒ　Ｃ42Ｈ33ＢｒＰ3Ａｇ・Ｈ2Ｏ（％）：Ｃ，６０．３１；Ｈ，４．２２；Ｎ，０．００；Ｂｒ，９．５５．Ｆｏｕｎｄ：Ｃ，６０．５３；Ｈ，３．９８；Ｎ＜０．３；Ｂｒ，９．１０． Anal. Calcd for C 42 H 33 BrP 3 Ag · H 2 O (%): C, 60.31; H, 4.22; N, 0.00; Br, 9.55. Found: C, 60.53; H, 3.98; N <0.3; Br, 9.10.
　得られた錯体のＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ測定の結果を下記に示す。 The results of DART-MS measurement of the obtained complex are shown below.
　ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ（Ｍ／Ｚ）：ｆｏｕｎｄ；８１６．０４．ｃａｌｃｄ；８１６．００（Ｍ）+． DART-MS (M / Z): found; 816.04. calcd; 816.00 (M) + .
　ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳより、下記組成の錯体を確認した。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
 A complex having the following composition was confirmed by DART-MS.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
　得られた錯体の組成比は、1Ｈ　ＮＭＲ、31Ｐ　ＮＭＲ、収量、ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ測定、及び、元素分析値から決定した。 The composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from 1 H NMR, 31 P NMR, yield, DART-MS measurement, and elemental analysis value.
合成例３（表１－１における化合物番号３１）
　アルゴン雰囲気下、塩化銀（Ｉ）（５６．８ｍｇ，０．３９６ｍｍｏｌ）のアセトニトリル６ｍＬ溶液に、Ａａ６０’（２５０ｍｇ，０．３９６ｍｍｏｌ）を加え、４５℃で３０分撹拌し、ジクロロメタン１８ｍＬを追加して、撹拌しながら１．５時間加熱還流した。反応液をろ過し、ろ液を濃縮し、クロロホルム－エーテルでスローディフュージョンによる再結晶を行い、結晶を乾燥させて淡黄色錯体を２８４ｍｇ得た。 Synthesis Example 3 (Compound No. 31 in Table 1-1)
Under an argon atmosphere, Aa60 ′ (250 mg, 0.396 mmol) was added to a solution of silver (I) chloride (56.8 mg, 0.396 mmol) in 6 mL of acetonitrile, stirred at 45 ° C. for 30 minutes, and 18 mL of dichloromethane was added. The mixture was heated to reflux for 1.5 hours with stirring. The reaction solution was filtered, the filtrate was concentrated, recrystallized by slow diffusion with chloroform-ether, and the crystals were dried to obtain 284 mg of a pale yellow complex.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
　得られた錯体のＮＭＲデータを下記に示す。 NMR data of the obtained complex is shown below.
　1Ｈ　ＮＭＲ（３００ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）　δ（ｐｐｍ）＝７．６９－７．６１（ｍ，４Ｈ），７．３１－６．９８（ｍ，２５Ｈ），６．９２－６．８６（ｍ，４Ｈ）；31Ｐ　ＮＭＲ（１２２ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）　δ（ｐｐｍ）＝－４．４－－８．９（ｍ），－２４．３－－２８．９（ｍ） 1 H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = 7.69-7.61 (m, 4H), 7.31-6.98 (m, 25H), 6.92-6.86 (m, 4H); 31 P NMR (122 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = − 4.4−−8.9 (m), −24.3−28.9 (m)
　得られた錯体の元素分析測定の結果を下記に示す。 The results of elemental analysis measurement of the obtained complex are shown below.
　Ａｎａｌ．Ｃａｌｃｄ　ｆｏｒ　Ｃ42Ｈ33ＣｌＰ3Ａｇ（％）：Ｃ，６５．１８；Ｈ，４．３０；Ｎ，０．００；Ｃｌ，４．５８．Ｆｏｕｎｄ：Ｃ，６５．３７；Ｈ，４．２８；Ｎ＜０．３；Ｃｌ，４．５９． Anal. Calcd for C 42 H 33 ClP 3 Ag (%): C, 65.18; H, 4.30; N, 0.00; Cl, 4.58. Found: C, 65.37; H, 4.28; N <0.3; Cl, 4.59.
　得られた錯体のＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ測定の結果を下記に示す。 The results of DART-MS measurement of the obtained complex are shown below.
　ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ（Ｍ／Ｚ）：ｆｏｕｎｄ；７７２．０６．ｃａｌｃｄ；７７２．０５（Ｍ）+． DART-MS (M / Z): found; 772.06. calcd; 772.05 (M) + .
　ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳより、下記組成の錯体を確認した。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
 A complex having the following composition was confirmed by DART-MS.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
　得られた錯体の組成比は、1Ｈ　ＮＭＲ、31Ｐ　ＮＭＲ、収量、ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ測定、及び、元素分析値から決定した。 The composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from 1 H NMR, 31 P NMR, yield, DART-MS measurement, and elemental analysis value.
　合成例４（表１－１における化合物番号３７）
　合成例３で得られた錯体１３．６ｍｇのジクロロメタン１．５ｍＬ溶液に１，２，４，５－テトラメチルイミダゾール２．１７ｍｇ（０．０１７５ｍｍｏｌ）のジクロロメタン０．５ｍＬ溶液を加え、４０℃で１０分撹拌した。反応液を濃縮後、真空乾燥して淡黄色結晶の錯体を１５．８ｍｇ得た。 Synthesis Example 4 (Compound No. 37 in Table 1-1)
To a solution of 13.6 mg of the complex obtained in Synthesis Example 3 in 1.5 mL of dichloromethane was added 2.17 mg (0.0175 mmol) of 1,2,4,5-tetramethylimidazole in 0.5 mL of dichloromethane. Stir for minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and then vacuum-dried to obtain 15.8 mg of a pale yellow crystal complex.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
　得られた錯体の組成比は混合比から決定した。 The composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
　合成例５（表１－１における化合物番号３６）
　合成例３で得られた錯体９．８５ｍｇのジクロロメタン１．５ｍＬ溶液に２，６－ルチジン１．３６ｍｇ（０．０１２７ｍｍｏｌ）のジクロロメタン０．５ｍＬ溶液を加え、４０℃で１０分撹拌した。反応液を濃縮後、真空乾燥して淡黄色結晶の錯体を１１．２ｍｇ得た。 Synthesis Example 5 (Compound No. 36 in Table 1-1)
To a solution of 9.85 mg of the complex obtained in Synthesis Example 3 in 1.5 mL of dichloromethane, 2,6-lutidine (1.36 mg, 0.0127 mmol) in 0.5 mL of dichloromethane was added and stirred at 40 ° C. for 10 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and then vacuum-dried to obtain 11.2 mg of a pale yellow crystal complex.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
　得られた錯体の組成比は混合比から決定した。 The composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
　実施例１（Ａａ１’の合成）
　８－［［ｏ－（ジフェニルホスフィノ）フェニル］フェニルホスフィノ］－キノリン（Ａａ１’）を、以下の方法で合成した。 Example 1 (Synthesis of Aa1 ′)
8-[[o- (Diphenylphosphino) phenyl] phenylphosphino] -quinoline (Aa1 ′) was synthesized by the following method.
　５０ｍＬシュレンク管に１－ブロモ－２－ジフェニルホスフィノベンゼン（３．１２ｇ，９．１４ｍｍｏｌ）、脱水ＴＨＦ　１５ｍＬを入れ、－６５℃に冷却し、撹拌しながらｎ－ブチルリチウムのｎ－ヘキサン溶液（１．６ｍｏｌ／Ｌ，５．５ｍＬ，ｎ－ブチルリチウムとして８．８ｍｍｏｌ）を５分かけて滴下した。赤色に変色した反応液を、－３０℃まで昇温して２時間撹拌した（反応液Ａ）。５０ｍＬ４つ口ナス形フラスコに、フェニルジクロロホスフィン（１．５８ｇ，８．８３ｍｍｏｌ）、及び、脱水ＴＨＦ８ｍＬを入れ、－５０℃に冷却し、反応液Ａをカヌラ送液により混合した。反応液を徐々に室温（２３℃）まで昇温し、１２時間撹拌した。反応液は白濁化した（反応液Ｂ）。２００ｍＬ４つ口ナス形フラスコに８－ブロモキノリン（１．８５ｇ，８．８９ｍｍｏｌ）、脱水ＴＨＦ９０ｍＬを入れ、－６５℃に冷却し、撹拌しながらｎ－ブチルリチウムのｎ－ヘキサン溶液（１．６Ｍ，５．５ｍＬ，８．８ｍｍｏｌ）を５分かけて滴下し、－４０℃まで昇温して２時間撹拌した。赤色に変色した反応液を－６０℃に再冷却した（反応液Ｃ）。上記反応液Ｂを－６０℃に冷却してカヌラ送液により反応液Ｃへ混合した。反応液を徐々に室温（２３℃）まで昇温し、１８時間撹拌した。反応液に塩化アンモニウム水溶液、クロロホルムを加え、クロロホルムで抽出を行い、得られた有機層を、無水硫酸ナトリウムで乾燥、ろ過、濃縮後、展開溶媒としてクロロホルムを用いてシリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィーによる精製を２回行い、乾燥させて黄色固体のＡａ１’を３３５ｍｇ（収率７．６４％）得た。 A 50 mL Schlenk tube was charged with 1-bromo-2-diphenylphosphinobenzene (3.12 g, 9.14 mmol) and 15 mL of dehydrated THF, cooled to −65 ° C., and stirred with an n-hexane solution of n-butyllithium ( 1.6 mol / L, 5.5 mL, 8.8 mmol as n-butyllithium) was added dropwise over 5 minutes. The reaction solution turned red was heated to −30 ° C. and stirred for 2 hours (reaction solution A). A 50 mL four-necked eggplant-shaped flask was charged with phenyldichlorophosphine (1.58 g, 8.83 mmol) and 8 mL of dehydrated THF, cooled to −50 ° C., and the reaction solution A was mixed by sending a cannula. The reaction mixture was gradually warmed to room temperature (23 ° C.) and stirred for 12 hours. The reaction solution became cloudy (reaction solution B). A 200 mL four-necked eggplant-shaped flask was charged with 8-bromoquinoline (1.85 g, 8.89 mmol) and 90 mL of dehydrated THF, cooled to −65 ° C., and stirred with a solution of n-butyllithium in n-hexane (1.6 M, 5.5 mL, 8.8 mmol) was added dropwise over 5 minutes, the temperature was raised to −40 ° C., and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours. The reaction solution turned red was re-cooled to −60 ° C. (reaction solution C). The reaction solution B was cooled to −60 ° C. and mixed with the reaction solution C by sending a cannula. The reaction was gradually warmed to room temperature (23 ° C.) and stirred for 18 hours. Aqueous ammonium chloride solution and chloroform are added to the reaction solution, followed by extraction with chloroform. The obtained organic layer is dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated, and then purified by silica gel column chromatography using chloroform as a developing solvent. This was repeated and dried to obtain 335 mg (yield 7.64%) of Aa1 ′ as a yellow solid.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
　Ａａ１’のＮＭＲ、ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳデータを下記に示す。 The NMR and DART-MS data of Aa1 'are shown below.
　1Ｈ　ＮＭＲ（３００ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）　δ（ｐｐｍ）＝８．７７（ｂｒｄ，１Ｈ），８．１１（ｄ，Ｊ＝８．３Ｈｚ，１Ｈ），７．７４（ｄ，Ｊ＝８．１Ｈｚ，１Ｈ），７．３６－７．０９（ｍ，２１Ｈ），６．９０（ｂｒ，１Ｈ）；31Ｐ　ＮＭＲ（１２２ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）　δ（ｐｐｍ）＝－１２．５（ｄ，Ｊ＝１６７Ｈｚ），－２０．１（ｄ，Ｊ＝１６７Ｈｚ）；ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ（Ｍ／Ｚ）：ｆｏｕｎｄ；４９８．１５．ｃａｌｃｄ；４９８．１５（Ｍ＋Ｈ）+． 1 H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = 8.77 (brd, 1H), 8.11 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.74 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.36-7.09 (m, 21H), 6.90 (br, 1H); 31 P NMR (122 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = − 12.5 (d, J = 167 Hz) , −20.1 (d, J = 167 Hz); DART-MS (M / Z): found; 498.15. calcd; 498.15 (M + H) + .
　Ａａ１’の元素分析測定の結果を下記に示す。 Results of elemental analysis measurement of Aa1 'are shown below.
　Ａｎａｌ．Ｃａｌｃｄ　ｆｏｒ　Ｃ33Ｈ25ＮＰ2０．５Ｈ2Ｏ（％）：Ｃ，７８．２５；Ｈ，５．１７；Ｎ，２．７７．Ｆｏｕｎｄ：Ｃ，７８．１２；Ｈ，５．１４；Ｎ，２．８３． Anal. Calcd for C 33 H 25 NP 2 0.5H 2 O (%): C, 78.25; H, 5.17; N, 2.77. Found: C, 78.12; H, 5.14; N, 2.83.
　実施例２（表１－１における化合物番号６）
　ヘキサフルオロリン酸銀（Ｉ）（４．２０ｍｇ，０．０１６６ｍｍｏｌ）のジクロロメタン１ｍＬ溶液に、Ａａ１’（８．２６ｍｇ，０．０１６６ｍｍｏｌ）を加え、４０℃で１０分撹拌した。反応液を濃縮し、乾燥させて橙色固体の錯体を１２．５ｍｇ得た。 Example 2 (Compound No. 6 in Table 1-1)
Aa1 ′ (8.26 mg, 0.0166 mmol) was added to a solution of silver hexafluorophosphate (I) (4.20 mg, 0.0166 mmol) in 1 mL of dichloromethane, and the mixture was stirred at 40 ° C. for 10 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and dried to obtain 12.5 mg of an orange solid complex.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073
　得られた錯体の組成比は、混合比より決定した。 The composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
実施例３（表１－１における化合物番号１）
　フッ化銀（Ｉ）（３．１２ｍｇ，０．０２４６ｍｍｏｌ）のジクロロメタン１ｍＬ溶液に、Ａａ１’（１２．２ｍｇ，０．０２４６ｍｍｏｌ）を加え、４０℃で１０分撹拌した。反応液を濃縮し、乾燥させて橙色固体の錯体を１５．３ｍｇ得た。 Example 3 (Compound No. 1 in Table 1-1)
Aa1 ′ (12.2 mg, 0.0246 mmol) was added to a solution of silver (I) fluoride (3.12 mg, 0.0246 mmol) in 1 mL of dichloromethane, and the mixture was stirred at 40 ° C. for 10 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and dried to obtain 15.3 mg of an orange solid complex.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074
　得られた錯体の組成比は、混合比より決定した。 The composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
　実施例４（Ｂｃ９’の合成）
　２－（２－ブロモ－４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニルオキシ）ベンズアルデヒドを、以下の方法で合成した。 Example 4 (Synthesis of Bc9 ')
2- (2-Bromo-4-tert-butylphenyloxy) benzaldehyde was synthesized by the following method.
　２－ブロモ－４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェノール（２０．０g，８７．３ｍｍｏｌ）、２－フルオロベンズアルデヒド（１０．８ｇ，８７．３ｍｍｏｌ）、炭酸ナトリウム（９．６０ｇ，８７．３ｍｍｏｌ）及びジメチルアセトアミド１２０ｍＬの混合物を１９０℃で２時間撹拌した。放冷後、反応液に水とクロロホルムを加え、クロロホルムで抽出を行い、得られた有機層を１ｍｏｌ／Ｌの水酸化ナトリウム水溶液と水で洗浄した。有機層を濃縮後、展開溶媒　クロロホルム：ヘキサン＝１：１（体積比）でシリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィーによる精製を行い、溶出液を濃縮後、クロロホルム－ヘキサンで再結晶を行い、乾燥させて無色結晶の２－（２－ブロモ－４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニルオキシ）ベンズアルデヒドを２２．０ｇ（収率７５．６％）得た。 Mixture of 2-bromo-4-tert-butylphenol (20.0 g, 87.3 mmol), 2-fluorobenzaldehyde (10.8 g, 87.3 mmol), sodium carbonate (9.60 g, 87.3 mmol) and dimethylacetamide 120 mL Was stirred at 190 ° C. for 2 hours. After allowing to cool, water and chloroform were added to the reaction solution, extraction was performed with chloroform, and the obtained organic layer was washed with a 1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution and water. After concentrating the organic layer, purification by silica gel column chromatography with a developing solvent chloroform: hexane = 1: 1 (volume ratio) is performed, and the eluate is concentrated, recrystallized with chloroform-hexane, and dried to obtain colorless crystals. 22.0 g (yield 75.6%) of 2- (2-bromo-4-tert-butylphenyloxy) benzaldehyde was obtained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000075
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000075
　２－（２－ブロモ－４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニルオキシ）フェノールを、以下の方法で合成した。 2- (2-Bromo-4-tert-butylphenyloxy) phenol was synthesized by the following method.
　３０重量％過酸化水素（１０ｍＬ，９０ｍｍｏｌ）とジクロロメタン２０ｍＬの混合物を０℃で撹拌しながら、トリフルオロ酢酸無水物（９４．５ｇ，４５０ｍｍｏｌ）を３０分かけて加え、０℃で１時間撹拌し、ＴＦＰＡ溶液を調製した。２－（２－ブロモ－４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニルオキシ）ベンズアルデヒド（２０．０ｇ，６０．０ｍｍｏｌ）のジクロロメタン３００ｍＬ溶液に、リン酸二水素カリウム（１６３ｇ，１２００ｍｍｏｌ）を加え、０℃に氷冷し、撹拌しながら前記ＴＦＰＡ溶液を３０分間かけて滴下した。０℃で２時間撹拌後、反応液に２０重量％亜硫酸水素ナトリウム水溶液を加え、ジクロロメタンで抽出を行い、得られた有機層を飽和重曹水と水で洗浄した。有機層を濃縮後、残渣をメタノール３００ｍＬに溶かし、濃塩酸１滴を加え、室温（２３℃）で３日間静置した。反応混合物を濃縮後、展開溶媒　酢酸エチル：ヘキサン＝１：４（体積比）でシリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィーによる精製を行い、乾燥させて無色結晶の２－（２－ブロモ－４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニルオキシ）フェノールを１９．０ｇ（収率９８．６％）得た。 While stirring a mixture of 30 wt% hydrogen peroxide (10 mL, 90 mmol) and 20 mL of dichloromethane at 0 ° C., trifluoroacetic anhydride (94.5 g, 450 mmol) was added over 30 minutes, and the mixture was stirred at 0 ° C. for 1 hour. A TFPA solution was prepared. To a solution of 2- (2-bromo-4-tert-butylphenyloxy) benzaldehyde (20.0 g, 60.0 mmol) in dichloromethane (300 mL) was added potassium dihydrogen phosphate (163 g, 1200 mmol), and the mixture was cooled to 0 ° C. with ice. The TFPA solution was added dropwise over 30 minutes while stirring. After stirring at 0 ° C. for 2 hours, a 20 wt% aqueous sodium hydrogen sulfite solution was added to the reaction solution, extraction was performed with dichloromethane, and the obtained organic layer was washed with saturated aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate and water. After concentration of the organic layer, the residue was dissolved in 300 mL of methanol, 1 drop of concentrated hydrochloric acid was added, and the mixture was allowed to stand at room temperature (23 ° C.) for 3 days. After concentrating the reaction mixture, purification by silica gel column chromatography with a developing solvent ethyl acetate: hexane = 1: 4 (volume ratio), followed by drying, colorless crystals of 2- (2-bromo-4-tert-butylphenyloxy) ) 19.0 g of phenol (yield 98.6%) was obtained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000076
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000076
　２－［２－（ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルジメチルシリルオキシ）フェニルオキシ］－５－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルブロモベンゼンを、以下の方法で合成した。 2- [2- (tert-Butyldimethylsilyloxy) phenyloxy] -5-tert-butylbromobenzene was synthesized by the following method.
　窒素下、２－（２－ブロモ－４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニルオキシ）フェノール（１９．６ｇ，６１．０ｍｍｏｌ）のＤＭＦ溶液に、イミダゾール（１０．０ｇ，１４６．４ｍｍｏｌ）、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルジメチルシリルクロライド（１１．０ｇ，７３．２ｍｍｏｌ）を加えて室温（２３℃）で１８時間撹拌した。反応液に水を加え、ヘキサンで抽出を行い、得られた有機層を飽和食塩水で洗浄した。有機層を濃縮後、展開溶媒として酢酸ヘキサンを用いてシリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィーによる精製を行い、乾燥させて無色油状の２－［２－（ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルジメチルシリルオキシ）フェニルオキシ］－５－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルブロモベンゼンを２５．０ｇ（収率９４．１％）得た。 Under nitrogen, 2- (2-bromo-4-tert-butylphenyloxy) phenol (19.6 g, 61.0 mmol) in DMF solution was mixed with imidazole (10.0 g, 146.4 mmol), tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride. (11.0 g, 73.2 mmol) was added and stirred at room temperature (23 ° C.) for 18 hours. Water was added to the reaction solution, extraction was performed with hexane, and the obtained organic layer was washed with saturated brine. After concentrating the organic layer, purification is performed by silica gel column chromatography using hexane acetate as a developing solvent, followed by drying to obtain colorless oily 2- [2- (tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy) phenyloxy] -5-tert- 25.0 g (94.1% yield) of butyl bromobenzene was obtained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000077
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000077
　２－［２－（ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルジメチルシリルオキシ）フェニルオキシ］－５－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルブロモベンゼンのＮＭＲデータを下記に示す。 NMR data of 2- [2- (tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy) phenyloxy] -5-tert-butylbromobenzene is shown below.
　1Ｈ　ＮＭＲ（４００ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）δ（ｐｐｍ）＝７．５７（ｄ，Ｊ=２．３Ｈｚ，１Ｈ），７．１５（ｄｄ，Ｊ＝８．６，２．３Ｈｚ，１Ｈ），７．０７－７．０３（ｍ，１Ｈ），６．９６－６．９０（ｍ，３Ｈ），１．１２（ｓ，９Ｈ），０．８４（ｓ，９Ｈ），０．１６（ｓ，６Ｈ）． 1 H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = 7.57 (d, J = 2.3 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (dd, J = 8.6, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 7. 07-7.03 (m, 1H), 6.96-6.90 (m, 3H), 1.12 (s, 9H), 0.84 (s, 9H), 0.16 (s, 6H) .
　（４－ブロモ－２，７－ジ－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル－９，９－ジメチル－５－ジフェニルホスフィノキサンテンを、Ｃｈｅｍ．Ｃｏｍｍｕｎ．３３３－３３４（２０００）に記載の方法で合成した。 (4-Bromo-2,7-di-tert-butyl-9,9-dimethyl-5-diphenylphosphinoxanthene was synthesized by the method described in Chem. Commun. 333-334 (2000).
　ＴＢＳ－Ｂｃ９’とＢｃ９’（ＯＨ体）を以下の方法で合成した。 TBS-Bc9 'and Bc9' (OH form) were synthesized by the following method.
　アルゴン雰囲気下、（４－ブロモ－２，７－ジ－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル－９，９－ジメチル－５－ジフェニルホスフィノキサンテン（３．５０ｇ，６．８３ｍｍｏｌ）とＴＨＦ　２５ｍＬの混合物を－６５℃に冷却し、撹拌しながら２．７６ｍｏｌ／Ｌ　ｎ－ブチルリチウムへキサン溶液（２．５０ｍＬ，ｎ－ブチルリチウムとして６．８３ｍｍｏｌ）を滴下し、－６５℃で１時間撹拌してリチオ体１を調製した。別容器にて、アルゴン雰囲気下、三塩化リン（４７０ｍｇ，３．４２ｍｍｏｌ）とＴＨＦの混合物を－６５℃で撹拌し、これに前記リチオ体１をカヌラで移送した。－６５℃で２時間撹拌した後、冷浴を外して０℃まで昇温させた。これを－４５℃に冷却して、更に２時間撹拌し、クロロホスフィン中間体を調製した。別容器にて、アルゴン雰囲気下、２－［２－（ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルジメチルシリルオキシ）フェニルオキシ］－５－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルブロモベンゼン（４．４６ｇ，１０．２ｍｍｏｌ）とＴＨＦ　２５ｍＬの混合物を－６５℃に冷却し、撹拌しながら２．７６ｍｏｌ／Ｌ　ｎ－ブチルリチウムへキサン溶液（３．７０ｍＬ，ｎ－ブチルリチウムとして１０．２ｍｍｏｌ）を滴下し、－６５℃で１時間撹拌してリチオ体２を調製した。クロロホスフィン中間体にリチオ体２をカヌラで移送した。－６５℃で２時間撹拌した後、冷浴を外して一晩撹拌し室温（２３℃）まで昇温させた。反応混合物に飽和塩化アンモニウム水溶液を加え、クロロホルムで抽出を行い、得られた有機層を飽和食塩水で洗浄し、有機層を硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥し、展開溶媒　酢酸ヘキサン：酢酸エチル＝１０：１（体積比）、後に、ヘキサン：酢酸エチル＝５：２（体積比）でシリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィーによる精製を行った。カラム中でｔｅｒｔ－ブチルジメチルシリル基の脱離反応が進行した。溶出液を濃縮して無色固体のＴＢＳ－Ｂｃ９’を３２０ｍｇ（収率６．６９％）と、無色粘性体のＢｃ９’（ＯＨ体）を２．３１ｇ（収率５２．６％）得た。 Under an argon atmosphere, a mixture of (4-bromo-2,7-di-tert-butyl-9,9-dimethyl-5-diphenylphosphinoxanthene (3.50 g, 6.83 mmol) and THF 25 mL was brought to -65 ° C. Cooling and stirring, 2.76 mol / L n-butyllithium hexane solution (2.50 mL, 6.83 mmol as n-butyllithium) was added dropwise and stirred at −65 ° C. for 1 hour to prepare Lithio 1 In a separate container, a mixture of phosphorus trichloride (470 mg, 3.42 mmol) and THF was stirred at −65 ° C. in an argon atmosphere, and the lithiated compound 1 was transferred by cannula to this at 2 at −65 ° C. After stirring for an hour, the cooling bath was removed and the temperature was raised to 0 ° C. This was cooled to −45 ° C. and further stirred for 2 hours to prepare a chlorophosphine intermediate. Under an argon atmosphere, a mixture of 2- [2- (tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy) phenyloxy] -5-tert-butylbromobenzene (4.46 g, 10.2 mmol) and THF 25 mL was cooled to −65 ° C., While stirring, 2.76 mol / L n-butyllithium hexane solution (3.70 mL, 10.2 mmol as n-butyllithium) was added dropwise and stirred at −65 ° C. for 1 hour to prepare Lithio Form 2. Lithium 2 was transferred to the phosphine intermediate by cannula, stirred at −65 ° C. for 2 hours, then removed from the cold bath and stirred overnight to warm to room temperature (23 ° C.) Saturated aqueous ammonium chloride solution was added to the reaction mixture. The resulting organic layer was washed with saturated brine, the organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate, and the developing solvent acetic acid was added. Purification by silica gel column chromatography was performed using xylene: ethyl acetate = 10: 1 (volume ratio), and then hexane: ethyl acetate = 5: 2 (volume ratio) .Elimination of tert-butyldimethylsilyl group in the column The eluate was concentrated to give 320 mg of colorless solid TBS-Bc9 ′ (yield 6.69%) and 2.31 g of colorless viscous Bc9 ′ (OH form) (yield 52.6). %)Obtained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000078
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000078
　ＴＢＳ－Ｂｃ９’のＮＭＲデータを下記に示す。 NMR data of TBS-Bc9 'is shown below.
　31Ｐ　ＮＭＲ（１２２ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）δ（ｐｐｍ）＝－１５．０（ｄ，Ｊ＝３０Ｈｚ），－２０．３（ｄ，Ｊ=２４Ｈｚ），－３０．６－－３１．１（ｍ）． 31 P NMR (122 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = − 15.0 (d, J = 30 Hz), −20.3 (d, J = 24 Hz), −30.6−−31.1 (m) .
　ＴＢＳ－Ｂｃ９’のＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ測定の結果を下記に示す。 The result of DART-MS measurement of TBS-Bc9 'is shown below.
　ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ（Ｍ／Ｚ）：ｆｏｕｎｄ；１３９７．６．ｃａｌｃｄ；１３９７．７（Ｍ＋Ｈ）+． DART-MS (M / Z): found; 1397.6. calcd; 1397.7 (M + H) + .
　Ｂｃ９’（ＯＨ体）のＮＭＲデータを下記に示す。 NMR data of Bc9 '(OH form) is shown below.
　31Ｐ　ＮＭＲ（１２２ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）δ（ｐｐｍ）＝－１５．０－－１７．０（ｂｒｄ），－１６．８（ｄｄ，Ｊ＝３，３４Ｈｚ），－３４．２－－３４．８（ｂｒ）． 31 P NMR (122 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = − 15.0−17.0 (brd), −16.8 (dd, J = 3, 34 Hz), −34.2−34.8 (Br).
　Ｂｃ９’（ＯＨ体）のＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ測定の結果を下記に示す。 The result of DART-MS measurement of Bc9 '(OH body) is shown below.
　ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ（Ｍ／Ｚ）：ｆｏｕｎｄ；１２８３．５．ｃａｌｃｄ；１２８３．６（Ｍ＋Ｈ）+． DART-MS (M / Z): found; 1283.5. calcd; 1283.6 (M + H) + .
　Ｂｃ９’（ＯＨ体）の元素分析測定の結果を下記に示す。 The results of elemental analysis measurement of Bc9 '(OH body) are shown below.
　Ａｎａｌ．Ｃａｌｃｄ　ｆｏｒ　Ｃ86Ｈ93Ｏ4Ｐ3・０．３Ｈ2Ｏ（％）：Ｃ，７９．９１；Ｈ，７．３３；Ｎ，０．００．Ｆｏｕｎｄ：Ｃ，８０．１３；Ｈ，７．３２；Ｎ，＜０．３． Anal. Calcd for C 86 H 93 O 4 P 3 · 0.3H 2 O (%): C, 79.91; H, 7.33; N, 0.00. Found: C, 80.13; H, 7.32; N, <0.3.
　実施例５（表１－２における化合物番号９７）
　臭化銀（Ｉ）（１．９０ｍｇ，０．０１０１ｍｍｏｌ）のアセトニトリル１ｍＬ溶液に、Ｂｃ９’（ＯＨ体）（１３．０ｍｇ，０．０１０１ｍｍｏl）を加え４５℃で１５分撹拌し、カリウムメトキシド（０．７１ｍｇ，０．０１０１ｍｍｏl）のメタノール溶液０．４５ｍＬを加え４５℃で１５分撹拌し、反応液を濃縮し、乾燥させて固化した後、水を加え懸濁ろ過し、真空乾燥により無色固体の錯体を１４．１ｍｇ得た。 Example 5 (Compound No. 97 in Table 1-2)
To a solution of silver (I) bromide (1.90 mg, 0.0101 mmol) in 1 mL of acetonitrile was added Bc9 ′ (OH form) (13.0 mg, 0.0101 mmol), and the mixture was stirred at 45 ° C. for 15 minutes. 0.71 mg, 0.0101 mmol) methanol solution (0.45 mL) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 45 ° C. for 15 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated, dried and solidified, then added with water, suspended and filtered, and vacuum dried to obtain a colorless solid. 14.1 mg of this complex was obtained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000079
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000079
　得られた錯体の組成比はＣＨＮ元素分析値より決定した。元素分析測定の結果を下記に示す。 The composition ratio of the obtained complex was determined from the CHN elemental analysis value. The results of elemental analysis measurement are shown below.
　Ａｎａｌ．Ｃａｌｃｄ　ｆｏｒ　Ｃ86Ｈ92Ｏ4Ｐ3Ａｇ・０．６７ＡｇＢｒ・１１Ｈ2Ｏ（％）：Ｃ，６０．１７；Ｈ，６．７１；Ｎ，０．００．Ｆｏｕｎｄ：Ｃ，６０．１２；Ｈ，６．６１；Ｎ，＜０．３． Anal. Calcd for C 86 H 92 O 4 P 3 Ag · 0.67AgBr · 11H 2 O (%): C, 60.17; H, 6.71; N, 0.00. Found: C, 60.12; H, 6.61; N, <0.3.
　実施例６（表１－１における化合物番号７２）
　テトラフルオロホウ酸銀（Ｉ）（３．７２ｍｇ，０．０１９１ｍｍｏｌ）のジクロロメタン１ｍＬ溶液に、２，２’－６，６'－テトラメトキシ－４，４’－ビス（ジ（３，５－キシリル）ホスフィノ）－３，３’－ビピリジン（Ｂａ１９’）（１４．５ｍｇ，０．０１９１ｍｍｏｌ）を加え、室温（２３℃）で１０分撹拌した。反応液に２，９－ジクロロ－１，１０－フェナントロリン（４．７６ｍｇ，０．０１９１ｍｍｏl）を加え、４０℃で１０分撹拌した。反応液を濃縮後、真空乾燥して淡黄色結晶の錯体を２２．９ｍｇ得た。 Example 6 (Compound No. 72 in Table 1-1)
To a solution of silver tetrafluoroborate (I) (3.72 mg, 0.0191 mmol) in 1 mL of dichloromethane was added 2,2′-6,6′-tetramethoxy-4,4′-bis (di (3,5-xylyl). ) Phosphino) -3,3′-bipyridine (Ba19 ′) (14.5 mg, 0.0191 mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature (23 ° C.) for 10 minutes. 2,9-Dichloro-1,10-phenanthroline (4.76 mg, 0.0191 mmol) was added to the reaction solution, and the mixture was stirred at 40 ° C. for 10 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and then vacuum dried to obtain 22.9 mg of a pale yellow crystal complex.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000080
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000080
　得られた錯体の組成は混合比から決定した。 The composition of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
　実施例２１（Ａａ３’の合成）
　Ａａ３’を、以下の方法で合成した。
　Ｎ－メチル－２－（２－ブロモフェニル）ベンズイミダゾールを、Ｏｒｇ．Ｂｉｏｍｏｌ．Ｃｈｅｍ．３２９７－３３０２（２００６）に記載の方法で合成した。
　５０ｍＬシュレンク管に１－ブロモ－２－ジフェニルホスフィノベンゼン（２．９３ｇ，８．５９ｍｍｏｌ）、及び、脱水ＴＨＦ１５ｍＬを入れ、－６５℃に冷却し、撹拌しながらｎ－ブチルリチウムのｎ－ヘキサン溶液（１．６ｍｏｌ／Ｌ，５．５ｍＬ，ｎ－ブチルリチウムとして８．８ｍｍｏｌ）を５分かけて滴下した。赤色に変化した反応液を、－３５℃まで昇温して１時間撹拌した（反応液Ｄ）。５０ｍＬナス形フラスコにフェニルジクロロホスフィン（１．５７ｇ，８．７７ｍｍｏｌ）、及び、脱水ＴＨＦ８ｍＬを入れ、－６５℃に冷却し、反応液Ｄをカヌラ送液により混合した。反応液を徐々に室温（２３℃）まで昇温しながら、１２時間撹拌したところ、反応液は白濁化した（反応液Ｅ）。２００ｍＬ４つ口ナス形フラスコにＮ－メチル－２－（２－ブロモフェニル）ベンズイミダゾール（２．５２ｇ，８．７７ｍｍｏｌ）、及び、脱水ＴＨＦ１３０ｍＬを入れ、－６５℃に冷却し、撹拌しながらｎ－ブチルリチウムのｎ－ヘキサン溶液（１．６ｍｏｌ／Ｌ，５．５ｍＬ，ｎ－ブチルリチウムとして８．８ｍｍｏｌ）を５分かけて滴下し、－４０℃まで昇温して２時間撹拌した。赤色に変色した反応液を－６０℃に冷却した（反応液Ｆ）。上記反応液Ｅを－６０℃に冷却し、カヌラ送液により反応液Ｆに混合した。反応液を徐々に室温（２３℃）まで昇温しながら終夜撹拌後、５０℃で１時間撹拌した。反応液に塩化アンモニウム水溶液、及び、クロロホルムを加えた後、クロロホルムで抽出を行い、有機層を無水硫酸ナトリウムで乾燥させ、ろ過し、濃縮した後、分取用ＧＰＣにより、無色固体のダイホスフィン２酸化物を６７５ｍｇ（収率１２．９％）得た。 Example 21 (Synthesis of Aa3 ′)
Aa3 ′ was synthesized by the following method.
N-methyl-2- (2-bromophenyl) benzimidazole was prepared according to Org. Biomol. Chem. 3297-3302 (2006).
A 50 mL Schlenk tube is charged with 1-bromo-2-diphenylphosphinobenzene (2.93 g, 8.59 mmol) and 15 mL of dehydrated THF, cooled to −65 ° C., and stirred with an n-hexane solution of n-butyllithium. (1.6 mol / L, 5.5 mL, 8.8 mmol as n-butyllithium) was added dropwise over 5 minutes. The reaction solution turned red was heated to −35 ° C. and stirred for 1 hour (reaction solution D). A 50 mL eggplant-shaped flask was charged with phenyldichlorophosphine (1.57 g, 8.77 mmol) and 8 mL of dehydrated THF, cooled to −65 ° C., and the reaction solution D was mixed by sending a cannula. The reaction solution was stirred for 12 hours while gradually warming to room temperature (23 ° C.). As a result, the reaction solution became cloudy (reaction solution E). A 200 mL four-necked eggplant-shaped flask was charged with N-methyl-2- (2-bromophenyl) benzimidazole (2.52 g, 8.77 mmol) and 130 mL of dehydrated THF, cooled to −65 ° C., and stirred while stirring. A n-hexane solution of butyllithium (1.6 mol / L, 5.5 mL, 8.8 mmol as n-butyllithium) was added dropwise over 5 minutes, the temperature was raised to −40 ° C., and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours. The reaction solution turned red was cooled to −60 ° C. (Reaction Solution F). The reaction solution E was cooled to −60 ° C. and mixed with the reaction solution F by sending a cannula. The reaction solution was stirred overnight while gradually warming to room temperature (23 ° C.), and then stirred at 50 ° C. for 1 hour. Aqueous ammonium chloride solution and chloroform were added to the reaction solution, followed by extraction with chloroform. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, concentrated, and then subjected to colorless solid diphosphine 2 by preparative GPC. 675 mg (yield 12.9%) of an oxide was obtained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000081
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000081
　得られたダイホスフィン２酸化物のＮＭＲデータを下記に示す。 NMR data of the obtained diphosphine dioxide is shown below.
　1Ｈ　ＮＭＲ（３００ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）　δ（ｐｐｍ）＝７．５７－６．９８（ｍ，２７Ｈ），３．４３（ｓ，３Ｈ）；31Ｐ　ＮＭＲ（１２２ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）　δ（ｐｐｍ）＝３２．８（ｄｄ，Ｊ＝９０，７Ｈｚ）． 1 H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = 7.57-6.98 (m, 27H), 3.43 (s, 3H); 31 P NMR (122 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = 32.8 (dd, J = 90, 7 Hz).
　得られたダイホスフィン２酸化物のＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ測定の結果を下記に示す。 The results of DART-MS measurement of the obtained diphosphine dioxide are shown below.
　ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ（Ｍ／Ｚ）：ｆｏｕｎｄ；６０９．２４．ｃａｌｃｄ；６０９．１８（Ｍ＋Ｈ）+． DART-MS (M / Z): found; 609.24. calcd; 609.18 (M + H) + .
　アルゴン雰囲気下、１００ｍＬ４つ口フラスコに上記で合成したダイホスフィン２酸化物（５００ｍｇ，０．８２２ｍｍｏｌ）、トリエチルアミン３．９４ｇ、及び、脱水キシレン１０ｍＬを加え、０℃に冷却して、トリクロロシラン（５．００ｇ，３７．０ｍｍｏｌ）を１０分かけて滴下した。自然昇温により室温（２３℃）に戻した後、１３０℃で１２時間撹拌した。反応液を室温（２３℃）に戻し、３０重量％水酸化ナトリウム水溶液５ｍＬを滴下した後、キシレンを加えて抽出し、有機層を濃縮し、乾燥させて固化した。残渣を展開溶媒クロロホルムのシリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィーにより、無色固体のＡａ３’を２０２ｍｇ（収率４７．３％）得た。 Under an argon atmosphere, the diphosphine dioxide (500 mg, 0.822 mmol) synthesized above, 3.94 g of triethylamine and 10 mL of dehydrated xylene were added to a 100 mL four-necked flask, cooled to 0 ° C., and trichlorosilane (5 0.000 g, 37.0 mmol) was added dropwise over 10 minutes. After returning to room temperature (23 ° C.) by natural temperature rise, the mixture was stirred at 130 ° C. for 12 hours. The reaction solution was returned to room temperature (23 ° C.), and 5 mL of a 30 wt% aqueous sodium hydroxide solution was added dropwise, followed by extraction with xylene. The organic layer was concentrated, dried and solidified. The residue was subjected to silica gel column chromatography using a developing solvent chloroform to obtain 202 mg (yield 47.3%) of colorless solid Aa3 '.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000082
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000082
　Ａａ３’のＮＭＲデータを下記に示す。 NMR data of Aa3 'is shown below.
　1Ｈ　ＮＭＲ（３００ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）　δ（ｐｐｍ）＝７．６２－６．８０（ｍ，２７Ｈ），３．６７（ｓ，３Ｈ）；31Ｐ　ＮＭＲ（１２２ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）　δ（ｐｐｍ）＝－１２．７（ｄ，Ｊ＝１５６Ｈｚ），－１５．１（ｄ，Ｊ＝１５６Ｈｚ）． 1 H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = 7.62-6.80 (m, 27H), 3.67 (s, 3H); 31 P NMR (122 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = −12.7 (d, J = 156 Hz), −15.1 (d, J = 156 Hz).
　Ａａ３’のＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ測定の結果を下記に示す。 Results of DART-MS measurement of Aa3 'are shown below.
　ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ（Ｍ／Ｚ）：ｆｏｕｎｄ；５７７．１７．ｃａｌｃｄ；５７７．１９（Ｍ＋Ｈ）＋． DART-MS (M / Z): found; 577.17. calcd; 577.19 (M + H) + .
　Ａａ３’元素分析測定の結果を下記に示す。 The results of Aa3 'elemental analysis measurement are shown below.
　Ａｎａｌ．Ｃａｌｃｄ　ｆｏｒ　Ｃ38Ｈ30Ｎ2Ｐ2・０．３３Ｈ2Ｏ（％）：Ｃ，７９．１５；Ｈ，５．２４；Ｎ，４．８６．Ｆｏｕｎｄ：Ｃ，７８．１６；Ｈ，５．４３；Ｎ，４．６９． Anal. Calcd for C 38 H 30 N 2 P 2 · 0.33H 2 O (%): C, 79.15; H, 5.24; N, 4.86. Found: C, 78.16; H, 5.43; N, 4.69.
　実施例２２（表１－１における化合物番号１３）
　ヨウ化銀（Ｉ）（２．７０ｍｇ，０．０１１５ｍｍｏｌ）のアセトニトリル０．５ｍＬ懸濁液に、Ａａ３’（６．６３ｍｇ，０．０１１５ｍｍｏｌ）を加え３分間撹拌後、ジクロロメタン１ｍＬを加えて４０℃で５分間撹拌した。反応液を濃縮し、乾燥させて固体の錯体を９．３３ｍｇ得た。 Example 22 (Compound No. 13 in Table 1-1)
Aa3 ′ (6.63 mg, 0.0115 mmol) was added to a suspension of silver (I) iodide (2.70 mg, 0.0115 mmol) in 0.5 mL of acetonitrile, and the mixture was stirred for 3 minutes. For 5 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and dried to obtain 9.33 mg of a solid complex.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000083
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000083
　得られた錯体の組成は混合比から決定した。 The composition of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
　実施例２３（表１－１における化合物番号１１）
　塩化銀（Ｉ）（２．１０ｍｇ，０．０１４７ｍｍｏｌ）のアセトニトリル０．５ｍＬ懸濁液に、Ａａ３’（８．４５ｍｇ，０．０１４７ｍｍｏｌ）を加え３分間撹拌後、ジクロロメタン１ｍＬを加えて４０℃で５分間撹拌した。反応液を濃縮し、乾燥させて固体の錯体を１０．６ｍｇ得た。 Example 23 (Compound No. 11 in Table 1-1)
To a suspension of silver chloride (I) (2.10 mg, 0.0147 mmol) in 0.5 mL of acetonitrile, Aa3 ′ (8.45 mg, 0.0147 mmol) was added and stirred for 3 minutes, and then 1 mL of dichloromethane was added at 40 ° C. Stir for 5 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and dried to obtain 10.6 mg of a solid complex.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000084
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000084
　得られた錯体の組成は混合比から決定した。 The composition of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
　実施例２４（表１－３における化合物番号１２４）
　テトラフルオロホウ酸銀（Ｉ）（２．２０ｍｇ，０．０１１３ｍｍｏｌ）のジクロロメタン１．５ｍＬ懸濁液に、Ａａ３’（６．５２ｍｇ，０．０１１３ｍｍｏｌ）を加えて４０℃で５分間撹拌した。反応液を濃縮し、乾燥させて固体の錯体を８．７２ｍｇ得た。 Example 24 (Compound No. 124 in Table 1-3)
Aa3 ′ (6.52 mg, 0.0113 mmol) was added to a 1.5 mL suspension of silver tetrafluoroborate (I) (2.20 mg, 0.0113 mmol) in dichloromethane, and the mixture was stirred at 40 ° C. for 5 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and dried to obtain 8.72 mg of a solid complex.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000085
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000085
　得られた錯体の組成は混合比から決定した。 The composition of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
　実施例２５（Ａａ１’－２及びＢａ１６’の合成）
　Ｂａ１６’を含む粗製物を以下の方法で合成し、８－［［ｏ－（ジフェニルホスフィノ）フェニル］フェニルホスフィノ］－２－メチルキノリン（Ａａ１’－２）を、以下の方法で合成した。 Example 25 (synthesis of Aa1′-2 and Ba16 ′)
A crude product containing Ba16 ′ was synthesized by the following method, and 8-[[o- (diphenylphosphino) phenyl] phenylphosphino] -2-methylquinoline (Aa1′-2) was synthesized by the following method. .
　窒素雰囲気下、８－ブロモ－２－メチルキノリン（１．６２ｇ，７．２９ｍｍｏｌ）のＴＨＦ　１１ｍＬ溶液を－７０℃に冷却し、ｎ－ブチルリチウムのｎ－ヘキサン溶液（１．５７ｍｏｌ／Ｌ，５．６ｍＬ，ｎ－ブチルリチウムとして７．２９ｍｍｏｌ）を１０分かけて滴下し、－７０℃で２時間撹拌して、リチウム塩溶液を調製した。別容器にアルゴン雰囲気下、ｏ－ビス（ジクロロホスフィノ）ベンゼン（１．０１ｇ，３．６１ｍｍｏｌ）のＴＨＦ　２５ｍＬ溶液を仕込み、－７０℃に冷却して、先に調製したリチウム塩溶液を１５分かけて滴下した。－７０℃でさらに３５分間撹拌した後、２時間かけて室温（２３℃）まで昇温した。室温（２３℃）で更に４５分撹拌した後、－６５℃に冷却し、フェニルリチウムのｎ－ヘキサン溶液（１．０６ｍｏｌ／Ｌ，７．２ｍＬ，フェニルリチウムとして７．５８ｍｍｏｌ）を１０分かけて滴下し、－６５℃でさらに１０分間撹拌した。室温（２３℃）まで自然昇温した後、２．５日間撹拌した。反応液を０℃に冷却し、１ｍｏｌ／Ｌの塩化アンモニウム水溶液３０ｍＬを滴下した。減圧下濃縮し、クロロホルム１２５ｍＬを加えて抽出し、有機層を無水硫酸ナトリウムで乾燥した。ろ過後、減圧濃縮して粗生成物を２．３３ｇ得た。粗生成物をＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳにより測定したところ、（Ｍ／Ｚ）＝５７７．１７の強いピークを観測した。Ｂａ１６’は（Ｍ＋Ｈ）+の状態で（Ｍ／Ｚ）＝５７７．２０であることから、粗生成物には多くのＢａ１６’が含有されていた。 Under a nitrogen atmosphere, a solution of 8-bromo-2-methylquinoline (1.62 g, 7.29 mmol) in 11 mL of THF was cooled to −70 ° C., and an n-butyllithium solution in n-hexane (1.57 mol / L, 5 6 mL, 7.29 mmol as n-butyllithium) was added dropwise over 10 minutes, and the mixture was stirred at −70 ° C. for 2 hours to prepare a lithium salt solution. In a separate container, a solution of o-bis (dichlorophosphino) benzene (1.01 g, 3.61 mmol) in 25 mL of THF was charged in an argon atmosphere, cooled to −70 ° C., and the previously prepared lithium salt solution was added for 15 minutes. It was dripped over. The mixture was further stirred at −70 ° C. for 35 minutes, and then heated to room temperature (23 ° C.) over 2 hours. After further stirring at room temperature (23 ° C.) for 45 minutes, the mixture was cooled to −65 ° C., and phenyllithium in n-hexane (1.06 mol / L, 7.2 mL, 7.58 mmol as phenyl lithium) was added over 10 minutes. The solution was added dropwise, and the mixture was further stirred at −65 ° C. for 10 minutes. The mixture was naturally warmed to room temperature (23 ° C.) and then stirred for 2.5 days. The reaction solution was cooled to 0 ° C., and 30 mL of a 1 mol / L aqueous ammonium chloride solution was added dropwise. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure, extracted with 125 mL of chloroform, and the organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain 2.33 g of a crude product. When the crude product was measured by DART-MS, a strong peak of (M / Z) = 57.7.17 was observed. Since Ba16 ′ was (M / H) + (M / Z) = 577.20 in the state of (M + H) + , the crude product contained a large amount of Ba16 ′.
　上記粗生成物を展開溶媒としてクロロホルムを用いてシリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィーによる精製を行い、乾燥させて無色固体のＡａ１’－２を１２０ｍｇ（収率６．５０％）得た。 The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography using chloroform as a developing solvent and dried to obtain 120 mg (yield 6.50%) of colorless solid Aa1'-2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000086
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000086
　Ａａ１’－２のＮＭＲ、ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳデータを下記に示す。 NMR and DART-MS data of Aa1'-2 are shown below.
　1Ｈ　ＮＭＲ（３００ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）　δ（ｐｐｍ）＝７．９６（ｄ，Ｊ＝８．３Ｈｚ，１Ｈ），７．６７（ｄ，Ｊ＝８．３Ｈｚ，１Ｈ），７．４３－７．４０（ｍ，１Ｈ），７．３３－７．００（ｍ，２０Ｈ），６．８９－６．８１（ｍ，１Ｈ），２．５０（ｓ，３Ｈ）；31Ｐ　ＮＭＲ（１２２ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）　δ（ｐｐｍ）＝－１２．７（ｄ，Ｊ＝１６８Ｈｚ），－１９．３（ｄ，Ｊ＝１６８Ｈｚ）；ＤＡＲＴ－ＭＳ（Ｍ／Ｚ）：ｆｏｕｎｄ；５１２．１７．ｃａｌｃｄ；５１２．１７（Ｍ＋Ｈ）+． 1 H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = 7.96 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.67 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.43-7. 40 (m, 1H), 7.33-7.00 (m, 20H), 6.89-6.81 (m, 1H), 2.50 (s, 3H); 31 P NMR (122 MHz, CDCl 3 ) Δ (ppm) = -12.7 (d, J = 168 Hz), -19.3 (d, J = 168 Hz); DART-MS (M / Z): found; 512.17. calcd; 512.17 (M + H) + .
　実施例２６（表１－３における化合物番号１３２）
　ヨウ化銀（Ｉ）（７．３０ｍｇ，０．０３１１ｍｍｏｌ）のクロロホルム２．０ｍＬ懸濁液に、Ａａ１’－２（１５．９ｍｇ，０．０３１１ｍｍｏｌ）を加えて４０℃で５分間撹拌した。反応液を濃縮し、乾燥させて固体の錯体を２３．２ｍｇ得た。 Example 26 (Compound No. 132 in Table 1-3)
Aa1′-2 (15.9 mg, 0.0311 mmol) was added to a 2.0 mL chloroform suspension of silver (I) iodide (7.30 mg, 0.0311 mmol), and the mixture was stirred at 40 ° C. for 5 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and dried to obtain 23.2 mg of a solid complex.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000087
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000087
　得られた錯体の組成は混合比から決定した。 The composition of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
　実施例２７（表１－３における化合物番号１３３）
　テトラフルオロホウ酸銀（Ｉ）（５．６０ｍｇ，０．０２８８ｍｍｏｌ）のジクロロメタン２ｍＬ懸濁液に、Ａａ１’－２（１４．７ｍｇ，０．０２８８ｍｍｏｌ）を加えて４０℃で５分間撹拌した。反応液を濃縮し、乾燥させて固体の錯体を２０．３ｍｇ得た。 Example 27 (Compound No. 133 in Table 1-3)
Aa1′-2 (14.7 mg, 0.0288 mmol) was added to a suspension of silver tetrafluoroborate (I) (5.60 mg, 0.0288 mmol) in 2 mL of dichloromethane, and the mixture was stirred at 40 ° C. for 5 minutes. The reaction solution was concentrated and dried to obtain 20.3 mg of a solid complex.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000088
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000088
　得られた錯体の組成は混合比から決定した。 The composition of the obtained complex was determined from the mixing ratio.
　＜比較例１＞
　アルゴン雰囲気下、テトラフルオロホウ酸銀（Ｉ）（２７．０ｍｇ，０．１３９ｍｍｏｌ）にＴＨＦ４ｍＬ、１，２－ビス（ジフェニルホスフィノ）ベンゼン（６１．９ｍｇ，０．１３９ｍｍｏｌ)を加え、１時間加熱し還流後、反応液を－６０℃に冷却した。別に、アルゴン雰囲気下、Ｊ．Ａｍ．Ｃｈｅｍ．Ｓｏｃ．１２６，２３００－２３０１（２００４）記載の方法で合成した１０－ブロモベンゾ［ｈ］キノリン（２８．２ｍｇ，０．０４８７ｍｍｏｌ）をＴＨＦ４ｍＬに溶かし、－６０℃にて１．６６Ｍ　ｎ－ブチルリチウムのへキサン溶液（８３．７μＬ，０．１３９ｍｍｏｌ)を加え、３０分撹拌後、前記－６０℃に冷却した反応液を滴下し、室温に戻して２時間撹拌した。反応液を濃（２３℃）縮し、クロロホルムに懸濁してろ過し、ろ液を濃縮して、クロロホルム－エーテルでスローディフュージョンによる再結晶を行い、結晶を真空乾燥して無色固体の錯体を６１．５ｍｇ得た。 <Comparative Example 1>
Under an argon atmosphere, 4 mL of THF and 1,2-bis (diphenylphosphino) benzene (61.9 mg, 0.139 mmol) were added to silver (I) tetrafluoroborate (27.0 mg, 0.139 mmol) and heated for 1 hour. After refluxing, the reaction solution was cooled to −60 ° C. Separately, under an argon atmosphere, J. Org. Am. Chem. Soc. 126, 2300-2301 (2004), 10-bromobenzo [h] quinoline (28.2 mg, 0.0487 mmol) dissolved in 4 mL of THF and dissolved in 1.66 M n-butyllithium hexane at −60 ° C. The solution (83.7 μL, 0.139 mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred for 30 minutes. The reaction solution cooled to −60 ° C. was added dropwise, and the mixture was returned to room temperature and stirred for 2 hours. The reaction solution is concentrated (23 ° C.), suspended in chloroform and filtered, the filtrate is concentrated, recrystallized with slow diffusion using chloroform-ether, and the crystals are vacuum-dried to obtain a colorless solid complex. .5 mg was obtained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000089
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000089
　錯体のＮＭＲデータを以下に示す。ＮＭＲスペクトルが、Ｃｈｅｍ．Ｃｏｍｍｕｎ．６３８４－６３８６（２００８）記載の錯体と同様のパターンであったことから、上記に示す構造の錯体であった。 The NMR data of the complex is shown below. NMR spectra were obtained from Chem. Commun. Since the pattern was the same as the complex described in 6384-6386 (2008), it was a complex having the structure shown above.
　1Ｈ　ＮＭＲ（３００ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）　δ（ｐｐｍ）＝７．５７（ｂｒ，８Ｈ），７．３９－７．３４（ｍ，８Ｈ），７．１４－７．１２（ｍ，３２Ｈ）；31Ｐ　ＮＭＲ（１２２ＭＨｚ，ＣＤＣｌ3）　δ（ｐｐｍ）＝１．２５（ｄ，Ｊ（31Ｐ－107Ａｇ，109Ａｇ）＝２３１，２６７Ｈｚ）. 1 H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = 7.57 (br, 8H), 7.39-7.34 (m, 8H), 7.14-7.12 (m, 32H); 31 P NMR (122 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ (ppm) = 1.25 (d, J ( 31 P- 107 Ag, 109 Ag) = 231,267 Hz).
　［錯体の固体状態での発光特性］
　固体発光量子効率：室温（２３℃）空気下での固体発光量子効率を以下のようにして、量子効率測定装置（住友重機械メカトロニクス社製）にて測定した。
　サンプル調製は以下の通りで行った。室温（２３℃）空気下、１８ｍｍ角、厚さ０．３ｍｍの２枚の石英板に、上記実施例及び比較例で合成した錯体のみからなる試料およそ１．５ｍｇを挟み込み、圧迫して１０ｍｍ×５ｍｍ程度の楕円形に引き伸ばし、四辺をテープで止め、密封した。 [Light emission characteristics of the complex in the solid state]
Solid emission quantum efficiency: The solid emission quantum efficiency under air at room temperature (23 ° C.) was measured with a quantum efficiency measurement device (manufactured by Sumitomo Heavy Industries Mechatronics) as follows.
Sample preparation was performed as follows. Approximately 1.5 mg of a sample composed only of the complex synthesized in the above examples and comparative examples was sandwiched between two quartz plates of 18 mm square and 0.3 mm thickness at room temperature (23 ° C.), and pressed to 10 mm × It was stretched to an ellipse of about 5 mm, and the four sides were fixed with tape and sealed.
　該機器構成は以下の通りである。光源はＫｉｍｍｏｎ社製クラス３ＢのＨｅ－Ｃｄ式ＣＷレーザーを用いた。出射部にＯＦＲ社製のＮＤフィルターＦＤＵ０．５を挿入し、光ファイバーで積分球へ導いた。住友重機械メカトロニクス社製のオプテル部の積分球、ポリクロメータ、及びＣＣＤマルチチャンネル検出器を介し、ＫＥＹＴＨＬＥＹ社製の型式２４００ソースメーターを連結して、ノート型ＰＣでデータを取り込んだ。 The equipment configuration is as follows. The light source was a Class 3B He-Cd CW laser manufactured by Kimmon. An ND filter FDU0.5 manufactured by OFR was inserted into the emission part and led to an integrating sphere with an optical fiber. A model 2400 source meter manufactured by KEYTHLEY was connected via an integrating sphere, polychromator, and CCD multichannel detector manufactured by Sumitomo Heavy Industries Mechatronics, and data was captured by a notebook PC.
　該測定の手順は以下の通りとした。室温（２３℃）空気中、積分球内に前記条件で調製したサンプルを配置し、レーザー励起光を３２５ｎｍとし、ＣＷ光で、積分時間を３００ｍｓ、励起光積分範囲を３１５～３３５ｎｍ、ＰＬ波長積分範囲を３９０～８００ｎｍとした。そして、住友重機械メカトロニクス社製の測定・解析ソフトの手順に従って、量子効率を算出した。 The measurement procedure was as follows. Place the sample prepared under the above conditions in an integrating sphere in room temperature (23 ° C) air, set the laser excitation light to 325 nm, CW light, integration time 300 ms, excitation light integration range 315 to 335 nm, PL wavelength integration The range was 390 to 800 nm. The quantum efficiency was calculated according to the procedure of measurement / analysis software manufactured by Sumitomo Heavy Industries Mechatronics.
　固体発光波長：前記固体発光量子効率測定と同様の方法で調製した試料を、蛍光分光光度計（ＪＯＢＩＮＹＶＯＮ－ＳＰＥＸ社製、Ｆｌｕｏｒｏｌｏｇ－Ｔａｕ３）のサンプル固定場所にセットし、励起波長を３５０ｎｍとして固体発光波長を測定した。
　固体発光寿命：測定・解析は以下の通りで行った。
　前記固体発光量子効率測定と同様の方法で調製した試料を、蛍光分光光度計（ＪＯＢＩＮＹＶＯＮ－ＳＰＥＸ社製、Ｆｌｕｏｒｏｌｏｇ－Ｔａｕ３）の未知試料用サンプル固定場所にセットし、参照サンプル固定場所には発光寿命０ｎｓのＬＵＤＯＸ（Ａｌｄｒｉｃｈ製、ｃｏｌｌｏｉｄａｌ　ｓｉｌｉｃａ　ｓｕｓｐｅｎｓｉｏｎ　ｉｎ　ｗａｔｅｒ）を含む純水をセットした。前記ＬＵＤＯＸの発光寿命を０と設定し、同装置で予め測定した銀錯体の最大発光波長及び最大励起波長において、周波数変調法による寿命測定を行った。測定結果は、Ａｎａｌ．　Ｃｈｅｍ．　６８，　９-１７（１９９６）に記載の理論式に従って解析した。 Solid emission wavelength: A sample prepared by the same method as the solid emission quantum efficiency measurement is set in a sample fixing place of a fluorescence spectrophotometer (manufactured by JOBINYVON-SPEX, Fluorolog-Tau3), and the excitation wavelength is 350 nm and solid emission is performed. The wavelength was measured.
Solid emission lifetime: Measurement and analysis were performed as follows.
A sample prepared by the same method as the solid-state luminescence quantum efficiency measurement is set in a sample fixing place for an unknown sample of a fluorescence spectrophotometer (manufactured by JOBINYVON-SPEX, Inc., Fluorolog-Tau3). Pure water containing 0 ns of LUDOX (Aldrich, colloidal silica suspension in water) was set. The light emission lifetime of the LUDOX was set to 0, and the lifetime was measured by the frequency modulation method at the maximum emission wavelength and the maximum excitation wavelength of the silver complex measured in advance with the same apparatus. The measurement results are shown in Anal. Chem. 68, 9-17 (1996).
　合成例１～５、実施例２、３、５、６、２２、２３、２４、２６、並びに２７、及び比較例１の錯体の固体発光量子効率、固体発光波長、固体発光寿命の値を表２に示す。 The values of solid-state emission quantum efficiency, solid-state emission wavelength, and solid-state emission lifetime of the complexes of Synthesis Examples 1 to 5, Examples 2, 3, 5, 6, 22, 23, 24, 26, and 27 and Comparative Example 1 are shown. It is shown in 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000090
 （表中、－は測定していないことを示す。）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000090
 (In the table,-indicates that measurement was not performed.)
　［錯体のＳ１－Ｔ１エネルギー］
　＜計算例１＞
　合成例１で得られた錯体のモデルとして、銀原子１原子、ビス－（ｏ－ジフェニルホスフィノフェニル）フェニルホスフィン（Ａａ６０’）１分子、ヨウ素原子１原子を用いた。初期配置としてビス－（ｏ－ジフェニルホスフィノフェニル）フェニルホスフィン中に含まれるＡｇ+に配位可能なリン原子３つ、及び、ヨウ素原子１原子を全て銀原子から３．０Å以内の距離に設置し、Ｇａｕｓｓｉａｎ０３プログラム（リビジョン　Ｄ．０２、Ｇａｕｓｓｉａｎ　Ｉｎｃ．製）の密度汎関数法を用い、構造最適化計算を行った。得られた最適化された構造に対し、同じくＧａｕｓｓｉａｎ０３プログラムを用いて、時間依存密度汎関数法を用い１電子励起状態の計算を行った。構造最適化計算及び１電子励起状態の計算のいずれも、計算手法として汎関数はＢ３ＬＹＰ、基底関数はＡｇ+及びハロゲン原子に対してはＬＡＮＬ２ＤＺ、その他の原子に対しては６－３１Ｇ（ｄ）を用いた。計算の結果、錯体はＳ１エネルギーが３．０７ｅＶであり、Ｔ１エネルギーが３．０１ｅＶであり、Ｓ１エネルギーとＴ１エネルギーの差が０．０６ｅＶとなった。 [S1-T1 energy of the complex]
<Calculation Example 1>
As a model of the complex obtained in Synthesis Example 1, one atom of silver, one molecule of bis- (o-diphenylphosphinophenyl) phenylphosphine (Aa60 ′), and one atom of iodine atom were used. Three phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + contained in bis- (o-diphenylphosphinophenyl) phenylphosphine as an initial configuration, and one iodine atom are all located within a distance of 3.0 cm from the silver atom. Then, the structure optimization calculation was performed using the density functional method of the Gaussian 03 program (revision D.02, manufactured by Gaussian Inc.). For the optimized structure obtained, a one-electron excited state was calculated using a time-dependent density functional method, similarly using the Gaussian 03 program. In both structure optimization calculation and one-electron excited state calculation, the functionals are B3LYP, basis functions are Ag + and LANL2DZ for halogen atoms, and 6-31G (d) for other atoms. Was used. As a result of the calculation, the complex had an S1 energy of 3.07 eV, a T1 energy of 3.01 eV, and a difference between the S1 energy and the T1 energy was 0.06 eV.
　＜計算例２＞
　実施例５で得られた錯体のモデルとして、銀原子を１原子、Ｂｃ９’を１分子用いた。初期配置としてＢｃ９’中に含まれるＡｇ+に配位可能なリン原子３つ、及び、酸素アニオン１つを全て銀原子から３．０Å以内の距離に設置し（化合物９５’の構造）、Ｇａｕｓｓｉａｎ０３プログラム（リビジョン　Ｄ．０２、Ｇａｕｓｓｉａｎ　Ｉｎｃ．製）の密度汎関数法を用い、構造最適化計算を行った。得られた最適化された構造に対し、同じくＧａｕｓｓｉａｎ０３プログラムを用いて、時間依存密度汎関数法を用い１電子励起状態の計算を行った。構造最適化計算及び1電子励起状態の計算いずれも、計算手法として汎関数はＢ３ＬＹＰ、基底関数はＡｇ+及びハロゲン原子に対してはＬＡＮＬ２ＤＺ、その他の原子に対しては６－３１Ｇ（ｄ）を用いた。計算の結果、錯体はＳ１エネルギーが２．６１ｅＶであり、Ｔ１エネルギーが２．６１ｅＶであり、Ｓ１エネルギーとＴ１エネルギーの差が０．００ｅＶとなった。 <Calculation Example 2>
As a model of the complex obtained in Example 5, 1 atom of silver atom and 1 molecule of Bc9 ′ were used. As an initial configuration, three phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + contained in Bc9 ′ and one oxygen anion are all placed within a distance of 3.0 cm or less from the silver atom (structure of compound 95 ′), and Gaussian03 Structure optimization calculations were performed using the density functional theory of the program (Revision D.02, manufactured by Gaussian Inc.). For the optimized structure obtained, a one-electron excited state was calculated using a time-dependent density functional method, similarly using the Gaussian 03 program. For both structure optimization calculation and one-electron excited state calculation, the functional method is B3LYP, the basis function is Ag + and LANL2DZ for halogen atoms, and 6-31G (d) for other atoms. Using. As a result of the calculation, the complex had an S1 energy of 2.61 eV, a T1 energy of 2.61 eV, and a difference between the S1 energy and the T1 energy was 0.00 eV.
　＜計算例３＞
　実施例６で得られた錯体のモデルとして、銀原子を１原子、Ｂａ１９’を１分子、２，９－ジクロロ－１，１０－フェナントロリンを１分子を用い、カウンターイオンは除いた構造を用いた。初期配置としてＢａ１９’中に含まれるＡｇ+に配位可能なリン原子２つ、及び、２，９-ジクロロ-１，１０-フェナントロリン中に含まれるＡｇ+に配位可能な窒素原子２つを全て銀原子から３．０Å以内の距離に設置し、Ｇａｕｓｓｉａｎ０３プログラム（リビジョン　Ｄ．０２、Ｇａｕｓｓｉａｎ　Ｉｎｃ．製）の密度汎関数法を用い、構造最適化計算を行った。得られた最適化された構造に対し、同じくＧａｕｓｓｉａｎ０３プログラムを用いて、時間依存密度汎関数法を用い１電子励起状態の計算を行った。構造最適化計算及び1電子励起状態の計算いずれも、計算手法として汎関数はＢ３ＬＹＰ、基底関数はＡｇ+及びハロゲン原子に対してはＬＡＮＬ２ＤＺ、その他の原子に対しては６－３１Ｇ（ｄ）を用いた。計算の結果、錯体はＳ１エネルギーが２．２９ｅＶであり、Ｔ１エネルギーが２．２９ｅＶであり、Ｓ１エネルギーとＴ１エネルギーの差が０．００ｅＶとなった。 <Calculation Example 3>
As a model of the complex obtained in Example 6, a structure was used in which one atom of silver, one molecule of Ba19 ′, one molecule of 2,9-dichloro-1,10-phenanthroline, and no counter ions were used. . Two phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + contained in Ba19 ′ as an initial configuration and two nitrogen atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + contained in 2,9-dichloro-1,10-phenanthroline All of them were installed within a distance of 3.0 cm from the silver atom, and the structure optimization calculation was performed using the density functional method of the Gaussian 03 program (Revision D.02, manufactured by Gaussian Inc.). For the optimized structure obtained, a one-electron excited state was calculated using a time-dependent density functional method, similarly using the Gaussian 03 program. For both structure optimization calculation and one-electron excited state calculation, the functional method is B3LYP, the basis function is Ag + and LANL2DZ for halogen atoms, and 6-31G (d) for other atoms. Using. As a result of the calculation, the complex had an S1 energy of 2.29 eV, a T1 energy of 2.29 eV, and a difference between the S1 energy and the T1 energy was 0.00 eV.
　＜計算例４＞
　実施例２２で得られた錯体のモデルとして、銀原子１原子、Ａａ３’１分子、ヨウ素原子１原子を用いた。初期配置としてＡａ３’中に含まれるＡｇ+に配位可能なリン原子２つ、Ａａ３’中に含まれるＡｇ+に配位可能な窒素原子１つ、及び、ヨウ素原子１原子を全て銀原子から３．０Å以内の距離に設置し、Ｇａｕｓｓｉａｎ０３プログラム（リビジョン　Ｄ．０２、Ｇａｕｓｓｉａｎ　Ｉｎｃ．製）の密度汎関数法を用い、構造最適化計算を行った。得られた最適化された構造に対し、同じくＧａｕｓｓｉａｎ０３プログラムを用いて、時間依存密度汎関数法を用い１電子励起状態の計算を行った。構造最適化計算及び１電子励起状態の計算のいずれも、計算手法として汎関数はＢ３ＬＹＰ、基底関数はＡｇ+及びハロゲン原子に対してはＬＡＮＬ２ＤＺ、その他の原子に対しては６－３１Ｇ（ｄ）を用いた。計算の結果、錯体はＳ１エネルギーが２．８１ｅＶであり、Ｔ１エネルギーが２．７８ｅＶであり、Ｓ１エネルギーとＴ１エネルギーの差が０．０３ｅＶであった。銀と、銀に配位する窒素原子間の距離は２．５４Åであった。 <Calculation Example 4>
As a model of the complex obtained in Example 22, one silver atom, one Aa3 ′ molecule, and one iodine atom were used. As an initial configuration, two phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + contained in Aa3 ′, one nitrogen atom capable of coordinating to Ag + contained in Aa3 ′, and one iodine atom all from silver atoms Installation was performed at a distance of 3.0 mm or less, and the structure optimization calculation was performed using the density functional method of the Gaussian 03 program (revision D.02, manufactured by Gaussian Inc.). For the optimized structure obtained, a one-electron excited state was calculated using a time-dependent density functional method, similarly using the Gaussian 03 program. In both structure optimization calculation and one-electron excited state calculation, the functionals are B3LYP, basis functions are Ag + and LANL2DZ for halogen atoms, and 6-31G (d) for other atoms. Was used. As a result of the calculation, the complex had an S1 energy of 2.81 eV, a T1 energy of 2.78 eV, and a difference between the S1 energy and the T1 energy was 0.03 eV. The distance between silver and the nitrogen atom coordinated with silver was 2.54 cm.
　＜計算例５＞
　実施例２６で得られた錯体のモデルとして、銀原子１原子、８－［［ｏ－（ジフェニルホスフィノ）フェニル］フェニルホスフィノ］－２－メチルキノリン（Ａａ１’－２）１分子、ヨウ素原子１原子を用いた。初期配置としてＡａ１’－２中に含まれるＡｇ+に配位可能なリン原子２つ、Ａａ１’－２中に含まれるＡｇ+に配位可能な窒素原子１つ、及び、ヨウ素原子１原子を全て銀原子から３．０Å以内の距離に設置し、Ｇａｕｓｓｉａｎ０３プログラム（リビジョン　Ｄ．０２、Ｇａｕｓｓｉａｎ　Ｉｎｃ．製）の密度汎関数法を用い、構造最適化計算を行った。得られた最適化された構造に対し、同じくＧａｕｓｓｉａｎ０３プログラムを用いて、時間依存密度汎関数法を用い１電子励起状態の計算を行った。構造最適化計算及び１電子励起状態の計算のいずれも、計算手法として汎関数はＢ３ＬＹＰ、基底関数は銀原子及びハロゲン原子に対してはＬＡＮＬ２ＤＺ、その他の原子に対しては６－３１Ｇ（ｄ）を用いた。計算の結果、錯体はＳ１エネルギーが２．５４ｅＶであり、Ｔ１エネルギーが２．４７ｅＶであり、Ｓ１エネルギーとＴ１エネルギーの差が０．０７ｅＶとなった。銀と、銀に配位する窒素原子間の距離は３．１２Åであった。 <Calculation Example 5>
As a model of the complex obtained in Example 26, 1 atom of silver atom, 1 molecule of 8-[[o- (diphenylphosphino) phenyl] phenylphosphino] -2-methylquinoline (Aa1′-2), iodine atom One atom was used. As an initial configuration, two phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + contained in Aa1′-2, one nitrogen atom capable of coordinating to Ag + contained in Aa1′-2, and one atom of iodine atom All of them were installed within a distance of 3.0 cm from the silver atom, and the structure optimization calculation was performed using the density functional method of the Gaussian 03 program (Revision D.02, manufactured by Gaussian Inc.). For the optimized structure obtained, a one-electron excited state was calculated using a time-dependent density functional method, similarly using the Gaussian 03 program. In both structure optimization calculation and one-electron excited state calculation, the functional is B3LYP, the basis function is LANL2DZ for silver and halogen atoms, and 6-31G (d) for other atoms. Was used. As a result of the calculation, the complex had an S1 energy of 2.54 eV, a T1 energy of 2.47 eV, and a difference between the S1 energy and the T1 energy was 0.07 eV. The distance between silver and the nitrogen atom coordinated with silver was 3.12 cm.
　＜実施例７＞
　クロロホルム：１，２－ジクロロエタン＝２：１重量比の溶媒に、合成例２の錯体を１重量％溶かした溶液約２００ｍｇを２ｃｍ角のガラス基板上に載せた。これを、スピンコーター（有限会社押鐘製、ＳＣ－１５０）を用いて１０００ｒｐｍで１５秒間、１５００ｒｐｍで６０秒間スピンコートしたところ、厚さ７０ｎｍの薄膜を得た。ＵＶランプを当てたところ、発光が観測された。なお、薄膜の厚さは、高精度微細形状測定機（株式会社小坂研究所、ＳＵＲＦＣＯＲＤＥＲ　ＥＴ３０００）を用いて測定し、以下の実施例８～１４及び比較例１でも同様とした。 <Example 7>
About 200 mg of a solution obtained by dissolving 1% by weight of the complex of Synthesis Example 2 in a solvent of chloroform: 1,2-dichloroethane = 2: 1 by weight was placed on a 2 cm square glass substrate. When this was spin-coated at 1000 rpm for 15 seconds and 1500 rpm for 60 seconds using a spin coater (manufactured by Oshibell Co., Ltd., SC-150), a thin film having a thickness of 70 nm was obtained. When a UV lamp was applied, light emission was observed. The thickness of the thin film was measured using a high-precision fine shape measuring instrument (Kosaka Laboratory Ltd., SURFCORDER ET3000), and the same was applied to Examples 8 to 14 and Comparative Example 1 below.
　＜実施例８＞
　クロロホルム：１，２－ジクロロエタン＝２：１重量比の溶媒に、合成例２の錯体を０．１６重量％、１，３－ビス(トリフェニルシリル)ベンゼンを０．７８重量％溶かした溶液約２００ｍｇを２ｃｍ角のガラス基板上に載せた。これを、スピンコーター（有限会社押鐘製、ＳＣ－１５０）１０００ｒｐｍで１５秒間、１５００ｒｐｍで６０秒間スピンコートしたところ、厚さ８０ｎｍの薄膜を得た。ＵＶランプを当てたところ、発光が観測された。 <Example 8>
About a solution of 0.16% by weight of the complex of Synthesis Example 2 and 0.78% by weight of 1,3-bis (triphenylsilyl) benzene in a solvent of chloroform: 1,2-dichloroethane = 2: 1 by weight 200 mg was placed on a 2 cm square glass substrate. When this was spin-coated at 1000 rpm for 15 seconds and 1500 rpm for 60 seconds with a spin coater (manufactured by Oshibell Co., Ltd., SC-150), a thin film having a thickness of 80 nm was obtained. When a UV lamp was applied, light emission was observed.
　＜実施例９＞
　クロロホルム：１，２－ジクロロエタン＝２：１重量比の溶媒に、合成例２の錯体を０．１４重量％、１，３－ビス(トリフェニルシリル)ベンゼンを０．６９重量％、２，４，６－トリス（４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル）－１，３，５－トリアジンを０．１４重量％溶かした溶液約２００ｍｇを２ｃｍ角のガラス基板上に載せた。これを、スピンコーター（有限会社押鐘製、ＳＣ－１５０）を用いて１０００ｒｐｍで１５秒間、１５００ｒｐｍで６０秒間スピンコートしたところ、厚さ８０ｎｍの薄膜を得た。ＵＶランプを当てたところ、発光が観測された。 <Example 9>
In a solvent of chloroform: 1,2-dichloroethane = 2: 1 by weight, 0.14% by weight of the complex of Synthesis Example 2, 0.69% by weight of 1,3-bis (triphenylsilyl) benzene, 2,4 About 200 mg of a solution in which 0.14% by weight of 1,6-tris (4-tert-butylphenyl) -1,3,5-triazine was dissolved was placed on a 2 cm square glass substrate. When this was spin-coated at 1000 rpm for 15 seconds and 1500 rpm for 60 seconds using a spin coater (manufactured by Oshibell Co., Ltd., SC-150), a thin film having a thickness of 80 nm was obtained. When a UV lamp was applied, light emission was observed.
　＜実施例１０＞
　クロロホルム：１，２－ジクロロエタン＝２：１重量比の溶媒に、合成例２の錯体を０．１２重量％、ポリ（９－ビニルカルバゾール）（Ａｌｄｒｉｃｈ社製、カタログ記載のＭｎ＝３５０００，Ｍｗ＜７００００）を０．５８重量％、２，４，６－トリス（４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェニル）－１，３，５－トリアジンを０．１５重量％溶かした溶液約２００ｍｇを２ｃｍ角のガラス基板上に載せた。これを、スピンコーター（有限会社押鐘製、ＳＣ－１５０）を用いて１０００ｒｐｍで１５秒間、１５００ｒｐｍで６０秒間スピンコートしたところ、厚さ８０ｎｍの薄膜を得た。ＵＶランプを当てたところ、発光が観測された。 <Example 10>
0.12 wt% of the complex of Synthesis Example 2 in a solvent of chloroform: 1,2-dichloroethane = 2: 1 weight ratio, poly (9-vinylcarbazole) (manufactured by Aldrich, catalog, Mn = 35000, Mw < About 200 mg of a solution prepared by dissolving 0.58 wt% of 70,000) and 0.15 wt% of 2,4,6-tris (4-tert-butylphenyl) -1,3,5-triazine on a 2 cm square glass substrate. It was put on. When this was spin-coated at 1000 rpm for 15 seconds and 1500 rpm for 60 seconds using a spin coater (manufactured by Oshibell Co., Ltd., SC-150), a thin film having a thickness of 80 nm was obtained. When a UV lamp was applied, light emission was observed.
　＜実施例１１～１９、実施例２８～３２、比較例２＞
　合成例１、２、３、４及び５、実施例２，３，５、６、２２、２３、２４、２６及び２７並びに比較例１の錯体をそれぞれ１重量％、ＰＭＭＡ６．２重量％のクロロホルム溶液約１５０ｍｇを１ｃｍ×２ｃｍ角の石英基板上に載せた。これを、スピンコーター（有限会社押鐘製、ＳＣ－１５０）を用いて１０００ｒｐｍで１５秒間、１５００ｒｐｍで６０秒間スピンコートして薄膜を得た。実施例２、３、５、６、２６、及び２７の錯体を用いた薄膜の厚さはそれぞれ、０．９８μｍ、１．２μｍ、２．８μｍ、２．３μｍ、１．７μｍ、及び１．７μｍであった。 <Examples 11 to 19, Examples 28 to 32, Comparative Example 2>
Synthetic Examples 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, Examples 2, 3, 5, 6, 22, 23, 24, 26, and 27 and Comparative Example 1 were each 1% by weight of PMMA and 6.2% by weight of chloroform. About 150 mg of the solution was placed on a 1 cm × 2 cm square quartz substrate. This was spin-coated at 1000 rpm for 15 seconds and 1500 rpm for 60 seconds using a spin coater (manufactured by Oshibell Co., Ltd., SC-150) to obtain a thin film. The thicknesses of the thin films using the complexes of Examples 2, 3, 5, 6, 26, and 27 were 0.98 μm, 1.2 μm, 2.8 μm, 2.3 μm, 1.7 μm, and 1.7 μm, respectively. Met.
　［錯体とポリマーの組成物の薄膜状態での発光特性］
　薄膜を量子効率測定装置（住友重機械メカトロニクス社製）の積分球内に設置し、前記固体発光量子効率の測定と同様の条件にて、レーザー光照射後約５秒と約１５秒における発光量子効率を測定し、レーザー光照射の前後における発光量子効率の減衰率の差を経過時間で除した値を酸素劣化速度として求めた。窒素雰囲気下で同様にレーザー光照射後約５秒における発光量子効率を測定した値を、薄膜発光量子効率とした。結果を表３に記す。 [Light emission characteristics of complex and polymer composition in thin film state]
The thin film is placed in the integrating sphere of a quantum efficiency measurement device (manufactured by Sumitomo Heavy Industries Mechatronics Co., Ltd.). The efficiency was measured, and the value obtained by dividing the difference in the decay rate of the emission quantum efficiency before and after the laser light irradiation by the elapsed time was determined as the oxygen deterioration rate. Similarly, the value obtained by measuring the emission quantum efficiency in about 5 seconds after laser light irradiation in a nitrogen atmosphere was defined as the thin film emission quantum efficiency. The results are shown in Table 3.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000091
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000091
　＜実施例２０＞
　１５０ｎｍのＩＴＯ膜が付着したガラス基板上に、ポリ（エチレンジオキシチオフェン）／ポリスチレンスルホン酸（Ｂａｙｅｒ製、商品名：Ｂｙｔｒｏｎ　Ｐ　ＡＩ４０８３）の懸濁液をスピンコートにより７０ｎｍの厚みで成膜し、ホットプレート上で２００℃、１０分間乾燥させた。この上に、合成例２の錯体をクロロホルム：１，２－ジクロロエタン＝２：１重量比の溶液で錯体を０．９０重量％の濃度に調製した溶液をスピンコートにより１０００ｒｐｍで１５秒間、１５００ｒｐｍで６０秒間スピンコートにより成膜し、１３０℃、１０分間乾燥させた。続いて、陰極として、フッ化リチウムを約３ｎｍ、次いでアルミニウムを約８０ｎｍ蒸着して、発光素子を作製した。得られた素子に１８Ｖの電圧をかけることにより、輝度４２ｃｄ／ｍ2、効率１．０ｃｄ／Ａの黄色発光を確認した。 <Example 20>
On a glass substrate with a 150 nm ITO film attached, a suspension of poly (ethylenedioxythiophene) / polystyrene sulfonic acid (manufactured by Bayer, trade name: Bytron P AI4083) was formed into a thickness of 70 nm by spin coating, It was dried at 200 ° C. for 10 minutes on a hot plate. On top of this, a solution prepared by synthesizing the complex of Synthesis Example 2 with a solution of chloroform: 1,2-dichloroethane = 2: 1 by weight to a concentration of 0.90% by weight was spin-coated at 1000 rpm for 15 seconds at 1500 rpm. The film was formed by spin coating for 60 seconds and dried at 130 ° C. for 10 minutes. Then, about 3 nm of lithium fluoride and then about 80 nm of aluminum were vapor-deposited as a cathode, and the light emitting element was produced. By applying a voltage of 18 V to the obtained device, yellow light emission with a luminance of 42 cd / m 2 and an efficiency of 1.0 cd / A was confirmed.

Claims (19)

  1. 　下記組成式（１）で表される銀錯体を含む膜。

    （Ａｇ+）（Ｌ1）a（Ｌ2）b（Ｌ3）c（Ｘ1）d　　　　　（１）

    （組成式（１）中、
    　Ｌ1は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを有する分子であり、Ｌ1が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は３つ以上６つ以下であり、Ｌ1が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子のうち１つ以上はリン原子である。
    　Ｌ2は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを有する分子であり、Ｌ2が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は２つである。
    　Ｌ3は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを１つ有する分子である。
    　Ｘ1はアニオンである。
    　ａは０．５より大きい数であり、ｂ、ｃ及びｄはそれぞれ独立に０以上の数である。）     A film containing a silver complex represented by the following composition formula (1).

    (Ag + ) (L 1 ) a (L 2 ) b (L 3 ) c (X 1 ) d (1)

    (In composition formula (1),
    L 1 is a molecule having an atom or an ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag + , and L 1 The total number of atoms and ions capable of coordinating to Ag + contained in is 3 or more and 6 or less, and one or more of the atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + contained in L 1 are phosphorus atoms.
    L 2 is, as a coordination atom or ions Ag +, phosphorus atom, nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a molecule having an atom or ion selected from the arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and sulfur anion, L 2 The total number of atoms and ions capable of coordinating with Ag + is 2.
    L 3 is a molecule having one atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion, and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag + .
    X 1 is an anion.
    a is a number greater than 0.5, and b, c, and d are each independently a number of 0 or more. )
  2. 　上記組成式（１）において、
    　Ｌ1が、
    　Ａｇ+に配位可能なリン原子を４つ以上６つ以下有する分子であるか、又は、
    　Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子として、又は原子及びイオンとして、リン原子を１つ以上と、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる１つ以上とを有する分子である、
    　請求項１に記載の膜。     In the composition formula (1),
    L 1 is
    A molecule having 4 to 6 phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + , or
    As an atom capable of coordinating to Ag + or as an atom and an ion, it has one or more phosphorus atoms and one or more selected from a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion. Is a molecule,
    The membrane according to claim 1.
  3. 　前記組成式（１）において、Ｌ1が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数が、３つ又は４つである、請求項１に記載の膜。 2. The film according to claim 1, wherein in the composition formula (1), the total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + of L 1 is 3 or 4. 3.
  4. 　前記組成式（１）において、Ｌ1が有するＡｇ+に配位可能なリン原子の数が２つ以上であり、該リン原子はｓｐ3炭素原子が結合していない、請求項１に記載の膜。 2. The compositional formula (1) according to claim 1, wherein the number of phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating with Ag + in L 1 is 2 or more, and the phosphorus atoms are not bonded to sp 3 carbon atoms. film.
  5. 　前記組成式（１）において、
    　Ｌ1は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な酸素アニオン又は硫黄アニオンを１つ有する、請求項１に記載の膜。     In the composition formula (1),
    The film according to claim 1, wherein L 1 has one oxygen anion or sulfur anion capable of coordinating with Ag + .
  6. 　前記組成式（１）において、Ｌ1が下記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ）、（Ｂｂ）、（Ｂｃ）及び（Ｂｄ）のいずれかで表される分子である、請求項１に記載の膜。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
     （式（Ａａ）中、
    　Ｑ1Aaは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Aa）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Aa）2、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Aa）（Ｒ14Aa）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ－、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Aa）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Aa）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Aa）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Aa）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Aa、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Aa）2である。Ｒ11Aa、Ｒ12Aa、Ｒ13Aa、Ｒ15Aa、Ｒ16Aa、Ｒ17Aa、Ｒ18Aa及びＲ21Aaはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Aa及びＲ19Aaはそれぞれ独立に置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Aa、Ｒ12Aa、Ｒ13Aa、Ｒ14Aa、Ｒ15Aa、Ｒ16Aa、Ｒ17Aa、Ｒ18Aa、Ｒ19Aa及びＲ21Aaはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｑ2Aaは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Aa）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Aa）－、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Aa）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Aa）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Aa）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Aa）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Aa）－である。Ｒ22Aa、Ｒ23Aa、Ｒ25Aa、Ｒ26Aa、Ｒ27Aa及びＲ28Aaはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Aaは置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Aa、Ｒ23Aa、Ｒ24Aa、Ｒ25Aa、Ｒ26Aa、Ｒ27Aa及びＲ28Aaはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｒ2Aaは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Aaが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Aaが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。
    　Ｒ11Aa、Ｒ12Aa、Ｒ13Aa、Ｒ14Aa、Ｒ15Aa、Ｒ16Aa、Ｒ17Aa、Ｒ18Aa、Ｒ19Aa、Ｒ21Aa、Ｒ22Aa、Ｒ23Aa、Ｒ24Aa、Ｒ25Aa、Ｒ26Aa、Ｒ27Aa、Ｒ28Aa、Ｒ2Aa及び置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。）
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
     （式（Ａｂ）中、
    　Ｑ1Abは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Ab）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Ab）2、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Ab）（Ｒ14Ab）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Ab）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Ab）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Ab）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Ab）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Ab、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Ab）2である。Ｒ11Ab、Ｒ12Ab、Ｒ13Ab、Ｒ15Ab、Ｒ16Ab、Ｒ17Ab、Ｒ18Ab及びＲ21Abはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Ab及びＲ19Abはそれぞれ独立に置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Ab、Ｒ12Ab、Ｒ13Ab、Ｒ14Ab、Ｒ15Ab、Ｒ16Ab、Ｒ17Ab、Ｒ18Ab、Ｒ19Ab及びＲ21Abはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｒ3Abは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。
    　Ｒ11Ab、Ｒ12Ab、Ｒ13Ab、Ｒ14Ab、Ｒ15Ab、Ｒ16Ab、Ｒ17Ab、Ｒ18Ab、Ｒ19Ab、Ｒ21Ab、Ｒ3Ab及び置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。）
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
     　（式（Ｂａ）中、
    　Ｑ1Baは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Ba）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Ba）2、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Ba）（Ｒ14Ba）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Ba）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Ba）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Ba）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Ba）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Ba、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Ba）2である。Ｒ11Ba、Ｒ12Ba、Ｒ13Ba、Ｒ15Ba、Ｒ16Ba、Ｒ17Ba、Ｒ18Ba及びＲ21Baはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Ba及びＲ19Baはそれぞれ独立に置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Ba、Ｒ12Ba、Ｒ13Ba、Ｒ14Ba、Ｒ15Ba、Ｒ16Ba、Ｒ17Ba、Ｒ18Ba、Ｒ19Ba及びＲ21Baはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｑ2Baは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Ba）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Ba）－、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Ba）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Ba）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Ba）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Ba）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Ba）－である。Ｒ22Ba、Ｒ23Ba、Ｒ25Ba、Ｒ26Ba、Ｒ27Ba及びＲ28Baはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Baは置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Ba、Ｒ23Ba、Ｒ24Ba、Ｒ25Ba、Ｒ26Ba、Ｒ27Ba及びＲ28Baはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｒ2Baは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Baが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Baが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。
    　Ｒ11Ba、Ｒ12Ba、Ｒ13Ba、Ｒ14Ba、Ｒ15Ba、Ｒ16Ba、Ｒ17Ba、Ｒ18Ba、Ｒ19Ba、Ｒ21Ba、Ｒ22Ba、Ｒ23Ba、Ｒ24Ba、Ｒ25Ba、Ｒ26Ba、Ｒ27Ba、Ｒ28Ba、Ｒ2Ba及び置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。）
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
     （式（Ｂｂ）中、
    　Ｑ1Bbは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bb）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Bb）2、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Bb）（Ｒ14Bb）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Bb）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Bb）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Bb）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Bb）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Bb、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Bb）2である。Ｒ11Bb、Ｒ12Bb、Ｒ13Bb、Ｒ15Bb、Ｒ16Bb、Ｒ17Bb、Ｒ18Bb及びＲ21Bbはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Bb及びＲ19Bbはそれぞれ独立に置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Bb、Ｒ12Bb、Ｒ13Bb、Ｒ14Bb、Ｒ15Bb、Ｒ16Bb、Ｒ17Bb、Ｒ18Bb、Ｒ19Bb及びＲ21Bbはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｑ2Bbは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Bb）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Bb）－、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Bb）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Bb）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Bb）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Bb）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Bb）－である。Ｒ22Bb、Ｒ23Bb、Ｒ25Bb、Ｒ26Bb、Ｒ27Bb及びＲ28Bbはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Bbは置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Bb、Ｒ23Bb、Ｒ24Bb、Ｒ25Bb、Ｒ26Bb、Ｒ27Bb及びＲ28Bbはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｒ2Bbは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Bbが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Bbが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。
    　Ｒ3Bbは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。
    　Ｒ11Bb、Ｒ12Bb、Ｒ13Bb、Ｒ14Bb、Ｒ15Bb、Ｒ16Bb、Ｒ17Bb、Ｒ18Bb、Ｒ19Bb、Ｒ21Bb、Ｒ22Bb、Ｒ23Bb、Ｒ24Bb、Ｒ25Bb、Ｒ26Bb、Ｒ27Bb、Ｒ28Bb、Ｒ2Bb、Ｒ3Bb及び置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。）
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
     （式（Ｂｃ）中、
    　Ｑ1Bcは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bc）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Bc）2、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Bc）（Ｒ14Bc）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Bc）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Bc）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Bc）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Bc）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Bc、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Bc）2である。Ｒ11Bc、Ｒ12Bc、Ｒ13Bc、Ｒ15Bc、Ｒ16Bc、Ｒ17Bc、Ｒ18Bc及びＲ21Bcはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Bc及びＲ19Bcはそれぞれ独立に置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Bc、Ｒ12Bc、Ｒ13Bc、Ｒ14Bc、Ｒ15Bc、Ｒ16Bc、Ｒ17Bc、Ｒ18Bc、Ｒ19Bc及びＲ21Bcはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｑ3Bcは、Ｐ、Ａｓ、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基、Ｎ、Ｐ（＝Ｏ）、Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）、Ｐ（＝Ｓ）、又は、Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）である。
    　Ｒ2Bcは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Bcが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ3Bcが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。
    　Ｒ11Bc、Ｒ12Bc、Ｒ13Bc、Ｒ14Bc、Ｒ15Bc、Ｒ16Bc、Ｒ17Bc、Ｒ18Bc、Ｒ19Bc、Ｒ21Bc、Ｒ2Bc及び窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ又は３つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基が任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。）
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
     　（式（Ｂｄ）中、
    　Ｑ1Bdは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bd）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Bd）2、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Bd）（Ｒ14Bd）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ－、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Bd）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Bd）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Bd）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Bd）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Bd、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Bd）2である。Ｒ11Bd、Ｒ12Bd、Ｒ13Bd、Ｒ15Bd、Ｒ16Bd、Ｒ17Bd、Ｒ18Bd及びＲ21Bdはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Bd及びＲ19Bdはそれぞれ独立に置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Bd、Ｒ12Bd、Ｒ13Bd、Ｒ14Bd、Ｒ15Bd、Ｒ16Bd、Ｒ17Bd、Ｒ18Bd、Ｒ19Bd及びＲ21Bdはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｒ4Bdは炭素原子数７０以下の４価の基である。
    　Ｒ11Bd、Ｒ12Bd、Ｒ13Bd、Ｒ14Bd、Ｒ15Bd、Ｒ16Bd、Ｒ17Bd、Ｒ18Bd、Ｒ19Bd、Ｒ21Bd、Ｒ4Bd及び置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。）     In the composition formula (1), L 1 is a molecule represented by any of the following formulas (Aa), (Ab), (Ba), (Bb), (Bc), and (Bd). The membrane according to 1.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
     (In the formula (Aa),
    Q 1Aa is —P (R 11Aa ) 2 , —As (R 12Aa ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 13Aa) (R 14Aa), - O -, -S -, -S (= O) 2 O -, -C (= O) O -, -P (= O) (R 15Aa) 2, -As (= O) (R 16Aa) 2, -P (= S) (R 17Aa) 2, -As (= S) (R 18Aa) 2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, - S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Aa , or —C (═O) N (R 21Aa ) 2 . R 11Aa, R 12Aa, R 13Aa , R 15Aa, R 16Aa, R 17Aa, R 18Aa and R 21Aa are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituted carbon atoms which may atoms 1-50 hydrocarbyl group , R 14Aa and R 19Aa are each independently a substituent ~ good 1 carbon atoms which may have a 30 alkyl group, R 11Aa, R 12Aa, R 13Aa, R 14Aa, R 15Aa, R 16Aa, R 17Aa , R 18Aa , R 19Aa and R 21Aa may be the same or different.
    Q 2Aa is —P (R 22Aa ) —, —As (R 23Aa ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Aa) -, - P (= O) (R 25Aa) -, - As (= O) (R 26Aa) -, - P (= S) (R 27Aa) -, or, -As (= S) (R 28Aa )-. R 22Aa, R 23Aa, R 25Aa , R 26Aa, a hydrocarbyl group of R 27Aa and R 28Aa each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituted carbon atoms which may atoms 1 ~ 50, R 24Aa substituent the have an alkyl group which may carbon atoms 1 ~ 30, R 22Aa, R 23Aa, R 24Aa, R 25Aa, R 26Aa, R 27Aa and R 28Aa may be the same or different.
    R 2Aa is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Aa is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Aa is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
    R 11Aa, R 12Aa, R 13Aa , R 14Aa, R 15Aa, R 16Aa, R 17Aa, R 18Aa, R 19Aa, R 21Aa, R 22Aa, R 23Aa, R 24Aa, R 25Aa, R 26Aa, R 27Aa, R 28Aa , R 2Aa and two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one or two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound which may have a substituent, optionally combine to form a ring. May be. )
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
     (In the formula (Ab),
    Q 1Ab is —P (R 11Ab ) 2 , —As (R 12Ab ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 13Ab ) (R 14Ab ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Ab ) 2 , —As (= O) (R 16Ab) 2, -P (= S) (R 17Ab) 2, -As (= S) (R 18Ab) 2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, - S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Ab , or —C (═O) N (R 21Ab ) 2 . R 11Ab, R 12Ab, R 13Ab , R 15Ab, R 16Ab, R 17Ab, R 18Ab and R 21Ab are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituted carbon atoms which may atoms 1-50 hydrocarbyl group , R 14Ab and R 19ab are each independently a substituent ~ good 1 carbon atoms which may have a 30 alkyl group, R 11Ab, R 12Ab, R 13Ab, R 14Ab, R 15Ab, R 16Ab, R 17Ab , R18Ab , R19Ab and R21Ab may be the same or different.
    R 3Ab is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
    From R 11Ab , R 12Ab , R 13Ab , R 14Ab , R 15Ab , R 16Ab , R 17Ab , R 18Ab , R 19Ab , R 21Ab , R 3Ab and optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound Two or more groups selected from a group excluding one hydrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring. )
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
     (In the formula (Ba),
    Q 1Ba is —P (R 11Ba ) 2 , —As (R 12Ba ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 13Ba) (R 14Ba), - O -, -S -, -S (= O) 2 O -, -C (= O) O -, -P (= O) (R 15Ba) 2, -As (= O) (R 16Ba ) 2 , —P (═S) (R 17Ba ) 2 , —As (═S) (R 18Ba ) 2 , —CN, —OH, —SH, —C (═O) OH, — S (= O) 2 OH, —SR 19Ba , or —C (═O) N (R 21Ba ) 2 . R 11Ba , R 12Ba , R 13Ba , R 15Ba , R 16Ba , R 17Ba , R 18Ba and R 21Ba are each independently a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. , R 14Ba and R 19Ba are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 11Ba , R 12Ba , R 13Ba , R 14Ba , R 15Ba , R 16Ba , R 17Ba , R18Ba , R19Ba and R21Ba may be the same or different.
    Q 2Ba is —P (R 22Ba ) —, —As (R 23Ba ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Ba )-, -P (= O) ( R25Ba )-, -As (= O) ( R26Ba )-, -P (= S) ( R27Ba )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Ba )-. R 22Ba , R 23Ba , R 25Ba , R 26Ba , R 27Ba and R 28Ba are each independently a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 24Ba is a substituent. R 22Ba , R 23Ba , R 24Ba , R 25Ba , R 26Ba , R 27Ba, and R 28Ba may be the same or different from each other.
    R 2Ba is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Ba is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Ba is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
    R 11Ba , R 12Ba , R 13Ba , R 14Ba , R 15Ba , R 16Ba , R 17Ba , R 18Ba , R 19Ba , R 21Ba , R 22Ba , R 23Ba , R 24Ba , R 25Ba , R 26Ba , R 27Ba , R 28Ba Two or more groups selected from R 2Ba and a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound which may have a substituent and a group obtained by removing one or two hydrogen atoms, are optionally bonded to form a ring. May be. )
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
     (In the formula (Bb),
    Q 1Bb is —P (R 11Bb ) 2 , —As (R 12Bb ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 13Bb ) (R 14Bb ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Bb ) 2 , —As (= O) (R 16Bb ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Bb ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Bb ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH,- S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Bb , or —C (═O) N (R 21Bb ) 2 . R 11Bb , R 12Bb , R 13Bb , R 15Bb , R 16Bb , R 17Bb , R 18Bb and R 21Bb are each independently a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent. , R 14Bb and R 19Bb are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 11Bb , R 12Bb , R 13Bb , R 14Bb , R 15Bb , R 16Bb , R 17Bb , R 18Bb , R 19Bb and R 21Bb may be the same or different.
    Q 2Bb is, -P (R 22Bb) -, - As (R 23Bb) -, which may have a substituent nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic two group remaining after removing the hydrogen atom from the compound, -N (R 24Bb )-, -P (= O) ( R25Bb )-, -As (= O) ( R26Bb )-, -P (= S) ( R27Bb )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Bb )-. R 22Bb , R 23Bb , R 25Bb , R 26Bb , R 27Bb and R 28Bb are each independently a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 24Bb is a substituent. R 22Bb , R 23Bb , R 24Bb , R 25Bb , R 26Bb , R 27Bb, and R 28Bb may be the same or different from each other.
    R 2Bb is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Bb is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Bb is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
    R 3Bb is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
    R 11Bb, R 12Bb, R 13Bb , R 14Bb, R 15Bb, R 16Bb, R 17Bb, R 18Bb, R 19Bb, R 21Bb, R 22Bb, R 23Bb, R 24Bb, R 25Bb, R 26Bb, R 27Bb, R 28Bb , R 2Bb, 2 or more groups selected hydrogen atoms from one to 2 group remaining after removing from R 3Bb and may have a substituent nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compounds, attached at any ring May be formed. )
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
     (In the formula (Bc),
    Q 1Bc is —P (R 11Bc ) 2 , —As (R 12Bc ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 13Bc ) (R 14Bc ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Bc ) 2 , —As (= O) (R 16Bc ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Bc ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Bc ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH,- S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Bc , or —C (═O) N (R 21Bc ) 2 . R 11Bc , R 12Bc , R 13Bc , R 15Bc , R 16Bc , R 17Bc , R 18Bc and R 21Bc are each independently a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. , R 14Bc and R 19Bc are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 11Bc , R 12Bc , R 13Bc , R 14Bc , R 15Bc , R 16Bc , R 17Bc , R 18Bc , R 19Bc and R 21Bc may be the same or different.
    Q 3Bc is P, As, a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound which may have a substituent, N, P (═O), As (═O), P ( = S) or As (= S).
    R 2Bc is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Bc is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 3Bc is In the case of a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
    Remove one or three hydrogen atoms from R 11Bc , R 12Bc , R 13Bc , R 14Bc , R 15Bc , R 16Bc , R 17Bc , R 18Bc , R 19Bc , R 21Bc , R 2Bc and the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound Two or more groups selected from these groups may be optionally combined to form a ring. )
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
     (In the formula (Bd),
    Q 1Bd is —P (R 11Bd ) 2 , —As (R 12Bd ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 13Bd ) (R 14Bd ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Bd ) 2 , —As (= O) (R 16Bd ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Bd ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Bd ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH,- S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Bd , or —C (═O) N (R 21Bd ) 2 . R 11Bd , R 12Bd , R 13Bd , R 15Bd , R 16Bd , R 17Bd , R 18Bd and R 21Bd are each independently a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent. , R 14Bd and R 19Bd are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 11Bd , R 12Bd , R 13Bd , R 14Bd , R 15Bd , R 16Bd , R 17Bd , R18Bd , R19Bd and R21Bd may be the same or different.
    R 4Bd is a tetravalent group having 70 or less carbon atoms.
    From R 11Bd , R 12Bd , R 13Bd , R 14Bd , R 15Bd , R 16Bd , R 17Bd , R 18Bd , R 19Bd , R 21Bd , R 4Bd, and optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound Two or more groups selected from a group excluding one hydrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring. )
  7. 　前記式（Ａａ）において、
    　Ｑ1Aaが、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Aa）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Aa）2、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-であり、
    　Ｑ2Aaが、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Aa）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Aa）－、又は、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基であり、
    　Ｒ11Aa、Ｒ12Aa、Ｒ22Aa及びＲ23Aaがそれぞれ独立に置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基であり、
    　式（Ａａ）で表される分子は、１つ以上の－Ｐ（Ｒ11Aa）2、又は、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Aa）－を含む、
    請求項６に記載の膜。     In the formula (Aa),
    Q 1Aa is —P (R 11Aa ) 2 , —As (R 12Aa ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —O − , -S -, -S (= O) 2 O -, or, -C (= O) O - is and,
    Q 2Aa is —P (R 22Aa ) —, —As (R 23Aa ) —, or a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound,
    R 11Aa, a R 12Aa, R 22Aa and R 23Aa is independently optionally substituted phenyl group,
    The molecule represented by the formula (Aa) contains one or more of —P (R 11Aa ) 2 or —P (R 22Aa ) —.
    The membrane according to claim 6.
  8. 　前記式（Ａａ）において、Ｒ2Aaが直接結合あるいは置換基を有していてもよい下記式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基である、請求項６に記載の膜。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
     （式中、Ｙ1は、－（ＣＨ2）n－、－Ｏ－、－Ｓ－、－Ｎ（Ｒ50）－、－Ｓｉ（Ｒ51）2－、－Ｏ（ＣＨ2）n－、又は、－Ｏ（ＣＨ2）nＯ－で表される基である。Ｙ2は、－（ＣＨ2）n－、－Ｏ－、－Ｓ－、又は、－Ｓｉ（Ｒ51）2－で表される基である。ｎは１～３の整数である。Ｒ50は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のアリール基であり、Ｒ51は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基である。）     The film according to claim 6, wherein in the formula (Aa), R 2Aa is a group represented by any of the following formulas r1 to r12 which may have a direct bond or a substituent.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
     Wherein Y 1 is — (CH 2 ) n —, —O—, —S— , —N (R 50 ) —, —Si (R 51 ) 2 —, —O (CH 2 ) n —, Or a group represented by —O (CH 2 ) n O— Y 2 is — (CH 2 ) n —, —O—, —S—, or —Si (R 51 ) 2 —. N is an integer of 1 to 3. R 50 is an aryl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 51 has a substituent. It may be a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.)
  9. 　前記式（Ｂａ）において、
    　Ｑ1Baが、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Ba）2、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、又は、－Ｓ-であり、
    　Ｑ2Baが、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Ba）－又は、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基であり、
    　Ｒ11Ba及びＲ22Baがそれぞれ独立に置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基であり、Ｒ2Baが直接結合であるか又は置換基を有していてもよい上記式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基である、
    請求項６に記載の膜。     In the formula (Ba),
    Q 1Ba is —P (R 11Ba ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —O − , —C (═O) O − , or, -S - a is,
    Q 2Ba is —P (R 22Ba ) — or a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound,
    R 11Ba and R 22Ba are each independently a phenyl group which may have a substituent, and R 2Ba may be a direct bond or may have a substituent in any of the above formulas r1 to r12 A group represented by
    The membrane according to claim 6.
  10. 　前記式（Ｂｃ）において、
    　Ｑ1Bcが、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bc）2、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、又は、－Ｓ-であり、
    　Ｑ3Bcが、Ｐ又は置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基であり、
    　Ｒ11Bcが置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基であり、
    　Ｒ2Bcが直接結合であるか又は置換基を有していてもよい上記式ｒ１～ｒ１２のいずれかで表される基である、
    請求項６に記載の膜。     In the formula (Bc),
    Q 1Bc is —P (R 11Bc ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —O − , —C (═O) O − , or, -S - a is,
    Q 3Bc is a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound which may have P or a substituent,
    R 11Bc is an optionally substituted phenyl group,
    R 2Bc is a direct bond or a group represented by any one of the above formulas r1 to r12 which may have a substituent,
    The membrane according to claim 6.
  11. 　前記組成式（１）におけるＸ1がハロゲン化物イオンである、請求項１に記載の膜。 The film according to claim 1, wherein X 1 in the composition formula (1) is a halide ion.
  12. 　前記組成式（１）におけるａ、ｂ、ｃ及びｄが下記数式（２）を満たす、請求項１に記載の膜。

    ７．０　≧　（ｚ×ａ）＋（２×ｂ）＋ｃ＋ｄ　＞　２．０　（２）
    （数式（２）中、ｚはＬ1におけるＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数である。）     The film according to claim 1, wherein a, b, c and d in the composition formula (1) satisfy the following formula (2).

    7.0 ≧ (z × a) + (2 × b) + c + d> 2.0 (2)
    (In formula (2), z is the total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 1. )
  13. 　前記銀錯体のＳ１エネルギーとＴ１エネルギーの差が０．３ｅＶ以下である、請求項１に記載の膜。 The film according to claim 1, wherein a difference between S1 energy and T1 energy of the silver complex is 0.3 eV or less.
  14. 　前記銀錯体の含量は、膜全体の重量に対して０．０１～１００重量％である、請求項１に記載の膜。 The film according to claim 1, wherein the content of the silver complex is 0.01 to 100% by weight with respect to the weight of the whole film.
  15. 　更に、高分子化合物を含む、請求項１に記載の膜。 The film according to claim 1, further comprising a polymer compound.
  16. 　前記高分子化合物が、ポリカルバゾール誘導体、ポリ芳香族三級アミン化合物の残基を含む重合体、ポリアリールアルカン誘導体、ポリビニルカルバゾール誘導体、ポリオキサジアゾール誘導体、ポリトリアジン誘導体、ポリフルオレン誘導体、又はこれらの組み合わせである、請求項１５に記載の膜。 The polymer compound is a polycarbazole derivative, a polymer containing a residue of a polyaromatic tertiary amine compound, a polyarylalkane derivative, a polyvinylcarbazole derivative, a polyoxadiazole derivative, a polytriazine derivative, a polyfluorene derivative, or these The film according to claim 15, which is a combination of
  17. 　請求項１に記載の膜を含む発光素子。 A light emitting device comprising the film according to claim 1.
  18. 　下記組成式（３）で表される銀錯体。

    （Ａｇ+）（Ｌ4）e（Ｌ5）f（Ｌ6）g（Ｘ2）h　　　　　（３）

    （組成式（３）中、
    　Ｌ4は、
    　Ａｇ+に配位可能なリン原子を４つ以上６つ以下有する分子であるか、又は、
    　Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子として、又は原子及びイオンとして、リン原子を１つ以上と、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる１つ以上とを有し、Ｌ4が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は３つ以上６つ以下である分子である。
    　Ｌ5は、Ａｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを有する分子であり、Ｌ5が有するＡｇ+に配位可能な原子及びイオンの総数は２つである。
    　Ｌ6はＡｇ+に配位可能な原子又はイオンとして、リン原子、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ヒ素原子、酸素アニオン及び硫黄アニオンから選ばれる原子又はイオンを１つ有する分子である。
    　Ｘ2はアニオンである。
    　ｅは０．５より大きい数であり、ｆ、ｇ及びｈはそれぞれ独立に０以上の数である。）     A silver complex represented by the following composition formula (3).

    (Ag + ) (L 4 ) e (L 5 ) f (L 6 ) g (X 2 ) h (3)

    (In composition formula (3),
    L 4 is
    A molecule having 4 to 6 phosphorus atoms capable of coordinating to Ag + , or
    As an atom capable of coordinating to Ag + or as an atom and an ion, it has at least one phosphorus atom and at least one selected from a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion and a sulfur anion. The total number of atoms and ions that can coordinate to Ag + in L 4 is 3 or more and 6 or less.
    L 5 represents, as capable of coordinating atoms or ions Ag +, phosphorus atom, nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, sulfur atom, arsenic atom, a molecule having an atom or ion selected from oxygen anions and sulfur anions, L 5 The total number of atoms and ions capable of coordinating with Ag + is 2.
    L 6 is a molecule having one atom or ion selected from a phosphorus atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an arsenic atom, an oxygen anion, and a sulfur anion as an atom or ion that can coordinate to Ag + .
    X 2 is an anion.
    e is a number greater than 0.5, and f, g, and h are each independently a number of 0 or more. )
  19. 　ジアリールホスフィノ基を２つ以上含有し、且つ、窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～３つ除いた基、－Ｏ－、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、及び－Ｓ-から選ばれる基を１つ又は２つ含有し、且つ、下記式（Ａａ）、（Ａｂ）、（Ｂａ’）、（Ｂｂ）、（Ｂｃ）又は（Ｂｄ）で示される分子。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
     （式（Ａａ）中、
    　Ｑ1Aaは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Aa）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Aa）2、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Aa）（Ｒ14Aa）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ－、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Aa）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Aa）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Aa）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Aa）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Aa、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Aa）2である。Ｒ11Aa、Ｒ12Aa、Ｒ13Aa、Ｒ15Aa、Ｒ16Aa、Ｒ17Aa、Ｒ18Aa及びＲ21Aaはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Aa及びＲ19Aaはそれぞれ独立に置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Aa、Ｒ12Aa、Ｒ13Aa、Ｒ14Aa、Ｒ15Aa、Ｒ16Aa、Ｒ17Aa、Ｒ18Aa、Ｒ19Aa及びＲ21Aaはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｑ2Aaは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Aa）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Aa）－、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Aa）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Aa）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Aa）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Aa）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Aa）－である。Ｒ22Aa、Ｒ23Aa、Ｒ25Aa、Ｒ26Aa、Ｒ27Aa及びＲ28Aaはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Aaは置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Aa、Ｒ23Aa、Ｒ24Aa、Ｒ25Aa、Ｒ26Aa、Ｒ27Aa及びＲ28Aaはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｒ2Aaは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Aaが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Aaが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。
    　Ｒ11Aa、Ｒ12Aa、Ｒ13Aa、Ｒ14Aa、Ｒ15Aa、Ｒ16Aa、Ｒ17Aa、Ｒ18Aa、Ｒ19Aa、Ｒ21Aa、Ｒ22Aa、Ｒ23Aa、Ｒ24Aa、Ｒ25Aa、Ｒ26Aa、Ｒ27Aa、Ｒ28Aa、Ｒ2Aa及び置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。）
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
     （式（Ａｂ）中、
    　Ｑ1Abは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Ab）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Ab）2、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Ab）（Ｒ14Ab）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Ab）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Ab）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Ab）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Ab）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Ab、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Ab）2である。Ｒ11Ab、Ｒ12Ab、Ｒ13Ab、Ｒ15Ab、Ｒ16Ab、Ｒ17Ab、Ｒ18Ab及びＲ21Abはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Ab及びＲ19Abはそれぞれ独立に置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Ab、Ｒ12Ab、Ｒ13Ab、Ｒ14Ab、Ｒ15Ab、Ｒ16Ab、Ｒ17Ab、Ｒ18Ab、Ｒ19Ab及びＲ21Abはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｒ3Abは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。
    　Ｒ11Ab、Ｒ12Ab、Ｒ13Ab、Ｒ14Ab、Ｒ15Ab、Ｒ16Ab、Ｒ17Ab、Ｒ18Ab、Ｒ19Ab、Ｒ21Ab、Ｒ3Ab及び置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。）
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
     （式（Ｂａ’）中、
    　Ｑ1Baは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Ba）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Ba）2、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Ba）（Ｒ14Ba）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Ba）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Ba）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Ba）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Ba）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Ba、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Ba）2である。Ｒ11Ba、Ｒ12Ba、Ｒ13Ba、Ｒ15Ba、Ｒ16Ba、Ｒ17Ba、Ｒ18Ba及びＲ21Baはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Ba及びＲ19Baはそれぞれ独立に置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Ba、Ｒ12Ba、Ｒ13Ba、Ｒ14Ba、Ｒ15Ba、Ｒ16Ba、Ｒ17Ba、Ｒ18Ba、Ｒ19Ba及びＲ21Baはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｑ2Baは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Ba）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Ba）－、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Ba）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Ba）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Ba）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Ba）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Ba）－である。Ｒ22Ba、Ｒ23Ba、Ｒ25Ba、Ｒ26Ba、Ｒ27Ba及びＲ28Baはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Baは置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Ba、Ｒ23Ba、Ｒ24Ba、Ｒ25Ba、Ｒ26Ba、Ｒ27Ba及びＲ28Baはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｒ2Ba’は炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Baが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Baが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。３つあるＲ2Ba’のうち１つ以上は直接結合ではない。
    　Ｒ11Ba、Ｒ12Ba、Ｒ13Ba、Ｒ14Ba、Ｒ15Ba、Ｒ16Ba、Ｒ17Ba、Ｒ18Ba、Ｒ19Ba、Ｒ21Ba、Ｒ22Ba、Ｒ23Ba、Ｒ24Ba、Ｒ25Ba、Ｒ26Ba、Ｒ27Ba、Ｒ28Ba、Ｒ2Ba’及び置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。）
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
     （式（Ｂｂ）中、
    　Ｑ1Bbは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bb）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Bb）2、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Bb）（Ｒ14Bb）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Bb）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Bb）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Bb）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Bb）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Bb、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Bb）2である。Ｒ11Bb、Ｒ12Bb、Ｒ13Bb、Ｒ15Bb、Ｒ16Bb、Ｒ17Bb、Ｒ18Bb及びＲ21Bbはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Bb及びＲ19Bbはそれぞれ独立に置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Bb、Ｒ12Bb、Ｒ13Bb、Ｒ14Bb、Ｒ15Bb、Ｒ16Bb、Ｒ17Bb、Ｒ18Bb、Ｒ19Bb及びＲ21Bbはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｑ2Bbは、－Ｐ（Ｒ22Bb）－、－Ａｓ（Ｒ23Bb）－、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ24Bb）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ25Bb）－、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ26Bb）－、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ27Bb）－、又は、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ28Bb）－である。Ｒ22Bb、Ｒ23Bb、Ｒ25Bb、Ｒ26Bb、Ｒ27Bb及びＲ28Bbはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ24Bbは置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ22Bb、Ｒ23Bb、Ｒ24Bb、Ｒ25Bb、Ｒ26Bb、Ｒ27Bb及びＲ28Bbはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｒ2Bbは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Bbが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ2Bbが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を２つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。
    　Ｒ3Bbは炭素原子数５０以下の３価の基である。
    　Ｒ11Bb、Ｒ12Bb、Ｒ13Bb、Ｒ14Bb、Ｒ15Bb、Ｒ16Bb、Ｒ17Bb、Ｒ18Bb、Ｒ19Bb、Ｒ21Bb、Ｒ22Bb、Ｒ23Bb、Ｒ24Bb、Ｒ25Bb、Ｒ26Bb、Ｒ27Bb、Ｒ28Bb、Ｒ2Bb、Ｒ3Bb及び置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ～２つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。）
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
     （式（Ｂｃ）中、
    　Ｑ1Bcは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bc）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Bc）2、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Bc）（Ｒ14Bc）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ-、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Bc）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Bc）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Bc）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Bc）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Bc、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Bc）2である。Ｒ11Bc、Ｒ12Bc、Ｒ13Bc、Ｒ15Bc、Ｒ16Bc、Ｒ17Bc、Ｒ18Bc及びＲ21Bcはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Bc及びＲ19Bcはそれぞれ独立に置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Bc、Ｒ12Bc、Ｒ13Bc、Ｒ14Bc、Ｒ15Bc、Ｒ16Bc、Ｒ17Bc、Ｒ18Bc、Ｒ19Bc及びＲ21Bcはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｑ3Bcは、Ｐ、Ａｓ、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基、Ｎ、Ｐ（＝Ｏ）、Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）、Ｐ（＝Ｓ）、又は、Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）である。
    　Ｒ2Bcは炭素原子数５０以下の２価の基であり、但し、結合したＱ1Bcが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基である場合、又は、結合したＱ3Bcが窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を３つ除いた基である場合は、直接結合でもよい。
    　Ｒ11Bc、Ｒ12Bc、Ｒ13Bc、Ｒ14Bc、Ｒ15Bc、Ｒ16Bc、Ｒ17Bc、Ｒ18Bc、Ｒ19Bc、Ｒ21Bc、Ｒ2Bc及び窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ又は３つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基が任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。）
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
     （式（Ｂｄ）中、
    　Ｑ1Bdは、－Ｐ（Ｒ11Bd）2、－Ａｓ（Ｒ12Bd）2、置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基、－Ｎ（Ｒ13Bd）（Ｒ14Bd）、－Ｏ-、－Ｓ-、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2Ｏ-、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｏ－、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ15Bd）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ16Bd）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ17Bd）2、－Ａｓ（＝Ｓ）（Ｒ18Bd）2、－ＣＮ、－ＯＨ、－ＳＨ、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＨ、－Ｓ（＝Ｏ）2ＯＨ、－ＳＲ19Bd、又は、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ21Bd）2である。Ｒ11Bd、Ｒ12Bd、Ｒ13Bd、Ｒ15Bd、Ｒ16Bd、Ｒ17Bd、Ｒ18Bd及びＲ21Bdはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～５０のヒドロカルビル基であり、Ｒ14Bd及びＲ19Bdはそれぞれ独立に置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数１～３０のアルキル基であり、Ｒ11Bd、Ｒ12Bd、Ｒ13Bd、Ｒ14Bd、Ｒ15Bd、Ｒ16Bd、Ｒ17Bd、Ｒ18Bd、Ｒ19Bd及びＲ21Bdはそれぞれ同じでも異なっていてもよい。
    　Ｒ4Bdは炭素原子数５０以下の４価の基である。
    　Ｒ11Bd、Ｒ12Bd、Ｒ13Bd、Ｒ14Bd、Ｒ15Bd、Ｒ16Bd、Ｒ17Bd、Ｒ18Bd、Ｒ19Bd、Ｒ21Bd、Ｒ4Bd及び置換基を有していてもよい窒素原子含有複素環式化合物から水素原子を１つ除いた基から選ばれる２以上の基は、任意に結合して環を形成してもよい。）     Diaryl phosphino group contains two or more, and, the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic ring one hydrogen atom from a compound to 3 except groups, -O -, -C (= O ) O -, and -S - And a molecule represented by the following formula (Aa), (Ab), (Ba ′), (Bb), (Bc) or (Bd), which contains one or two groups selected from:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
     (In the formula (Aa),
    Q 1Aa is —P (R 11Aa ) 2 , —As (R 12Aa ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 13Aa) (R 14Aa), - O -, -S -, -S (= O) 2 O -, -C (= O) O -, -P (= O) (R 15Aa) 2, -As (= O) (R 16Aa) 2, -P (= S) (R 17Aa) 2, -As (= S) (R 18Aa) 2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, - S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Aa , or —C (═O) N (R 21Aa ) 2 . R 11Aa, R 12Aa, R 13Aa , R 15Aa, R 16Aa, R 17Aa, R 18Aa and R 21Aa are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituted carbon atoms which may atoms 1-50 hydrocarbyl group , R 14Aa and R 19Aa are each independently a substituent ~ good 1 carbon atoms which may have a 30 alkyl group, R 11Aa, R 12Aa, R 13Aa, R 14Aa, R 15Aa, R 16Aa, R 17Aa , R 18Aa , R 19Aa and R 21Aa may be the same or different.
    Q 2Aa is —P (R 22Aa ) —, —As (R 23Aa ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Aa) -, - P (= O) (R 25Aa) -, - As (= O) (R 26Aa) -, - P (= S) (R 27Aa) -, or, -As (= S) (R 28Aa )-. R 22Aa, R 23Aa, R 25Aa , R 26Aa, a hydrocarbyl group of R 27Aa and R 28Aa each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituted carbon atoms which may atoms 1 ~ 50, R 24Aa substituent the have an alkyl group which may carbon atoms 1 ~ 30, R 22Aa, R 23Aa, R 24Aa, R 25Aa, R 26Aa, R 27Aa and R 28Aa may be the same or different.
    R 2Aa is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Aa is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Aa is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
    R 11Aa, R 12Aa, R 13Aa , R 14Aa, R 15Aa, R 16Aa, R 17Aa, R 18Aa, R 19Aa, R 21Aa, R 22Aa, R 23Aa, R 24Aa, R 25Aa, R 26Aa, R 27Aa, R 28Aa , R 2Aa and two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one or two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound which may have a substituent, optionally combine to form a ring. May be. )
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
     (In the formula (Ab),
    Q 1Ab is —P (R 11Ab ) 2 , —As (R 12Ab ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 13Ab ) (R 14Ab ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Ab ) 2 , —As (= O) (R 16Ab) 2, -P (= S) (R 17Ab) 2, -As (= S) (R 18Ab) 2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH, - S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Ab , or —C (═O) N (R 21Ab ) 2 . R 11Ab, R 12Ab, R 13Ab , R 15Ab, R 16Ab, R 17Ab, R 18Ab and R 21Ab are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituted carbon atoms which may atoms 1-50 hydrocarbyl group , R 14Ab and R 19ab are each independently a substituent ~ good 1 carbon atoms which may have a 30 alkyl group, R 11Ab, R 12Ab, R 13Ab, R 14Ab, R 15Ab, R 16Ab, R 17Ab , R18Ab , R19Ab and R21Ab may be the same or different.
    R 3Ab is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
    From R 11Ab , R 12Ab , R 13Ab , R 14Ab , R 15Ab , R 16Ab , R 17Ab , R 18Ab , R 19Ab , R 21Ab , R 3Ab and optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound Two or more groups selected from a group excluding one hydrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring. )
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
     (In the formula (Ba ′),
    Q 1Ba is —P (R 11Ba ) 2 , —As (R 12Ba ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 13Ba) (R 14Ba), - O -, -S -, -S (= O) 2 O -, -C (= O) O -, -P (= O) (R 15Ba) 2, -As (= O) (R 16Ba ) 2 , —P (═S) (R 17Ba ) 2 , —As (═S) (R 18Ba ) 2 , —CN, —OH, —SH, —C (═O) OH, — S (= O) 2 OH, —SR 19Ba , or —C (═O) N (R 21Ba ) 2 . R 11Ba , R 12Ba , R 13Ba , R 15Ba , R 16Ba , R 17Ba , R 18Ba and R 21Ba are each independently a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. , R 14Ba and R 19Ba are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 11Ba , R 12Ba , R 13Ba , R 14Ba , R 15Ba , R 16Ba , R 17Ba , R18Ba , R19Ba and R21Ba may be the same or different.
    Q 2Ba is —P (R 22Ba ) —, —As (R 23Ba ) —, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 24Ba )-, -P (= O) ( R25Ba )-, -As (= O) ( R26Ba )-, -P (= S) ( R27Ba )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Ba )-. R 22Ba , R 23Ba , R 25Ba , R 26Ba , R 27Ba and R 28Ba are each independently a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 24Ba is a substituent. R 22Ba , R 23Ba , R 24Ba , R 25Ba , R 26Ba , R 27Ba, and R 28Ba may be the same or different from each other.
    R 2Ba ′ is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that bonded Q 1Ba is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or bonded Q 2Ba When is a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used. One or more of the three R 2Ba ′ are not direct bonds.
    R 11Ba , R 12Ba , R 13Ba , R 14Ba , R 15Ba , R 16Ba , R 17Ba , R 18Ba , R 19Ba , R 21Ba , R 22Ba , R 23Ba , R 24Ba , R 25Ba , R 26Ba , R 27Ba , R 28Ba , R 2Ba ′ and two or more groups selected from a group obtained by removing one or two hydrogen atoms from an optionally substituted nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound to form a ring May be. )
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
     (In the formula (Bb),
    Q 1Bb is —P (R 11Bb ) 2 , —As (R 12Bb ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 13Bb ) (R 14Bb ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Bb ) 2 , —As (= O) (R 16Bb ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Bb ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Bb ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH,- S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Bb , or —C (═O) N (R 21Bb ) 2 . R 11Bb , R 12Bb , R 13Bb , R 15Bb , R 16Bb , R 17Bb , R 18Bb and R 21Bb are each independently a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent. , R 14Bb and R 19Bb are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 11Bb , R 12Bb , R 13Bb , R 14Bb , R 15Bb , R 16Bb , R 17Bb , R 18Bb , R 19Bb and R 21Bb may be the same or different.
    Q 2Bb is, -P (R 22Bb) -, - As (R 23Bb) -, which may have a substituent nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic two group remaining after removing the hydrogen atom from the compound, -N (R 24Bb )-, -P (= O) ( R25Bb )-, -As (= O) ( R26Bb )-, -P (= S) ( R27Bb )-, or -As (= S) (R 28Bb )-. R 22Bb , R 23Bb , R 25Bb , R 26Bb , R 27Bb and R 28Bb are each independently a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 24Bb is a substituent. R 22Bb , R 23Bb , R 24Bb , R 25Bb , R 26Bb , R 27Bb, and R 28Bb may be the same or different from each other.
    R 2Bb is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Bb is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 2Bb is In the case of a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
    R 3Bb is a trivalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
    R 11Bb, R 12Bb, R 13Bb , R 14Bb, R 15Bb, R 16Bb, R 17Bb, R 18Bb, R 19Bb, R 21Bb, R 22Bb, R 23Bb, R 24Bb, R 25Bb, R 26Bb, R 27Bb, R 28Bb , R 2Bb, 2 or more groups selected hydrogen atoms from one to 2 group remaining after removing from R 3Bb and may have a substituent nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compounds, attached at any ring May be formed. )
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
     (In the formula (Bc),
    Q 1Bc is —P (R 11Bc ) 2 , —As (R 12Bc ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 13Bc ) (R 14Bc ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Bc ) 2 , —As (= O) (R 16Bc ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Bc ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Bc ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH,- S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Bc , or —C (═O) N (R 21Bc ) 2 . R 11Bc , R 12Bc , R 13Bc , R 15Bc , R 16Bc , R 17Bc , R 18Bc and R 21Bc are each independently a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. , R 14Bc and R 19Bc are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 11Bc , R 12Bc , R 13Bc , R 14Bc , R 15Bc , R 16Bc , R 17Bc , R 18Bc , R 19Bc and R 21Bc may be the same or different.
    Q 3Bc is P, As, a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound which may have a substituent, N, P (═O), As (═O), P ( = S) or As (= S).
    R 2Bc is a divalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms, provided that the bonded Q 1Bc is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, or the bonded Q 3Bc is In the case of a group obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from a nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound, a direct bond may be used.
    Remove one or three hydrogen atoms from R 11Bc , R 12Bc , R 13Bc , R 14Bc , R 15Bc , R 16Bc , R 17Bc , R 18Bc , R 19Bc , R 21Bc , R 2Bc and the nitrogen atom-containing heterocyclic compound Two or more groups selected from these groups may be optionally combined to form a ring. )
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
     (In the formula (Bd),
    Q 1Bd is —P (R 11Bd ) 2 , —As (R 12Bd ) 2 , a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, —N (R 13Bd ) (R 14Bd ), —O − , —S − , —S (═O) 2 O − , —C (═O) O − , —P (═O) (R 15Bd ) 2 , —As (= O) (R 16Bd ) 2 , -P (= S) (R 17Bd ) 2 , -As (= S) (R 18Bd ) 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -C (= O) OH,- S (═O) 2 OH, —SR 19Bd , or —C (═O) N (R 21Bd ) 2 . R 11Bd , R 12Bd , R 13Bd , R 15Bd , R 16Bd , R 17Bd , R 18Bd and R 21Bd are each independently a hydrocarbyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent. , R 14Bd and R 19Bd are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 11Bd , R 12Bd , R 13Bd , R 14Bd , R 15Bd , R 16Bd , R 17Bd , R18Bd , R19Bd and R21Bd may be the same or different.
    R 4Bd is a tetravalent group having 50 or less carbon atoms.
    From R 11Bd , R 12Bd , R 13Bd , R 14Bd , R 15Bd , R 16Bd , R 17Bd , R 18Bd , R 19Bd , R 21Bd , R 4Bd, and optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound Two or more groups selected from a group excluding one hydrogen atom may be optionally combined to form a ring. )
PCT/JP2011/062390 2010-05-31 2011-05-30 Membrane containing silver complex WO2011152358A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2010124634 2010-05-31
JP2010-124634 2010-05-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2011152358A1 true WO2011152358A1 (en) 2011-12-08

Family

ID=45066725

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2011/062390 WO2011152358A1 (en) 2010-05-31 2011-05-30 Membrane containing silver complex

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP5746915B2 (en)
TW (1) TW201202390A (en)
WO (1) WO2011152358A1 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2012144530A1 (en) * 2011-04-22 2012-10-26 住友化学株式会社 Copper complex
JP2013229425A (en) * 2012-04-25 2013-11-07 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Light-emitting element, silver complex, and ink for element containing the same
CN106366126A (en) * 2015-07-23 2017-02-01 赢创德固赛有限公司 Benzene-based diphosphine ligands for alkoxycarbonylation
CN114591365A (en) * 2022-03-22 2022-06-07 郑州大学 Light-emitting copper compound based on benzimidazole phosphine oxide ligand and preparation method and application thereof

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106833008B (en) * 2017-02-14 2020-05-22 黑龙江大学 Multidentate phosphine coordination silver complex dual-emitting dye, synthetic method and application thereof
CN106866732B (en) * 2017-02-14 2020-09-01 黑龙江大学 Multidentate phosphine coordination silver complex dual-emitting dye, synthetic method and application thereof
CN106833010A (en) * 2017-02-14 2017-06-13 黑龙江大学 The multiple tooth double transmitting dyestuffs of phosphine coordination silver complex, synthetic method and its application

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010093181A (en) * 2008-10-10 2010-04-22 Canon Inc Organic light emitting device

Non-Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ALAN L. BALCH ET AL.: "Complexation of tin(II) by the iridium metallomacrocycle Ir2(CO)2Cl2(.mu.-Ph2PCH2As(Ph)CH2PPh2)2. A novel receptor and sensor of tin(II)", JOURNAL OF THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY, vol. 111, no. 11, May 1989 (1989-05-01), pages 4021 - 4028 *
ANTHEA L. AIREY ET AL.: "Self-assembly of homochiral double helix and side-by-side helix conformers of a double-stranded disilver(I)-tetra(tertiary phosphine) complex", CHEMICAL COMMUNICATIONS, no. IS.6, 1995, pages 695 - 696 *
ANTHEA L. AIREY ET AL.: "Self-Assembly of Homochiral Double Helix and Side-by-Side Helix Conformers of Double-Stranded Disilver(I)- and Digold(I)-Tetra(tertiary phosphine) Helicates", INORGANIC CHEMISTRY, vol. 36, no. 8, 1997, pages 1588 - 1597 *
CHI-MING CHE ET AL.: "Metal-metal interaction in polynuclear silver(I) complexes: spectroscopy, luminescent properties and X-ray crystal structure of [Ag3(dppp)2(MeCN)2(ClO4)2]+[dppp = bis(diphenylphosphinophenylphosphine)]", CHEMICAL COMMUNICATIONS, no. IS.22, 1991, pages 1615 - 1617 *
CHRISTOPHER J. BLAKE ET AL.: "Diastereoselectivity and Molecular Recognition in the Self-Assembly of Double-Stranded Dinuclear Metal Complexes of the Type [M2{(R*,S*)-tetraphos}2](PF6)2 (M = Ag and Au)", INORGANIC CHEMISTRY, vol. 42, no. 26, 2003, pages 8709 - 8715 *
D. FERNANDEZ ET AL.: "Gold(I) and silver(I) complexes containing a tripodal tetraphosphine ligand: influence of the halogen and stoichiometry on the properties. The X-ray crystal structure of two gold(I) dimeric aggregates", DALTON TRANSACTIONS, 2008, pages 2633 - 2642 *
EFFENDY ET AL.: "Tripodal polyphosphine ligands in silver (I) coordination chemistry: Mononuclear cf. polynuclear complex dependence vis-a-vis counterion and ligand to metal ratio", INORGANICA CHIMICA ACTA, vol. 358, no. 13, 1 September 2005 (2005-09-01), pages 4009 - 4018 *
GLENNA SO MING TONG ET AL.: "The 3[ndsigma*(n+1)psigma] Emissions of Linear Silver(I) and Gold(I) Chains with Bridging Phosphine Ligands", CHEM. EUR. J., vol. 15, no. 41, 19 October 2009 (2009-10-19), pages 10777 - 10789 *
JOHANN ZANK ET AL.: "Gold and silver cations in the "Procrustean Bed" of the bis[2-(diphenylphosphino)phenyl]phenylphosphine ligand. Observations and conclusions", DALTON TRANSACTIONS, no. IS.3, 1999, pages 415 - 420 *
JOSE A MONTES ET AL.: "Comparative structural studies on silver(I) complexes with tripodal polyphosphines. Crystallographic characterisation of the first infinite chain structures in 2:1 adducts of silver(I) halides with 1,1,1-tris (diphenylphosphinomethyl)ethane", DALTON TRANSACTIONS, no. IS.6, 2002, pages 1110 - 1118 *
SHAOBIN MIAO ET AL.: "Molecular structure and nonlinear optical properties of a tetrasilver(I) phosphonitocavitand", JOURNAL OF MOLECULAR STRUCTURE, vol. 660, no. 1-3, 12 November 2003 (2003-11-12), pages 159 - 165 *

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2012144530A1 (en) * 2011-04-22 2012-10-26 住友化学株式会社 Copper complex
JP2013229425A (en) * 2012-04-25 2013-11-07 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Light-emitting element, silver complex, and ink for element containing the same
CN106366126A (en) * 2015-07-23 2017-02-01 赢创德固赛有限公司 Benzene-based diphosphine ligands for alkoxycarbonylation
EP3121184A3 (en) * 2015-07-23 2017-02-08 Evonik Degussa GmbH Benzene-based diphosphine ligands for alkoxycarbonylation
US9725398B2 (en) 2015-07-23 2017-08-08 Evonik Degussa Gmbh Benzene-based diphosphine ligands for alkoxycarbonylation
CN106366126B (en) * 2015-07-23 2019-09-27 赢创德固赛有限公司 The diphosphine ligand based on benzene for alkoxycarbonylation
CN114591365A (en) * 2022-03-22 2022-06-07 郑州大学 Light-emitting copper compound based on benzimidazole phosphine oxide ligand and preparation method and application thereof
CN114591365B (en) * 2022-03-22 2023-09-05 郑州大学 Luminous copper compound based on benzimidazole phosphine oxide ligand and preparation method and application thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2012012584A (en) 2012-01-19
TW201202390A (en) 2012-01-16
JP5746915B2 (en) 2015-07-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5746915B2 (en) Film containing silver complex
Zhao et al. Synthesis and photophysical, electrochemical, and electrophosphorescent properties of a series of iridium (III) complexes based on quinoline derivatives and different β-diketonate ligands
JP5408200B2 (en) Polymer light emitter and polymer light emitting device using the same
US7250512B2 (en) Electroluminescent iridium compounds having red-orange or red emission and devices made with such compounds
TWI743556B (en) Organic emissive layer and organic light emitting device comprising the same
JP4048810B2 (en) Polymer light emitter and polymer light emitting device using the same
KR101135910B1 (en) Metal complexes with bipodal ligands
JP5695314B2 (en) Luminescent silver complex
US20040072018A1 (en) Metallic complexes covalently bound to conjugated polymers and electronic devices containing such compositions
WO2003084973A1 (en) Metal complexes and organic electroluminescent devices
JP2005519988A (en) Photoactive lanthanide complexes having phosphine oxide, phosphine oxide-sulfide, pyridine N-oxide, and phosphine oxide-pyridine N-oxide, and devices made with such complexes
TW200404882A (en) Polymer compound and polymer light-emitting device using the same
JP2005518081A (en) Electroluminescent iridium compounds having phosphinoalkoxides and phenylpyridine or phenylpyrimidine and devices made with such compounds
JP5883711B2 (en) Copper complex
Klemens et al. A family of solution processable ligands and their Re (I) complexes towards light emitting applications
WO2012056966A1 (en) Amine-containing phosphine compound
JP4228741B2 (en) Polymer light emitter and polymer light emitting device using the same
JP2005314689A (en) Polymer complex compound and polymer luminescent element using the same
JP5797078B2 (en) Phosphorescent light emitting device
JP5733663B2 (en) Complex
JP5670835B2 (en) Silver complex
JP5957313B2 (en) Film containing organic antimony compound and polymer compound
JP2005126705A (en) Polymeric light-emitting material and polymeric light-emitting element
JP2006152014A (en) Polymer complex compound and polymer light emitting element using the same

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 11789761

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 11789761

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1